Eurotherm controls 808, 847 Handbook

N

.* w ffi b:

@

@

CONTROLLER

ffiffi

EIII.IE

t r

Wsrnlng Nolo

Page

'1.0

Gonora1................,.........,....,

I l.'l

S@ps.............,..,..,...,...........

1

'1.2

Op1i6s...................'............'l

Contents

2,1 Pml-rcunling lnshllalion.l

2.2

Preoduts,..........,.......,.....,.. t

Page g.l

Alsrm...-.......................,...,,10

Annunc1a1i0n.....,...,..,.........10

8.2

Acknwledgement...,..,...... 10

9.0 Ssnsor 8ro0k.........,.,........'l0

9.,l

Annunciat'Dn...................,.. l0

9.2 Automalictranslolto opeft hop modo...............,,

I

0

3.0 Estrlcal lnthll.thn.......,.2

3.1 GseEl lnlomation and PcEuiions........,.....'.... 2

3.2

Suppv ed

Eanh

(bmhds 5,6 ud

4...........3

9.3 lnputs ................,...,......,.,.....3

3,4

Oulp!|s...,........,..,.,,...........,.3

3.5 4m....................................4

3,6

Communl€|ions....,.............5

10.0 Scll Tuno................,..........

1 l0.l

Pamot€rs €lc!14t0d.,.,...'l I

I

,l0.2

Pffietqrs sd

10.3

,l0.4

Annmclati@ ...................... I

2

Operalion...,......,.--.-...,..

Abod Conditions t3

.---....... l5 ll.0 Ljrer lnput (Optlon OL..) t7

I l.t

Hardwam.........,.......,,........ 17

I 1.2 Sot-up and ConfiguEtim...l0

I 1.3

,l1.4

S€ling Prcedm.............18

Fi|brVa|uo...,.....................,l9 4.0

Dl!pl.y!..............................6

4.,l

Uppor dsplay turclims .....,.6

4,2 LwEr dsphy tunqlims .......6

5.0

Output lndlEllonr...,.,...,...7

s.l

OPI md OP2 ......................7

5.2 communi@lionsrssmisslm in prcgEss.........,.,............,,. 7

5.3

Ramp-lGsetsoint h prcgres8..........,....................

5.4

Meuql modo.........,..........,..7

7

6,1 Pametsr (PAR)......,..........7

6.2 UpsdDmffis,.....,...,7

6,3

Aulo/lvtanual

(t/M opoEdon seleqliil).....8

lZ0 Sotpolnl Programmlng

(optlq

OP).......................21

lZl

Progmms/@nlrolltr....,..2l

,l2.2

PrcgEmmtr 8lates ....,.......22

123 PrcgEm ontol m€hods..23

12.4 PrcgEm P8metero ...,.,...26

125 Prcltram Annundalo6...,...27

12.6 Opd8|ioa.....,.,....--.--,.,.,. 28

12.7 Lossofpowsduing a prog8m.,...,...,...,,..........,30

128 Cheging pogm pffi otsE......................... 3l

129 A1ms........................,......32

Typlql Wrlng Schomrtlc........3i)

7.0 Fronl Prrel Pio€dut!!....8

7.1 ltodilying ho seFoin!....,.....8

7.2 L@ling ed modfyino e aqustablg pamotsr

......

I

7,3 Mausl mode prc@dures'...9

7.4

Aubmatic mode

(wih mp-to-$Point)

' prc€dures,...,.,...............,....9

7.5

Annurciation...........,....-......9

7.6

Modifi€lim ot mping pffie|grs........,...........,.,....9

7.7

Ramping spsed....,...............9

7.8

Taroot sstsoint.....................9

ocryhM Euem !;ld t9r'

l

APPLlcANON NOTE

STANDABD PRECAUTIONS

TO BE TAKEN WHEN USING rlu!.EE4[u BE_99NrBollEEg

\rrh€n dosignlng any pan ol hc system

@n[ol sy6toms h is osssntisl to malluclions.'

Mslddwhal willhappon ll dny lndividual ln a tempmluE systom iomoins

@nrrol appliatlm,ltr oxmple,lho pomMeidy Ewilcll€d on.

dangerls hat lot somo reaen lho hosting

'

This @uld h6pp6n lll

'l-

Thom@uolg or 6onsq b@mo6'd€hchod' lrm tho Eyslom l.e, is no lodgor moasulino tho 6chr6, bmp€Eture adllovod.

2,

Them@uplo ot lhom@oupls wlring b@mes thort.jr@ilod.

3,

Oomponont failuE wifiin ths cmltolld in srch a way as lo l66w the oulPul 6witchod on'

4.

Mqop@essd or EolMee lajluG ln a sysf€m.

s. faitffi a vave moEmenl q valvs linkags.

6.

Remolo Eelpolnt lo @ntroll€ri3 laulty.

7. o6Etim

- (a) bv unouthodsed mrEonngl.

C&rbllerloltin MMulwih hlgh @iPUI power

Bet.

(b, Selpoint sol t@ high.

. ,

-

. i.

I

8.

Any hck ol maintgnan@ ln sowl€ablo pans.

......,..4d msy ohd unloresom 6iluations.

ll laEvlno tho hoslot on tll tho tlmc c.n cauto dEma9.

or llo co'ntonto, thon.n lndopondant Plotoctlon dovlce olthor to tho plent mu!t b. provldod.

lltoll

Thls alam isa will aeo&alo puI out the marn o.g,

(\,

)

I

I

A ruibble mli-@mn is ttE

Nolo thal

EuD$m l06 ovenemp€Eluro alam.

e dam retay ln he @nlrollsr is rct sulfi.jenl p.olsction lor all ovenluatitles.

I

This maual @ntains intormation for th; instatlation, op€ralion, of tho Modgls 808 and 847

MicDprccesrbas€d Digilal Temp€rature Conlrcllers manufactured by EuDthErm l-td.

Forrunhar dstails orth's inslrument r€f€rlo:

Tho hadb@k (forlurthsrop€Eting inslructions and ths @nliguralionand elbration)

Pan No. HA021429.

The manud (f6icircuit d'ngnms ad circuit deuiption) Parl No.

HAOzl4ilo

1.2 Options

The lP-54 gasket kitfff l/&DlN size instruments can be orderod separately:,-

2i

Order: 808/847 Mounting ', ''

2.0 MECHANICAL

G6kst - Part No. LA022339

'.'

|NSTALLATI9N

'

.

'

2.1 Panel-mounting

The inslrumont sl€Bve lnstallatlor

;'''

' munts into a 45x92.2min culout, and is seored frcm the rea with ths 2 enclossd mounting brack€ls. Behind ths panel provido for sutl'Eienl wiring spaco in ordgrtosgparaleproporlythepower and s'rgnal eblos. -t

-

1.77'18fi :

(+s,"tj.!-l

-.

I<_|l'-i'

z.i

pro&auie

Muimumpaner rh'rcknss; o.2s- (6mm'

WTg'B'i8:88 ffiffi|

f**:*e8

Panel Cutout

Propare lh€ panel instrumeni lront i dlout s abovo. Slid€ tho sle8vo into th€ cutout tom ths lnslall the mounling brackets lrom the roai.

Verify that tho 4 tinos of lhE brackets are lirq,y ssaled in the slots on the sls€ve;

@r€c1ly lnslallEd brackets will notlall out.

lighten lhe screws tirmly. A torque limlter in each bracket prEvents ov€rt'Eht€ning.

Pmei

3.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION q

R€lay RS{22

2gVac

Ovofireor@lmn&4hG

RTD.3

2

Modols 808

I .

.

A7 extemal connections.

Precautlons

.,:

.1,.i,,..

3.1 General cAunoN!

lnformatlon and curont ln .ach

8ny partlcutar rogulatlons. Ovolh€atod mblss End damsgod lnsulatlony may rosutt eblo. Ilo eblr slz. nol permhtdb trom ov€rl$dlng. oxcood tho by th; .toEl

'

, .

',,.};iftj

. r.Jt

It ls your responslblllty to €ldlate lho msxlmum posluie{ ratod durr3nt lor wlrlnd

' j, i

I i

CAtmONl

Damagc to tha lnstrument en rasult l, output channals ll lh6y

.

.'i.

llnod wlth loglc or OC outpul modules wer. rlttod wlth trlac or ralay modulos.

sra wlrad 8s t a

Mako input and outputieimination"toin.trrrEntwilhpowsroFF.'' i'

-f

Retor to liguro abovo and to lhs rest o, this paagraph ,or rgil tetminal designdions wiring thB power, oulputs, and signal inputs, ild lor

, Th€ rear scrow lerminals do not rsquirE lhe use ot lugs tor prcper wire relEnt'Pn. lf lugs aro used th6y should havs a self-retainingf€ature.

Unussd t€rminals should!9t be usod

6 tie poinls as lhBy may b€ inlomally onnsc-t€d.

sPade

I

V€rify in th6 Sp€ciliations that lhs ralings of thg @nt ollsr oJiput dsvic$ arenot€xcesded, ! trd lho inPuls

..{

I

"'

'i!,

i

I t

I

I

I

i

I iltr

&;

Lino

Neulral

Earth b

7

,

CAUTION! ObseruE

'praciices to eliminale o, earth loops.

' proper wiring the possibility

..ra

No conneclion l8

't9

Load

N

3.2

5, 6,

Supply and 7)

and

Earth (terminals

ThE instrument may bd pow6r6d from an AC voltage bstween 80 ild264vac,50or60

Hz.

Conn8cl tho noutral to terminal 6.

Connecl the lins b t€rminal 5; place a

1-Amp luss In the lino sid€ ol thg

AC suppt. The power wiring should be run separatsly fDm th€ s'rgnalwiring.

The wire size should not bo smallsr whing cable a larger sizo.

ThB type o, inslallation must bo ln a€lrdancs wilh the lmlwiring odes.

thil 0.5162; bcal speifi€tion may rsquiro, however,

The instrumBnt,ground (terminat

@nnect€d to

4 should bo directt

6arth. Do not pass by lhB earlh lerminal of olher inslrumonts

3.3

('daisy€hain, @nneciion).

Inputs

T'

The instrurlgnt a@pls th'srmoouple and

RTD inpuls. For lhb types and ranges of the lnput devices, soe lheSpecifi€lions

\-

Thermoouplc li'put

Connecl tolominals 19C) ild

20(+) as shown.

Use appropriate @mpensling eble (lhermmuplE

€xtension wire) having them@uple ths sam9 lhsrmal aml as tho to which it is @nnec't€d; vedty that orsct polarity is rgspocled at both tho thormmupl& end and instrumBnt-end olthe eble.

'19

N

BTD lnput

Only the 3-wire onneclion should be ussd.

Connecl ths msasur€m9nt leads

ThB excilalion to tsrminal 19

G) and 20 (+).

curent is available at tsrmiridl t8.

Use tho sam6 gauge and length leminals.

,.

'\.

Llnasr lnputs and DC lnputs opper wire on all 3

CommonG) is connrclsd to terminal 19 and lhe s'rgnal (+) is connoct€d to t6rminal 20.

3.4. OutDuts

N/o lully';;,lsolated

Ralay

Ji.'

Relay oulputs are @nnect€d to lerminals

I and 2 lor oulpul 1 and"3 and 4 for oulput are shown

2.

Th€ relay @ntacts h lhe do.€nBrgised state. The rBlay will

€nBrgise when lhe measured value is bolow setpoint lor O/P1 and abovo sstpoint lor O/P2. in ths aulo

Load

Fully lelatod

I mode. The rolay @nlaci r.m,s. ae ralad at zNAO-zgV e

5O/60H2. lt is r@mmended lhat a 2 amp tuse is

. used to ploled the r8lay

@nteis.

Not isolated from

Thsm@uplE cirdit

-

Loglc

Logic ouipuls ar€ oulpul 1 and 3 and 4 for output isolated lrom lhe onneclsd to teminals 1 senpr ad

2. Thsse outpuB

2 d ile not ciroit.

The oulpul ls 18 volt a

1omA.

NotisolatEdfrcm thBrmmuple ctcuit

4

DC Ouput

DC outputs are @nnocted to

0-20mAor4-20mA. ' tominals

1 and 2, Vdc,

Load otPl

Lins

Load oP2 oFn

OF hM

Nol isolated lom

Thermo@uple citoit

1A

Fully ielated

Fully lslated

Fully lsolated

Trlac

Tdac outputs are @nn8cled lo tsrminal output 1 and 3 and 4 lor oulput

I and 2 lor

2.

Tho tdac is ratEd al

11,/80-264V a 1 e r.m.s. 5c[60H2. lt is r@mmonded that ffip luse ls used lo prclecl lh6 triaa

I eith€r the Cool cliannel orthe

I m alam chann€l

Output 2 ls @nligured

Alarm 2 channel.

I it is mfigursd thsoulputmodulsshouldnotbealrie

Warnlng!

Output 2 onfigurEd the oulpul dEvicd

6 ff is dam channel is adivat€d during

.

"".:" not failials: ths alarm alarm dovico in a system. For lailsale operat'pn, use lhs Aam Output.

3.5 Alarm

Ths ;ltrm oulput a be eilher a relay or logic as shown below.

Rslay

Ths relay oulput'E wired to lerminals 8, conlacts are Et€d at 2A,|80-264V

I and 10. The e

[m,s.50/60H2. tt is rsommended lhat a 2 amp ruse is rined to pDlecl lhg rslay @nlacts,

.t

I

mffib tBbdcdh)

118V@ rm ov t.) g

Not isolaled lDm therm@uplE

Loglc

Tho log'r oulput is wirgd to tominals g and

'lo.

This output is nol isolated rrom the s6nsq input or log'E outpd fin€d in O/Pl, and ot OlPz, The log'rc oulput is

'l8Val1omA

Ths Alam output is _Iallsfe: the oulpn devhe b de.

€nergis€d during th€ alar,ti ondit'ton or powsr down.

:[he attach€d alarm designed circuil should be lused and lo haVe lailsatdoperation EvEn in tho casg ofablownfusE.. ;.-

,

Warnlng! The alarm oulpul channel should lgyel be fined wilh a lriac oulput module

For crilical alarm apptications a parallsl rsdundant syst€m should always bo installedi use a separate alarm unil, e'9.

Eurctherm Model 106 or equfualEnt and a separals ioputssnsor.

3.6 Communications

RS232 , '

Uso 3 @nduclor,22 gauge, slrandod with

$reening.

Atlach tha screoning to earth at tho suPervier6ndolthe link. Muimumeblo l€ngthmustbE50leet(l5m).

I -:'

(opdonal) lot commt @ntaol

Frmr p&d onablo

17

RS 422

Use 2 lwistod pairs separalely scr€€nsd (22 gaugg, strandsd). Attach tho $r€sns lo tho oanhd$6suporuborBndolthe link Maimumcabls lsngth mustb€4000lest(1200m).

ComM 1l l6 l(.yrwlrch lockout

(opllonal) lil

F ml pmol anablo

Lockoul ovsrldo swltch ll a superircry ffiput€r regaining h programmed to lock ou the lrcnt-pmel pushbutlons, a 2position keyswildr may bo installed on tho front panel lo has bs6n romot€ly disabled by lho @mmunicat'bns lGlly onable ths lrcnt panel if it link.

[An altelnative m€lhod of loel

@ntrol altei a lrcnt-panel lockoul by lho snmunications link is to lurn the suppv OFFand ON againJ

Tho koyswitch koy should b€ captivs and ths ontacls opsn ln th6 'lEntranel enablE posilion,

I l@l@nlpl b always dgsired, jumpertsrminab

16 and l7t€sther.

ll either ot th8 ommun'Et'pns boards is mt installsd, then no @nneclion n€ed bo made lo lerminals 16 and 17.

4.0 DISPLAYS

6

4.1 Upper display lunctions

Me6ured value whsn lntho automaticormilual mdss;

Parameter mnemoniG when viewing the parai€lsr list wilh lhE PAR button.

Ths mesursd value displayed flashes if lhs @ntrollsr enloB tho dam @ndilion algl i, thg

ALl oulput has switched into th€ alarm slale. and HAO, LAO, and ltf lho onlrcller enlors tho alam @ndition dAO havo bsen set lo OFF, the mecured valuo display do€s nolllash.l

4.2 Lower dlsplay lunctlons

TemPerature selpoint whgn in lho automat'rc mode;

Oulput l€vel setpoint

(%)when in tho manual mod€;

Pilamotervalus when viewing the paramelgr list with lhE PAR butlon.

ll ths m€asured valuo snlsrs one or mors alarm @nditions, lhe appropriate mnemonic(s)

(HhL, LoAl and d AL) ahemato with the displayod selpoinl.

I

I

s.0 OUTPUT

tNptcAnoNq ,

::

.

5.1 OPI and OP2

Each yellffi LEo is llluminated whsn the oresponding oulpul channel is ON.

Wh€n Oulput 2 ls conligured as an alarm channEl (AL2), lamp OP2 is illuminatsd whsn AL2 hs switchsd into thealam onditbn.

5.2 Communications transmission in progress

Lmted ln the upp€r-lEft comor ot the upper display (with no lEg€nd), this grssn LED dot is illuminated whsn ths odroll€r is transmining information lo lhe hosl 6mputor. Ths lighl can bo operativsonv il a ommunbalionsboard isinstallod.

5.3 Rampto.setpoint in progress ldEntiliad by tho legsnd p€dod when ths

'R' in ontrcller'rs the upper display, this greon

LED dot ls illuminaled dudng ramping rrcm the aclual msasur6d value lo thg thE new selpoinl.

This lamp can only be seen llluminatod il ramFto-s8lpoint opention has been enabled in tho inslrumsnt onfiguration. Tho lamp llahes during inspsclion ol lhs inslantanaous setpoint during ramping when PAR is dopressed,

5.4 Mahual mode

The manual light{ndsmealh lhe 'M' in the upp€r.right @rner of ths upp€r dbplay-..is

illuminat€d whsn tho instrument is in lhe manual mode. A flashing manual l'Eht indi€tss the sensorbr€ak mode.

6.0 PUSHBUTTONS

There are 4 fmnf.panel pushbuttons:

6.1 Parameter (PAR) ;.

:

Tho PARAMETER pushbutlon has2 funclions:

To advarce to lhs next paramstarwhon exmining the parameter lisl; r

To acknowledgo an alarm with a latchEd oulput when the @ntrolle, is annuncialing an

6.2 UP and DOWN arrows

The UP ad

DOWN ilrcrc have the sote ,unc.tions o{ inssasing md dffieasing, respoclively, the valus of lhe param8ler cuilently displaysd. Mosl parmeleE havs continuously variable numeric valuos; examples

@nslant, o, lhess includs setpoint, integral time otc

Othgrs

€n be assigned only discretB valu8s that ars prosentsd in a list; ihesg are mainlythomnfiguralion param€lsc:

ConlroltypE, output@nfiguration, stc

For the numBric vatugs, defle$ing the UP (DOWN) button once ircrEasEs (decr€ases)

the displayed valus by 1 least signifimt digit.

Holding a bu[on down momenlaiv euses the valuo operation to increaso or decroaso automatically as long as the button is deprossed. The ls idsnti€l lor discr€le values, sxcspt that each buton push rgvgats ths next value in the list.

6.3 Auto/Manual (A/M operation.selection) ogprEssing ths A,lM button when lhe @ntDller ls ln the automat'rc mode places lhe

@ntoll8r in lhe manual modo. .,Dspro$ing tho button again retums the @nt ollgi' to automal'rc, The transilion is bumpless: whon lranstsring from automatic to manual, the oulpul,lBvel in manual is dgtgrmingd by the most rsent steady-slato requirgments ln aubmetic; whsn transfsrring lrom m.gnual lo automatic, tho oulput lovgl required to attain thB dsshed sElpoinl is smoothly reached by lntegral aclion.

This button

H be disabled wh8n @nliguring lhs inslrumsnl; the ontrcller reriralhs pemanenlly in the aulomalicmodo

,; the onfiguration paramEteris chang6d.

'

Erch and evsry button press is @mpanied immediately by ome sort ol vhual fe€dback{ change in a paramster valus or a chmgo of stato ol a lamp. There are no double PIess sequener

8

Vgrity lhal the lront pan€l has nol been disabled r€molgly by the @mmuniet'pns link or lhat modilicat'pn ol all the paramEtEE hs nol been lockod out if lhsre is no response.

7.1 Modifying the

selpoint ':

-.'"-' I

ThB setpoint€n belroely modifiedwithin the limils ot tho setpoint h'Eh and low limis.

'

Wilh the m€asured valug in tho upper display and tho lomponluro sElpoint in the low€r display, uso lhe UP and DOWN pushbuttons tochange lhe sElpoint valug, ln the manual modg, th€ p€rcent power oulput is the pametsr mniiilied praedure; itsupp€rlimitmayhaveaceilingplmedonitbyHPl-(highpoworlimit).

by th's sme

:'.7.2Loca|ingandmodifyinganadiustaLlepara;jer

Wilh the instrument dbplaying tho meaured valuo and lhe s'elpoinl, depressing PAR once rovsals the display unils (C or D. Dsprossing PAR orce again shom th8 noxt €nabled pilameter and its qrrrsnt value on thg display. The paramolff valuo with

€n eih€r lhg UP and DOWN pushbuttons, or lgft unmodilisd.

''Pressing PAR bs again modified diiplais lhe nerlparamElsrand its orrentvaluB ild son.

' tl lhe PAB buflon is untouch€d whgn viewing a parlicular parametEra tho display rsturns to lhe mesurod value irnd the sslpoint atter 6 seonds. l-lolding down on PAR ov8rrides this

6.smndtimmut and psrmits viEwing asbng s dEsired.

To modily a erlain parmeter, ontinue presing PAR until its mn€monic app€a6 in lhe upperdisplay, then fiEdily lho valuo with tho UP and DoWN pushbuuons.

These prmadures are valid in eilhgl the automatic or manual rcdgs; or if tho mgasured

Soms parameter valuos may mt respond to tho UP ad

DOWN butlons; thsse havo bsen

.i

,.,:

I

I

@nligured fff viewing only and hudenlrcm tho opsratil.

rct fq opsrato, modit'Htion. OlhoE may bE @mpletEly

7.3 Manual mode procedures

With PID onlrol, tho manual mode b aclivalod by the A,/M pushbutlon ad indicalsd by the grE€n 'M'LED dot. ln the manual mode, lhe mecur€d value appem in the uppel display and th€ percont output lovel ln the lowsr display. When €nloling lhs mmual mode from automatic, tho Inilial odprn lovel ls lho most the output lEvsl with thri UP and DOWN buttns tffint elculated outpul

The A/M pushbutton oporales ln a similil ,sh'pn wilh ONr'OFF

@nlD[ lev€|. siePl

Adiust lor lhe adjustmenl ol lho output with tho UP and DOWN bunons. HeI6, the OFF seledsd by the DOWN pushbutton (0.096 in the disPlay), and the ON dtsln stale h oulPtt slals lhe UP pushbulon (100.0P4 in the dbplay).

Accesstothe manual modsm bo inhibiled in th€ configuralion''

7.4- Automatic mode (with ramPto-setpoint) procedures

Rampto-selpoint onv by one ol 2 setpoint tollows opsrdlon insuros bumPless s€tpoint modili€lion' BamPing is lnitiated onditions:

Tho sp€ed at whidr the power-up ad a change in setpoint. Ths a sla'rght line Fining the oliginal measursd valuo inslantanmus to lhe taryel sotPoint.

rmping progreses (in'F/min or "cymin) is sglsctable by tho SPr

(sstpoint Bmp ratg) paamoler trd r€mains onstill tor all ramps unlilSPr is cha-ngod. l

7.5 Annunciation

During Emping, lhe upper display shorE lhs measured valuo manual op€ration); tho low€r display

(s in mlmal, automatic q shils ths tatget setpolnt. During ramPing sggmsnts the 'B' lahp is ilhiminated. Aftsi lh; now taEst sgtPoint hai been r€ached; the lamP goes oul. To vi€w lho instantamus setpoinl during a lamPlng sEgmsnl, deptoss the PAF button--lhe 'R' lamp flshes to Indl5e lhat tho value in the lowor display ls lhs curent instmtansus sstpoinl. flhe inslantansus selpoint disPlay unils display (c or R norm ally vi€wed afior tho fitst butlon push.l

repla6s thB.msasured value

7.6 Modilication ot ramping

parameters ,

.

tl lhe targEl solpoint or the mFing sp€ed are changed in mid-Prcgress of a IamP segm€nt, the etl€ds on th€ instanlanmus sstpoinl aI6 lmm€diats.

7.7 Ramping speed.

Th€ moment thal lho rlses or lalls mping

6p€ed

(sPr) b ianged the sPeed at whlch the selpoint changes. This aordlngly shorlens ot longthsns lhe lime ,equirsd to reach thetaEsl sslpoint.

7.8 Target setpoint.

lf the largst sslpoint is lncrE8€d

(dsesed) lo a.hvel-beydhd lhe drEnt,hslanltr€bus selpoint, lhe ramp segmenl ontinuss until the nsw talgot is ,EachEd lf tho tatgBt s€lPoint is dmr€asod (increased) to a level tha ha already.been crossed by the lamp, ths slopo chagessign and the inslantansous setpoint ramPstowaldsthe newlalgeisgtpoinl

9

8.0 ALARM

8.1 Annunciation

ThEre are 2 lEvEls of alam annunciation

Lilsr display Indicatgs H!dl- !aAl- trd/or dAL allernating whh tho s€tpoint: mecured value ha ent€ted analam condition, tho

Upper display ons d the qfigurg llashs the moasur€d value: AL1 has bsen configured to r€spond lo at least

3 alam selpoinls, thB onlrcllor s a&l ALI thal ths has switchsd into an alarm alarms as state. rt ls po$ibtE to simply annurciated by the display ild that no action is tal(en

When AL2 ry ALI

. ln rh'E

€s€ ths m€asured value dbplay does annunciat€san

Ogl llch.l

alm ondition, theyellowOP2lamp ls illuminated,

8.2

Acknowledgement

.The alarm oulputs can b€ onfigured as lalching or rcnJatchitg.

Latching outpuls require acknowl8dg€mEnt to deil the display ol the alarm indications. not-as s@n as the alam @ndition has cl€ared, the display

(Nonlatching oulputs do and output r€lurn to th€ nomal, non.alarm @ndition.)

To *knowledge a latching alam, dsFess ths PAR pushbutton after the alarm onditlon h6 clBared.

9.0 SENSOR BREAK

9.1

Annunciation

I ''

9.1.1 Overrange condition

A broken thermmuple or op€n ckcuit input is indi€tEd by the mnemon'E Sn b (s6nsor break).

The mesured value n'sos rapidly beforo the sEn$r circuit break input is detscled by an overrange input signal indi€tion excseding murs.

The open ths milimum of ths linearizalion tablE.

Tho @ntrcller th€n onleE the opsn.l@p mode and oulputs lhs.sensor break power soleled by tho SnbP paamBler.

*

9.'1.2 Underrange condition

A ondilion in wh'Eh the input lalls balow tho minimum ot lhe linearization tabte will causs thg display ur

(underange) to app€ar. Examplos ol such situations include: inorr€ci therm@uple, r€vBEBd @nnedion, stc

The ontrcllEr th€n onteE the op€n.loop mode and outputs tho sensor break powsr sel€dod ry th€ glbP peamEteL

10

9.2 Automalic transrer to open.loop mode

This mode is indicatEd by a the flshing .M' light.

@ntrcllo, reinstates automatic op€ration (if

When the faulty input condition is repaired, it is not placed into ths manual mode by lho op€rats).

There are 2 operating procedur€s depending on whelh€r or nol manual operalion has prEvbusly authorked with thgA

Hparameter in th€ instrumont@nliguration: been

ll manual oporation h6 bEon authorized, the opeEtor cff modify lhe s€nsor break powor with entEr by tho UP and DOWN pushbuttons. By pushing on lhe Ar'M buuon, thg op€Etor delinhively lho milual modg. Trtrsf€r lo thE aulomatic mode is then po$ible only depressing ths A/M button again (dep€ndant on if the input laull has beBn

€n

6rsclsd). l, the ontrollEt remains ln thE opEnl@p mode and the input fault is Ispaired, it.esumes

aulomatic opsration, lf only aul6mailc opsralion d'Eablsd and hs b€on authoriz€d,'ths UP,.DoWN, and ry'M butlons ate lhs conlrollel uansfsre lrom the open-loop mode to automatic s $on s lhe input ondilion is rsclilied.

10.0 SELF TUNING (Option QS)

Types ol self

tuning

Tho Models 808 and 847 feature 2 types of sell luning: i

(A) Tuno ,rom amblent

A self.tuns procedurs from ambisnt is psrformed if the measured valus is not sglpoint. This can apply to a "normdl" heat-up condition or luning a load predominantly in

@ling, i.s. tho setpoint is well below ambiont.

neartho mnlrol wh'rch opsralos

B) Tune lrom setpolnt

A sell-tune prcedurB from setpoint is psrlormed s€lpoint. This cm applyto either an endothErm'Eor must b€ moled lo mainlain @ntrol point.

il tho measur€d value is nsar lhg an

@ntDl gxothermicpreEssoraprocesswhich

10.1 Parameters calculated

Both typ€s of self tuning calculats valuBs for the PID parameters:

" ProP lnt.t prcportional band intsgraltime @nslant

" der.t derivalivo timE 6nslant.

ln

. addilion, the tune{rom-ambienl opgralion calculates the cutback levsls:

H cb highcutback

.

L cb lowcutback.

Th6 tune.from-selpoint veriliEs that tho cutback values are not wilhin the proportional

Culback values lying within lhg proportional band are moved out to tho edge.

band.

NOTE!R6vlslctn level 3.28 ot the selt-tunlng software does not calculate thE value o, the relallvo cool galn, rEl.C, but assumes lhat tho setting selected by the user ls correcl.

When tunlng a load whlch ls prlnclpally @oled, as in cryogenic or exothermic applicatlons, lhe cool channel proportional band ls eslablished by the algorlthm. The value o, tho relatlve cool galn ls used to calculale the heat channel proportional band. Thls lmplles that, under thes condltlons, ll the the value o, rEL.C is not set correctly, tha unlt may nol control properly ln heating.

'tl

12

CAUTION! On watercooled evaporatlvo systems tuned wilh the $lt-tuning algorlthm, damags en result lo the syslem l, OP2 ls lmproperly sat to FAN, OIL or 0.05.

Bo suro lhat H20 ls selected ,or OP2 ln thls case,

10.1.1 Conditions ,or self tuning

Self.tuning op€ratos undff the lollowing

@ndilions

.

.

.

.

A@ess lovel = op€ralor

Opsrating mode - automatic (Auto)

Controllyps - any PID seletion: Pld,

Controlaction

= reveEe r

SP or Prog

(tEv),{ption

OL... only.

The following overrides and exclusions prevail:

'

.

o manual (HAnd).Switching rrcm manualto aulomalic wilh tuning ON r€slans sEll.tuning lhe

Manual@sratino mode. Tuning is tsmporarily halted when the controller is placed inlo b€gining-il does nol rssums lrom whsre it left olr.

lrom o

Power failurE. is a result of tho th€

A powEr failur€ causes the t u n E paramel€r lo revsrt backlo n o. ll tuning t

Su being s6t lo YES, luning r€starts ahEr a powsr failure.

.

PID contr6lwith solmint oroorammino (ootion OP...l. SElf.tuning does not run whilo

4-segment program is running. The pDgram musl be placed intoldl Eor Hold a bslore intiating sell-luning.

o

PID @ntrolwith ramoed setmint modificat'pn. Self.tuning ovsrddes ramping if the unil

CAUTIONI l, lho unlt ls conflgured ln lhls way tor tho r6a$n ol preventlng shock to tho load, sell-lunlng should not bB used asth€ 808/847 sell-tunlng algorilhm puryosely shocks ths syslam.

'10.2 Parameters and Annunciatlon

Two ditlerent param6tErs can bB used to launch a tuno opsralion. Both d€it€rmina to porform a tune from ambienl or lunE lrom sBtpoinl, whichever is appropriatg.

10,2.1 Tune on demand

. t u n E. This paramst€r has two possiblo setlings. lt is used both as a requsst lo perform aiunB operation at any timB and as an annunciation of the luning status,

.

OFF. As an annunciation, tho unit is not prosently self.luning; this means lhat atuning operation was neverlaunchEd, orthat it has sumesslully or unsuoessfully lerminated aluning opsration.

As a@mmand, it terminales a tuning operalion in progr6ss.

ThE valuos currently assignsd to lhe PID and cutback paamelers in the scroll list are used for the ontrol.

. o n. As an annuncialion, this indicates that tho @nlroller is presenlly in tuning operalion.

As a command, the unit begins tuning lhe @nlrol loop.

10.2.2'lune on start-up

. no. As an annurciation,lhis indimtesthat a upon slart-up, and thal when power is apPliedJto the unit in attemPted.

As a @mmand, soloclno

$thal the unitdoes not porlsm atune ol mwer.

settlngs. h is usod both as a of aswce$fultuning i oporation was psrformed future, no tuning will bs upon application

YES. As an anhurciation,lhis means thal has everbsen pedormed upon start-up and that operalion will be

As a the next limE Powet is applisd to the tinit, a sell-tuning launched.

:

- - -...

., .. -- .. I r

6mmand, solecl Y ES to €nablo a tuns opetat'pn uPon lhs nExl aPPlicat'pn ol

Pow€r.

f.il' ,.!:!()ir,;l 1r..,, i

'10.3

Operatlon

Possiblo senarios ol s€ll-tuning op€rations are pr€s€nted her€.

During

r

.:,:,: tunE duing llashes inlhe lowerdisplay. Do not make any adjustmsntsto the this period. Ths self -tuning are alarm annuncialions isjinished whent u

(Hl AL, Lo ALord nEno

AL) tunEl tn display.[[there alt€rnanlVwith

Th6 value of r€lalivg

60l gain, rEL.

op€ration, ls assumsd to be @rrEcl c, belore starling ths sell-tune t rhe

2O9/ non-evaporative@ling).

- -. ,

. :.,

' tltl

10.3,1 Start-up

tune '*:r

...1 rr,: tr'-r

1 q:.

i'i

Figure 1 illuslratss thg hgat-up

The outputs f om lha conlrollgr

€se lor a starl-up tuns, and Figure 2 the cooldown case, ds turned OFF and lhe lempstatule is monilorsd lor 1 minute.

Heat

(or 6oling) is appligd and the appopriate values aro slored lor lal€r roaction drue is evaluat€d, Ths

Aswitch-off

Oscillat'Dns as shown.

CP power is set to

0%.

'

Valuss lorlho PID terms and the high and low cutback l€v€ls are sdlculated lrom the various criticalpointsof thsodcillal'on. - - ; '- ":!.'n.

t

--i t,.l1i:l_'

-1 l i!..i1r-'ir l.'"!.+:ll,t'.{

..13

14

Figu@

1 Stad-up tune - heat-up e

Pmt

Figurc

2 stdl-up ture - c@l d@n

CP

Figurc

3 Tmo al filptint - endohmic p@ess r

I

I

10.3.2 Tune at setpoint

Figuro 3 illustrat€s solt.tuning o, a

€ndoth€rm'E pr@ss, and Figure 4 an oxothermic prccoss.

Upon inilialing a lune al sslpoint the.oulput power is tixed lor ono minuls.

Bolh outputs are tumed off and th€ direction ol tho rssponso notsd. Wh€n lhe temporalure drops (or rises), o*illalions are induced around lhg ontrol pointCP by addilion o, hsaling (or mling).

Values lor ths PID terms aro eldlated frm the various sit'El poinls ol the o$illal'Dn, Tho high md lowculback lov€ls are notcalculated bul il€ checked to insur€ thatthey ate not insido the prcponionalbmd

10.4 Abort Condltlons

10.4.'l Start-uD tune abort-heat-onlv ll lho tompErature does nol cresl al PV2 and r€lurn io the the @nlrol point CP (Figurs l ) bul is hetd from upby$mE Exlernal inlluence (Figure 5)thes€ll-luns rculine'aborts.Ths algorithm waits lor a time b€rors aborting; this time is variable ths p@e$ r€aclion curvo aro used aslhE ad depsnds on many faclors. oata gathsred

$ur@ lordetermining the PID parameters in lieuordalarrcmtho ffiillations.Thislomot aborl@uld osurin amulti-zoneappl'Eationwhot€ an adiacent zon€ is adding hoat which Bl8vates ths t€mporature of thE zono being lunsd.

1

0.4.2 Start-up tune abort-heaucool

Fora heat€olontDller, ilthotemp€ralurodoes notcreslatPV2 and r€lurnto lhglheontrol

CP (Frgure 1) bul is hEld up as shown and thB PID l6rms ars temp€ralurs €nnot bs brought down to CP even by the appli€t'pn ol @ling, tho PID terms ate calolaled from dala acquted lrom the prmBss r€elion curvo.

10.4.3 Tune at setpoint abort

Similarabortsoquencesarefollowed lortuning atselpoinl i,ths oscillations are unsuccessful.

tl, howevor, thsre is a heatool abort m calculations willbe p€dormgd.

15

CP

-s.Fohl

-

Figun 4

Tuno at serpint - exohmic pto@ss a

Figun 5

Statt-up tuno atf,n - h@t only

16

Fig!rc

6

S/€n up Tqe abort - heatl@o!

l

I

I

I t,

11.0. LTNEAR TNPUT (OPTION OL...)

11.1 Hardware lnput adapter

V€rify lhat tho inpul adapter modgl 1A... ls apprcprlat€ly largo Enough lhat lhe input adapter rangE iust sksd lorth6 ant'EipatEd input signal:

€mmpasses tho input s'Enalswing but small onough that rg$lulion doos not sutfer. Tho nominal ranggs oltho input adapters alrEady have a 20% overdrivE latq d€slgn€d Into thsm (on lho positivg side only) so that an IAIOV en bo sal€ly us6d for a signal wilh a +'l0V mdimum.

NOTET

Ttolnpuladapterlncroas€sthapanoldopthotthecontroltartoZ..l05lnchsg

(180.5mm).

Wrlng

Refer to 3.3 for ths onneclion and wiring of thg input signal.

@( lto

9

E.

100$ hElfl lnF]r

6lgd (hV) ua

{

@( tt.

€l l.lt.

Figuro 7 Ureil input set up and @figuatlon

17

11.2 Set-up and Configuration

.

S€t lhs sensor seleclion param€lor Sn lo Lln (unils' display prsision) or lo .Lln

(tenths'display prelsion). Selecling

Llnor.liln revsalsoth€rlin€arpmcs$ inputparmBlsrs.

.

S€lecl @nlDladion Actto be sithsr?av (revec€) {ora nsgativo onlEllergain

(dkecl) lor a posillvo @ntrcltsr gain. [Act alilayi appeas on ordll thi*roll list il opt6n OL... ls insralled.l

. lav providos a dseaing outpul as the measured valus incr€as€s, rav should bo selgcled for temporaturo @ntrol l@irs with the heal output on tho Oulput 1 channBl.

. dlr provld€s an incrosing output as the moasursd value ircrecBs.

.

SetHl Ltothepointdeshodlobethossnsoroverrang€polntorlheson$rupp€rbr€ak point (in display units). usEful lltho inputs'Enalcusssthe displayvalueto oxcesd this threshold,tho mnlroller ontgrs lh8 sEnsr break ondition. Hl L is nomally sel lo 105% o, lhe milimum sensr oulpul slgnal lev€l lo allow lor oporal'ron up to maximum wilhout bntodng the sEnsor broak 6ndh'pn.

o

Sst

Lo

L to the point d8sired lo bo tho ssnsr underrange point or the sEnsr lowsr brgak point (in display units). tl the input signal causes thE disday value to rall bslow lhis thr€shold, the lo

@ntroller snlors thg sensor break @ndition

-5%otlhe minimum

(ss

S4.4.3).

Lo

L b normally sel us€rulssneroutpul si]nallevelto allowloroperation downlo mlnimum withoul €ntedng ths sensil br6ak @ndition

CAUTION! Hl Land Lo Lsre not alarmsand do not ptovldaoleclrlcal slgnaloutpub.

Ussthcalarmoulpulora $parsterodundantalalm systomto alottola ctlt16l cbndttlon.

o

Set lhe variablo digital tiher,

Fll, to 1.00 as il inithl valuE.

1'1.3 Scaling Procedure

Tho seling procEdur8 onlails adiusting 2 sotup points, P 1 and P 2, thai link known.valuo inpul signals to specilic display values.Thess 2 scaling values are used to delins a slraight lino and ar€ ,olioteractivs (Figure 7,. S€le ths input tordisplay by using the Proc paEmotor ild this procedure (outinsd in Figuro 8).

o

Conn€ct th€ output, or to

@ntrcllerto somolom of signalgEnoratorwh'rch the sEnsor ils€ll.if the s€nsor

@ reppduetho sonsor en bo inducsd to supply various s'rgnal lsvels.

ThE input to the this

@ntd,larmust bs b€twsen -lOmV and 50mV. Voltage signals which 6xeBi, rangs must be atlenuatsd with an approprialely sized input adaplerlA,... Cunent signals are convErled to thE -10 lo 50mV range with a shunt input adaptEL

18

Apply a signallo ths @nlrollor equalto soms known

Thoinputsignalvaluo zoro s

Possible.

usod doss not hav€ to bo

. value. This is tho rirst setup point P1.

Scrcllthrowh to the Proc paramEler and press UP-

P i appeas ln theiwer display.

o

Press PAR again; P display.

: l app€ars in ths utperdisplay and a numb€r appeas in lhe lower

.

Adiust tho number wilh UP or DOWN until the display valug @ilesponds to thg slgnal pros€nlly applied to ths input ol the instrumsnt.

.

Pr€ss thB PAR pushbutlon. The numb€r wh'rch display and no rpfeats in the lower display.

w6 enlered appeaE in the upper

.

Pr€$UP.YESappeaEinlhelowordisptay.

.

Press

-:

-

PAB.

Pl app€aE in both displays whils thE onlroller is storing thE low s€ling poinl.

o

All€r ssvoral smniis,"Proc appeer! in the uppu display to s'End ;mplotion,

.

.

Applyasignaltolheontmllerequdrisome known highvalus.This isthe s@nd Setup point P2. Th€ lnputs'rgnal valuE usod doos nol havelo be should be as

€xadv atlh6 span point but nsarspan as possible. Repeattho above prccgdure substituting P2 and the display valudonssponding to tho s@nd input signal.

Eslablish all remaining paramelers applrcarcn.

i.

rorthe ontrollo, based on the rsquksmenls ol the

'11.4

Filter Value

The Mod€ls 808and 847in@rpoiale und€r adigtal inputlitl€rhaving an adjustablgcoet icientfound

Fll in the sroll list. This value, in display un'rts, mafis a gradual cutoll bstween what should bs @nsid€red real cfiang€s in th€ n'l€sured valuo and backgound noise.

Whenthevalue

1.00 lnput issstlo 1.00, p€rtuIbationsorstopchanges unil ar€ given more signllicane than changos in tho less medsurodvaluogreatertha than 1.00 input unit.

lncreasing ordrcrsasing the valus ol Fl I moves the cutotf point up ordown. For tempeEture

@ntrcllors,Flliss8llol.00'.

..:

19

20i

DO:,.r

'"'-i.':

)J,. l. icbmd @i6 (lrm sloiil dd d 6019) to hpu tomlnsL bolo6 p@6dinE.

Ooiui,j

10irr,. li.r,ri,!.1i)gi! :ri,; r.iti:itr.l_:...11

c rl .:.q . !:.:I rjlr:.y{r,' x z"9Y.ryl.ARynq,'"r-.

,i..,, ,

.'._ :: r jatq

J r:r.l

{r. r . jio:j

Proc r;f:.l.L::.: a ?

3,oep.sstPuno:

1.1!.f., t1l., -'-&','-o'' r1.' i. ]ii "ilr{

.t

r,

.: ::

{

.

4, oop@

PAB ogaln: fhenumbei'' lo the lowd dbplay will bo the Elu6 tho d"., hl€dd rDu oqM.

to

Proc

P1

P1

1500

)\

.ljr, .0.iit5,:r:.i

i{:l r,:ti::,,.'1

IU1,:..irj" lY ql.'?r'ri

'l ft!,q .a

4

.

i.'

-.'5. Deprisa UPoiOowNkiiidiuBrt6

-. , ^, tumbor h ho lo[6 dkpby unti it

6ospon& lo tlrc hruc Epcmled

.,'i1'"w$roa1.S"'i9P;,.;;'

!, trl

..-,

6. D€p.6 PAB: ;;"9 ; I rc:i

:.;r ii.':,: -. E: rirlr.ril ii bs-,ia:","n 0r.

P1

2500

2500

11 0

'

.-l;..r:.r(si',i i.."r,:6rjiriri

Jnt Iq: i s:

, iii !i::. 1:

7. Dop.@ UP lo allim l .j:':,-,,,.' ::-iJj j,,'rIfr.r,i.11ta:Iji r.:'i,,

.J:,r1i,".:t'.-,::.n6.'rr':j-i

.0,.._.,,

:' i

!, Ji,?.ll:J ! .".:- .sri-, . ,'

8.

Dffi PIF-r.r,,, r

...8,

:r :,

'

;C I r.r -it ,.g.:: 1,'[i: f

,r :,,!i; jrE1 .r..:f i? siJ;:r:Oirlt:r.: :1.

9. Attr

5 s@nds tho s@llE ol lho li6l slup p<inl b 6m9l€tod.

Repod peoduo lo, tho 6@nd slup poinl (P2),

2500

YES

Proc

ii{ }"It

,

!

-.1

^.i'

..,",-iinrlilt1:1

L

,;,!,:,tC.l,.i;i6:,.

:tl:, iar!6^.rL, lt a' 'ii n,ri,! 0; '

'7 tl1 11 ',,,:'ni

Fiwn 0 Uneu hput scaling p@durc

1

2.1 Programmer/controller

Tho Modols 808 and 847 with option OP thB onlain

@ntroll6rfunclion. The setpolntgenEratuor a lirmwaro setpo,ht pmgrnmerotipuls gileratoiln tolho addltionto

6ntrollsrsotpoinl input as€des ol straight-line sqgmertsthat ile adlustabte snsurcs thal lho measurod valuo rospects this pDfile'as in duraiion and slope. The contioller dcEly as possible. Figur€ 9 shom howthe sEtpoint g€n€rator is imrporated inlo lho programmer/@nlrollef,

ToM

@mmfuEFA

SoFoht

!anmbr

Plo dtdar

FdEK

HddM M@rad Vtu.

Figsn

I

Con@pt@l bbc}' dagm ol a ptugwneil@nt ottq

12.1.2PtogJam segments

The.808/847.progEmm6r/@ntrcllor g€nerates dwell, ramp, dwell. The 4segmsnts ar8 exrcuted in following thls lormal aro glven in Figure

10. ' a ,ixod.lomat, 4.segmonl program: rmp!

. sueession;when s@nd is automalically startsd and so on untilthE fourth can bs segmBnt is tno firit isiinisnea,liE

6xsutod.

Tho program

€xsuted betweon 1 and 200 times or continuousV. Examples ot vaious p'rcgims

. .. - :

12.1.3 Ramp segments

Ths selpointlorthB temp€ralursorprccgss variablo increasesordecreases al a linearEf,prlrg

Ere until a specifiBd targsl reyelis currerl positive measured valm; reehed.

Th€ target lovel can be oilher abovs br below the relativB positions of tho two lh; dstermine if thg slope ot ths ramp is or negalivs. The ramping rate is expr€ss€d in units/minute.

21

12.1.4 Dwell segments

The programmerselpoinl do€s not movsduling dwgllsegmsnts; il l€sls atlhe ass'Ened until the dwelr rima has Expirgd.

value

22

/

'+/

Figug lO Epnptes ol4-segnent pagms

(2 runCdwell pairs)

12.2 Programmer states

Ths Model808/847programm€I is a3-state

Programmor. ln each ot these slatos tho @ntrollsr and the programmsr op€rato indep€ndentv o, one another. Figuro I thBso slalBs. The prcgrammsr state selsdion is available undor the

1 shows examplos of

Prog parffiEtEI in the scroll list.

Idl.

When ths prcgrmmer is placed into ld selpoint d;tetminBd by tho vatug shown on

@mplolion of a program Le.

LE it b€havss as a standard @ntlollerwith the @ntrol lhs botom disPlay (the base setPoinl. Allet lho snd of the lounh segmsnt, the poglammet aulomatically placgsitsgil into ld LE. Launching aprogramlrom ld LE starlsthE programtromthe bsginning.

A program may bo t€rminaled during running by selecling ld LE

Solpolnt SeFoint oE, ldlE

Hold

- run

Tlme tdlE tun

LC

>l

Figurc tt Prcgamet sbtes

Tlmo

Run

Tho pBgram has b€en started and ls moving through its progrmmer is in ru n, it must bo in ono of

Atlirming various segmgnls, When thg the 4 program ssgmgnls.

run when in ld LE always launches a program althe beginning. Atler@mpletion the

@nlrcllsr r€lurns to

IdLE

Hold tl Hold is sglecled during a prcgram the timo base is stopp€d ild thg selpoint rsmains unchangsd unlilthe Hold is r6l6ased. Pufling the pogrmmerinto Hold effEctivsly longlhsns lhB lolal run timo of lh€ program.

Holdback

Holdback (H with onB b) is a sp€cial cass ot maFr sxception: it

Hold and ths programmer b€haves as if it wsre in Ho ld ennot bs sslgctsd by the user{nly the programm6rcan place itssl, thE inlo holdback. While running a program, i, the ab$lute vatu€ ofthe diflerenc€ bstween programmersetpoint andthB measuredvalus sxcEsdstherrolrbaclrband(mnemonic

H b), tho programmer €nters a chance to inlluerces

'calch holdb&k. By stopping the prcgrammerclock, ths msasured valuo has up'lo ths prcgrmmed setpoint. Figurs 12 shows how holdback the pDgram pofils, During a ramp ssgment, holdback ca opsration have thE etfect o, flattening out tha slope soaklime

Tho o[tho ramp. Dudng a dwe[ ssgmEnt holdbacl guarantess a minimum by stopping the clock il the measured valuE deviates outs'xjg of th6 progEm retuns to ru n on@ tho doviation has reducgd

6 long as

Hold holdbek is not band, sslectsd.

The mnBmonic

[Available

Hb is slrictly an indication and is not a sBleclion under thB ptog only wilh software revision o2.Oo or greatsl] paEmeler,

12.3 Program control methods

Prcgram onlrol@nsistsolchangingthB staraolthe programmer. This is a@mplished byway ol lhB lEnt pansl pushbutons, ths rsar terminals or th€ ommuni€tions inlerface. fhe instrumsnt obgys ths last @mmand issued by any ot ihe 3 sources.'An overr'tding sxcoption lo this is if tho rgar t€rminals

1

6 and 17 ar€ opon circuit, the pDgrammer malter what r€mains in Ho ld, no other @mmands aro issued through lhe communications link or ths front pil€1.

NOTE!lt the programmEr remalns ln Hold and does not run, verlfy that reart€rmlnals.t6

8nd 17 aro connected tog€thor. lnstallatlon, ll roar.termlnal lh€se 2 lermlnals should bo shorted.

bontrol ls not to be usd ln the

Fronl-panEl pushbuttons

The pEgram can b€ placod in run, Hold or ldlE by scrclling apprcpriats s€lting. Noto lhat i, tho programmer is in ld

I

E, to lircl enter run but it is placed immediately into Hold.

to prog placing it into Ho and sslecling lhe ld causes th€ unit

23

srrdd&P tun Hb tun Tlm a tun tun

,,.,':

''

Tlm

BeRbMM

24 run tun

Tlm

C,

MA tu dW M, poM eF & tua

[email protected]

&dM

.-

Figu@ 12 Hol&ack ennples

Roar-t€rmlnalconnsctlons(lErmlnalsl6andlT),

...".

ll

Ctrl is sello Prog, r€arterminals

1

6 and

1

7 ars used for program @;trol. The r€lationshhs bstwesnthoprcgrammerstatBsandlhoswitchingondil'nnsareilluslratodinFigur€13.

Note lhat it is not possiblo to 6nl6r

I d

I

E thEugh uso o, the rsar terminals. r

. lf lf the programmer is in ldl

E or Ho ld, shorling tho terminals places the thg lorminals ar6 alroady shon€d (as islhe irogrammer into ru n.

6e aftsrthe @mplelion ol a program) and it is d€skodto repoattheprognm,thstsrminals muslbo opensd and shon€d lo launchlhs program again.

[, thE r6ar terminals are open circuit unlil run is att€mptsd at which tims lnto

Hold.

tl lhs plogram is drr€nlly running, op€ning tho

Hold.

r€il t€rminals pla@s the programm€r into

Hold

AAWO@rq!,@.

tun Hold ,un ldrE td tE tun

C gee

MMtu M tu drv&lbi d

Ntu NMt

I Figu@ 19 Use ol Bat-tanioal @nnacties

16 and 17lq Nogamet c@ttol

Whsn Ct rl is set to Prog, lsrminals 16 and 17 no longer lunction as the lmal oveilide of the front-panol disable 3.6. ll tha lrcnt panel is disablgd through the communications link and communicationswith the host is losl, powertothe instrument mustbe lo €nabls ths kont.panel pushbuttons.

rycled OFFand

ON again

25

26 communlcallons lntorrsce nll

;;Fcd;ithedi6iamming teature can bs a@ossed and @ntrolled thrcugh the digitat

@mmunicallons pon

12.4 Program Paramaters

S€gm€nt pa-ramEtetg

. r 1 -Emo1. The rats atwhhhths s€tpoint rampsto therirsltargot lgvsl. AdiustablElrom

0.01 to 99.99 display units p€r minute. r 1 ahflays slarb lrom the moasursd value (soryo sla/o.

S€No start is illustralBd in Figure 14.

t

T LI l2 rl dt tdtE

APo&lc.ma@tn wiB iitid frswedva}J&

B.DilNMD,wn@pl

Foemwhen

WdlavC 2

Fieurc 11 Sem swt @ nnD

1 segnont al tu

.

Ll has b€en

-tarcel lsv€l 1. The target valus to wh'tch tho selpoiot ramps when lhs pogrammor placsd into run. Adiuslable ov€rthe entire range ot tho input s6nsor. Noto thal ths adjustmontrangeorthislevelisnolboundbythesgtpointlimilparamoleESP HandSP L.

. and d 1 - dw6ll lime 1. Ths lsngth ol timo th€ s€lpoinl remains at belore beginning tho r2. Adjuslablo indicates thg rl lom

0 lo 9999 minutes. ffhe value ollhis paramstgr time r€maining in ths dwBll segm€nt

Ll atlerompleling ths rlh€ valuo is viewed whilo thg progrm is cutrentlyinthispart'EulardwEllsggmEnt.ThEsggm6ntisskippsdildl'Es€ltoz€ominutes.l

. r 2 - ramo2. Tho Ele at which lhe setpoint rffipsrrom

Adiustable lrom 0.01 lo 99.99 display unils p€r minute.

Ll to L2 aft€romplet'nn o, L1.

.

L2=lerseugyelS. Ths targst valuo to which the selpoint ramps aftorompl€tion old

1.

Adiuslable is ov6rthe 6ntko rang€ oflhs input s€nsor. Notethattheadiuslmsnt rot bound by ths setpoint limil parmsteE SP

H and SP

L

Engsorthis level

. d

2=duelllitrgz. Tho lsngth oftimsthe sstpoint l€mains al L2 atlErcompl€ting r2 and belore either ending or rop€ating lho pmgram. Adjustable lrom 0 to 9999 minules. lNote thal this value indicales the timo r€maining ln lhe dwell ssgment flhe valuo is viEwsd while lho pogram is currently in this parliculardwoll segmsnt. Tho segment is skbp€d ifd 2 is sst to z€rc minul€s.l

Loop @unt€r

LC - tmo ounter. This paramsler dsterminis the number ol itErations of the program, Tho value may be adjusted b€lwegn 1 and 200 rspolitions plus a ssleclion, Conl, lor onlinuous

program cycling. lconlinuouspDgrm groator.] Note that whEn a ppgram is cycling lsavailableonly withsotlware r€vision running, th€ value indicaled will r€rlac1

02.00or

th€ numbor ol toallons remaining including tho cutrent itearbnbefolo the prcgrammer l€verls to ldlE.

Holdback

Hb m€asurBd value

Ths allowable deviatlon botwsen tho programmed setpoint and

€xeeds progEm. ll the dsviation bstw€en the programmed solpoint and

H bthe prcgBm is aulomatically pla@d into Ho ld

(clsk slops) unlil lhe devialion reduces to an a@eptable lEvol; the prcgram lhon t€sum€s opeEtion (clock starts). Hb is adiustablo ovgrlhs sntirs rmge ol tho input s6nsr and is always enablEd. So lhal holdback has no etfecl on the program, sel H bto il exlr€mely largevalue.

[Available only with software rsvis'ron 02.00 or groatBr.l

12.5 Program Annunciators

Progrsmmer stat6

Stato lamp "R"

Tho LED immediatsly below tho R legond on thg lascia indiGt€s lhe stats ol lhe pDgram:

" OFF. ldlE

ON-run

.

FLASHING - Hold or Hb

NOTE!Tho "R" hmp als lndlcates rsmp.lo-slpolnt ln progress llr sP (aM not Pro0) ha3 baen selectod under

Ctrl.

12.5.1 Programmer state display

Ths paramster Ptog rell€c1s th€ current stats of lhe progGm.

Program ll ssgment tho program is in EilhBr ru n, H b or Ho ld, prossing PAR on@ €uses th8 lower display lo annunciats tho curr€nt segmEnt ol tho prcgram r 1, d l,

12, d 2 or H b aiong wilh the units.

[Signals indicating lions link.l

lhe cutrsnt progmm s€gment can bedBrivod onlythrough the@mmunica-

Bomahhg tlm6

' lf lhe prcgram is curr€nlly Bx€culing €ith6rd l or d 2, lhB value shown bglowlhss8 paamot€r mnomonics r€llecls ths time remaining in lhe sggmsnt as opposed lo lhe total time lor that panicular segmsnt.

Seloolnts

While the pmgram is ln run, Hold, or Hb, th€ setpoint shown on lhe bottom display is ths curent working setpoint. The bEE selpoinl used at ths end o[ the prcgrm

(in ldlE), can bg viowed by scrollinq throuqh lhg paramel€r list lo SP.

27

12.6 Operation

Allof lhese pr@odurgs

€n also b€ psrfomEd lhrcughths digilal6mmunications

C2 or C4). Some aro possiblg by opsning or shorling rear t€rminals 16 and 17.

link (option

Enabllng satpolnt plogrammlng

To enablo solpoint prcgramming sot param€t€rs

Ctrl to Prog. This causes all of tho prcgram lo appsar in the ssoll list unless thgy havB b€en removEd with

HldE.

6ntol

When Prog is solsctBd and the pogrammsr state is not ldl

E the base setpoinl is available

,or view and modilicalion underlhe mn€nomic S P.

12.6.1 Running (starting) a program

Pro@dur€g

.

V€dly fhat all prcgram and @nlroller parameters havs bgen assigned thg desired values. Then lollow one ol thsss 3 procedur€s:

.

.

.

EreE-lbeielr.aaoel

Verily that teminals 16 and 17 ars short€d.

Scrclldown the paEmstEr list with PAR until Ptog appeac.

. .,

DspressoitherUPorDOWNuntiltheprogramstalepaEmotsrrunappsariinthelowor

. display.

Either pr€s

PAR u lat the display lims outlo enter the ru n progrm statg.

o

.

Frcm lhE rear lerminals: tl lErminals 16 and 17 ilE open circuit, shon lhem togethor. tl thg tBminals aro shorted logsther, opon circuit them and then short them togEth€L

: o

. -

Throuoh the oxlernal@mmunicafions

Thls requtes modilication

@mmunicalions pDlml.

mrt: olths oplional stalus parameter os using the oxternal

. ln all cases lhe stale lamp 'B' illuminales to indi€ls thal ths programmor is in ru n.

BUN characterlstlcs

. lf thoprcgrammsr is in run,lhe paramstsrs LC, rl,

L1, d 1, r2, L2, and d

2ennotbo adjusted lrom either tho front panel or tho sxiemal 6mmunciations port. Any other parmeter thal is amssablo is adjuslable.

.

A modifietion to thg value ol the holdback band

H b during ru n is parmanenl.

''

. tl a dwell segmsnt is seleclod ror display during run and thoprcgrammer is curenily in thal segmgnl, holds

Itisthotime remaining and rotlhetotaldwelltimothatisdisplayed.

Th€ samo tru€ il thg progmmmsr is inlerroqaled lhrough the oxtsrnal@mmunical'nns port,

2A

I l

. yiglds

Obsgilation ol loop ounter LC ln a mullipls hEration lh€ numbor o, itsratims r€mainlng including lho program (LC cur€nt itsration.

*.1) during run

12.6.2Holdlng a program

ProBduros

.

--

Follow one of these 3 pmeduros:

Eel0lhe.Igaileltrioalsi

Opon circuit tsrminals 16 and

17 .'

:

| o

From

. lhe tronl oanel:

Scroll down the paramgl€t llst with PAR until

.

Dgpross Either UP or DOWN untiltho prcgram

Pro6 appears.

stdo paramet€r Hold appsarc in the lowerdisplay.

.

Either pres

PAB or l€t thg display timE out lo enl€r thg Ho ld pDgm state.

.

. o

.

Throuoh thg sn€rnal@mmunicalions

This rsquirss modificat'pn mrt: ol tho optional stalus paramoler os using lhe sxtsrnat

@mmuni€tions pDlml.

. ln all

6Es tho slats lamp 'R'llashss lo lndiElo that lho programmsr is ln

Hold,

.

-

HoLD charscl6ilstlcs

" that the

U/h€n the F(ErammEr b in Hold, the prcgramm€rclock is stopp€d. Tho tlme €lapsed pogEmmer is in Hold €tfeciively lEnglhEns lho total run time ot the p6gram.

o

Changes madetoparam€ters LC, r'1,

Ll, dl,

12, L2, dnd d2duilng Hold arsvalid

NOTE!h rasume ls posslbl. lor lho programmer lo be ln Hold lnd Hb slmuttaneously. Io lh. avolullon otlho proglam, ?un must bc aolectod and tho holdback6ndltlon musl ba clssted.

NOTE!Hold ls not at all lhe ssm. as the manual opsratlng mod. (HAnd):

Hold stops the llme bae ot lh! programmat ond p€rmlts lomporary adluslmont ot lhe paramstors; urad valuo lho controllor romalns ln aulomstlc closed.loop oporathn and tho moas controls at thr setpolnt.

HAnd aflocts tho controll6r7.3. Thc programmor clock contlnuss lo run durlng opEratloni tho mnual control16roulput lov€l ls adlustsbla thus lnlluenclng tho moasur.d valuo.

lr, howovar, oxcosds lhr dlllolcnco brlwoon lhr moasurud valu. and th. progrEmmod sotpolnt the holdback band, lh6 programmor placss ltssl, lnto

Hb.

,

'

29

12.6.3 Besetting

Pro6dureg a program

.

A pogram m bs placod into ldlE lrom the lont panol or through the

Exlernal

@mmunicat'pns port. The r€arlerminals do nol

Fovlde this option. Two pEceduras follow: low€r

.

Fom the rront oanel:

ScEll down tho parametsr list whh PAR until Prog

8ppeare. -

Depress €ithsr UP or DOWN unlil tho program slato paametgr ldlE app€ars in lhe display.

EilhEr pros

PAH ff lgt lhE display time out to entor the ldlE progrffi state.

o

.

Throuoh ths sxternal@mmunicalions

This r€quires modi,icalion

6mmunietions ppi6l.

mrt: of tho oplional slatus param€ls os using the oxtornal.

o ln bothcasesthe state lamp'R'exlinguishEs to indi€tethatthe prcgEmmer is lnldl E

IDLE characlorlsllca

.

Modifications made lo arlparametErs in ldlE are permanont.

12.6.4 Ending a program

Four options aro available to tho user al the ond ot a program as shown in Frgure 15.

30

.Ed

Figup 15 Metpds ol endog ptugms

12.7 Loss ol power durlng a program

Figurol6 showsthoetfeclotapowsroutagsduringprogramtun.Whenpowerislost,lhe valuos ol all lhe parametsrs are savsd in non-volalilo m€mory. When power is restdred, the clock rosumes @unting in lhe sms segmenl as soon as lhs msasured value re-ont€rs lhe holdback band.

ll

t

r@E nEsM&

t

I

.

8rc6@ etuadurd

Figuv 16 Lrss ol pwet dudng $ogm RIJN

12.8 Changing program parameters

ParamstgG in

Lq ldlE or Hold.

rl, Ll, d l, 12, L2, and d 2 can bo modillgd whilo ths prcgrammsr is silher

.

Any changes mado lo thesg palamotors while in ld lE arc pomanenl.

.

Any changes made tolhEss parameters while in Ho ld causB a t8fipola/ychange valid onv duing the padiculal it€ration ot the program loop.

o

Ths programmBrdoas not p€rmit anychangss to be mads lo th6so parametersduring run.

Ths base sgtpoint

SP, along with holdback band Hb and the othBr non.program

paramsterc cn still be lreely and pstmanBnlV modilied during run.

31

12.9 Alarms lf tho mssurod value lollows a ramping selpoint through an alarm teg'pn, the alarms are detocl8d, annunciated, and outpul

B usual. As shown in FrgurB 17, trctyp€s ot b€haviou are to bs nolsd:

"Fullscale" hlgh and the alarm solpoint lnto lhe

"fullsalo" low6larms. ItlhE alarms are non'latching,

'safg reg'pn snds the alarm ondilion.

clGsing

Dovlallon alatm. Ths doviation alarm measured value bandlolloffithecuilentlyactivo setpoint. tlthe canot lrack the 3€lpoint within tho bounds ol lho dgvialion alam, an alarm

@ndition ls gsnotalsd.

I

A.

Bdtsnb. d @lal&kt' h,lts@L h* alam.

.32

8. Eohsvbt ol N,tatdl@ dadale alm

Figurc

-

17 Ranp-lo-sepoint openlioo ild alms

I

I

I

^

808 driving a heauc@l load and fitted with an audibls alarm'

808/11/T1/R1/NO/NO4AJHC21 5)

M f,& o

E m

L o gM

BT

6sd3

33

Eurotherm Conlrols Componles

UK Reglonol Soles snd Serylce

Boma

"

;.

oluIar.sd.nd

Eu6A.rm

6t& L'dd toodq Cl@, Oudigh wds(J.g8Nt33[

Ll.*s. (ml69337t

T.rdSrlla EUROrcG tu (m3)

265982

,l'

l

t; r'i

-l

l,

I to,otum Contd! Udbd

Coh' bd Wd6eb

Ll.!56.

(@25) 5721ll

T.1.r52t852

tor{m5).rmg

f'

Overeeos Componles

Authllo luEhc6 trr, Ud.

Td.pir.

Srdnry

LluM7a362 hi121.7777% l2l

.777022

Tlhphsr W.n (m22) 787

T.ld ll32mflAW tut lc722t t87&5

&l

&lrlun

Ll.pb.eh@. (3,i22$70

T.ld 04633317 tlSNl

.frr l3l 32 l 7363

I

Id.pho. CoFnhr.n (3ll

S71622

Ll

!23l7TEUSS

tu

13ll 972r2.

Eurcfr.mAutoholl6 5A

Td.phm. tp

Tda 38m38 t78)

6dl9a3

EUrEil f

E

.' tu178,3524rc

Ap.{iml.frd

Eurtr.m t6l..O6bH

Id.plm hb!

10613U

T.lqa84Dl

EUTOTD tor l0A3l) 298119

2980

Hq trq

E!rcfr.m Umld

Ll.phd.

Hqs r.it

T.ts6t257Errf!U

tor

15)

67@la8 l5l 8733826 lr.lond

Eurcfr.mh.llndunlt.d rdhphm N@. (0151

Tdd Om&ras

79937

Eu fl tor(0451 75123 lllly

T.Lrr6. ctr

Tdd 38083

{31)

97r10!

EUrcn

I tor13ll977512

Nory

Es6tr.6M

Ll+l@.&(66)80330 for (66) 803331

Eu6tr.m BFtusI

T.l.rto.ll) 66lml rorll)

6619@3

,

T t t.pt-" ml*

(rOl rlSrO

T.l.r 32317 tWfr5 tu1.0).35s20

Lhlte. Iobp

{3) 33&832.

L|.r02321016 TUROAJ tur{3) 33638320

EsE6.6 rdoh.(tuL)AO.

r.l.pt6. Zddll)8103e6

T.1.r82757, E$G torlll

8108920

Eu6fr.m

T.l.pi6. xffia Ualld

H l2l5s8s7

TlldEIKORK23l05 tor (2J s539655

N.fr.drn&

T.l.rh. bid.. lTll al

T.1.r3rc73 ElBNtNt tor17l! a14526 l6al

EuES.m hdt

T!r.r[o. wonhin! lB03)

T.r.r87lla EUROrcG tor

(m3l

265t82 asllbPlotu

Udld

2$fi u5t

Iclcpb. krd

(703) r7l1870

T.lu 8ry4a, EUrcfrEU BN

&,1703).373182

&l.t cd &d.. ln

[email protected]

tu@nlda

Edoh.,m d [d tu

6dreh Udd: [email protected] evd hpl.. toEdry Cla, Ddebn, wd{, b: wd

Ll.rlo.l@03J

2685@

Lld

871la EUROrc G sl,.e,0N13 fd (m3) 26982

3PL

E4l.nd.

Printed in I 193 HA021428 lssue 7

Srol

..til

it1

.{

+;

.t.

\:

i,

)

808/847

_|NSTnIJ!4ENTS

MN E*IflO NICS

HS tq

1H

1L il

VO

cl

BL

MN

PV

HB

IB

CH

cc

BG

BP

HO

SR

Hb

Lc sP.

OP

SW

OS

xs

ER

SL

HA

LA

DA

XP

TI

TD r1 ri

tl

t2 t2 t2

MNEMONICS OF PABAMETERS ACCESSIBLE VIATHE EXTERNAL COMI'/UNICATIONS LINK,

This is a complete list of allparamelers available.

MNEMONICS PARAMETER ASCII/FIEX

48

53

4C 53

31

48

31

4C dq dq

56

30

43

49

42

4C

40

4E

50

56

53

50

4F

50

53

57

4F

s3

s8

53

45

52

s3

4C

48

4',1

4C

41

44

41

58

50

54

49

54

44

48

42

4C 42

43

48

43

4il

52

47

42

50

4A

AF

53

52

48

62

4C 63

72

31

6C 31

-74

31

72

32

6C 32

74

32

Setpoint high limit

Setpoint low limh

High range limit

Lowrange limh lnalr rmanl lv^a havadonimal

..

Software verison number hexadecimal information bbck length Comms buffer and transmission

Mode number

I ast measrrred vahra read onlv

Selpoint read only

Outpul power in auto read only

Slalus word hexad€cimal

Optionalslatus word

Exlended slalus word

Errorvalue

Local setpoint

1

High alarm selpoint

Low alarm setpoint

Deviation alarm selooint

Proportional band lntegral time

Derivativs lime

High cutback

Lowcdbad<

Cycletime

1

(output

1

- heat)

Cyclelime 2 (oulput 2 - cool)

Relative coolgain

1

Sensorbreak power

Heat loutout 1'l oulout limit

Ramp-lo-setpoint ramp ralo

Holdbad<

Loop counter

Ramp rale'l

Level

1

Dwell

1

Ramp rate 2

Level 2

Dwell2

Programme only version

I

I

I

i-

i l

I

I t.

i:

I

1,.,

t,

$ i,

I

I t i

I

I t'

-f

-'' t

I

I'

:

:+ii

iu+

1

.

',

{4.

g

92 ond 921 lnstollotion

ond

Operoting

Read Safety notes over the page before commencing

lnstructions

,

,,1

/

,nEcHAN ICAL

TNSTALLATT O ll

.

Prepare panel cutout in sheet metal

.

enclosure. Enclosure temperature must remain within 0-55oC range.

Install the optional front panel gasket

(pait no. BO133297) if required. Remove the backin! from the gasket and apply it arorind the on the outside of

' .

While holding the sleeve, slide the

..'

;.'

mounting bracket towards the pill6l uniit the clips engale on the ratchets. t

'", ..i;'' ' 'i

While still pulling back on the sleevel fpess

.ir

' on the upper left and lower comers rigtl t of the bracket to seat the

anq"li");

mouhting ' i.

ji

bracket.

eunciinERm

coNTROTS

Ponetdetoits.

Panel

.,t, depth: r,, withterminal cover: l26.lmm

, :

with

gasket:

less l.5mm

Panel thickriess: .maximum l3mm

'',,,,

\t.

. t.r

into might be necessary to secure the installation.

asx+smm

Srl

ii.t

*

'l5.3mm

+l

I mex. radll

Silmm

48mm

122.1mm

i

50mm

Dimensionol deloils

,*,

Ponel culout ond hrinimum spocjng t-

', .:'

,, ,.r

'..

-o''

'

:

EIECTRI"CAL CONNECTTO

WARNING

Ensure that the maximum voltage which is applied to the unit power supply, between any two isolated circuits, or between any isolated circuit and ground does not.exceed 264vac.

It is the user's responsibility to calculate the maximum possible current in'each power and common wire. Do not exceed the rated current for any particular wire size permitted by the local electrical code. Overheated wires and damaged

-

-\:

may result from overloading.

da*

Power'

Respect the polarity of the AC power supply; line wire must be connected to terminal

12, and the neutral must be connected to terminal

1 l.

Alqrms

The alarm outputs are failsafe: the relays are

'

de-energised during the alarm condition or power

. down. The attached alarm circuit should be designed foi failsafe operation and fused appibpriately. A snubber may be required.

Snubbers

Connect snubbers

1

CZ|4O398 (22nf

.

+

l00Q) across the appropriate output or alarm relay contacts when driving AC inductive

(mechanical contactors and solenciids). loads

Do not use snubbers when driving high impedance loads.

.i

'

The snubber passes lmA in l20Vac circuits, and

2mA in 240Vac circuits; this is sufficient to hold in certain relays with high impedance coils and should not be used in such installations.

WARN!NG

When an contact is to be implemented as part of a failsafe alarm scheme, it is the user's responsibility to verify thai the efiect of the snubber does not interfere with the operation'of the circuit. Certain high imfedance circuits are not able to detect a contact opening when the snubber is placed across the contact. In these cases the snubber should not be in'stalled across the relay contact.

Reset inpu! (lolching configurolions only)

Connect momentary contact, normally open pushbutton to terminals 6 and 7. Keep wiring run shorterthan lm and well away from any noise generating circuits.

t d

5 fru h dlm t{/o

I

2

(

ClG.d h .hm

h.

I'l/c hd.m

l(D{,OVr

+lU.l6*

50 d 60tk tgo tra m{td

1

2

3

-4

510

I

7

9

6

12

11 lnput

WARNING

.This alarm unit must have its own input sensor.

Neverconnecttheinputterminalsgand

l0in

parallel e.g. with the input of any other instrument, recorder, controller, etc. The parallelled I

: ti

"' , r

".

:. ' inputs of oiher instruments interfere with pro.per operation of the sensor break detection circuitry

.

-' and may also impair the measurement accuracy.

NOTE: The input circuit is NOT isolated from the reset input (terminals 6 and 7).

Use of shielded, twisted pair is recommended for the input sensor. The shield must be connected to terminal

.

l0 even when grounded elsewhere.

Thermocouple: Use appropriate compensa-

.

tion cable. Keep loop resistance as possible (lkO maximum) low as

RTD: Use 3 copper wires of same length and

.

diameter. (20Qllead maximum resistance.)

,'

:

.l

t'

rll.

l

Reor lermlnot cover (optionolli .! . .

-.

.

--:.- .-

.

After wiring, attach rear terininal

cover

:

,

BD133125 with screw FY133264U001.

E a.

Z

1'

Sofefy noles

Before installing, operating or seruicing this unit supplied by Eurotherm Controls, please read the following:

INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USE OF

EUROTHERM CONTROLS EQUIPMENT

(Note: These instructions represent good engineering princilrles and are applicable to all control equipment of the same type, whether from Eurothem Controls or any other supplier.)

Enclosure of live parts

This unit should be installed inside a suiiable grounded metal enclosure to prevent live parts being accessible to human hands and metal tools. It is recommended that rear terminal covers (available re an option) be fitted.

Wiring

It is important to connect the unit conectly in accordance with the installation data on this sheet.

Wiring should confom to appropriate standuds of good pmctice and lmal codes and regulations. Conductors should be commensurate with voltage and current ratings of the units.

Out-of-limits slarms

In applications where excessive deviation of a contrclled paftrmeter due lo equipment failure could cause damage to machinery or materials, or injury to personnel, it is strongly recommended that m additional sepmte unit with its own input sensor be used to give alarm indication or to shut down the procss or both, as may be appropriate. (Note: The alm function built into controllers may not give sufficient protection in these circumstances). When the controller alarm function separate alam'units or re used they should be checked for correct operation at regular intervals.

Configuration

Many initrument functions are user selectable from the front panel. It is the user's responsibility to verify that the instrument configuration is correct. Personal injury, property loss and equipment damage could result from an improperly configured instrument.

Grounding

This instrument hs intemal circuits which ue isolated or "floating." This is necessary to prevent the occurence of a "ground loop" in signal circuits. To avoid possible shock hazards in the event of an intemal fault causing breakdown of insulation, it is recommended that all equipment connected to this unit be enclosed in a grounded metal enclosure.

Sheaths of themocouples (or other sensors) should be properly grounded by a septrate conductor (instead of bbing dependent on grounding via the machine framework).

ESD precautions

This instrument contains static sensitive components.

Care should be taken to avoid electrostatic discharge

(ESD) and thus reduce incidence ofdamage to the instrument when removed from its sleeve. Any manipulation ofthe instrument printed circuit boards should be perfomied on a conductive surface with the personnel in contact with the surface by means of a grounded, metal or conductive plastic wrist strap with a

IMO series resistor.

Supply isolators

Every electrical system should be provided with means for isolating the system from the AC supply to allow safe working during repair and maintenance. SCRs and triacs are not adequate means of isolating ihe supply, and should always be backed by a suitable mechanical disconnect switch.

Hazardous almospheres

This unii is not suitable for use in areas subject to hutrdous atmospheres. No Eurotherm Controls product should be connected to a circuit which passes into or through a hazardous area unless appropriale precautions are taken (even though the instrument itself may be located in a safe area). Such an installation should confom to the requirements of the relevant Authoriiy.

Procedure in the event of trouble

Before beginning any investigalion of a fault, the electrical supplies to all equipment concemed should be switched off and isolated. Units suspected of being faulty should be disconnected and removed to a properly equipped workshop for testing. There are no userserviceable pans inside this unit.

CONFIGURATION

Procedure

1.

Cycle power OFF and ON. Self test follows: tESt appears followed by I I I l, 8888, then the 4-digit ionfiguration code.

Touch and hold secret key only after 4-digit configuration code appears to enter configuration mode,

NOTE: Touching the front panel during the start-up self test could lead to erroneous test results.

Configurotion code

lsr (lefr) ond 2nd digit

0

olorm 1 ond otqrm 2 functions

Disobled

lotchlng operolion

-

I

2

3

4

Deviolion low

Deviolion high

Deviotion olorm olorm bond olorm

Full scole low olorm

5

Sensor breok olorm

6

Full scole high olorm

I

Role-of-chonge non-lotching operollon

9

olorm

-

Deviolion low olorm

A

Deviolion high olorm

B

Deviotion bond olorm

C

Full scole low olorm

D

Sensor breok olorm

E

Full scole high olorm

F

Role-of-chonge olorm

-

2.

See configuration code with left digit blinking.

3.

Enternewcode:

V

= select digit position

(l through 4)

A

= modify digit value.

4.

To exit configuration mode do one of these:

Secret key = accept parameter new configuration; value check follows.

CJ

= abort; retum to previous configuration.

3rd digir

0

I

lnDUl sensor lyoe

"RTD-1000 Pr,

DtN43760',

B-Pr-30YoRh/Pil6YoRh

2

C-W.5%Re/W-26%Re

(Hoskins)

lull specllled ronge

"C mln oC mox

-100

600

600

I 820

2t50

3

E-Chromel'"/Adoms

conslonlon

4

J-FeISAA4A

conslonlon

0

-260

-200

5 K-Chromel'"/Alumel"

6

7

8

L-Fe/Konslonlon

N-NiCroSil/NiSil

Plotinel

ll'"

9 R-Pt-13%Rh/Pi

A S-Pt-10%Rh/Pi

B

T-Cu/Adoms

conslonlon

C

Lineor o-2-point enlry scoling

D

Lineor b-point-ond-spon enlry scoling

-25O

- 100

0

-250

0

0

-255

I 000

I 200

1372

900

I 300 l 395

17

17

67

67

400

4rh dlgir pwr. dlsolov remole ock. olorm fqll o t"c

'c-

ALI

ALI

&2

&2

no-

yes

2'C

3 *"C

4'C

5"C

6.F

7'F

8'F

9'F

A'F

ALI

ALI

At2

At2

ALt

ALI

ALI

ALI

AL2

&2

&2 no yes no yes no yes no yes no

AL2 yes

Go30

bb50

Configurotion exomple

6650:

lst digit

(6):

full scale (absolute) high latching alarm

(AL l).

2nd digit

3rd digil

4th digit

(6):

full scale (absolute) high latching alorm

(AL

2).

(5):

type K thermocouple input.

r^ $

(0):

display units in oC, remote alarm acknowledgement for both alarms, and power fail alarm disabled.

(s

,11

Lolching olorms

Before resefling

(uriocknowledged)

Afler resetting

(ocknowledged)

Non-lotching Alorms

Aclive lomp floshing reloy de-energised

Gleqred lomp floshing reloy de-energised lomp reloy sleody ON de-energised lomp OFF reloy energised lomp reloy floshing de-energised lomp OFF reloy energised

Toble

A Alorm conditions

fr.,,

ifi't

OPERATION

Bosic procedures

Open lisl

Refer to illustration below.

.

Measured value is displayed when unit is unattended.

.

.

Depress CJ once to view display'units.

Depress again to view AL I (rocl). Push

A

or

V

to view alarm I setpoint.

.

Depress again to view AL 2 (roc2). Push

A

or

V

to view alarm 2 setpoint.

.

. To acknowledge (or reset) latching alarms

(flashing red ALt or AL2 lamp); use CJ until ALI (AL2) appears. Hold A or

V for

5 seconds the until Clr appears, release , then press button agriiir: ' oulput acliv€ dam activs decrease value rext param€ler incr€ase valuo measured value parameter mnemonic secret key parameter

r=

EUROTHER

Fronl ponel pushbuttons, disploys ond lomps

Protected

. list

To enter protected list: use CJ until units display (oF, oC or Lin), then "secret key".

Continue

.

Push

A or wittr CJ toTiew p'iiameters.

Y to view parameter value.

PushA or

V again to modify parameter

.

value.

To retum to measured value display when in protected list: "secret key".

NOTE: Parameters not pertinen! to the unit configuration do not appear.in the scroll list.

Alqrms

-temperoture ond process olorms

'If the measured. value enters an alarm,condition

(defined by the configuration code and the parameter values), then the appropriate red lamp, ALI or AL2, lights and the corrgsponding relay deenergizes. The alarm operation is configurable as latching or non latching.

NOTE: Deviation alarm setpoints (d-land d-2) are in reference to the alarm setpoints (AL I and AL 2).

Examples: deviation low alarm setpoint = AL2 - d-2, deviation high alarm setpoint =

AL I + d-1, deviation band alarm setpoints =

AL2td-2.

Role-of-chonge olorms (configurotion codes

"8"

of

"F"l

Configured alarm channels go into the alarm condition if the rate of change of the measured value exceeds the alarm setpoint. This applies for both positive and negative changes of the measured value. Modifications to the setpoint take effect after the pushbutton lights extinguish.

Resetting (ocknowledging) lotching otorms

Latching alarms are acknowledged in the open list (see "Open list procedures") or by a remote pushbutton.

NOTE: The remote pushbutton can be configured to acknowledge only

ALl, only AL2 or both.

Sensor

foil

olorm

Sensor fail detection is always operative. The unit displays SnSr FAIL upon detecting at least one of these conditions:

.

if the input signal is less than 40mV or greater than +90mV,

.

ifthe input is open circuit, or

.

ifthe unit's temperature is outside ofthe

0-55oC operating range (thermocouple inputs only).

The behaviour of the relays and the alarm lamps

ALI and AL2 conforms to the Table A on bottom of page 2.

NOTE: Selection of configuration codes

"5" or "D" for digits I and 2 enables the alarm relay operation only for sensor fail al:irm (and power fail alarm if enabled) and not for any process alarm condition.

Power

. foil

olorm (lotchlng olorms

Manual reset after power restoration.

only)

If the power fail alarm is selected (one of the

"yes" selections for configuration code digit

'

.

4), the limit switch always places both relays in the alarm state (de-energized) upon powering up. A manual reset by the operator is thus required to re-energize the alarm out put relays. These alarms are acknowledged as all others in the open list or by the remote pushbutton.

Automatic reset after power restoration.

If the power fail alarm is not selected (one of the "no" selections for configuration code digit 4), the limit switch automatically re-affirms any alarm existing before the power failure.

Alorm lest

To test the operation of the output relays and the connected

(ALl or circuit, scroll to the appropriate alarm

AL2) in the protected list and hold

A or

Y until tESt appears. Release, then depress the button again to change the state of the relay: if the relay is energized, then the alarm test de-energizes the relay and vice versa. When the button is released, the relay assumes the previous condition determined by the input.

Adiustoble porqmelers

See Adjustable parameter list over the page.

Lineqr input setup

Etectricol conneclions

For all inputs use a shielded twisted pair.

.

Millivolt inputs (.10 to 70mV)

Connect signal leads directly to input terminals 9(+) and lOC).

.

0-20mA and 4-20mA inputs.

Connect 3.01O shunt (parrno. CA 9G3R0l) across input terminals 9(+) and l0().

.

Higher voltage inputs. Voltage divider network is required (resistors supplied by user). Refer to table for suggested values.

Resistor specifications:17o, 0.125W

minimum, tl00ppm metal or metal oxide film.

I

't0

9 to c dsHt e p dSLo

G20mA and 4.20mA lntr t

1.0k

R

Vottagp infln8

-20 lo 200mV

-0.1 lo l V

.o-5 to 5V

-l to IOV

-2.5to25Y

T

2.2k

r5.0k

75.0k

r50k

392k

..,

Coullon

Use of the shunt or voltage divider inhibits operation of the sensor break detection feature.

Scollng procedure

There are two methods of entering and scaling linear inputs:

.

Linear a: 2-point scaling (configuration code

,,c).

.

Linear b: point and span scaling

(configuration code

"D").

Linear a and b

l.

Set display decimal point

position

parameter, dP to desired value.

2.

If reading the input signal directly from the source, connect source

(from signal

.': generator or sensor) to input terminals. a signal equal to a known

AnplV __-. low value for the

,

*

first setup point.

3.

Scroll tkough the protected list until In.Lo.

Press and hold on V or A until rEAd appears, release, lhen push the button again.

[Altematively, if no input signal is required or the exact value is known, the input value in millivolts can be set in with V or

al.

4.

Scroll to sDLo. Then set in corresponding display value with V and A.

Linear a only

5.

Again, ifreading the input signal directly from the source, apply a signal equal to a known high value for the second setup point.

6.

Scroll through the protects list until In.Hi.

Press on

A

or Y until rEAd appears, release, then push the button again.

[Altematively, if no input signal is required or the exact value is known, the value in input millivolts can be set in with orV l.

7.

Access dSHi. Then set in the corressponding display value with or V.

ln,Lo h.Hl

hpul (mV)

Lineor o: 2-poinl scoling

Linear b: point and span"scaling

Linear b only

8.

Access In.Sn. With A or

V set in the input signal span in millivolts.

9.

Access dSSn. WithA or V set in the display span.

E.

-9

E dSLo ln.Lo

input (mV)

Lineor b: point & spon scoling

IINEAR INPUT SCAIING (Reoloces "OFSI" ooromeler in orolecled lisll ln.Lo

lnput for low selup poinl -9.99 io 70.00mV inpul signol ronge dSLo ln.Hl

dsHl

Disployvoluelorlow selup

poinl

-999 1o9999, -99.9 1o999.9, or lnpul for high setup point

-9.99 lo 99.99 orocess unils

-9.99 ro 70.00mV inpul signol ronge

Disploy volue for high selup

point

-999 to 9999 , -99 .9 to 999.9, or

.

.i';,:' l.i'--

-

-9.99 lo 99.99 process unils

.d:'-

Adiusroble

Mnemonic

n oEN I l<T oC,

"F.

Lin

(rocll

'

Ifl----------=-- porometer lisl

Porqmeler

Adiusloble

ronge

Disolov

mils

."tpoint

(rote-of-chonqe

setooinl)

View

onlv.

View

only.

Al2

(roc2l

Alorm 2 selpoinl

(role-of-chonge setpoinl)

Both lineor o ond b inpuls. To reod input signol volue from reor lerminols: Hold UP or DOWN unlil "rEAd" oooeors. releose. lhen oress lhe butlon oooini

Bolh lineor o ond b inpuls.

Lineor o inpuls only. To reod inpul signol volue from reor lerminols: Sei: orocedure for "ln.Lou. obove."

Lineor o inpuls only.

Commenls

Disoloy unils selected in

To ocknowledge lotching

confiourotion.

olorms:

Hotd

-----I,

UP or DOWN butlon unlil "CLr" oppeors,releose, lhen press lhe button ogoin.

"iii

Volue odiusloble in protected list, below.

ALT

(rocl

)

HYl

-d-r

AL2

(roc2l t+( 2

-d-2

Decimol point position for lineor inouls o ond b

Alorm 1 selpoinl

(rote-of-chonge setpoinl)

Alorm

I hysteresis

Deviolion from "ALl olorm offset

"

0lo 2 decimol

$Ofi.

XXX.X or ploceg. [ormols: xx.xx'

Full scole olorm selpoinls ond deviolion olorm reference levels: configured inpul sensor ronge,

Role of chonge

3000"C/min.; olorm: I lo

I to 5400"F/min.;

I lo 3000, 0.] lo 300.0, or'

0.01 to 30.00 orocess units/min.

l"C (or

1'F) lo upper ronge limil

Lineor inpuls:

I io 9999, 0.1 to

999.9.0.01 to99.99

l"C (or

1'F) to upper ronge limit

Lineor inpuls:

I lo 9999,0.1 to

999-9. 0-OI to 99.99

Some os olorm I Alorm 2 selpoinl

Irole-of-ihonoe selooinll

Alorm 2 hysleresis

Deviolion olorm offsel lrom

"

AL 2"

Colibrolion offsel oFsr

LlnE Line frequency

-50.0 to 50.0"C

-90.0 to 90.0'F

50 Herlz:

" 50" ; 60 Hertz:

"

60"

Disploy messoges lisl

Messoge

Disploy

INPUT STATUS NAESSAGES condition

SnSr

FAII-

Sensor foil. lnpul open or reversed; meosured valrre orrlside of confiorrred ronoe

.,^t,,- ^ .^-^-

SELF DIAGNOSTTC II'TESSAGES rESr

" lnlernol self tesl upon power up.

Ittt

8888

EE

FAIL rd

FAIL

Disploy test ofler obove self lesl. Losls for opproximolely 3 seconds

.. Memory corruplion.

Unil foilure

@ Copyright Eurolherm Controls Limiled

'l

994

Appeors for lineor inpuls only. Affecls oll ooromelers disoloved in orocess unils.

Alorm function selected in configurotion.

"AL I " setting irrelevonl for sensor breok olorms: configurolion codes

To lesl olorm operolion: Hold UP or

DOWN buflon unlil "lESl" oppeors, releose, then press lhe butlon ogoin.

Alorm slole should toqqle.

Appeors for deviolion configurolions only.

For deviolion bond olorms, "HYl "' musl be less thon "-d-1"-

Some os olorm l

Appeors for temperolure inpuls only.

Sel io line frequency upon instollolion.

User oclion/commenls

Verifo input sensor ond conneclions. Messoge dissopeors when inorrl sionol is reinsloted-

.'

,:

Reploce unil if oll four l's do not lighl up or foils lo go on lo '

'8888'disploy.

Do not louch fronl ponel durino self lesl.

User should verify lhol oll digils ond lomps lighl up to prevenl erroneous reodinqs.

Cycle power. Verify ond correct oll poromeler ond configurolion volues- lf disolov mrsisls- reoloce unit-

Reploce unit mcndmenls or omissions to this specification, We cmnot rccept rcsponsibility

Prinled in Englond

0394

fordmage, injury loss orexpenrs ruulting thercfrom.

.Ft'r,.:.'''

HA023804 lss

1

{1

{

I

I

!

I t

I

I

I

I i

I a ro st sf

Model

J,4S**"

Forlurther lnrormatlon, please

contac-t

your

EUROTHERM

agency. Our lechnlclans wlll

be

pleased to advlse you and eventually to asslst you wlth the commlsslonlng ol your lnstallatlon.

Every ettort has been madeto ensurethe accuracy otthe lnfomatlon

ln

lhls manual. However,

ln

order to malntaln our technlcal

lead

we are contlnuously lmprovlng our products whlch could, wlthout notlce, result

ln

amendments, errors and omlsslons. We cannot actept responslblllty lor damage, lnlury, loss or expenses lesultlng thereln.

t

1

I

I

I

I

@ 1992 Copyrlght

EUROTHERM

AUTOMATION

S.A.

(FRANCE)

4255 Solld state comador User's

Manual

Part No. HA 173817 lss

4 O3/94 l

.{

EUROCUBE Series

4255

Solid

state

contactor

CONTENTS

1.

General

description

page

3

2. Coding.

3.

lnstallation.

4.

Control

signal

5

9

H

E

E

E

E

25

H

5. Fuses

6.

Technical

specification.

29

H

33

EUROTHERM

1

2 EUROTHERM

;

t

{ t

{

1 l

1

{

I

I

t

)

{ i t

I

i

I

i

1 t i

I

I i

General

i

I

I

I i

I

1.

GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

Model4255

in

the

EUROCUBE

425 range

is a

solid state contaclor which switches

15

to

125

A cunents

at

voltages

ol12O

to

rt80 V.

Mode!

4255

has been designed as a replacement

for electromechanical contactors switching

low

temperature coetlicient resistive

loads.

The

controlled

loads can be connected

between two phases

(380

to

480

V)

or

between

the phase

and

neutra!

(220

to

240 V) of

the

supply.

Two 4255 modules

can

be

used to

controltwo

phases

ol three phase loads.

There is no

requirement

for

any particular phase relationship

between the

load supply

voltage

and that to the

controller.

The

type of

input

signal is loglc

(operating in "On

/

Oft" mode).

When

ordering,

the user

has

the

choice

of

DC or

AC

options.

Two

voltage leveloptions

and one

cunent

level option

are

available

for the

DC

input

signal.

Three

voltage

level

options

including

the voltage range

100

to 240V

are available

lorthe AC

input signal.

The

switching ol 4255

solid state

contactors

is synchronised

with voltage zero crossings

in order

to

minimise

electrical

interference and

supply disturbances.

4255

modules are extremely

compact

and are suitable either

for

DIN

ralt

or

bulkhead

mounting.

4255 solid

state

contactors offer

ease of access

for

different

wiring

methods:

- of

the

mains

supply

- of

the

load

- of the

control

signal.

EUROTHERM

3

General

The

housing of

the unit

is removable atter breaking

the

electrical

connections.

Low

level and power

cables

are separated.

The

control electronics

are

galvanically

isolated, and are totally

enclosed

within

lhe casing

as a

safety

measure.

The control

connector

is

detachable

The

heatsink provides

thermal

dissipation by

natural convecltlon

up

to

a

75A cunent

rating.

From

l(XlA, 4255 solid

state

contactors

are fitted

with lntegrated coollng.

lan

A

salety thermal cut-out

inhibits the control signal in

the

case

of overheating

(e.9.

lan lailure).

Fuses and

luse holders

are standard:

they

are

extemalto

the

unil,

but are specified

lor

mounting on

the same DIN rall.

The

fuse

and

luseholder

assembly must be

specilied

by

the

installer and

procured

at

the

same

time

as

the 4253 by

means of

a separate order.

There

is an

optiona! load

monitoring

facility, partlal load lallure detectlon

(PLF),

which

enables

the

detection of a

drop ol20% ln the load current corresponding to an lncrease ol

25o/o

ln load reslstance

(in single phase).

PLF

detection

is

signalled

by a relay contact and an

LED

indicator.

Another

LED shows

the

state

ol

the

controlsignal.

Opening of the

thermal cutout

causes

this

LED

to

be extinguished.

I

1

:

:

I i

4

EUROTHERM

Codlng

2.

CODTNG

2.1 4255

Solid

state

contactor

2.2 Fuse and

fuseholder

assembly

2.3 Descriptive

label

.

page

6

7

8

H

EUROTHERM

5

Codlng

2.1

425S

Solid

state

contactor

Model Load current

Line vohaqe

Fan suoolv

4255 lnput Option End

E

H

6

Marimum current Code

15 amps

25 amps

40 amps

60 amps

75 amps

100 amps

125 amns

15A

25A

40A

60A

7sA

100A

lrEl

Vohaoe ranoa

120 vohs

240 vohs

415 vohs

440 vohs

480 vohs

Code

120V

240V

415V

/t40v

4AOv

Fan suoolv

Wilhoul lan

Fan vohage:

(up to 75A)

(100 and 125A)

1

00 vohs

'l

1

0 to 120 volts

200 volts

220 to 240 volts lnoul

llooic

conlroll

DG signal

AC sional

Coda

000

100v

110V120

200v

220V24/J

Code

LGC

ACL

Oplion

Partial load lailure detection

Contact slate lor alarm:

Code

Open

Closed

PLF

IPF

Coding exampte:

4255 solid slate contactor;

Load current 17A; mains supply 380V; Without fan cooling; logic input DC signal;

Options - partial

Joad lailure (output contact open in alarm):

425s,t 25 N 415V/000/LGC|/PLF/00

EUROTHERM

.t

i

I

I i

Codlng

2.2 Fuse and

fuseholder

assembly

Fuseholder

Current

End

Code

for

nominal

contactor current 154

254

404

60A

754

100A

125A

Code

FU1038

FUl038

FU1451

FU22s8

FU2258

FU2760

FU2760

Code

16A

25A

40A

60A

754

1004

1254

L trt ao

o

Codlng erample:

Fuse and

fuseholder assembly for

a

4255

solid state

contactorwith

maximum

curent of 15A:

FU1038/16A/00

I

EUROTHERM

7

Godlng

2.3

Descriptive

label

The

descriptive

label giving

allthe

information on

characteristics ol the

solid state

contactor

as

shipped

is

located

behind

the

stack.

E')

.E

!t

o

o

EI

EUROTHERI,I

TI]RIHIIIE.EN6!-AND ll0DEL

r

{255/404/?t0V/000/LGC/PLF/00

N'

000001/001 t00L!07 t92

ANY {)IHER FUSE IIII,ALIDATES

EU0RAilTEE :FERRAZ 194779

:0903-68500 2.10

INPUI

:

LOEIC

DC

AUIILIARY SUPPLY

: l!l

Flgure

2.1

Example ol

a

descrlptlve label

Model

4255

Nominalcurrent 40A

Maximum

vohage

240V

Wlthout fan cooling

DC input

signal

PLF option

(relay contact

open

in alarm

mode)

:

42sS

I

40

N

IOVIOO0/LG C/P

LF/00

8 EUROTHERM

I i t i

I

I

lnstallatlon

3. INSTALLATION

3.1 Mechanical details

3.2

Mounting

3.2.1

15

3.2.275 to 60A models to 125A models

.

.

.

.

.

3.3

Wiring

3.3.1

Termlnal ldentlllcatlon

3.3.2

Slngle phase load

3.3.3

Three phase load

3.4

Setting up

partial load

failure

detection

.

page

10

12

14

15

16

16

20

23

24 c

.9

s

(l o

E

EUROTHERM

9

lnstallatlon

3.1 Mechanical

details

The dimensions of

4255

solid

state

contactors are

shown

in

fig.

8.1

lor

models

with

a

nominalcurrent between

15 and 60A, and in

fig.

3.2

for

models

with

a

nominalcurrent

between 75

and

125A.

o o

II

ooo

o

Cl

G o tr

o

10

D W

Flg.3.1 4255 Dlmenslons (nomlnal current l5 to 60A)

Dlmenslons (mm)

Height

width

Depth

Weight

(H)

(w)

(D)

(kg)

Nomlnal current

15A 25A 40A

60A

134

134 134 134

98

98 116 116

94 130

0.6

0.8

155

1.1

155

1.2

EUROTHERM

I

t

I

I

I

lnstallatlon

o o

II rla r r

3

+

uxc

cur

I

lt

c

.9

s cl

L o

w

I

I

I i

I

I

I t

I

I t

F i

I

I

I

D

Heighl widrh

Depth

Weight

EUROTHERM

Flg.3.2 4255 Dlmenslons (nomlnalcurrent

75

to 125A)

Dlmenslons (mm)

(H)

(w)

(D)

(kg)

75A'

Nomlnal culrent

1004

125A

190 190 190

117 117

190

1.85

190

2.0

117

190

2.0

11

lnstallatlon

3.2 Mounting

4255

solid state contactors can

be

mounted on:

- a bulkhead with the

fixing plate

provided

-

DIN rails

using

mounting

plate

and clips tr

.9

g

(u

Stack outllne

\

t--

75

I

t-

97

!

T

I

I

a

6,5 mm

-1

1

62

12 lz

I

r____L___J_-___

krl

ttu

for nominal currents 15 and 25 A lor nominal currents from tlO to 125 A

1tl3

Flgure 3.3 Mountlng plate

To

mount

severalunits

on the same

veilical,

a minimum gap

ol lOcms

is recommended between units.

EUROTHERM

I

I

I

!

I

l

l

I

I

lnstallatlon

For

bulkhead

mounting,

two holes

must be ddlled

for solid

state

contactors ol

15

to 60A nominalcunent,

and

three holes lor solid

state

contactors

of 75

to

125A

nominalcunent.

The drilling template for

the

bulkhead

fixing

holes is

shown

in

fig.

3.4.

t

I

12 mmt0,5

1

85 mmt10

--6

gomm

+-

-l

-l

Nominalcurrent

15 to

60A

f I l*

so mm

-q:

,l

Nominalcurrent 75 to 125A

Flgure

3.4

Drllllng template for bulkhead flxlng

Cllps

are used

lor

DIN rail mounting.

The

rails may

be

symmetric

or

asymmetdc.

tr

.9

g

(!

art

c

t

I

I

I

I

484

465

)-----<

>-(

r----{

)-.-( f-----(

20 101 101 20 101

>-(

20 101

It

N a,

Flgure 3.5 DIN rall- llxlng holes

The

rail is

supplied

pre-drilled, with

fixing

holes of

6.5mm diameter,

in a length suitable

foi mounting

in

a 19"

rack

EUROTHERM

13

tr

.9

g

G

ID

E lnstallatlon

3.2.1

15

to 60A models

The

units

are

mounted by means of a base

plate

(see

fig.3.3).

Fixing

clips are

used

when

mounting on a

symmetricalor asymmetrical

DIN

rail (bt.ral!

adaptor).

Each

unit is

delivered

with screws and a set of two

lixing

clips as standard

(rel. EUROTHEBM

BD173730).

o@o

425S

o

o

DIN rail

Fixing clips

:€ s-

\loI

&

Cllp-on

flxlng

Mounting plate

o o

D

I

M6

screws

I l

I

1

I

I

I

I

I

I

) t

I l i i

14

Flgure

3.6

4255 Flxlng (nomtnat current

15

to 604)

EUROTHERM

lnstallatlon

3.2.275 to 125A models

Each unit is mounted on

two DIN ralls

by means

of

a base

plate

and

three fixing clips (ref.

EUROTHERM

8D173730).

@ @ @

@

a

-

@

425S

o

@

12 mmt{1.5

-+Jt#

-----oo

85 mm

t10

I

I

I

N

I

I

I

E.

DIN rail

$

Clipon

lixing

cl tPs

Mounting plate

[\

M6

screw

'qh,

Flgure

3.7

4255 Flxlng (nomlnal current

75

to

125A)

EUROTHERM 15 o

s

(E o

c

c

.9

g

(E o

s

lnstallatlon

3.3 Wiring

3.3.1 Termlnal ldentlllcatlon

In

the lollowing

four

figures,

identification of

terminals

on

4255

solid state

contactors

is

shown

according to the

type

of

control

signal (DC or AC) and according to

the

value

of

nominal stack current.

L1 Earth Load

EUROTHERM

D6latn

Fail

S€UiI

Adlust

@ f;r

ao

l6

to

b

LINE

LIGNE

@

-L

b

LOAD

CHARGE

Prcsence ol control slgnal

@@

@@@

16 used

lft5,Tilllrn*"',

aecordlng lo

Used

system) l','"'I

lilit"r

\,-, wlth PLF or IPF opdons

Flgure

(15

3.8

ldentlflcatlon of 4255 termlnals to,60A nomlna! current) Control

signal

-

DC

Common

Pluggable connector

EUROTHERM

i l l

lnstallatlon

EUROTHERM

D6laul o

Fall

Seull

f,r

ls

Eo Adlust

@

L1

Earth

Load

LINE b

@

LIGNE b

J-

LOAD

CHARGE

Presence o, control signal tr

.9

g

(E o

.s

@@

@@@

Not used

PLF supply

( Neutral or according

Phase L2 to system)

Alarm relay contact t--,

Used

witi

PLF and IPF options

Flgure

3.9

ldentlflcatlon ot 4255 termlnals

(15

to 60A nomlnal

current)

Control

signal -

AC

EUROTHERM

Common

Pluggable connector

17

lnstallatlon c

.9

s

(!

o

E

E

Datart

Fall

Sru[

Adl.rst

@ r

t

h

c

L o a d

LINE t]GNE

J-

LOAD

CHARGE

Prcssnca of control slgnal

18

@

@@

@ l,lot used

PLF supply

(N6ulral or Phasc L2 acoodlng to sysle.n)

Alarm relay conlac{

Usod

\,-, wlth PLF or IPF optlone

Common

Fan supply

(ror 100 or

125

A curents) Pluggable

connector

Flgure

(75

3.l0ldentlllcatlon of 4253 termlnals

to

125A nomlnal current) Controlsignal-

DC

EUROTHERM

lnstallailon

EU

D6faut

Fall

Scull

AdJusl

c

h a l

L o a d

LINE

LIGNE

J-

LoAD

= CHARGE

Proscnco oil control slgnal

P.LF.

INPUT

ENTREE

.f

e

.\

@

@@

@

Not uscd

PLF supply

(Ncubal or Phasc L2 rccordlng to systcm)

Alarm rolay clntscl

Uscd

\..J

wlth PLF and IPF opdons

Common

Fan supply

(fot

100 currcnts) and 125 A

Pluggable connector

Flgure 3.11ldentlllcatlon ot 4255 termlnats

(75

to 125A nomlnal current) Control signal- AC

EUROTHERM

19

c

.9

-g

G o

=c

Installatlon

3.3.2

Slngle phase load

L1

N rF

Cul-out devlcc for protoctlon of lnstallatlon

Ertomal fusc

(lor thyrlstor prot6ctlon)

Slngle phaso load

.9

g

L o o

Fusc

0.s A

@

LOAD

425S

P.LF.

INPUT

O

EiITREE

\

s

o@@@@@o@@

* *

*

R

**

R6lay contact (wlth optlon)

Open ln alarm state (PLF)

Closed ln alarm ststc (lPR

Control

-_I contact

(electromecanlcal, or optotrlac) trlac

20

Flgure 3.12 Example ol4255 wlrlng

15

to 60A nominalcurrent

lnput signal

AC lfi!/2tl{lVac

22O124OV system

* r*

Only lor PLF or

IPF

optlon

The

impedance of

the

control

contact

protection

circuit

must be

>20kohms tor

24Y input,

>36kohms for 48V

input or

>600kohms for 1fi1/240V

input

EUROTHERM

!i

I

!nstallatlon

L1

Culoul devicc

N

Fusr 0.5 A

Exlrmal luro

(rorthydltor protrctlon)

Singla,phesc load

425S

P.LF.

o

LIt{E

@o

toro

CXARGE

INPI'T

O

E}ITREE t

ooooooooo

* t

o

Belay contacl (wilh option)

Opcn in alarm stalc (PLF)

Clossd in alarm stalc (lPF)

+

H4 H2 L N

TEMPERATURE

CONTROLLER

902

Logic oulput

+

A2 A3 tr o s

(E o

E

Flgure 3.13 Example

15

to 60A ol4255 wtrtng

nominalcurrent gB0/415V

system

Controlled

by

EUROTHERM 902

controller. lOVdc

input

Cutout devlcelsolalor, lnterruptor, breaker, contaclol etc.

t

Only lor PLF or

IPF

opilon

EUROTHERM

21

tnstallatlon

L1

Hl

o-

L

_l

Cul.oul devlce.

Ertemrl

(lor

fur

lhydstol prolecllon)

Fu3e 0.5A

Slngle-phase

!oad

o

(U

L a!

o

EUROTHERiI

o

UilE

LlonE

:!. r.oeo

-

cltAmE

P.L.F

o

h{PUT

ENTREE a

@@@@@@@@@@

* **

+

H.

L N

TEMPERATURE

CONTROLTER

9(n

Loglc output x2 A3

+

22

Flgure 3.14 Exampte

75

to 125A

nominal

ol4255 wtrtng

current

2ZO124{0V system

controlled by EURoTHERM

902

controlter. 1Ovdc

input

Force ventilated,lan

suppty

220V

(without

lan

cooling

for 75A

nominal

curent)

Only for

PLF

or

IPF

optlon

EUROTHERM

,

I

I

;

lnstallatlon

3.3.3 Three phase !oad'

Three phase

load

YorA

L1

L2r

Cut out device r-s

I

J

Erlemal luso

o

tlltE o

-t-

42sS

P.LF.

INPUT

O

ENTREE

.f

oo@@@o@@oo

*

Fuar

0.5 A

Extomal ,uso

@

LI}IE

425S

P.LF.

INPUT

O

ENIREE

.f

o@@

@

@

o

@

@

@

*

Frr

0.5 A

Control signal

E

h

E

E

F19.3.15

Example ol wlrlng oltwo

42SS

sottd state contactors conroillng

a

lhree phase load

24Vdc

input

Onty lor PLF or

IPF

optton

EUROTHERM

23

lnstallatlon

E

E

E

E

24

3.4

Setting

up partial load

failure detection

The "Partla! Load Fallure" (PLF)

alarm

detects an

increase in load impedance.

The

parlialload failure

circuit enables

the deteclion ol a20% decrease

in load

current,

corresponding

to a25% lncrease in

load

reslstance.

The principle

of

PLF is based on

the comparison of

instantaneous

voltage

and

current

at

the

load terminals

to detect

an

increase

in load impedance.

Discrimination:

better lhan25/o

in

variation ol load

resistance.

PLF output alarm: by

relay contact.

The relay

is not

energised

in the alarm state, or

when

the unit is

not

powered.

PLF

optlon.

The

contacl

is

closed

in

the

normal state

-

when

the

unit is energised and not in

the

alarm

state.

IPF

optlon.

The

contact

is

open

in

the

normal

state

i.e.

not

in alarm.

Relay contact ratlng:

0.25A (250Vac or

30Vdc).

lsolation: 250vac.

Settlng.

ln

orderto

carry

out

PLF adjustment,

the cunent

must be greater

than 15%

(but not less

than

2A) of

the nominal

unit current.

As a

general

rule, since

the

load

current is

less

than the nominalthyristor

current, the

following

setting must be

carried out:

-

Check that the thyristors are

conducting

-

Turn

the

PLF potentiometer (identified on

front as

cSEUIL),

(ADJUST))fully

anticlockwise. Note that

the cDEFAUTu

(FAIL) indicator is

not

illuminated.

-

Turn

the

potentiometer clockwise until

just extinguished. The

PLF detec{ion

control the indicator

is lit

-

Slowly back

ofl the potentiometer (anticlocJrwise) until the indicator is is

now

set to give maximum sensitivity.

Resettlng the alarm

is

peilormed

either

by removing powerfrom the

unit

or

by

a

return

to the

previous load

cunent.

EUROTHERM

.!

I

I

4. CONTROL SIGNAL

4.1 DC

signal

4.2 AC

signal

Slgnal

27

28

H

EUROTHERM

25

H

Slgnal

I i

The control

signal

is

ol the loglc type

(Bootean) ("On

/ Ofl').

There are

two

options

which

may be chosen

when ordering

a solid

stale

contactor:

or

DC signal

AC

signal

A lront panel LED

i ndicates

the presence

of

the control

signal.

'1

I

J,

I

I

1

j

1 i

I i

1

:

l

,i i:

I

+

&

I t

'I

{

I

I

-t i'!

a

I

I

i l i

26

EUROTHERM

Slgnal

4.1 DC

signal

The user may

choose

between three different signa!

level

inputs which are available on the

terminalblock.

20

mA culrent

On: l=5to50mA

Ofl:

l< 0.5mA

10 V

voltage

Vottage

drop

(burden) at

20mA

:

<6V

On: U=8to20V

Off

:

U<2V

24 V

voltage

On:

U=16to32V

Off

;

U<2V lmpedance lnput

20mA

10v

24V

Reslstance

0

390

()

1590

()

Nota

Each

input

is

in sedes

with

2 diodes:

Voltage

drop

about

3.5

volts

6

L

.9

U,

I

EUROTHERM 27

Slgnal

.!tr

o

4.2

AC

signa!

The

user

may

choose

between one of

three different

AC signal voltage inputs

which are

available on the

controlterminal block

at the front of

the

unit.

24 V

voltage

On:

U=20to30V

Off:

U<6V tl8

V

voltage l0(, to

24OV

voltage

On:

U=30to55V

Otl:

U

<

12V

On:

U=90 to264V

Otl:

U<50V lmpedance lnput

24V

'EV

100

to 240V lmpedance

(at g'0

Hz) about zl<dt

3K)

9.sko

Nota

Each

input

is

in sedes

with

4 diodes:

Vottage drop

about

6

Volts

1

I

I

I

I i i i

{

28 EUROTHERM

I

5.

FUSES

Fuses

EUROTHERM

29

H

Fuses

H

The

luse

and

luseholder

isolator (according

to

NF

C

15100) are a

separate

commodity and must be ordered

as

such.

They must be speclfled by the lnstaller and supplled

at

the same as the 4255 solld state contactor (dtfferent references).

ilme

A fast-actlng semlconductor protectlon use ln the 4255 solld state contac{or.

luse ls lntented for

Thls luse cannot under any clrcumstance be used

In

place of a llne protectlon fuse.

The guarantee ls lnvalld unless the correc.t fuse ls used: recommended luses are glven ln the lollowlng table.

The

fuseholder

is intended

for

mounting

on

a

symmetrlcal

DIN rail.

For

asymmetrlcal

DIN rails an

adaptor

must be specified

lor

the

fuseholder

(ref. FE

018700), supplied

as standard when the

fuseholder

is ordered.

1

't

I

,l

30 EUROTHERM

---,-jr-F-.:--I q, r

{ o

I m

=

Statlc swltch nomlnal current

15A

25A

40A

60A

754

100

A

125

A

Fuses

20A

324

50A

804

100

A

125

A

160

A

Fuses and luseholders chart wlth tuse

/

luse-holder sub.assembly

Fuse ratlng

EUROTHERM

reference

Fuse reference cH

260024

cH

260034

Fuse-holder cP

018525

cP

018525

cH

330054

CP

171,180

cs

173087U080 cs

173087U100

cs

173246U125

cs

173246U160

cP

173083

cP

173083

cP 173245 cP 173245

Fuse

/

fuse.holder

sub.assembly code

FU1038/16A/00

FUl038 t25At00

FU1,t51

I 40A100

FU2258/60A/00

FU2258t75At00

FU2760

/ 100A/

00

FU276o t

i,ts:At

Oo

.[

Fuses

s

d

H

m

o

N

b a

D o o

:,

TL

Flgure

5.1.

Fuse-holderdlmenslons

Dlmenslons (mm)

Helght wdrh

Depth

a

b c

(H)

(v'I)

(D)

d

FU1038

81

17,5

68

715

38

36,5

Fuseholder

FU1/t51

95

26

86

2

7.5

/t{t

40.5

FU225a FU2760

124

35

90

4

il

42

2N

54

107-

71

75

I

I il

I

{

32

EUROTHERM

t

t i

6.

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATION

Load current

15Ato 125A

Supply voltage

120V to tt80V

+1OVo; -15To of nominal voltage

Frequenry

50 or 60Hz

Type of load

Resistive, with low tomperalure coeflicient

Single phase

Three phase, three wire (controlon two phases) lnput

Firing mode

Option lsolation

Loglc signal

Type of signal (DC or AC) specified when ordering

Signal levelchosen by user:

DC signal:20mA; 10V; 24V

AC signal: 24Y;4€Y;100 to 2tOV

Zero voltage

switching

(synchronised to line)

Detection ol load resistance lncrease ol 157o i.e. detection of lailure of one of

six

parallel heater elemenls

LED indication and openinS (PLR or closing (tPF) of alarm relay

contact

Contact rating: 0.25A (250Vac or 30Vdc)

Control signal isolated from power lo lP20 (lEC 529)

Distances comply with lEC664

Protection RC circuit (snubber) and VDR

External luse (to be ordered separately)

Terminalblocks

Environment

Control: detachable

Wires 0.5 to 2.5 sq mm

Power and earth:

15Ato screw terminals

40A

-

1.5to

10 sq mm cables

60A

- 2.5 to 16 sq mm cables

75A

to 125A - 4 to 35 sq mm llexible cables

2.5

to

50 sq mm rigid cables

Opetating:

0 to +50 degrees C

957o RH non condensing in

veilical

position

Pollution levelS flEC

664)

Non-explosive / f lam mable atmosphere

Stotage:

-10 to +70 degrees C

Forced fan

cooling

From 100A, thermalcutout for safety of operation

Fan consumption 13W (50H2), 10W (60H2)

Eleclronics consumption

2,5W

EUROTHERM 3:l

ll.

EUROTHERM

Eurotherm Companies

Aurt slL

Euotherm Pty Ltd

Unil3

1&18 Bftrgo Road

Homsby New Soulh Wales

2oZ

Telephons: (61) 2 477 7022

Fax:l61l21TlTlS

Au.trL

EuothcmGmbH

Geierocksf

A

11

Io asse 1U

1

Wlenna

'v. '

T€leplDno: (43) 1 787 601 i)

"T€lox:l 13200 El

Fax: (43)

AUT A

I

787605

8.tCrm

Euothcm BV

Hsrontabebaan 7l-75

8-2100 Oourne Anlwsrp€n

Telophono: (32) 3 322 3870

Fax: 33317 EIBNL B

Telex: (32) 3 321 7363

O.tumtk

Euothcm

Fins€nsvoi

Dmrr.rt AIS

,

86

DK-2000 Frederiksberg

Tslophons: (45) 3 l

871 622

Fax: (45) 31 872 124

Fm6

Parc d'Aflaires de Dardilly

6, Chenin de6

Jon6,

BP 55

69572 Dardilly Cedox

Tolephona: (33) 78 66 19

Tolox:38m38 F

/t3

Fax: (33) 78 35 24 90

C€rrlsry

Etrotham Rcglcr GmbH

Ofiostrasse

1

D-65549 Lirburg

Tolophono: (49) ad. Lahn

6431 2980

Tel6x:484791 EUROT D

I

Fax: (49) 64i11 2981 19

Hong Konf

Euothcrm LU

Unil D

1&F G€o Chang Hong Contre

65 Wong Chuk Hang Road

Abddeqr

Tolephone: (852) 873 3826

T€lex: 69257 EIFEL HX

Fax: (854) 870 0148 krbnd

El,olhdmkd..d LH l.D-A. hdustrial Estalo

Naas co

Kldare

Tolephono: (353) 45 79937

Fax: (353) 4s 7s123 ltrly

Euoth.rm S,p.A

Vaa)(xN Maggio

22070cuanzato

(COl

T€l€phono: (39) 31 9751 I

1

:

Fax: (39) 31

97512

T€lsr

38O 893

J.Fr!

EIotlEm

MaruEhirna

(Je.ol

Ltd

Building

28-2 Chuo 1, Chorn€

Nalancku

Tolqo let

T€l€phone: (s1) 33 363 sil24

Fax: (81) 33 36il 832 0

Kom

Errolh-m Kort. Lld

Suite t903, DaeiooBuilding

132-19 ChungdaftDong,

KangnarrFKu

Sooul 13$100

Tslgphono: (821 2 543 8507

Fa(: (82) 2 545 9758 llalhqL.d.

Euotham B.V.

Johan F'Eostraal 1

'

2382 HJ Zoslerlvoudo

Tolephone :

(3ll

71 4l I 841

TEIEX: 39073 EIBNL NL

Fax: (31) 71 414 526 lloruey

El,othcnnA/S

Pct

Boks 199

N-1412 Oslo

Telgphofle:

(44

66 80 3!l 30

Fax: (44 66 80 33 31 spoln

Euothcm Etp..llSA

Callo La Grania 7rl

Pol. lnd. Acobsndas

Maddd

Tslophone: (34) 1 661

Fax: (34!

1 6619093

6ml

SwGdGn

EtrotDam AB

PO Box 24

5.23221 Adol,

Tolsphons: (46) 404 a546O

Fax: (46) 4(x 35520

SulEcrlrld

Elrothcfm ProdrH. (schw.lz) AG

Kanalsta8se 17

CH.8152 Glattbrugg

Tolsphone: (41)

I

810

3erc

Fax: (41) 1 810 894)

Un[6d rcngdom

Errolhcrm contolr Ltd

Faraday Clo6o, Duf ringflon

Wo.thirg

W6st Srrs8ex, BNt3 3PL

Tol€phone: (44) 903 26S500

Tolox:87114 EUROWG G

Fax: (44) 903 265982

U.S.^"

ElrolrrIm Contsda lnc

1

1485 Suns€l HiXs Road

Bgston Vkghia 22090-5286

Tolsphono: (1) 703 471 4870

Fax: (1) 703 787 3435 stle'.t d

*rr[e, ln oyct 30 cotlttllo.

For couilri€s nd lblod abovo al

6 chomh dss Joncs, BP 55,

6952 oadily,

Franca / Telophono (33) 78 66 omuirieyordsE to :

Eurolherm aulomalion SA,

'1949/Fax(33)78352490

:

@Copyright EurohermAutomation 1992

All righs strictly rcscrvcd No part of this documcnt may bc storcd in a raricval systcm, or any form or by any mcans without prior wrincn pcrmission from Eumthcrm Automation SA

4255 User's'lranual Printed in France 03/94

,Made in

\:all,'

France t; i.. ;

HA17s817 lss

^-..t

.

-

4

I i

ON/OFF CONTROLLER

(PROCESS

ALARM)

TYPE 106

INSTALLATION AND

OPERATING !NSTRUCTIONS

Part No. H4016860

106W - 5

Ordering lnformation

You are welcome to order by description below which is a uselul check list.

or by code

Process

Code

106

Relay 2tu250V de-energising lor high alarm

Relay 24,/250V de-energising lor low alarm

See inputs and scale ranges

Scale

See in and scale

1

15/230+t -15"/", 50/60H2

1 0O l2N

+l -1

5!o, 50/60H2

028

036

Screw Termanals

Dorvnscale

Upscale t/c break (std. with -036 output) t/c break (std. with -028 output)

Scale stops

Latching alarm and reset push button

Controller version (LED illuminating when relay energised .)

19

25 o9

24

50

49

59

85

{

I

I

-t l

Basic

Product

Scale

Supply

The normal function of a Eurotherm model 106 is to act as

U z

V

I

r

Position of Reset swilch button

106 lnputs and Scale Ranges lnput Types lron

Constantan

J lronconstantan

DIN 4371 0

NiCr-NiAl

K

Copper-Constanlan

T

PttS%Rh/Pt

PNO%Rh/PI

S

Copper-Constanlan

T

R

Nicrosil/Nisil

Pt Resistanco thermomeler

100 ohm at 0 deg C

DC millivolts (no GJC)

Linear

o

01

02

03

04

05

06

19

45

o

6 o

o

N o

017 o17

70

97

98

01 017 o o

I o20 o20 o20

02(

DegrecScales

o28 o2a

a Q a

EEEEEEsEEH o23 o22 o24 o25 026

026

026

121

248 07s

090

T --

-F

-

-

106 lnputs and Scale Ranges lnput Typeg lron

Constantan

J lron-Constantan DIN 4371 0

NiCr-NiAl

Copper-Constantan

Pt13%Rh/Pt

Pt10%Rh/Pt

Copper-Constantan

Nicrosil/Nisil

Pt Resistance

100 ohm at 0C

DC millivolts (no CJC)

Linear lr o

6

{

o

o1

02

03

04

05

06

1S

45

11(

70

97

98

.tlllt!

H

@

6666

't19

Dcgrec Scales

R

119

124

EE

25

126 138

138 uE

EEREqSEEE

!8#$?e[:3

48€ 244

136

136

298

732 492

285 110

lnstallation

The instrument plugs into a panel mounting sleeve which requires a

DIN size 92x45mm cut-out.

Remove the instrument lrom the sleeve by opening the dmr and pulling on tre door handle.

As sleeve insertion and retention is done from the front of fre panel, rear access is not required. All wiring to the slo€ve could therefore be carried out beforehand.

I

I

a

Version

Version

Remove each to litt spring-loaded clamp by placing a screwdriver blade

(ideally between prongs inside

4mm and 6mm wide) under one or both ot he sleeve.

Push he front tilards the rear until it is possible he clamp inwards.

Gently release the pressure on the spring.

Fully insert the sleeve into the cut-out with the open section to the right.

Replace the lwo damps by locating the rear of each in he slot as shown in the diagram. As before, with a screwdriver blade push ttre front of the clamp tolards the rear until tre cenre prong clears the front edge of the slot.

The damp may be released inlo place, ensuring that the prongs on he inner surface of he sleeve are flush with tre surface.

I

Plug the instrument into the sleeve by ihserting wih he door open and pushing fully home. The acl of shuning the door locks the instrument in place.

For screw clamp version access is required from the rear of he panel. lnserl sleeve into panel aperture, then snapfitclip into sleeve as shown in diagram. The mounting screw can then be adjusted to damp to the back of he panel.

Note:

Allatt adequate lree air ciratlation spae above and belur the insnnnent lor sudl that the local ah temperature bes not ex@ed Therelore do not mwnt instuments dosely above in anlined spaes.

Connections and Wiring

Electrical connections are made via 2.5mm screw clamps or 1/4" double faston terminals recessed in the rear of the sleeve. For instruments fitted with screrv clamps, belore inserting the tsrminal blocl< ensure he wires in he screws are undone sufficienily to allol the wire to be positioned correctly. A 0.5sq.mm (or equivalent) wire size is adequate for low-current connections (up to 2A)

A label adjacent to the terminals identifles input, output and supply cxrnnections. The terminals are numbered

1 to

13, startjng from the top.

-F

2N

(Mo)

2ll5v

1230v

Supply

The instrument supply is connected between neutral

(N(Mp)) and the relevant live termrnal, as delailed by the instrument to terminal 1.

label. The ground connection is made

3100V

4200V

):

RiT

lnputs

Thermocouple

Thermocouple conneclions are made to fte terminals

11 and 12 as shown. Compensating cable of the coroct type must be used boniro€n and he thermocouple he instrument and must bo connected in fie consct polarity. To drec* compensatng cable polarity, twist junaion. disconnect he cable from he fiermocouple, fie bare ends togeher and apply heat

Wih he instrument sepoint at b about he embient, he enor-indicating LED's should shor an increase in tempora0re. The total length of thermo couple and compensating cable used is not critical but fie loop resisance should not excs€d 1000.

Thermocouple break prctection is standard as upscale for a {28 ouPut and downscale for a -036 output.

Reslstance Thermometer

(100 Ohm)

Platinum resislance hermometer (BT) connections are made to terminals

1 1 , 12 and 'l 3 as shown. Generally, a 3-wire heavy head numbered duty RT has as in he terminal block on irs he diagram whilst a standard type has two blue leads (equivalent to

1 and 3) and one red lead

.

lt a

2qie

RT is u sed , oonnect to the instrument as terminals

1

1 and 12 and link terminals

11 and 13. Copper wire should be used throughout.

RT break protection is available as upscale only, on only 2 oul ol 3 wires; a 2-wire RT is fully protected for upscale break protection.

Dorvnscale break protection is not possible.

Note: ln 2-wire RT's, every 1O of cable loop resistance gives an eror of about 2.6"C.

1+

2-

MV

IJ it

Mllllvolt !nput

The positve and negative wires of a millivolt input are oonnectd to the instrument as shown, using copper wtre.

Output

Either of two types of output are available, each having h€ relay contacts brought out on terminals 5

(common), 6(n/o) and 7

(n/c). The relay is rated at 2A,

250V a.c. wih the rvo contaci being suppressed wih a

0.0221rF capacitor and a 1oon rosistor. The alarm state LEO is otf when he relay is energised (unless option -85 is called for).

Type -028 output

The relay gives protection against over temp€raturo conditions in which the relay d+energises in alarm

(aborre setpoint) and an open circuit lhermocouple or

RT gives upscale break prot€ction. This is he type normally used when the inswment is to lunction as a controller-

Type - 036 output

The relay giv€s protectjon against under temperature conditions in which the relay de-energises in alarm

(below gives setpoint) and an open circuit hsrmocouple downscale break protection.

Options

Scale Stops: (Option -49) lnstruments ordered wifr scale stops are delivered with one stop, set at zoro and tho oher stop at span.

To set a stop so that it is not possible to rotats the scale drum abore a certain temperature, turn screwdriver he setpoint to span, insert a narrow ino the lower of the two cut-outs located in

tp

meai cover (as shown in the diagram below) and lever fie plastic moulding away from setpoint to lhe scale drum. Holding the stop thus, tum the he required maximum temperatJre and release he sbp ensuring it is lully engaged in the drum.

A similar procedure is followed if a minimum temperature limit is required; rotate the drum to zero, disengage he stop in he upper cut-out, turn the setpoint to he reguired minimum tempeEture and rolease the stop.

Care must be taken not to exert too much leverage on each scale stop with the scrervdriver.

il

Scale Stop Adjustment

Latchlng Alarm and Reset Push Button:

(Option - 59)

For fleeting alarms, rhis option is available. Upon an alarm oco:ning, the relay de-energises. Upon the alarm situation clearing, the relay remains in the de-energised state and is reset by pushing the button located behind the lront door; the relay then becomes energised through its own latch-in contact.

Alarm State LED on when Relay Energised:

(Option - 85)

This LED is recommended wh€n the instrument is used as a controller rather than a process alarm.

ADJUSTABLE CONTROLS

Temperature Setting

Set the required alarm temperature (say) by rotating the setpoint drum behind the instrumentdoor. ln the caseof the alarm point being considerably higher than the load lemperature, upon connecling the supply the lowest errorindicating LED will light showing small that the temperature is more than 3% of span dornscale; a arrow masking the LED indicates this. The relay will be either energised (output -028) or de-energised (output -036); the alarm state LED will be off or on respectively.

As the temp€rature approaches indication LED will light showing the alarm point, the next error hat the temporature is between

1olo and 3% belorv the alarm point.

Wh€n the temperalure finally reaches the alarm point +/-1%, the centre LED will be illuminated.

Should he temp€rature go above the alarm point, one of the two upper error indicating LED's will be illuminated to indicate errors of

1% to 3% or greater fran 3% above lhe alarm point, he upper LED also being masked by a small arrow as before.

Upon he temporaure passing through lhe alarm setpoint, and alarm state LED will change to thsir oPposite state' the relay

Deadband Adlustment

A deadband potenliometer is locatod on he top edge of he instrument case, and is accessed by unplugging lhe insmtment.

The range ol contol is variable between 0.210 and 27o of span, the de.energise (alarm) point being unaflected with deadband variation.

Wh€n the instrument is used as a controller and option -85 is called lor, he acton ot the alarm state LED is inverted (i.e. on when he relay is energised.)

Controller Type 106 Fault Finding

Guide

Condition

All LED's extinguished

Fault Action a. Break in supply connections.

b. LED board failure (will not interfere with control)

a.

Repair supply mnnections.

b.

Replbce LED board - see maintenance manual or contact Eurotherm.

c. Transformer failure. To check monitor voltage on alternative supply terminal.

Absence of voltage indictes transformer failure

c.

Check cause of failure if possible,

& replace transformer - see maintenance manual or.

contact Eurotherm.

d. Failure of IC2.

d.

Beplace lC2.

Note:

ll

a lault is sus@ted in he thermoauple ot thenro@upte interannectbns, this can be anlirmed as loilowsi Dism,tnect the ampensating cable hom the instrument iltermoouple teminals and onnect a millivolt

sure

to these terminals. Ched< hat he insnument LED indicator moves up and signals

&wn the scale as mittivott arrespnding to temperawres above and below the setpoint arc injected. ll the LED indiator lails to rcspond in lhis manner, an intemal lault exists in the instrument.

\

I

Typlca

Wiring Schematic

1Oo Alarm Unit

({28 or

-036 ouPutt)

Lil

H.d.

-fl

E

E

106 fPIl t

-'t'' f[Tl

2 N

(rS) l-?I-l 3 1E

@1 tztw

@sa

@r-.)

W\1t-

l7l1a w\1 e

@1to

[7I] rr1+

@rrt-

[6]

|3

Cqbr.B'

(br

Am Srtbnt lEta6 a Arnuc&l

106 wired as Controller

Lod or

CcLd Fu$

F6e

106

lal )'

[6]

tto,tt

fdt

tw

l6tsY

LlOl rsl

@-)

@l-

@

@

Cori.ff

BL!

8T S€ffi

Ldd lltA

Rae

N L(zov)

Standard Precautions

to

be taken when using

Temperature Controllers

When designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any individual part of the system malfunctions ln a temperature control application, for example, the danger is that for some reason the heating system remains permanently switched on.

lf leaving the heater on all the time can cause damage either the plant itself or its contents, then an independent protection device must be provided.

to

The best form of protection is a completely independent

'policeman'. This own thermocouple is a separate over{emperature alarm with its or sensor and, on alarm will pull out the main contactor or shut off the valve to ensure the plant,s safety e.g

i

Thyristor i unit i il litted

-a

lsolator tlql

Controll€r

PoIceman

Furnace

A suitable policeman is the Eurotherm 106 over-temperature alarm.

Note that an alarm relay in the controller is not sufficient protection for all eventualities

Eurotherm Companies

UK Regional Sales and Service

Southem

Home

A16

Counti6, South and Soulh Easl

Eurolhsrm Ltd

Faraday Close, Durrington

Worthing

W6l

Sussex BN13 3PL

Tslephono (0903) 693379

T6lex 871'14 EUROWG G

Fa

09 03 65 982

Midland8 Arei

Midlands, Soulh Waler, EBst Anglia and South WeBl

Eurotherm Ltd

Miller House

Corporation Street

Rugby WaMickshir€ CV21 2DW

Telephono (0788) 56201'l

Telex 3'1'l 874

Fa

07 88 53 62 49

Noilhem Arca

Norlhem Countieq Nolth Wales

!nd Scotlsnd

Eurolherm Ltd

4/5 Chelham Coun

Calvar Road Warrington

Ch€shirs WA2 8RF

Telephon€ (09251 5721

1 1

Telex 629852

Fil

09 25 41 30 99

Sales and Service in over 30 countrier.

For counlries not lisled abovs all enquirievordsrs to:

Eurolherm Exportc: Telsphone Worlhing (0903) 68500

Telex 871 14 EUROWG G

Fa

09 03 65 98 2.

Printed in England 0891

E UROTH E RAA

*:r l-ttr: l*

ti*

r,,

per*ti*n

e r:r,.l$ig r.rr <*?ii.;.,

<*tll-;"lZi

This apparatus has been designed and tested in accordance with applicable safety standards, and is supplied in a safe condition. The basic instruction manual (as supplemented by any associated auxiliary manuals) contains some inlormation and warnings which have to be lollowed by the user to ensure safe operation and to retain the apparatus in safe condition.

WARNING

!

FOR THIS APPARATUS, THE POWER SUPPLY LINE SHALL

CONTAIN A SWITCH OR OTHER ADEQUATE MEANS FOB DIS.

CONNECTION FROM THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE.

BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE APPARATUS, ENSUHE THAT

THE CONNECTED POWER SUPPLY IS OF A VOLTAGE COM-

PATIBLE

THAT

WITH THE APPARATUS AND IS FUSED. MAKE SURE

ONLY FUSES WTH THE REOUIRED RATED CURRENT

AND OFTHE SPECIFIED TYPEARE USED FOR REPI-ACEMENT.

THE USE OF MAKESHIFT FUSES AND SHORT.CIRCUITING OF

FUSE HOLDERS IS PROHIBITED.

WHEN THE APPARATUS IS CONNECTED TO ITS SUPPLY,

TERMINALS MAY BE LIVE, AND THE OPENING OF COVERS OR

INTERNAL ASSEMBLIES IS LIKELY TO EXPOSE LIVE PARTS.

THE APPARATUS SHALL BE DISCONNECTED FROM ALL VOLT.

AGE SOURCES BEFORE IT IS OPENED FOR ANY ADJUST.

MENT, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR. ,

ANY ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF THE

OPEN ED APPARATUS UNDER VOLTAG E SHOULD BE AVOIDED

AS FAR AS POSSIBLE AND, IF INEVITABLE, SHALL BE CARRIED

OUT ONLY BY A SKILLED PERSON WHO IS AWARE OF THE

HAZARD INVOLVED.

Process

Monitor/lndicator

Table of Contents

1.0

lntroduction

.

2.0 Specifications. . : : : : . . : : : : . . :

:

2.1

ProductDescription

2.2

TechnicalSpecifications

3.0

lnstallation

3.1

Receiving and Unpacking

3.2

Chassis Removal

3.3

Mounting

4.0

Connections and lnitial Setup

4.1

Thermocouple lnputs

.

4.2

Millivolt, mA (w/shunt) and Vdc lnputs

.

4.3

Current lnputs - lnternal Power Supply

4.4

Current lnputs - External Power Supply

4.5

RTD lnputs

4.6

Strain Gauge lnputs

5.0

Configuration

5.1

Display and Keypad

5.2

Entry of Numbers

5.3

The Main Conliguration Menu

5.4

The lnput Configuration Menu

5.5

The lnstrument Configuration Menu

.

5.6

The Alarm Configuration Menu

5.7

The Retransmission Configuration Menu

6.0

Operation

6.1

Electrical lnput Value

6.2

The Operator Menu

.

6.3

Remote Conlact lnputs

.

7.0

Maintenance

7.1

Skain Gauge Jumper

7.2

Warranty

7.3

The Calibration Menu

7.4

Feature Addition

1

4

4

4

9

10

I

7

I

8

6

7

6

6

4

5

11

14

16

18

19

19

19

21

22

22

22

24

26

1

1

1

1.0

INTRODUCTION

This manual is intended to familiarize the user with the basic installation, configuration, operation and routine maintenance of the Process Monitor/ lndicator. Serial communications is covered in a separate manual.

This manual is organized into seven seclions:

Section 1 - describes the manual and its organization.

Section 2 - contains the instrument description & technical specifications.

Section 3 - describes the unpacking and mounting.

Section 4 - covers user connections and initial setup choices.

Section 5 - details

Section 6 - gives the configuration steps.

inlormation on the operating controls and procedures,

Section 7 - shows the location of certain internal components.

2.O

SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 Process Monitor/lndicator Description

The Process Monitor/lndicator is a general purpose inslrument thal accepts mV, dc Volts, Thermocouple, RTD or Strain Gauge (with integral 5Vsupply) inputs. The visual display on the lront panel presents to the operator a maximum of 6 LED characters (5 active digits). Two separate LED indicators signal the status of the two alarms.

The instrument is 1/8 DIN size, and designed for either panel or bench-top mounting. Hardware for panel mounting is furnished as standard.

Separately specified options include: alarm relays, isolated signal retransmission, transmitter power supply, serial communications, mounting panel gasket and rear terminal covers.

The operator and configuration controls are mounted on the front of the instrument and consist of a four button membrane keypad. The user can configure all necessary functions using the display and these four keys.

2.2 TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

lnputs

Type:

Thermocouple, "F, 'C, 'K (without units letter)

RTD

DC

DC

Millivolts: basic ranges: +40, +160 & +640 mV

Volts: basic ranges: r'1.25 & -2.0 to 5.00 V

Volts >5 using 1 Megohm, 100:1 Divider

Strain Gauge: 300 O, 5 Volt supply

Linearizations: TC: B, C, D, E, G2, J, K (CA), L, Ni/Ni-Mo, PL2, R, S & T

RTD:

Pt1 00A(0.00392), Pt

1

000(0.0038s),

Ni120, Pr500, Pt1000

Linear

Square Root

1

1 point, 10 line segment Custom Curve lssue 1, May

1

993 1

TC

RTD

Linearizalion Low'C Hioh'C

Low'F

B

c

D

300

0

0

-250

1820

2315

2495

1

000

E

G2

J

CA

L

Ni-NiMo

PL2

R

S

T

RlOOA

RlOOD

Ni120

Pts00

R1000

100

-200

-250

-100

-20

-270

-50

-50

-260

-180

-220

-70

-220

-220

231 5

1200

1

370

900

1

300

1

395

1

765

1

765

400

800

850

542

32

32

-418

212

-382

-418

-148

-4

-454

-58

-58

-436

-292

-364

-94

-364

-364

Hioh'F

3308

41 69

4493

1

832

41 99

2'192

2498

1652

2372

2543

3209

3209

752

1472

1 s62

608

1

562

1562

2

Performance

Resolulion:

Accuracy:

Conformity:

Zero Stability:

Cold Junction:

Span Stability:

0.01% of basic range in use / 0.1 "F or "C

0.1 %of basic range in use

< 0.2

< 0.5

"c pVfC from 25 "C

+ 1.5 'C from 25

50 ppm/'C

'C

Operation

lnput lnput lnput

Filter:

0 to 20 seconds

Offset:

-99.99 to 99999 - configurable in Eng. Units lmpedance:

5 Mc2

Rejection:

12O db min. 250 Vac max.

Common Mode

Normal Mode

Rejection:

55 db at 50 or 60 Hz, 50 mV max.

Maximum lnput

Voltage:

24 Vdc without damage

Sample/Update

Rate:

S/sec.

Environmental

Relerence Temperature:

Operating Temperature:

Storage Temperature:

Relative Humidity:

Rating:

25 "c

2to55"C

-40 to 80 "C

5 to 90%, non condensing

NEMAl-GeneralPurpose

Power

Transmitter Supply:

Strain Gauge Supply:

Supply Voltage:

24 Vdc at 35 mA max.

5 Vdc into 300 Q minimum

85 to 264 Vac.

lssue l,

May 1993

Supply Frequency:

Supply Power:

45 to 65 Hz.

15 VA

Relays

Two SPDT, 2 A@ 24O

Vac/500 VA or 30 Vdc/60 W.

Physical

Terminals:

Case Material:

Case Size:

Bezel Size

Display Type

Color:

Digits:

Update:

Screw w/clamp washer, two #14 AWG max.

Polycarbonate

92mm

3.62

W),45mm (H) & l26mm D (panel front) in. (W), 1.77 in. (H) & 4.96 in. D

1/8 DIN

96mm (\/),48mm (H) & 14mm (D)

3.78 in.

041,

1.89 in. (H) &

7-segment, .56 in. LED o.ss in. (D)

Green or Red

5 value plus 1 units character

3/sec.

92.0 (+.08,- 0o)mm

+3.63 (+ .03,

-.oo)in. -.....-

PANEL CUTOUT

45.0

(r

.06, -.OO)mm

1.77

(+

02,

-.00)in.

125 mm

'14 mm

0.55 in.

...........

mm n

Mounting

Bracket

48 mm

1.89 in.

lssue 1, May 1993

Figure 2.1, Panel

Mu.

Panel

'13 mm

0.51 in.

and

Mounting

3

4

3.0

INSTALI.AT!ON

3.1

Receiving and Unpacking

The Process Monitor/lndicator is shipped in a special pack, designed to ensure adequate protection during transit. Should the outer box show signs of abnormal wear or damage, it should be opened immediatly and the instrument examined.

ll there is evidence of damage to the instrument, it must not be operated.

The local sales representative should be contacted for instructions.

After removing the instrument trom its packing, the packing should be examined belore being discarded documentation have been removed,

to

ensure that all accessories and

3.2

Chassis Removal

lf it is desired to remove the instrument chassis from its case before the case is mounted; grasp the serrated portions on each side of the front bezel, squeeze in and pull the chassis from the case.

CAUTION

Do not touch the exposed circuit cards unless precautions are taken to prevent damage by Eletrostatic Discharge (ESD). See Section 7,

Maintenance.

3.3

Mounting

a) Prepare the panel culout as shown in Figure 2.1.

b) lf used, install the panel gasket around the cutout on the outside of the panel.

c)

Slide the instrument into the cutout from the front of the panel.

d) Position the mounting bracket on the rear of the case with the two clips at the rear of the bracket.

e) Slide the mounting bracket toward the panel untilthe two clips engage the serrations on the case sides.

f)

Hold the case firmly to the panel and press the mounting bracket up against the rear of the panel, Press on the upper right and lower left corners of the bracket to tighten it against the panel. Final tightening by pressing with a screwdriver is helplul.

To remove a mounting bracket, pry the side outward at the clip until it slips out of the serrations.

lssue l,

May 1993

4.0 Connections

and Initial Setup

o o o o o S S S S S

109 I S ?

6 5 A

3 2

1

22

S

21

20 19 18 17

16

S S S S S

15 14 13 12

11

o

o o o o

Figure 4.1, Terminal

Board

1

2

3

4

5

I

7

6

9

10

11

12

13

't4

15

16

't7

18

19

20

21

22

All connections to the instrument are made to the rear terminal board

The printed terminal numbers on lhe instrument are turned 90" from those shown above.

Termlnal

Number

Conneclion

Retransmit + or RS422 Rx +

Retransmit - or RS422 Rx -

RS424485 Common

RS 422 Tx + or RS485 TxRx +

RS 422 Tx - or RS 485 TxRx -

Strain Gauge +svdc Power

Circuit, 5 & 24 V Common, also RTD "C" Lead

----

Strain Gauge lnternal Cal Besistor ln put

Signal lnput - and RTD Negative "B"

Signal lnput

+ and RTD Positive "A"

Transmitter Power

+

24 Vdc

Transmitter Powet 24 Vdc Common

Alarm No. 2, Normally Closed (NC)

Alarm No.2, Common (C)

Alarm No. 2, Normally Open (NO)

Contact/Digital lnput

Lead

Lead lin k

ContacVDigital Return

Alarm No. 1, Normally Closed (NC)

Alarm No. 1, Common (C)

Alarm No. 1, Normally Open (NO)

AC Power, Une

AC Power, Neutral

5 lssue 1, May 1993

4.

1

Thermocouple lnputs

Thermocouple inputs are connected directly to terminals 9 (negative) and

10 (posilive). Terminals 7 and g are nol jumpered together.

4.2

Millivolt, mA (Wshunt) and Vdc lnputs

To measure dc inputs up to svdc, the small "pencil point" slide switch on the rear terminal board must be in the 'TC OFF' position and terminals 7 and 9 must be terminals lumpered together. DC sources are connected directly to

9

(negative) and 10 (positive). For current inputs, the shunt resistor (usually 250 (2, directly across converting 4 to 20 mA into

1 to 5 Vdc) is connected terminals g and 10 along with the input current leads.

Voltages greater than 5 Vdc are connected to a 1 Meg Ohm, 100:1 voltage divider which results in 0.050 to 1.000 Vdc atthe input terminals. See Figure

4.2.

> svdc

6

'to

o

4-20 mA TC

,,e.

.11

el

o o

V, mV

.11

250

V, mV & mA Only o

Figure 4.2,

Direct

Volt

Divided DC lnputs

4.3

Current lnput Using lnternal Power Supply

Wth the standard internal 24 Vdc power supply, a Z-wie transmitter can be connected directlyto the indicator. An input shunt on the terminal board is used to convert process current (normally 4 to 20 mA) into a I to 5 Vdc input signal.

CAUTION

Shorting the transmitter leads places the power supply across the input and may damage the input shunt resistor.

The lnput and Common Negative (terminals 9 & 7) are connected with a terminal board jumper,

The transmitter posltive is connected to the Supply positive

(1 1) and the transmitter negative is connected to the positive lnput terminal (10). The shunl is mounted across lnput terminals 9 and 10.

lssue l, May 1993

250

4-20 mA

Transmitter

V

o

@

in-te ral

linl @

o

12

o

'I

1

Figure

4.3,lnternal Power

Supply

and

Transmitter

4.4

Current lnput Using External Power Supply

Connect the transmitter/power supply negative to the negative input terminal (9). Connecl the transmitter outpul to the positive input terminal (10).

The shunt is mounted across terminals 9 and 10.

4.5 RTD

lnputs

Connection terminals of 3-wire Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD's) is to

7,9 and 10. Terminals 9 and 10 each provide identical 200/A excitation currents to terminal 7. Wth the required equal resistance leads from lhe RTD to terminals 9 and 10, the small voltages caused by lead resistance are equal and opposite; thus cancelling out lead resistance eflects rrom the lnput reading.

Connection of 2-wire RTD's by jumpering terminals 7 and 9 is not recommended because there can be no compensation for the effects of any lead resistance. 4-wire RTD's are connected as il they were 3-wire devices.

lssue 1, May 1993

10

o

a

)

)

@

7

a o

Figure 4.4,

BTD

lnputs

7

4.6

Strain Gauge lnputs

As ordered, the indicator is configured for use with TC, mV, V or RTD inputs.

For use with Strain Gauges, an initial set-up step is required. Jumper

JP1 on lhe center edge of the input card must be moved to the back (nearset the rear of the case) two of the 3 jumper pins. See Section 3.2 lor chassis removal and Section 7.0, Maintenance, for instructions covering tho location ol internal components.

+

@

Com

6 o o

Figure 4.5, Strain

Gauge lnputs

These connections are shown terminals for a full bridge using 5 Vdc excitation

(+6 and -7) and signal terminals (+ 10 and -9). Use with a 1/4 or l12bridge requires the addition of external resistors. Terminal 8 can be used for a calibration resistance. Although shown as a part of the Strain

Gauge bridge, an external calibration resistor can be connected between terminals 7 and 8. A keyboard entered software command makes the connection between terminals 8 and 9 during calibration.

5.0

CONFIGURATION

5.1

The Display and Keypad

Configuration is done with the four front panel keys in response to displayed menus. lnlormation is displayed using the numbers 0 thru 9 and the following characters (note - letters U & V use the same characters):

8

5.1, Display and Keypad lssue l, May t993

The menu display representations in this manual will lollow the above characters as closely as the typographic font used will allow. Both the displayed characters and separate explanatory words will be shown on the menu flow charts.

-J

Press ENTER to start conliguration.

The Up Arrow key is used to page through a menu and to change numbers and selections which are blinking.

Access the Operator Menu with the Side furow key. Also used to reset the Peak values and to move the cursor during numeric entry.

tr

The CLEAR key is used to erase changes not entered and back up to next higher menu level. Repeated use of Clear exits configuration.

NOTE lf no key is pressed for 3 minutes while in the Conliguration or Operator

Menu,lhe indicator will automatically return to the measured value display.

Manual return from any point in any menu is always possible by repeated use of the Clear key,

5.2 Entry of Numbers

Configuration calls for the entry of two types ol numbers: lntegers (without decimal point) and floating point numbers (with a decimal point included).

lnlegers are displayed as 5 digits with all leading zero's shown: 00123.

When the displays lor such entries as Password and Filter Time are accessed, the current value is shown and the first digit on the left end is blinking. lf the number to be entered does not have 5 digits, press the Side

Arrow one time to move the blinking digit one place to the right. When the first digit to be entered is blinking, use the Up Arrow to change that digit as required.

Pressing the Side Arrow again leaves the digit just set and moves the "blink" one digit to the right to set the next digit. lf the digit to be set is passed, continue Side furow pushes until the process starts again at the left end.

When the required number is displayed, press ENTER.

Afier the ENTER key

is

NOTE pressed, the right end characler will then confirm the enlry by flashing the two vertical segmenls ln lhe lower half followed by the lwo vertical segments in the upper half (similar to the slgnal for a "louchdown"). This signal is given upon enlry ol any change to any part of the conliguration.

Floating point numbers display as 5 digits with all leading zero's shown:

001.23. When the displays for entries such as: Offset, Point Palrs, etc. are accessed, the current value is shown and the first digit on the left end is blinking. The first Up Arrow digit choice after the "0" is the "-" negative sign.

Press the Side Arrow one time to move the decimal point one position to the left until the lirst digit to be entered is blinking. The decimal point stops moving after the first digit change is made.

lssue 1, May 1993

9

The largest positive number is 99999. The largest negative number is -9999.

lf the number to be entered is less than 1.0000, continue pressing the Side

Arrow. After the decimal point is between the flrst and second digits, the blinking digit starts lo move to the right. The smallest number that can be entered is: 0.0001.

5.3

The Main Configuration Menu

Access

ENTER to the Configuration Menu requires entry ol a password. Press and then configure the password. The Operator Menu does not require a password and is entered by pressing the Side Arrow key (see

Section 6lor details).

00010

See Section 5.2lor instructions on entry of numbers. The

Password is defined in the lnstrument Menu (see Section

5.5), The password when shipped is "10"

10

MAIN CONFIGURATION MENU

1

23456 tr tr oo

PASS

Password

Up Arow

Between

Choices

Enter to

Selecl n

V

g

Clear to

Back Up

O = Displays

Present only with Option lnPUt lnStru lnstrument

ALl

Alarm # I rEtrAn

SETIAL

CAL

Calibration lssue l, May '1993

lnPUt

Press ENTER with the correct password displayed to access the lnput Menu (see Section 5.4). Line Frequency filtering, Linearization, lnput Source, Filter Time, lnput Otfset, External CJC

Temp., Displayed Units, Decimal Point position and Linearization Point

Pairs are delined in the lnput Menu.

!nStru

The lnstrument Menu contains the definition of the Contact lnput, determination of Alarm & Strain Guage Access, the software Revision Number and the means ror changing the Password

ALX

The AL

1 and AL 2 m€nu's are identical. Both permit the setting of th€ Alarm Type, Alarm Latching choice, Alarm

Setpoint, Deadband Alarm band and Alarm Hysteresis.

rEtrAn

The Retransmission Menu Contigures the Output Type and the High & Low mesaured values defining the analog output.

CAL

The Calibration Menu is used to calibrate the four basic ranges, the Cold Junction Compensation, the RTD excitation current, the Retransmission output and to restore Factory Configuration values entered at manufacture

It ls

CAUT!ON

not necessary to enler the Calibration Menu to set up this instrument lo meaaure an input. Calibration requires connection of specific precision sources. lmproper calibration can affect the ability to make an accurate measurement.

5.4

The

I

ut Menu

LinE

This choice changes the input lilter to reject interference at the ac Line frequency used where the instrument is installed. The choices are 50 Hz and 60 Hz.

LnriSE

The Linearization choice determines whether the measured input value will follow a Thermocouple curve, an

RTD curve, a Square Root curve, the 10-point internal curve or respond linearly to the input signal.

SourCE

The choices o{ Source are defined by the choice of

Linearization already entered

:

Linearization

Source Choice

TC

Type

TC or TC w/ external CJC

RTD

Type

RTD

Square

Rool

Volts, Millivolts or Strain Gauge

Custom Curve TC, TC w/ext CJC, Volts, mV, RTD or Strain Gauge

Linear

TC, TG w/ext CJC, Volts, mV, RTD or Strain Gauge

FiLtEr

The input Filter can be set for any value from 0 to 20 seconds. The filter time affects the input measurement.

A long lilter time can delay the response of the alarms.

11 lssue I, May 1993

INPUT CONFIGURATION MENU

1234s6

E

PASS lnPUt lnoul

UnE

Uofurw

-

I cholc.s '7

Entrr to

Select g

Clou lo

Brck Up

LnrlSE

SourCE

FILtET

UnltS

V

I

Pl PrS

I

point pais

OFFSET

ECJ cJc dEC Pt

OFFSET

The Offset adjustment can be used to change the displayed measured value by a fixed amount. The entry is in the same units as the displayed value. The maximum otfset values are

+ and - 9999.

12 lssue l, May 1993

ECJ External Cold Junction is used when thermocouples are terminated in a remote box and then connected from that box to the indicator using copper wire. The Ext CJ is the temperature in deg C or F (as chosen in Units) at which a TC connection changes from

TC (or extension lead) material to copper.

UnitS

The character at the right end of the display is reserved lor a Units character. The following characters are available: 'C, 'F,

RTD

-

(blank), A, b, d, E, G, H, i, J, L, n, o, P, r, t, U and y. Direct inputs must use 'G or 'F. Direct TC inputs musl have the terminal boards CJC switch in the "ON" position. For'F or'C, the Units must be "F or'C. For'K, choose the blank (- -) and enter "273.18" into the "Offset".

dEC Pt

The display Decimal Position entry attects the display of the measured value only. lt does not atfect any of the values entered entered during conliguration. The configured Decimal Position of values may be ditferent from the Display Decimal Position. lf the number to be displayed is larger than permitted by the Decimal Position choice, the displayed decimal position will change to display the larger number - auto decimal position.

Pt

PTS The Point Pairs are used to scale all inputs except direct needed

TC and RTD connections. No Point Pair entries are lor direct TC and RTD inputs. There are I1 Point Pairs defining

10 line segments. Only the first 2 Point Pairs are needed

Root

or

Strain Gauge scaling. The remaining

9

Point Pairs need be configured only for Linear, Square if a Custom Curve is being used. Except with a Strain

Gauge source, each Point Pair is an input value and its associated display value. Point Pairs are identilied as "in X" and "dS X", where

"X" is a number

,rom 1 to 11.

IMPORTANT

The in2 value is used to automatically set the basic range f or Linear, Square

Root & Skain Gauge measurements. The inl1 value is used for Custom

Curve basic range. This means that reversed ranges (in2 less positive than

inl)

are not possible. (Reversing the displayed (dSX)values is, however possible; so reversed electrical input connections and reversed displayed values achieve the same result).

The basic range in use is displayed when the ENTER key is pressed with the process value displayed.

0= -2to5V;

2

=

+640

mV;

1=

+1.25V;

3

=

up to +160 mV

For correct automatic basic range choice, if in 1 is negative; in2 must be a positive value at least as greal as in1.

Note that the maximum negative input value is determined by the basic range in use - see Example (2), lollowing.

EXAMPLES

1)The Point Pairs for a 4-20 mA (1-5 Volts),0-1000 PSIG input would be:

inl =

1.0000, dS1

=

0.00P, in2

:

5.0000 and dS2

:

1000P. The in X entries are always made in the input units defined by the Source entry.

lssue

1, May 1993 13

2) The

Set connected input varies -1.0 to 0.0

g 0 to 2000 feet.

inl

to -1.0 and dslto 0. Since in2 must be a positive value at least as gleat as lnl

, set in2 to

1

.0 (not 0.0). The measured input has been doubled, so double the normal dS2 value from 2000 to 4000. The indicator now displays

0 to 2000 between

-1 .0 and 0.0 V.

The 0.0 to

1

.0 V readings of 2000 to 4000 are theae but are not used.

Hioh lnput - ln2 or

640

<640

mvto

< 1.25

1.25vto

> 1.25

V

lnl

1

Basic Range Used Max Neoative lnput

mV

V

<5.00V

160

640

mV mV

1.25V

5.00

V

-160 mV

640 mV

-1.25V

-2.00 V

3)lf less than 11 Point Pairs are needed to define a custom curve, the unneeded Point Pairs must be configured with values beyond and slightly grealel than those in use on lower Poinl Pairs. Remember, lnl 1 chooses the basic range. The lollowing example uses 7 Point Pairs and places the remaining 4 beyond the desired linearization:

Poant

Pah (inx) (dSX)

Polnt

Palr (inX)

(dSR

1 1.0000 0.0000 8 5.5000

2000.0

2

3

1.1234 166.67

2.34s6 333.33

9 5.5000

5.5000

2000.0

2000.0

4 2.6789 s00.00 11 s.s000

2000.0

5 3.0123

666.67

6 4.5678

833.33

7 5.0000

1000.0

Strain Gauge - lgnoring tare weighl (which will be discussed in Secion 6,

Operation); Point Pair 'l defines the low end output. Set inl for the low end output ol the skain gauge device (normally 0.0 mV without tare weight).

Set dSlforthe required display value at

inl

(normally 0.0). Point Pair 2 defines the high end output. Set in2 for the output ln lhe gauge specified mVlt/. No other Point Pairs are used.

This rataometrlc in2 setting, using the Strain Gauge's value of millivolts at full scale output per Volt of excitation, assures that slight variations in excitation voltage will not affect the accuracy of the measurement. The excitation voltage is 5 Vdc. dS2 is set for the full rated output value of the

Strain Gauge device.

5.5

The lnstrument Menu

ContC

The Contact lnput terminals 16 and 17 can be used to acknowledge Alarms (AL Acc), reset the both the high and low Peak values (PE dEt), adjust Strain Gauge high and low input values (SG Lo/Hi A) or do a

full

(both high and low) Strain Gauge adjustment using a calibration resistor (SG Fl A).

14 lssue l,

May l993

INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION MENU

1234s6

E

J

PASS

Password

lnStru

lnstrument

ContC

Up furow

Between

Choices

Enter to

Select

g

Glear to

Back Up

AL ACC

Alarm Access

SG

ACC

S Acc.

rEu no

Rev. Number

PASS

Password

c

AL

ACC

This Alarm Access YES or NO choice determines whether both alarm setpoint, deadband and hysteresis values can be changed (without a password) in the Operator Menu. The NO choice results in view only value displays.

SG ACC

This Strain Gauge Access YES or NO choice determines whether the Skain Gauge low (tare) and high (full or calibration resistor) values can be adjusted without a password in the

Operator Menu.

rEv no

This display gives access to the software revision number. Use the Side Arrow key to move the decimal point out to 3 places for the complete rev. number. This number cannot be changed by the user.

PASS

The Password can be any number between "0" and as secure

'32767" . The numbers '0,

1 ,

2 & 3" are not recominended codes, since one of them will always appear when the ENTER key is first pushed (identifying the basic range in use).

lssue 1, May

1

993

15

5.6

The Alarm Menu

The alarm menu's for Alarm 1 or Alarm 2 are the same

AIarm Relays

The alarm relay option provides two Single Pole Double Throw (SPDT) relays. fhese relays are rated at 2 Amps, 24O Vac - 500 VA or 30 Vdc - 60

W. Relay #1 responds lo alarm #1 and relay #2 responds

lo

ala(m #2,

These relays activate when power is applied and de-activate on alarm

-

Normally Qlosed contacts close on alarm.

AL1

tP

The five selections lor the Alarm Type are: OFF, lo, hi, deadband and rate. Hi and Lo alarms are active when the measured value is above (Hi) or below (Lo) the setpoint.

A deadband alarm is active when tho measured value is elther above the amount of th€ deadband entered.

or below setpoint by

A rate-of-change alarm is active when the measured value is changing by more than the setpoint value per minute. Calculations are based on one second samples.

Alarms not

ln

use should be set

lo

OFF to avoid unwanted alarm lndications.

ALARM CONFIGURATION MENU

123456 PASS

Password

AL

1(2)

Alarm

1

16

Up Anow

Between

Choices

Enter to

Select

Clear to

Back Up

P

AL 1tP

Alarm

1

AL

1 I.At

Alarm 1 Latch

ALlSP

L1

ALldb

A 1 Deadband

ALlHY

c

lssue l,

May 1993

AL1 IAt

Alarms can be configured as Not Latched or Latched, Not

Latched alarms become active and their associated relay

(if present) de-activates ([ormally

Qlosed contacts are closed) when the measured value passes the setpoint. The front panel alarm indicator for that alarm blinks. \ilhen the measured value returns past the setpoint by the amount ot any hysteresis (see

ALI

Hy), the relay activates and the alarm indication is turned off.

Latched alarms become active and their associated relay (if present) de-activates (lormally Closed contacls are closed) when the measured value passes the setpoint; and the panel alarm indicator lor that alarm blinks.

\Mren a Latched Alarm measured value returns past the setpoint by the amount of any hysteresis, the relay does not activate and the alarm indication conlanues to bllnk. This type of alarm will stay latched until the measured value returns past the setpoint and the alarm is acknowledged by a contact input or front panel keypad. An acknowledged alarm indication changes from "blink" to "'steady on" until the measured value returns past the setpoint by the amount of any hysteresis,

AL1

SP

The alarm Setpoint determines at what measured value

(or change in measured value) the alarm becomes active.

For high and low alarms, any value equal to or beyond the Setpoint will activate the alarm.

For deadband alarms, any measured value which is greater than or less lhan the Setpoint by lhe amount of the Deadband causes the alarm to become active.

For rale-of-change alarms, any change in measured value which occurs faster than the Setpoint value in units per minule will activate the alarm.

A positive Setpoint is entered lor an increasing rate-of-change. A negative

Setpoint specifies a decreasing rate-of-change. Because input circuit noise can affect rate alarms, the following minimum settings should be observed

(4V values must be converted to measured value units):

FILTER

0

SETTING

MEASURED VALUE IN MICROVOLTS

seconds

180

TrVolts

1

second

2

seconds

120

TrVolts

60 4Volts

Filter settings above 2 sec. slow response appreciably and are not recommended for use with rate alarms.

AL1

db

The Deadband setting atfects only alarms configured for the Deadband alarm type. lt should not be confused with hysteresis as described below. Deadband determines the size of the band both above and belowthe sepoinl at or beyond which a Deadband alarm becomes active.

lssue 1, May 1993

17

AL1

Hy

setting determies the measured value by which the input must return past the setpoint before an alarm is no longer active. Example: A high alarm setpoint ol 500 "F with 10

"F Hysteresis. At 500'F an increasing temperaturo would cause lhe alarm to become active. Vvhen the temperature went down again, it would have to fall to 49O deg F before the alarm was not active.

Hysteresis is used to prevent an alarm from going in and out rapidly as an input varies about the setpoint. lt can also be used to control a volume or pressule by turning on al a low setting and not turning off (Hysteresis) until the pressure or volume has reached its high value.

5.7

The Retransmission Menu

The Retransmission option provides a

O - 20 or 4 - ZO mA output which follows the linearized measured value. This output can be scaled so that the output is over any part (or all) of the measured range.

outPut

The output can be chosen as 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA or OFF.

Voltageoutputs (0- 5Vor

1

-5

V) require aseparate 250

Q r€sistor across output terminals 1 (+

) and 2 f

).

An

Lo

The Analog Low value determines what measured value causes an output of 0 or 4 mA.

An

Hi

The Analog High value determines what measured value causes an output ol 20 mA.

RETRANSMISSION CONFIGURATION MENU

123456

tr tr

DO

PASS

Password

rEtrAn

Retransmission

Up Anow

Between

Choices

Enter to

Select

Glear to

Back Up

outPut

Output Type

An Lo

Low Value

An Hi

Value

c

18 lssue

1, May t993

6.0

OPERATION

The operating controls are the front panel keys and a configurable terminal board contact input. The lollowing lunctions are (or can be configured to be) available without password entry. The contact input can do one of the tasks listed:

Reading of actual electrical input in mV or

Acknowledge latched alarms (if

Ohms

Press Up Arrow

enabled)

Operator Menu

reset

Operator Menu Reading

Resetting of high and low peak value since last of high and low peak

values

Operator Menu

Change alarm SP, hysteresis & deadband (if enabled) Operator Menu

Adiust strain gauge low and high values (if

enabled)

Operator Menu

Ack. both latched alarms together (if

enabled)

Contact lnput

Resetting of

Strain both high and low peak values gauge low adjust (if

enabled) together

Contact lnput

Contact lnput

Strain gauge high adjust (if

enabled)

Contacl lnput

Strain gauge full - low then high with cal. resistor adjust (if

enabled)

Contact lnput

6.1

Electrical lnput Value

Pressing the up arrow while in normal operating mode (with the measured value displayed) causes the electrical input ln Millivolts or Ohms (RTD) to be displayed for 1 second. This is useful when checking thatthe intended input signal is being measured by the indictor.

6.2

The Operator Menu

The Operator Menu is accessed by pressing the side arrow key. Several functions of this menu are controlled by password protected configuration.

Alarm acknowledge, setpoint change, deadband change, hysteresis change and strain gauge low and high adjustments are enabled or disabled in the lnstrument Menu. ll disabled, the values lor these functions can be seen but not changed in the Operator Menu.

AL1

AC

Pressing Enter while on the ALI AC or Al2 AC display causes a latched alarm indicator to go from "blink" to

"steady on" and permits the latched alarm relay to re-activate when the measured value returns past the setpoint by the amount of any hysteresis.

Hi

/Lo

P

The indicator automatically stores the highest (most positive) and lowest (most negative) measured value displayed since these values were last reset. These values can be read in

Operator Menu by pressing Enter when the

Hi

P or

Lo

P is displayed. This displayed peak value will remain until cleared or until the normal 3 minute timeout.

Reset a peak value by pressing the side arrow key while that value is displayed. A reset peak value goes immediatly to the current measured value.

19 lssue 1, May 1993

20

OPERATOR MENU

1234s6

E

Side

Arrtr

ALl

AC

AL2AC

AL 2 Ack

LoP

UpArrd

B€twscn

Cholccs

m

'7

Entar to

Selocl

Clcar to

Back Up

O =

Displays

Pros6nt only wtth Option

ALl

SP

1

ALl

db

ALl

Hy

A1

AL2SP

AL2db

AL2Hy

A1

SG LoA

SG HiA

SGCaI

Hi lssue 1, May 1993

NOTE

Aflashing center bar in the right (units) display character indicates a peak reading.

AL1

l2

It enabled in the lnstrument Menu, the alarm setpoints, deadband (deadband alarms only) and hysteresis values can be changed in the Operator Menu. These values are accessed by pressing the Enter key on one of the following displays: ALl

SP, ALI db,

ALI Hy,

Al2

SP,

Al2 db or A[2 Hy. ll not enabled, the conligured values for theso functions can be viewed but not changed.

SG Hi/Lo

ll enabled in the lnstrumenl Menu, the low and high strain gauge values can be adjusted in tha Operator Menu. The low adlust is used to offset any initialvalue, i.e. tare weight. The high adjust is used to reset the full span strain gauge measurement. High adjust is required after a low adjust has been made to re-establish the input value for the high end.

lf the strain gauge sensor contains an internal calibration resistance, the output lead for that resistance should be connecled to terminal 8. During

SG Hl Adjust, terminal

I

is connected to terminal 7; temporarily placing the resistance across one arm of the bridge. An external calibration resistance should be connected between t€rminals

I

& 9.

After pressing Enter to choose SG HiA or SG LoA, the value to be displayed at the high or low end is shown. The low value is the display with no force on the gauge (usually 0.0). The high value can be one of two numbers: (1) with no calibration resistor in the gauge or connected externally, the high value is the display with a known lorce on the gauge. (2) with a calibration resistor connected, the high value is the display value (usually about 80% of range) derived from information given by the gauge manufacturer.

After the low and high values have been entered, press the Side Arrow key wilh no lorce on the gsuge to adjust the low end. The word "CAL" will appear as the adjustm€nt is made. Press the Up Arrow key to advance to the high adjust.

vwren a calibration resistor is used, press the Side furow key with no lorce on the gauge to adjust the high end. Without a calibration resistor, press the Side Arrow key with a known force on the gauge equal to the entered high value. The word "CAL" will appear as the adjustment is made.

CAUTION

Because value up the high end adjustment process moves lhe measured to 80

-

100% of span, high alarms may be activated temporarily.

6.3 Remote Contact lnput

A remote contact connected between terminals 16 &

1

7 can be used to do many of the Operator Menu functions (see listing on p20). The contact input is configured in the lnstrument Menu and can do any one of the listed functions. Note the following differences function: from Operator Menu keypad lssue 1, May 1993

21

Alarm Acknowledge - bolh alarms are acknowledged.

Besel Peak Value - both the high and low peak values are reset.

Strain Gauge Low Adiust - only the low ad,iust is done with no force on lhe gauge.

Straln Gauge High AdJust - only the high adiust is done. lf a calibration resistor is connected, it is temporarily connected to terminal 7. See SG Hi above.

Strain Gauge Full Adiust (SG

F A) - this contact input can be used to set both the low and resistor calibrated high values. When the contact is closed momentarily, with no torce on the gauge, the adjustment process is automatic. First, the low adjust is done, then the resistor is temporarily connected to terminal 7 and the high adjust is done. The word "CAL" will appear during this adjustment. See SG Hi/Lo above.

7.0

MAINTENANCE

7.1

Strain Gauge Jumper

The jumper on the edge of the input card must be in the rear (nearest the input terminals) position for strain gauge use. lt must be in the front

(nearest the display) position for all other measurements.

Shown in

Strain Gauge

Position ln put

Card

Position for

All Olher lnpuls

Display

Flear view of lnput Card

Jumper

-.

Main Card

7.2

Warranty Statement

This product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for the specified period from the date of shipment. During the warranty period the manufacturer will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.

Warranty service at the buyer's facility can be provided only upon prior agreement by the manulacturer or its representative, and the buyer may be required to pay roundtrip travel expenses.

22 lssue 1, May 1993

ln all cases the buyer has the option of returning the product for Warranty service to a facility designated by the manufacturer or its representatives

The buyer shall prepay shipping charges for products returned to a service facility, and the manufacturer or its representative shall pay for the return ol the product to the buyer.

Limitation ot Warranty

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects arising lrom: lmproper or inadequate maintenance by the user.

lmproper or inadequats site preparation

Unauthorized modification or misuse

Operation of the product in unfavorable environments, especially high temperature, high humidity, corrosive or other damaging atmospheres

Disclaimer

No other warranty is expressed or implied. The manufacturer specifically disclaims the implied warranties

of

merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Exclusive Remedies

The remedies

The provided above are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies.

manufacturer shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special incidental or consequential damages.

Calibration Accuracy

This product was thoroughly tested to ensure compliance with the published specifications. All'instruments used in production and linal test are regularly inspected to maintain accuracy of calibration traceable to lhe

National lnstitute ol Standards and Technology. The user should be satisfied thal the performance of the product as received meets expectations and, as part of a program ol planned maintenance, should periodically check calibration accuracy against reliable standards.

CAUTION

The product chassis should not be removed by other than qualilied service personnel. High or lethal voltages may be present at exposed points within the case if power is applied. See other cautlon inlormatlon on the page ol lhis manua!.

lirst

The manufacturer shall not be liable for personal injury or property damage suffered in servicing the product. The product should not be modified or repaired in

a

manner at variance with procedures established by the manufacturer.

lssue 1, May 1993

23

1

23456 o

CALIBRATION MENU

PASS

Pssword

Up

Arffi

Botween

Choices

Enter to

Selecl

Clear lo

Back Up

g

D

@

CAL

Calibrale rAnGE

Gain

CAL CJ

CL rtd

XJO( U

ZEtO

SHOrt x.)o( u

X.rc(X Volts

]ECALL

Recall Facl Cal

FAct C

Cal

CL AO

SPAn

)oooo(.

7.3

The Calibration Menu

DO NOT USE

NOTE the Calibration Menu lo set up the lndlcator to measute a specific lnpul. See Section 5 - Contiguralion.

The calibration function makes it possible to:

Calibrate the various basic ranges using precision signal standards.

Calibrate the termocouple cold junction compensation using a thermocouple at a known controlled temperalure or a precision thermocouple simulator.

Calibrate the RTD ranges using precision resistance standards.

Calibrate the retransmission function using a precision 250Q resistor.

Restore the range, CJC and RTD calibration constants stored at time of manufacture.

24 lssue 1, May 1993

CAUTION

While in the Calibration Menu various internal and external signal inputs replace the normal process measurement signals. For this reason, alarms may become active during calibration.

rAnGE

There are f ive basic dc ranges: 40.0 mV, 160 mV, 640 mV,

1.25 V and 5.0 V.. The indicator automatically selects a range based on the configuration.

x.)oo( u

When Enter is pressed on the rAnGE display in the

Calibration Menu, the basic range currently in use is the first to appear. Pressing the Up Arrow will then display the other calibration ranges. There is no input for the 40.0 mV range.

ZErO

Press Enter to begin low end (zero) calibration. Press the

Up Arrow to go directly to the high end (span) calibration.

SHOrt

Low end calibration is carried out with the input shorted.

Press Enter to calibrate the low end. The word "Cal" is displayed during this step

SPAn

Press Enter to begin high end calibration, Press the Up

Arrow to go directly to the Cal CJ menu display.

)oooo(.

A high end input is prompted for each basic range: 100 mV for the 160 mV range, 500 mV for the 640 mV range,

1.000 V for the 1.25 V range and 5.000 V for the 5.00 V range. Use a high precision source to apply these values. lf other source input values are to be used, change the prompted value (in millivolts) to match the actual connected input value.

CAL

CJ

Calibration of the thermocouple cold junction requires that the indicator be configured to measure any thermocouple type other than "B". The Units must be "C.

There are three ways to calibrate the CJ: (1) Use a TC simulator to enter 25

'C for the conligured TC type. (2) Place an actual connected thermocouple of the configured type into a known temperature (0"C in an ice bath) and change the prompted 25'C to the known temperature. (3) Short the input and enter the actual measured 'C rear terminal board temperature in place of the prompted 25 "C. No.1 is most accurate, No 3 is least accurate

Press Enter to display the prompted temperature. Adiust the source to match the prompt or adjust the prompt to match lhe source (see above), press Enter to calibrate.

CL

rtd

RTD calibration requires the use of high precision resistance standards: 300 Ohms for Pt100 & Ni120, 1500

Ohms for R 500 and 3000 Ohms for Pt1000,

Accurate

CAUTlON calibration ol RTD inputs requires that the 160 mV,640 mV and 1.25 V dc ranges be calibrated first.

25 lssue 1, May 1993

Press Enter to display the first prompted resistance. Use the Up Arrow to select the the required resistance for the RTD in use. Adjustthe source to match prompt or adjust the prompt to match the source. To assure maximum accuracy, do nol use an inpul resislance thal is less lhan 5O7" of the prompted resistance for the range being calibrated. Press Enter to calibrate.

FACI

C

Factory Calibration means recalling the calibration constants for each range that were stored

in

EEPROM memory at manufacture. This step does not change any configuration entered in Section 5. Factory Calibration does change the effects ol any calibration done after receipt by the user.

r1500

Factory Calibration constants are stored for 160 mV, 640 mV, 1.25 V,5.00 V,300c2, 1500 O,3000 A, CJC and

Retransmission. Use the Up Arrow lo select the range or function to be recalled.

TECALL

Press Enter

to

recall the Factory Calibration for the selected range or function.

CL

AO

Calibration of the Analog Output requires that a 250 Q resistor be connected across the retransmission terminals 1

10

(+

) and 2 (-) and these terminals be connected to the input terminals

(+) and 9 (-), Press Enter to start calibration.

CAUTION

Accurate calibration of Retramsmission output requires that the 5.00

V range be properly calibrated.

C

AOut

Press Enter to start analog output. "Cal" will be displayed during calibration. During calibration the analog output goes to the 4 mA and 20 mA limits

7.4

Feature Addition

The Alarm Relays and the Retransmission/Serial Communications Card may be added to the indicator by the user.

Feature addition requires that the indicator chassis be removed lrom its case. Grasp the two serrated portions on the sides of the front bezel and pull the chassis from the case.

Only

CAUTION qualified service personnel should make modifications to electronic equipment.

Care must be taken to avoid both mechanical and electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage when handling the circuit cards, A grounding wrist strap should be worn and the work should be done on a grounded, conductive surlace.

26 lssue 1, N,1ay

1

993

L_ l

.

Bottom

Side of

Main

Circuit

Board

-

Coil

)

1

Solder hilo places ca

Flelay No. I oNC oNO

Solder lhr€€ places trc places

a-

Felay No.2

o

:NC

a

:No

Solder three places

Figure

7.2, Alarm Relay

lnstallation

7.4.1

Alarm Relays

(see Section 5.6 - Alarms)

The alarm relays are soldered directly onto the main (larger) circuit card.

See Figure 7.2.

1) To ensure stability and avoid undue stress on the connections, relays should be mounted firmly to the top side of the circuit card.

2) The use of good soldering lechnique is important. The iron used should be grounded and no more lhan 40 Watts with a tip no wider than 3/32 inch.

To avoid damage to the circuit card, apply only enough heat for good solder flow.

lt

should not be necessary

to

trim the relay leads after soldering.

7.4.2

Retransmission/Serial Communications

Card

(see Section 5.7 - Retransmission and/or Communicatlons manual)

This card mounts above the main circuit card in the position beside the lnput Card. Like the lnput Card the front of the option card is hooked into the lront bezel moulding. lt is supported at the back by a post that snaps into the main circuit card and lhe Retransmission/Comms card. See Figure

7.3.

1) Note that the option card has a short ribbon cable attached. This cable connects to the main card using a latching type connector. The latch must be fully raised before the ribbon can be inserted.

lssue 1, May 1993

27

o

lnpul Board

o

R€lramsml$lon & Comms Board

a a

Support Post

Dotail ol

Ribbon

Position

Top

Vi*

Conngctor

LIFT HERE

Figure

7.3,

Addition of

Card

CAUTION

Attempting to insert the ribbon when the latch is not lully raised can damage the ribbon and prevent proper connection to the main circuit card.

See Figure 7.3 lor latch location and raise the latch.

2) The option card is inserted into the front bezel hooks by lifting the rear

(connector) end of the card. Lower the card slowly so that the bezel hooks engage the two holes in the front of th€ card.

3) As the option card is lowered into position, the ribbon cable can be carefully inserted into the open latch connector. Do not force the ribbon. lt will enter the connector easily if the latch if fully open.

4) Afterthe ribbon isfully inserted into its connector, close the latch. Ensure that both ends of the latch are lully down.

28 lssue 1, May 1993

5) Raise the rear of the option card sllghtly and insert the support post into the holes in the main circuit card and the option card.

6) ln order to ensuro that the ribbon cable that connects this option card to the main circuit card clears tho side of the case, ths ribbon should be pressed inward after clmpletion ol the above steps.

lleuc I,

May t$s 29

,

760 Process

Monitor/lndicator

Addendum to HA205760 lss

1

This apparafus has been designed and tested in accordance with applicable safety standards, and is supplied in a safe condition.

The basic instruction manual (as supplemented by any associated auiliary documents) contains some intormation and wamings which have to be followed by the user to ensure sale operation and to retain the apparatus in safe condition.

FOR THIS APPARATUS, THE POWER SUPPLY LINE SHALL

CONTAIN A SWITCH OR OTHER ADEQUATE MEANS FOR

DISCONNECTION FROM THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE. IT SHALL ALSO

BE PROVIDED WITH AN INDIVIDUAL 0.5 AMP SLOW BLOW FUSE.

ALL EXTERNAL WIRES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THIS

APPABATUS IN SUCH A WAY AS TO PREVENT STRAIN OR

TWISTING AT THE CONNECTION.

BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE APPABATUS, ENSURE THAT THE

CONNECTED POWER SUPPLY IS OF A VOLTAGE COMPATIBLE

WITH THE APPARATUS AND FUSED. MAKE SURE THAT ONLY

FUSES WITH THE REQUIRED RATED CURRENT AND OF THE

SPECIFIED TYPE ARE USED FOR REPLACEMENT. THE USE OF

MAKE SHIFT FUSES AND SHORT.CIRCUITING OF FUSE HOLDERS

IS PROHIBITED.

WHEN THE APPARATUS IS CONNECTED TO ITS SUPPLY,

TERMINALS MAY BE LIVE, AND THE REMOVAL OF COVERS OR

INTERNAL ASSEMBLIES IS LIKELY TO EXPOSE LIVE PABTS. THE

APPARATUS SHALL BE DISCONNECTED FROM AIL VOLTAGE

SOURCES BEFORE IT IS OPENED FOR ANY ADJUSTMENT,

MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR.

THE TWO LARGE CAPACITORS IN THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE AREA

OF THE MAIN CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY MAY TEMPORARILY

BETAIN A HAZARDOUS CHARGE WHEN THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE

IS

REMOVED. DO NOT REMOVE THE CHASSIS FROM ITS CASE FOR

1

OSEC. AFTER DISCONNECTION.

ANY ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR

OF THE OPEN APPARATUS UNDER VOLTAGE SHOULD BE

AVOIDED AS FAR AS POSSIBLE AND, IF INEVITABLE, SHALL BE

CARRIED OUT ONLY BY A SKILLED PERSON WHO IS AWARE OF

THE HAZARD INVOLVED.

1

2.1 (p.1) The panel gasket and rear terminal covers are included as standard with all instruments.

2.2 (p.2) a.1 (p.6)

4.2 (p.6)

4.6 (p.8) s.3 (p.10)

No bench mounting kit is available.

lnput Offset: -9999 to 9999 in Engineering Units

The link between terminals 7 and

9 should be used for both Thermocouple and DC inputs. lt is not used with RTD or Strain Gauge inputs.

There is no "pencil point'slide switch in the input terminal board area. Thermocouples are connected the same as any other DC input.

The external calibration resistor shown as

.R

Cal' in figure 4.5 is connected into the circuit when the indicator makes the connection between terminals 7 &

8.

See section 6.2 lor details on the Strain Gauge low and high end adiustments.

See section 7.1 for position of internal jumper for Strain

Gauge operation. The Strain Gauge will not function properly with this jumper in the front position.

The Password as shipped is "10'. lt is entered as 00010.

The initial display shows either '00000', .00001.,

',00002"

"00003'depending on the automatically selected intemal or range.

s.4 (p.14) When setting the Strain Gauge mVA/ value into ln2 of the

Point Pairs, the value entered must be more positive than the value entered into ln1.

s.s (p14)

For proper operation of the low and high adjust functions

(Operator Menu or by Contact lnput) the values set in the

Operator Menu for low and high must agree with those entered into Point Pairs Ds1 and Ds2.

The external Contact (terminals

i6

& 17) can be turned

'off" or used to do one of the following jobs:

Adjust the strain gauge low 'tare weight'

Adjust the strain gauge high "R cal"

Automatically adjust strain gauge low and high

Acknowledge alarms

Reset peak values

The external contact should be closed for at least 2

2

i

seconds to assure initialisation of any of these tasks.

7.3 (p.251

When calibrating the Cold Junction comp€nsator, it is recommended that the instrument be wrapped in an insulating material such as'bubble pack'and allowed to come to a uniform, stable intemal temperature before and during the calibration. The longer the temperafure stabilisation period (up to three hours) the more accurate the

CJ calibration results.

7.4 (p.27) When addlng alarm relays, a retransmission and/or serial communications cad to an instrument with a thermocouple input, the CJ should be calibrated as in Section 7.3 and as noted above.

The relay numbers shown on Figwe7.2 are reversed.

The top relay is Relay No. 2 and the bottom relay is

Relay No. 1.

3

Eurotherm Recorders

One Pheasant

Newtown, PA

Run

18940 lnc

Telephone: (215)

Fax:

(215)

968 0660

968 0662

Overseas Companies

Australia

Great Britain

Eurotherm fty. Limited, Eurotherm Recorders Ltd

Unit 3, 6-18 Bridge

Hornsby

Boad Dominion Way,

Worthing,

2077

West Sussex BNl4 8OL New South Wales

Tele: 61 2 477

7022

Tele: 44 W3 205222

Fax: 61 2 477

7756

Fax.44 903 203767

Austria

Eurotherm

Me0-und Regeltechnik

GmbH,

GeiereckstraBe 18/l

A1

1

10 Vienna

Tele:43 222787601

Fax:43222 78 7605

Belgium

Eurotherm BV.,

Herentalsebaan 71-75

82100 Deurne (Antwerp)

Tele: 32 33223870

Fax: 32 3 321 7363

Denmark

Eurotherm Danmark ly'S

Finsensvej 86

0K2000 Fredriksberg

Tele: 45 31 871 622

Fax: 45 3'l 872 124

France

Eurotherm Mesures S.A.

27,Avenue du Qu6bec,

ZA de Courtaboeuf

8P225

F-91942 Les Ulis CEDEX

Tele: 33 1 6918 5100

Fax: 33 1 6918 5199

Hong

Kong

Eurotherm Limited,

Unit D, 18/F Gee Chang

Hong Centre, 65 Wong

Chuk Hang Road,

Aberdeen

Tele: 852 873 3826

Fax: 852 870 0148 lreland

Eurotherm keland Ltd.,

IDA lndustrial Estate

Monread Road

Naas, Co. Kildare

Tele:353 4579937

Fax: 353 4575123

Italy

Eurotherm SpA.,

Via XXIV Maggio, l-2207O Guanzate,

Tele: 39 31977103

Como

Fax: 39 31977512

Japan

Eurolherm K.K.,

Marushima Bldg,28-2

Chuo 1 Chome,

Nakano-ku, Tokyo 164

Tele: 81 33 363 8324

Fax: 81 33 363 8320

Netherlands

Eurotherm BV.,

Johan Frisostraat

1,

NL 2382 HJ Zoeterwoude

Tele:3171 411

841

Fax:3171 414526

New Zealand

Eurotherm Limited

PO Box 8497,

Symonds Street, Aukland

Tele: 649 358 8106

Fax: 649 358 1350

Norway

Eurotherm

Ay'S,

Kongeveien 49,

PO Box 199

N-1412 Soliemyr f ele'. 47 2 80 33 30

Fax'. 47 2 80 33 31

Spain

Eurotherm Espaia SA,

Calle de la Granja 74,

Pol. lnd. Alcobendas,

28100 Alcobendas,

Madrid

Tele:34 I 661 6001

Fax:34 1 661 9093

Sweden

Eurotherm AB

Hantverkaregaten 18,

Box 24, 5-232 21 tulciv

Tele: 46 404 35460

Fax: 46 404 35520

Germany

Eurotherm

MeBdatentechnik lm \Megenfeld 4

GmbH

W 8015 Markt Schwaben

Tele: 49 8121 4100

Fax: 49 8121 41020

Korea

Eurotherm Korea Ltd.,

Suite 303, Chang Hak

Hwe Kwan Building,

945-15 Daechi-Dong,

Kangnam-Ku,

Seoul 135-280

Tele:822 554 8507

Fax'.822 553 9655

Switzerland

Eurotherm Produkte

(Schweiz) AG.,

Kanalstrasse

1

7,

CH-8152 Glattbrugg

Tele: 41 1 810 3646

Fax: 41 1 810 8920

r'n-l.ir-

EUROTHERil CONTf,OLS LIMITED

Faraday Close,

Durrington

Worfring, West Sussex BNl3 3PL

ENGLAND

Tel: 0903

268500

Fax: 0903

265982

I

I

2

y s tg

o-odd

EUROTH

E

RffI coNTROTS

CONTROTTER/

PROGRAMMER

Operoting inslruclions

WARN NG

STANDAHD PHECAUTIONS TO

BE

TAKEN WHEN

USING

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS.

When designing any control systems il is essential to consider what will happen il any individual part of the system malfunctions.' ln a temperature conlrol application, lor example, system iemains permanently switched on.

lhe danger is that for some reason the heating

This could haPPen if:

1.

Thermocouple or sensor becomes "detached" from lhe system i.e. is no longer measuring the actual temperature achieved.

2.

Thermocouple or thermocouple wiring becomes short circuited.

3.

Component failure within the controller in such a way as to leave lhe output switched on.

4.

Microprocessor or software failure in a system.

5.

Failure of valve movement or valve linkage.

6.

Bemote setpoint to controller is laulty.

7.

Operation by unaulhorised personnel.

eg.

(a) Controller left in Manual with high output power set.

(b) Setpoint set too high.

8.

Any lack ol maintenance in serviceable pans.

.........and many other unforeseen situations.

lf leaving the heater on all the tlmE can caus€ damage elther-to the plant ltself or its coitents, then an lndependent protectlon devlce must be provided.

The best form of protection iS a completely independent 'policeman'. This is a separate overtemperature with its own thermocouple or sensor and, on alarm will pull out the main contactor or shut off the valve to ensure the plant' s safety.

e.g.

unit i,lined

L__l

lsolatol

800

Controller Polleman

Furnace

A suitable policeman is the Eurotherm 106 overtemperature alarm.

Note that an alarm relay in the controller is not suflicient protection for all eventualities.

CONTENTS

Section Page No.

1.0

1

.'l

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11

1.12

1

.13

lntroduction and General Operation

Software Versions

Setpoint Changes

Short Scroll

Long Scroll

Self & Adaptive Tune

Auto/Manual

.

Local/Remote

Programme Entry (Model 81 8P)

Running Programmes (Model 81 8P) ........,...............

1

I

7

Alarms

5

5

4

4

2

2

3

1

1

1

2.0

2.1

2.2

2.2.1

2.2.2

2.2.3

2.2.4

2.3

2.3.1

2.3.2

2.3.3

2.3.4

2.3.5

2.3.6

2.4

Commissioning

Factory Default Values

Self Tune.....

Adaptive Tune ............

Self and Adaptive Tune............

Manual Tune

Valve Positioner Controller

Valve Parameters Commissioning

Self Tune (VP)

Adaptive (VP)

Manual Tune (VP)

Position Potentiometer Calibration

Potentiometer Limits

Response to Broken Sensors

3.0

3.1

3.2

3.3

Conliguration

4.0

4.1

4.2

4.3

31

Hardware Changes

Configuration

33

Parameters

....................35

Reference

Section

Labels and Coding

Glossary of Terms..............

Error Codes

.........43

43

52

54

26

27

27

28

28

28

28

29

30

22

22

23

23

25

25

@@fight Eurothdm Limited 19SB

Param6l6r selsl€d on se@ndary displayi

SP

OP

- Setpoint

-

Outp.rt

Pryq

TIME - Tim RmininO

818 CONTROLS & INDICATIONS

Arm

1

Actiw

(AM1)

Ahrm 2

Activo

(ALA

Forple

S€bded

(REM)

Mtrua,

Solec'ted

(MAN)

Adadlre or Sell

Tum Solclsd

(A-r)

So@ndary

Disphy

Down Bunon

Autc/Mauai

B uton

I

OP

TITE

EEIJ

E

ffiP

g

DWE|l-

E E

H4D

v

{J

R€I

^^.

Pms V{iablo

(Software

Pfl6r

Up) reEion on

Digital Comuni€tions

Aclire (E

)

Condition ot Progrm,

Rarp or Owell and ll program ls held. Rarp Dwall segmnt currently running

Up Button

Scril retaining lnstrurent

In Sl66vo

Sotpoint 2

Ouput

Tire

RurvHoU

Butlon

LcaYRsrclo

Butlon

Smll

Button

FRENCH DISPLAY

I w2

RAT'PE

PALIEN

UINT

v

tru .^.

wrrI

@

o

Rarp

Owoll

HoH

Run

Hoh

Rorcte

I

Section

1.0

- lntroductlon and General Operation

The 818 controller is a flexible instrument, accepting a wide range of plug-in modules for communication, alarms and outpuls. A vast range of facilities may be contigured in software

The instrument is provided in one of the following models:-

818S

818VP

81

8P

818P4

8t8P15

Standard conkoller with manually adjusted setpoint and a-nalogue or digital communicailons.

Motor Valve Positioning controller.

Programmed setpoint version with up to

I

ramp / dwell combinations.

Multiprogrammed programmer

15 programmes of up to with either 4 or

I

ramp / drvell combinations.

Outputs:

Models may have one or two output channels for controlling measured values approaching setpoint from above or below setpoint

. eg heat / cool. Alternatively the

818VP uses a raise / lower action to control motorised valves.

lnputs:

A large number of input linearisations are programmed into the instrument including thermocouples, resistance frermometer and certain radiation pyrometers, including emissivity adjustment. Linear d.c. inputs above 50mV require an atenuator and current inputs require a shunt across the rear input terminals.

All instrument features (Tune, Manual, Remote, Programme, Ramp etc) will need to be configured to operate. See section 3.0.

Full configuration details are available by applying for an 818 engineering book,

H4021452 through your local Eurotherm sales office or engineer. See the rear @ver of this booklet.

1.1

Software Versions

When switched on the controller momentarily shows the installed software version number. The upper display then displays the current value of the process variable.

Note: 'Or' in the upper display indieles the process circuit sensor or zero input on an elevated range.

variable is out ol range. eg open

Or' in the lower display indicates an out ol range condition lor the second input. e.g.

remote setpoint or pot position.

1.2

Setpoint Changes

On switch on the lower display shows eiher SP or OP depending on display at switch off.

SP

v t5D

21

@

.^

2

This may be adjusted, using the

or'V'

buttons.

A

Short presses step the setpoint by single units.

long presses accelerate he display for large changes.

CHANGING VALUES

@

Keep button depressed until close to final value then depress and release button rapidly until final value is displayed.

The flashing dot indicates hat the sepoint being displayed can be changed.

Nole: The setpoint security switch

an

be vaied

(within the setpoint limits) only neither keylock

ror

parumater

arc

set.

if

1.3

Scroll Button

Flashing dot indicates

Parameter hat can be changed.

D

q

1.4

Short Scroll

Short presses ol his button will scroll he lower display betw€€n sepoint and ouPut power.

Note 1: ln ramp, or progrummer versions there may be a third panmeter'TIME', the tme remaining in that segmenl.

AUN

HCLO

FEH

Note 2: ln valw positioner versions saolling to outPut the be displayed in o/" (il the position Potentiometer oPtion ptenlometer is litted).

position will

Valve positioner output activity is indicated by

'l-l

' (up) and

'L-l'

(down ) symbols.

I

1.5

Long Scroll

Holding the scroll butlon depressed causes th6 lower display to scroll through tre short scroll (see section 1.4) and then proceed into he long scroll.

The long scroll contains he following sections if configured

; i) Programmer/Ramp values ii) All setpoints iii) Self & Adaptive Tune selection iv) Alarm settings v) P.l.D. commissioning values

For full details of tre long scroll list see section 2.0.

ADJUSTING

COMM ISSlONING

VALUES

RI.IN

HCtF

FEH

Hold fre bunon depressed while scroll is displayed.

he short

RUN

HCt 0

REH

As soon as he first mnemonic of tre main scroll is displayed, release tre button and depress the button repeatedly single stepping through until he desired parameter is displayed.

When the required parameter is reached its value can be displayed by pressing eiher the

'A

'or'y'buttons.

The flashing dot indicates that he parametercan be changed.

-{Ll

To view the value of any parameter press eiher lhe up or dorn buttons whilst viewing the parameter mnemonics.

3

4

1.6

Self & Adaptive Tune

These are selected bY using the long scroll to reach the required mnemonlcs; -

St lor Sell Tune

At

for Adaptive Tune

SAt lor Self & AdaPtive Tune

*e

2.2.2 for full details of using hrners.

When the required mnemonic is displayed, the function can be selected by pressing

he'A'and

'V

buttons together. To de-select his tunction, re-scroll to the parameler and press boh buttons again.

1.7

Auto/Manual

Eact press of tre button will toggle between auto and manual. When manual is selected the lower display is lorced to indicate the outsut power.

For VP

'fl

' raise and '

LJ' lower symbols key are shown in resPonse to press. lt a teedback

Pot is fitted a value G10O gives position as a"/o ol calibrated

Pot travel.

Caution: Pot limits are overidden in manual.

Note: ln TANUAL the instrument is NOT coilrolling so ensure that the powet output is set et a sate level.

5E

Depress boh he up and down buttons together.

Note:'St'will disengage once the self lune sequence is completed. At' remains mgaged until de-selected by the operalor.

AUTO-MANUAL

Each depression of ttis button will switch between Auto and Manual.

llluminated when Manual Aclive

I

t

1.8

Local/Remote

Remote is selected bY a single press ol he remote button, HEM.

The next press will retum

'contsoller to local.

fie

Note: Remob annot be seleded whm a programme or ramp is operaling.

REMOTE.LOCAL

Eadr depressidn ol tris button will switdr between Local and Remob

REM

The legend illuminates when REmote

9P

or Remote + Local Trim or Local

9P

+

Remote Trim is selected.

5

6

1.9

Ramps

Depressing once

he

RUN/HOLD button will enable lhe ramp function,

When a ramp is running the legend

BAiIP will be illuminated.

At the conclusion of a ramp an ,E, legend will be ctrsplayed.

The sepoint SP on he short scroll cannot be changed if RAilP is engaged.

To change he target setpoint, scroll to SPI on he long scroll.

STARTING A RAMP

FETI

@

A single depession of his button will start he ramp

RAH P For inshrments configured for ramp function.

The conclusion ol a running ramp will be indicated by an

'E'being displayed.

It remains engaged and any furfier changes to the sepoint will be aproached at the ramp rate.

A running or complebd rarnp can be disengaged by depressing the

RUN/HOLD button a second time.

The right hand lower part ol he screen will blank to indicate that his function is disabled.

TO

DISENGAGE

A

RUNNING RAMP

RtH

G.

Depress and release the button once.

The lower right hand comer of the display will blank.

1.10

Programme Entry (Models 818P

t4

t15)

Two levels of programming facillities exist.

The 818P consists of entered programme a

Either or boh he alar switched for each seg

The

818P4 ramp/level to the next level combi tu ru ru

OISPL/.Y

uMfs

[1 ru

&

(

M

\

P6 M

- rm(Ec,-

TIHE

@2 il

SF e!

il ffi

u

q ffi

Qr

-t

G

2-r-a

6

2

\

E m tre

I

I e

Pr

(#)=

RAMP rate

Pd (#) = DWELL time

PL (#)

=

dwell LEVEL

Option

Or (#)

Od (#)

=

O/P for ramp

= O/P for drvell

End

=

O/P tor end

(#) Segment No.

7

8

Basic'Programme

module'

(ramp/level)

Entry

Output 2 Relay

OuFut3

(Alam 1) Rolay

OuFut 4

(Alarm 2) Relay

Enorgls€d

De-energisod

En€rgls€d

De-energlsed

Energised

Oeenerglsod o(x)

=

2-

od(x)

=

2-

-3

-

-3

-

-4

DISPI.AY

UNrts

PL(x)

- -

Set in dlsplay unlB

Programme

Pronle

+

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

L

Pd(x)

S€t ln minutss

(hours)'

Pr (x+1)

P(x) set ln display unlty mlnuto

(hour)'

x=

Ram/Hold segment numb€r (le I to

'=

Orderlng Code Depondont

s)

TIME

Starting Level

lor first

Ramp (Servo) lf the first ramp

Prl is set to a ramp value and not'SIEP' the sepoint will start ramping from he measured value when he ram/programme is run.

to start from a defined temperature set Pr1 to'SIEP'and first ramp rate.

enter'PL1'. Use'Pr2' to define the

DISPLAY

UNITS

Programme

Profile

Pt1

TIME

Note: Programme parumeters can only be changed whilst the instrument is hold andition and neither keylock nor the parameter seutity switch are set.

in the rcset ot

Enterthe long scroll by holding

tt'"'@'

button depressed whilst the display runs through he short scroll. Release the button as soon as the first paralleter in the long scroll appears.

For 818P the first parameter is Pr1.

For 818P4 (or 818P15) the first parameter is Pnrl (programme number).

The'A'and V' buttons can be used to select a programme from 1 to 4 (or 1 to

15). Pressing cause the'@'button will now

fie

Pr1 parameter to appear and programming may continue as for the

818P.

ENTERING RAMP RATE Pr (x) pLt t5D

Pr

I

-{l-l

REIl

Hold the scroll button depressed until

Prl is displayed

Press and release either button to reveal

the'A' or'V'

he current value of Prl

(Ramp 1 rate).

For example 10.6 display units per minute

(hour)'.

-B]AL t5D r0

6

-\'l-1,

R€II

Press

the'A'or'V'

buttons to adjust the ramp rate to the desired value.

Press and release

the'A'or'V'

button to reveal current value of Pr1

SUII

t5n

12.8

-\rl-1,

REI.I

Adjust the value by pressing

theAorgbuttons.

.

Ordering Code dependant.

I

10

All other ramp rates, i.e. Pr 2-8, can be adjusbd in a simihr

Eshion. These can be found by pressing and releasing

he'@

, button whilst in the long scroll until he relevant mnemonic is displayed.

ll,r!t5D

Pr6

.{Lt

REII

Scrolling he value of any ramp rate down below zero will rewal three oher options:

END - to terminate ttre programme at the end of tre

Prsvtous segment.

STEP - lmmediate jump ol setsoint from original value to tre new value

NONE - The ramp segment is omitled.

FEH

ql

Scrolling a ramp rate (Prx) below zero gives END, STEP and NONE.

Enter the long scroll by holding the'@' button depressed whilst the instrument runs through the short scroll.

Then release the button as soon as the mnemonics releasing

Prl appears. Pressing and the

(&'

button again will reveal he mnemonic'PL1' (first level) on lower display.

ENTERING

A

LEVEL PL (x)

RUN t5D

Pl

I

.

REII

Hold the'@' button, depressed until

Pr1 is disp'layed then press and release th"'@'button to reveal PL1

Press and release button to reveal the the

A'or'V' currenl value of

PL1. ln the example 135 display units.

Press the

A'

or

'V'

buttons to adjust the level to the desired value

-EL$L

t5n

I

'E

-{Lf

F

EII

Press the the

A'

or value ol PL1.

'f7'

button to reveal

-8r-Lt5D t38

-\Ll-f

Rtt

I

Adjust the value by pressing

or'V'button the'[

11

12

Other levels. i.e. PL2-8 can be adjusbd in a similar fashion.

These can be bund by pressing and releasing the .@'button until he relevant mnemonic is displayed.

t5D

Jijtll

a{!-f

itn

@

Enter the long scroll by holding the

'@

' button depressed whilst the instrument runs through the short scroll. Then release the button.

This oives ttre mnemonic Pr1.

PresJand release ttre

'@

' button until the mnemonic Pdl (first dwell) is lower display.

ENTERING

A

DWELL

TIME

Pd (x) a[N t5D

Prl

I

-{1.,

REI

I

Hold the'@'button depressed until

Pr1 is displayed. Release the button. Press and release lhe button until Pd1 is displayed.

Press and release ttre button to reveal

A'

or

'V' he current value of

Pd1. ln he example 16.9 minutes

(hours)'.

_8tr_

I\D

t5I

tr

REIl

Press and release the

'A'or'y bunon to reveal the value of Pdl.

Press

the'['or

V'

bunons to adjust the time to the desired value.

-til}L t5D

l7

3

tr{l-l

hLH

.Ordering Code dependant

Adjust the value by pressing the

or'V'button.

A

13

14

Other dwell times, i.e. Pd 2-8 can be adjusbd in a similar fashion.

These can be found by pressing and releasing ttre in

@'button whilst the long scroll, until the relevant mnemonic is displayed.

t5D

Pd3

tr\rl-l

Ifit

Press and release the '@' button until desired mnemonic is displayed.

Scroll the value of any time down to below 0.0 will reveal.

END - The programme will terminate at he end of the previous segment.

IGC -al

Scrolling a dlell time (Pdx) below zero gives END.

I

Nole: The outputs can be changed whilst the programme is running.

Enter the long scroll by holding button depressing

t'"

'@' whilst the instrument runs through the short scroll. Then as soon as the first long scroll parameter appears, release the button. Press and r-.lease the

'@'

button until the required mnemonic is displayed.

Or (x)

=

Output stale during ramp number x

Od (x)'=Oulput state during drvell number x

End =

Relay state during end state and before reset is enabled. During reset relays are de-energised.

PROGRAMME CONTROL

OF OUTPUTS t5D

Or! 6

-{,

RFTI

Press and hold the @'brnon to enter long the scroll. Press and release

'(&'

button until required mnemonic is displayed.

Press and release either

the'A'or'V'

button to reveal the current suate of the output relays in that segment of the programme. ln the example fris would be in segment dwell 6.

-B.U}L REH

Press and release buttons to reveal the

A

or

V' fre cunent value.

Rgpeatedly press and release either the

'A'or

V'

buttons to the output relays as:reset the condition of

Outputs all outputs denergised

2 - - output2 energised

2 - 3 - outputs2and3energised

- - 4 output4energised

2 - - 4 outputs2and4energised

- 3 - 4 outputs3and4energised

2 - 3 - 4 outputs2,3and4 energised

_zuIL

REH

Adjust the value by pressing the

or'W

button.

A

15

16

Linking Programmes (Models 818p4 and

818P15 only)

Enler the mains scroll by holding the

,@, buttons depressed whilst he instrumei-t runs hrough the short scroll, then release lhe button.

Press and release tre'@, bunon, single stepping trrough the mnemonics until

'Cnt n' is displayed.

LINKING PROGRAMMES t5D

Cnl n

.(, tEr

I

I

Press and release tre

A'

and

,V,

buttons to toggle between ,Cnt y' (continue) and'Cnt n' (no continue).

The effect of selecting 'Cnt y' is to continue the programme to he next programme number. i.e. lf at the end of programme number 3 we select

,Cnt y' when programme 3 is complete, progranme 4 ivill run automatically.

Setting continue at the end of programme

4 will initiate the start of programme

1.

Each prograrnme will complete the selected number of loops before continuing; (see later).

PLI t5D

Cnt y

-{l_l

PEH

To prevent a programme conlinuing if the measured value falls too far below or rises above the programme or ramp setpoint, holdback may be configured to operate deviation high, low or band.

for lf the hold back teature has been configured it is set by the following procedure:

Enter the main scroll by holding the

'@ ' button depressed whilst the instrument runs through the short scroll. Then release the button. Press and release the ' single stepping

@'

button, hrough the mnemonic until

Hb is displayed.

SETTTNG

HOLDBACK

(Hb)

-BUIL t5D

Hh

-\Ll-f

REtI

Press and hold the 'fri',' button until

Pr1 is revealed. PreYs and release th" '@'button until Hb is displayed.

Press and release

he'A'or'V

buttons to reveal the current value of holdback.

Press either the

A'

or the

'V'

buttons to adjust the value of holdback which is in display units.

pLl

FEil

Press and release either the

'V

button.

I or

_H]IL t5D

ll tru-f

HLH

Adjust the value by pressing the or

! button.

'{

17

18

Enter the main scroll by holding fre

,@

, button depressed whilst the insrumeii runs hrough the short scroll. Then release he button. Press and release

tre'6',

button, single stepping trrough mnemoniqs treuntil PLc is displayed.

SETTTNG LOOP COUNT (PLC) t5D

-\il-,

REH

Press and hold the'@'button until

Prl is revealed. Press and release

t'"'@'button

until PLc is displayed.

Press and release

the'A'or V,

bunons to rewal the curent setting of loop oount

PLc.

I

I i

I

FTH

Press button and release the

'A'

or

'!' to reveal the cunent value.

Press adjust eiher tre

'A' or'V,

buttons to the loop count value.

3Lt!.

REH

Adjust the value by pressing

or

'V'button.

the'A

1.11

Running Programmes

(Models818P/4t15),

Depressing tre RUN/HOLD button once will start the programme.

As soon as a programme starts the legend RAMP 1 will be illuminated.

This legend will change as the programmeme progresses:

RAMP

1

DWELL

1

HAMP 2

DWELL 2

RAMP 3 etc.

At the conclusion of a programme an 'E' legend will be displayed.

STARTING

A

PROGRAMME

PLIl @

A programme may be startsd by pressing when the RUN/HOLD button the'E'legend is being displayed.

A single depression of this button will start the programme.

For 8'l8P instruments configured for

Programme functions

While the programme is running the cunent segment number and type is displayed.

The conclusion of a running programme will be indicated by an 'E' being displayed.

19

20

Depessing time, the Run/Hold button a second while he programme is running, will cause tre programme

b

be held. This will be indicated by the 'HOLD' legend being illuminated.

A lurther depression of this button will cause the programme to continue running

Note: The programme will automatically be placed into hold, il the holfrack leature bxomes adive.

lf conligured this feature is activated should the process deviate too lar from setpoint.

Either the 'RAMP'or'DWELL' legend will flash when holdback is active.

HOLDING

A

RUNNING

PROGRAMME

P]H

9rm

a

On models 818P/#15 models configured as a programmer a single depression of this button will enable hold. Furher depressions of tris bunon will switch he HOLD

'OFF'and'ON

P

HOL D

TO

RESET

A

RUNNING

PROGRAMME

A running or completed programme can be reset by depessing tre

'A'

and

'V' buttons togeher.

The reset condition will be indicated by he bottom right hand comer of he screen blanking.

Under trese conditions the controller will be running on either sepoint 1 or 2 or remote.

Note : Ensure SPI or SP2 is set to a safe level before resetting the programme.

tr\Ll,

Depress both the up and down buttons together.

The lower right hand corner of the display will blank

1.12

Alarms

Outputs 3 and 4 may be contigured as full scale high

, full scale low or deviation alarms.

Full scale alarms are activated when the rreasured value goes either higher or lower than the alarm sefting. Deviation alarms are activated when the measured value exceeds a deviation band above and below setpoint. ln alarm the indicators AL1 and

AL2 flash.

lf no relays are fitted the ALI and AL2 indicalors on the display will still flash if the alarm limits are exceeded. (Soft alarms).

Alarm hysteresis can be set from 0.1 to 10%.

For 818P models outputs 2, 3 and 4 may alternatively be conflgured to be controlled during each segment of the programme.

1.13

Security

There are three forms of security available on this instrument to prevent its unauthorised use.

a) Keylock enabled by either digital input or digital communications b) Parameter modification enabled by Security Switch or digial input

Link Switch

BE

Pararnelers may modified

Pararnelers

Protecled

Security

Switch

Ei

E

Eo

I-lollo:

Microprocessor

Board

Parameter Modification Enable Switch

By operation of a switch on the micropro@ssor board (see diagram certain parameters can be

) ttre adjustmenl of disabled, as selected in configuration. (see section 3.0) (see also 818 Engineers book).

c) Parameter Disabled some of ttre instruments functions can be disabled completely or made available as digital input only within the configuration. The functions that can be inhabited in this way are;-

Auto/Manual

Remote/Local

Run/Hold

Reset

Self Tune

Adaptive Tune setpoint 2

Ramp

For more information, refer to the 818 engineers book.

21

Sectlon

2.0 -

Commlssionlng

2.1

Factory Default Values

The instrument leaves tre tactory with commissioning values installed suitable for many typical applications.

Table 1 Factory setting ol commissioning values in a P.l.D. conuoller

Parameter Mnemonic on

Secondary

Display

Factory Set

Value

Customer

Changes to

Factory

Settino

22

Sepoint

Output

Ramp Function Bate

Output lor Bamp

Output lor End

Main Setpoint (intemal)

Second Setpolnt

Local Setpolnt

Remote Setpolnt

Self Tune

Adaptive Tune

Self + Adaptive tune

Adap'Tune Trig'r Point

Alarm

1

Alerm 2

Proportional Band lnteoral time

Manuat rcset

Derivative time

Propband (2) lntegral tlme (2)

Manual reset (2)

Derivetlve ilme (2)

Relative Cool Galn (2)

Cuhack low

Cutback high

Output

I

llmit nemoto output

(Appllcable llmlt to output 1)

Output

1 cycle tlme

Reletlve cool

Output

2limit

Remote Output ltmit

(Appllcable to output 2)

Output 2 cycle tlme

Output 1 cycle time 2

(Output 2 hardware driven from outpul 1)

Output 1/2 deadband

Emissivity

Sensor break power

RL

Hc

Cr

CL td2

Cr2 cbl cbh

HI

Pb ti rES td

Pb2 t2 rES2

LSP rSP

St

AI

SAt

Atr

SP

OP

Pr

Or

END

SP1

SP2

AL1

Atz

RL

Cc

Hc2 db

ES

Sbr

25C

Max chch-

250C

25.C

Mid-span

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Dev=1

Full scale Hioh = display max.

Full scale Low

= display min

5,O/o

30O secs o%

60 secs o%

300 off off

100%

10.0 secs

1.0

0 or -100%

10.0 secs

10.0 secs

0

1.00 for PYR

0.00 for others

O/"

Parameters in italics are only included in listing if applicable

I

1

(

Table

2

Factory setting of additional commissioning values

(see table 1).

applicable to a valve positioner

Parameter Mnemonic Factory Value Customer

Proportional band lntegral time

Manual rcset

Derivative time

Travel time down on time

Cutback low

Cutback hish

Pot min. limit

Pot max. limit

Pb ri rES td n nd ot ut cbl cbh

PL

Ph

1O/"

30O secs o%

50 secs

60 secs

50 secs

0.1 sec

0.1 sec off off o%

1ocP/"

Parameters in itallcs are only included in listing if applicable

You ln th then any change made to the lactory setting above.

instrument being retumed to a servicacentre for repairs it can be required values.

2.2

PID

Controller

On loops where these values are not suitable, identified by the measured value oscillating recovering sluggishly from a disturbance, he commissioning values will have to or be modified by one of the three following methods:-

1) Self Tune

2) Adaptive Tune

3) Manual Tune

2.2.'.| Self Tune

Note: Self-Tune is sometimes known as Auto Tune.

The self-tuner ts one-shot algorithm which automatically tunes ters to suit new process loop conditions he instrument control parame-

Note: During full self tune the controller will apply either futl heat power or zero power or, if lined

aol

power during this sequence. Tuning at redued power is possible

iy

reducing

,HL, and/or'CL'to the power required.

For best results:a) The process value should be steady before commencing b) Use the usual start up situation self tune.

Tuning with derivative or integral initially rurned off will result in a Pl or PD control after self tune.

Self tune.is initiated, by scrolling through to 'St' on the lower display and fren simultaneously pressing both the raise and lower buttons.

The 'A-T' indicator is then illuminated, and the lower display indicates the setpoint at which the self tune sequence will occur

23

After selection the 'SP' indicator will flash tor 1 minute during whictt time changed, he sepoint may be if it is required to retune at a new setpoint either above or below the proc€ss value indicated on the upper display.

At tre end of the minute fre 'SP' indicator will stop flashing, indicating that the setpoint can longer be changed. The 'A-T' indicator will start flashing and continue to flash until the selfno tune has completed.

On completion tre lollowing parameters will be automatically adjusted.

Parameters modified by the Setf Tune Routine

Parameter

Proportional Band lntegral time

Derivative time

Cutback low

Cutback high

Heat Cycle time

Cool Cycle time

Relative Cool Gain

Mnemonic

Pb ri rd cb

l'

cbh'

Hc"

Cc"

Cr"

'

Only one ol hese parameters is modified by this routine and then only if the measured value was more than 5% ol span away from the setpoint at the commencemont of he self tune routine. lf tre measured value was initiallylower than setpoint, cbl is modified, and if higher cbh is modified.

"

All or some of these parameters may be missing from fre commissioning list, in which case they will not be set by his routine.

Note: Whilst self tune is acilve the abow parameterc cannot be altered.

Once the self tune sequence is compleled the flashing A-T'legend tums off.

Typical Sell Tune Sequence

LulSetpolnr

AnlffcialS4oint

PV nnE

+1*1"

Pwer 0

-10r,/"

Time complore (h€ar & @ol)

Tuno compl€le (heal only)

24

For more information on sell tune ask for the 818 engineers book.

2.2.2

Adaplive

Tune

Adaptive tune is a background algorithm which continuously monitors the error signal (PV-SP) and analyses the loop response during process disturbances.

lf the a[Lrithm recognises an oscillatory or under damped response it then recalculates he

P, landDparameters.

The value ol error signal required to activate adaptirre tune is called point

Adaptive Tune trigger

(Atr). This poiit is set automatically by the controller but may be manually readjusted in the range 0.1 to 25% of span. (minimum of 1"C on temperature ranges).

Adaptive tune should

1) Processes fu used in the lollowing cases.L

that require frequent parameter variations as a result of load, setpoint or other changing conditions.

2) Process that cannoi tolerate the rn/off sequence required lor the sell tune

Adaptive tune should not be used in the lollowing casesi

1) On processes that experience regular external disturbances trat could mislead adaptive tune.

2) On highly interactive multiloop applications. However, moderately interactive loops such as multi zone extruders should give no problem'

Adaptive tune is initiated by scrolling through to 'At' on the lower display and then simultaneously pressing both the raise and lower buttons.

The 'A-T' indicator will illuminate and will remain illuminated until adaptive-tune by is switched off again scrolling through to 'At' on the lower display and repeating the dual bunon press.

Typical Adaptive Tune Sequence

Measu red

Value

Lmp SeFoint

Triggor Point

Measured Value

Flelum lo

Setpoiil AnalFed

Adaptive

Aclivaled

t

Tum

Time

---.-t>

Whilst adaptive tune is selected the Pb, ti and td parameters cannot be c*ranged manually

For more information on adaptive tune ask lor the 818 Engineers book'

2.2.3 Self and Adaptive Tune

This is selected Ly using the mnemonic 'SAt' on the lower display which starts the controller otf in self tune mode anJ when complete automatically initialises adaptive tune. This is indicated on the front of the controller by the 'A-T' indication changing lrom flashing during self tune to steady illumination during adaptive tune.

25

2.2.4 ManualTune

The loop parameters can be set manually using the Ziegler-Nichols melhod.

Al normal running temperatures with the

tl'

and

td'switched

otf, the proportional band (Pb) should be reduced untilthe system just goes unstable. This is best observed by looking at the output power.

The values required 1o give stable control can be calculated using the value proportional band that just made the system unstable (Xp1) and the period of ol oscillation (T) in the following table:-

FINAL

CONTROL

LOOP

TYPE

SETPOINT OF CONTROLLER PARAMETERS

FOR CRITICAL DAMPING

PROPORTIONAL

BAND (Pb) z.XP1

INTEGRAL TIME

Co}.ISTANT (ri)

DERIVATIVE TIME ooNSTANT (rd)

P

PROPOBTIONAL

ONLY

P+l

PROPORTIONAL

PLUS

INTEGRAL

P.l.D.

THREE ]ERM z.?,.P1

1.67XP1

0.87

0.sT

o.121

Controller parameters calculated by the Ziegler-Nicholls method

CUTBACK

The above method

Tu/o that normally occurs when the measured value approacfies setpoint from a large offset.

lf he extra parameters 'cbl' and 'cbh' are used to control ttre overshoot and undershoot starl up sels the conkol parameters for optimum steady state control.

conditions are not

'cbh' should be set as follows.

satisfactory witr the parameters set as above, ,cbl' and set the low and high cx.rtback values ('cbl and cbh') to one proportional e.g. cbl

= cbh =

XP(%)

x

instrument span band width;

100 lf lhe start up conditions produce unacceptable overshoot or undershoot

'cbl'and'cbh'should be modified as follows:

,

26

S/P

Overshool

TEMP

M€asurod

Valu€

TIME

(a) ln the example shown 'cbl' should be set to

(a) cbl

= XP(%) x span + overshoot

100

Eurotherm Conlrols Componies

UK Regionol Soles qnd

Service

Soulhern Areo

Home Counlies, South

South Eost ond

Eurolherm Conlrols Limiied

Forodoy Close, Durringlon

Worthing

West Sussex 8N I 3 3PL

Telephone (0903)

Telex

Fox (0903)

693379

871 I

4 EUROWG G

265982

Midlonds Areo

Midlonds, South Woles,

Eost Anglio & Soulh West

Eurotherm Conlrols Limiled

Miller House

Corporolion Streel, Rugby,

Woruickshire CV2l 2DW

Telephone

Fox (0788)

(0788) 56201 l

536249

Norlhern Areq

North Woles, Scotlqnd ond Norlhern Counlies

Eurolherm Controls Limited

4/5 Chethom Courl

Colver Rood

Worringion

Cheshire WA2 8RF

Telephone

Telex

{0925) 5/2 I I

I

629852

Fox (0925)

41

3099

Overseqs Componies

Auslrolio

Eurotherm Ply. Ltd.

Telephone Sydney (2) 4777022

Telex AA74362

Fox l2l 4777756

Also regionol offices

Hong Kong

Telephone Hong Kong (5) 8733826

Telex 69257 EIFEL HX

Fox (5) 87001 48

Auslrio

Eurotherm GmbH

Telephone

Telex

Wien

10222)

I

I

3200

El AUT/A

787 601

FoxlO222) 7a7605

Belgium

Eurotherm E.V.

Telephone Antwerpen (3) 3223870

Telex 0463331 7 EIBNL B

Fox (3) 321 7363 lrelqnd

Eurolherm lrelond

Telephone Noos

Limited

(045) 79937

Telex 0500-60745 ETMA

Fox (045) 751 23

El

Itoly

Eurotherm 5.p.A.

Telephone Como (31) 977103

Telex 380893 EUROTH

I

Fox (31) 977512

Denmork

Eurotherm A,/S

Telephone Copenhogen

Telex 3231 7 TELMET

S

Fox

131)

872124

\31) 871622

Fronce

Eurolhem Automotion SA

Telephone Lyon (/8)

66) 943

Telex 380038 EURTERM F

Fox (78) 352490

Also regionol offices

Jopon

Eurotherm KK

Telephone Tokyo (3) 33638324

Telex

Fox

0232401 6

(3) 33638320

EUROJA

J

Also regionol olfices

Koreo

Eurolhem Koreo Limited

Telephone Seoul

12)

5548507

Telex EIKOR K23105

For (2) 5539655

Germony

Eurolherm Regler GmbH

Telephone Limburg (06431

)

2980

Telex 484791

EUROT D

Fox (06431) 2981 l9

Also regionol offices

Netherlonds

Euiolherm B.V.

Telephone Leiden {71) 41 i841

Telex 39073 EIBNL NL

Fox l7 1) 41 4526

Soles qnd Seryice in over 3O counlries

For couniries nol lisled obove oll enquiries/orders to:

Euroiherm Conlrols Limited:

Exporl Depl , Forodoy Close, Durrington, Worthing, West Sussex, BNI 3 3PL Englond

Telephone (0903) 268500

Telex 871 14 EUROWG G Fox

(0903) 265982

Printed in Englond

1 1

93

New Zeolond

Eurolherm Limited

Telephone Auckiond (9) 35881 06

Fox (9) 3581 350

Nomoy

Eurothem A/S

Telephone Oslo (66) 803330

Fox (66) 803331

Spoin

Eurolherm

Telephone

Espoio SA.

(l)

6616001

Fox (1

) 661

9093

Sweden

Eurotherm AB

Telephone Molmo (40) 435460

Telex 323 I 7 TELMET 5

Fox (40) 435520

Switzerlond

Eurolherm Produkte (Schweiz) A.G.

Telephone Zurich

(l)

8103646

Telex

Fox

827577 ESAG

(l)

8108920

Uniled Kingdom

Eurolherm Controls Limited

Telephone Worthing (0903) 268500

Telex

871l4 EUROWG G

Fox (0903) 265982

Also regionol offices

U.S.A

Eurolhem Controls ln.-

Telephone Reslon

Telex

{/03) 47)4870

899449 EUROTHERM RSTN

Fox (703) 4373

1

82

Also regionol offices

HA020l

7l

lssue 9

Eurotherm Ltd.

Sales Department

Faraday Close

Durrington

Worthing

West Sussex

BN13 3PL

Further

lnformation

For information

on

the configuration, calibration, digital comm;nication

and

detailed operating instructions

on your 818

controller, fill

in

and

return

this form

to

the

address over

the

page.

Name:

Tiile:

Company

Address:

Date

Please

send

me a

copy ol the 818

Engineers

book

(HA021452)

containing details

of

the

configuration,

calibration

and

detailed operating

procedu re.

Please

send

me a

copy

of

the

Communication

book (HA020161)

containing

the communication protocol

and mnemonics.

TICK

AS APPROPRIATE

PHOPORTIONAL -

ACTION

RAMP -

RESET -

REVERSE ACTION .

RUN -

SCROLL -

SELF TUNE -

SERVO STABT -

SINGLE STEP.

TOGGLE.

With proportional action the output of the instrument varies propotionally to the error between setpoint and process value. The propband is the range of process value over which this linear gain action occurs before the output saturates at maximium or minimium.

This is often expressed as a percentage of the instrument span.

The gain of the instrument varies inversly as the propband increases. (See Manual Reset)

One segment of a programme where the cbntroller setpoint moves trom one level to another linearly during a fhed period of time.

An action which returns a completed or running programme to the start condition i.e. controlling on SP1, SP2 or remote S.P.

Control action such hat the output decreases as the process value tncreases.

An action which starts a programme running or restarts it from a hold condition.

A method of presenting a large number of mnemonics or numerals, on the display, in sequence, so allowing the operator to make a choice.

A facility which, when enabled, perlorms a number of

'on'and 'otf' sequences ol the controller output, measuring the influence this has on the measured value From these results the value of proportional band, integral time and derivative time plus, under certain circumstances, cut back low, cut back high, heat cycle, cool cycle time and relative cool gain, for optimum control, are calculated and written into the commissioning mnemonics.

A condition at the start of a programme where the lirst ramp starts from the current measured value instead ol a lixed level.

A form of scrolling where the rate at which the parameter or numeral changes is controlled to one at a time.

The selection of two states (i.e. AUTO & MANUAL) using a single push button. The first press gives one state (AUTO) and he second press the other (MANUAL). A further press will return to the lirst state (AUTO).

4.3

Error Codes

Entering table of invalid parameters will cause an error flag to be set within he instrument. Below is error codes and corrective acti on. For all corrective actions enter configuration mode.

(These apply to sottware version 3.1 1 and later).

Enor Code

CEn

CEr

Cch

Meaning lnvalid end to Confio lnvalid Config parameter value uonfig

Parameter checksum error lnvalid hard,vare ident

Corrective action

Scroll to clear press

'A'and

'V' keys.

Re-enter correct value(s)

Re-enter corruptd value(s)

HEr

Check that output modules fitted are valid then scroll to 'idn'

press'A' and'V'keys.

Re-enter corru pted value(s)

Pch

Parameter checksum error

Note: Atl correclve actions must be completed by scrolling to'CLr' and prets

'A'

and'l'

keys together.

54

lf any other error messages appears on the screen contact your nearest Eurotherm engineer

HOLD -

HOLDBACK -

[4AX

MEASURED

VALUE IN

DISPLAY

UNITS

Oy

AquE

<flJ

The freezing of a running programme, in time, for the duration of the condition.

A hold condition forced onto values deviation a running programme by he measured from fre setpoint by more than a predetermined amount.

Holdback can be one of three types illustrated below:-

Oy q_q4 dqHE

<flJ

8s""9

Es3?

PROGRAMME

SETPOINT

MN

DEVIATION o

U

Ea luu

<:il

Es5

DEVIATION

LO&

DEVIATION,I

BANO

TIME

INTEGRAL ACTION.

KEYLOCK.

LOCAUREMOTE -

LOOP COUNT-

MANUAL RESET.

OUTPUT RELAY -

PROGRAMME lntegral aclion is used to achieve zero steady state control eror.

The product of error and proportional gain is integrated into an accumulalor which is added to output signal.

A problem for with integral aclion is that when large error signals exist a significant period of time, such as following a large scale setpoint step, the integral accumulator

The assumes a very large value.

enor signal must then go negative to reduce the integral accumulator. This will cause overshoot. Various steps are taken to reduce this effect when the outputs are saturated. Additionally a facility 'Cutback'is provided. (See Cutback)

A condition enabled by a digital input or digital communications hat disables the operation of all push buttons.

Alternative selections of the working sepoint. Eiher a value stored within the controller (local) or an analogue signal brought into ttre controllers rear terminals (remote).

The number of times hat an entered programme is repeated automatically betore the'E

N D' condition becomes actiw.

ln controllers with proportional only control, manual reset is used to provide a user defined output offset such that the controller can provide control with zero offset.

Relays that are normally driven by the alarm output condition but can, as an alternative, be driven by segments of the programme.

A preset profile of the controller setpoint made up of ramps and dwells, together with the sequence of state of the output relays.

53

4.2

Glossary

ol

Terms

ADAPTIVE TUNE.

ALARM -

A facility which, when enabled, monitors the process and, if necessary, updates the proportional band, integral time and derivative time to ensure continuous optimum straight line control

A condition that exists if the process variable exceeds internally gtored alarm setpoints.

These setpoints can be:-

MIN

ZERO

______1I>

MEASURED VALUE

IN DISPLAY

UNITS

MAX

52

AUTO/MANUAL.

AUTO/BEPEAT -

CUTBACK ACTION -

DIRECT ACTION -

DERIVATIVE ACTION

DWELL.

Alternative control conditions that can be selected within the controller.

Manual - An open loop condition, in which the power to the process is manually set and not influenced by the sensor.

Aulo

-

A closed loop condition, in which the power to the process is automatically computed and set by the sensor output relative to the setpoint.

A time saving device to scroll quickly through a list of mnemonics with a hesitation at key values.

Cutback is provided to improve the large step response

When cutback is of PID control.

set to zero it has no effect on control action.

When the process value is below setpoint by an error value exceeding the cutback low limit, the integral maintain output at maximium. accumulator is adjusted such as to

When PV becomes greater than setpoint minus cutback low, normal PID control action resumes.

A similar but inverse action occurs for cutback high. (See lntegral)

Conkol action such that the output increases as the process value lncreases.

Derivative action is normally used to give a fast response to changes in process value and to improve process stability.

Alternatively derivative action may be configured to act on the error signal which is useful in ramping applications.

A time entered into a programme during which the setpoint remains constant.

I

!

I

Digital lnputs

Dil

UPI

DbUP 2 r€

NO

Aulo Manual

L@l

Femole

Adaplive Ture

Keylock

OIG l/P 1 up key'

OOG l/P 2 d@n key'

Pdarel€rS@irly

So[ lure sP 2i SP

Slep r" prog numb€r"'

Pto zPlD I

Bun,Hel

Ramp

Hun/Bold

HoldRuf,

SkrD S4menl

LR

KL

UK

PS s2

,," ss

'l

DX

i.

s2

SP

P2 n"

BH

HR ss

' These oplions musl h slded log€lher ll selded no other rnpul is posslble

"

Nol available wilh remoE rim

"'

Mutually erclusvs wilh Oual PIO

Sonuare Oplions

Fudion ilailral Key E.Eblod

cd tudbn taon T/C lnptrl lderEl Compen$lion

Enerol rc Rel

0

Eftmd 45'C H€|15

Enemd 50'C Rel 50

Fudion lnlegral aM Derivanv€ SeG lnlororal and O€irvalve in Mrns hlegral and Derilalive rn Se6 wilh dual PIO lnlegral and Derivalive in Mrns

Code

E

D cd

N

IN

Cde s

SS

Code

Power Feedbacl

P

No Power F@dMck N'

Nol availade on dc or vP oulpls lMrelore enl€r N

Plogrammel

Rsnp ScCG/Drroll Scelc

Bamp Scale

SP unils por minule

SP unils p€r hour

Time lo largpl mins

Time lo largel hours

Drell Scale

Dwell rn mrnutes

Dwell in HNrs c&

MN

HF

MT

HT

Cod€

MN

HN

Pq6ffiSeglmts or retransmEson lhetr oulwl slages can be drlven hom lhe segrenls ol enler'PHOG nto lb program FoI lhrs leature llE requred alarm lield

HoldbGl

Cde

No Holdbacl

Band deviation holdb&k

Hhh devraxon holdback

N

H

U

L

Nole:

For h€h re$lulon ramp rale sufrrt @de

HH UH or LH

H grvrng

51

818

Programmer

Coding

(continued)

Cum

DtloL, [r.d.y lln hr tltlt

Oae

UPI

Dl9

W2

Solma6

Opdmt nrmp frwrll

Holdb.ck

lmCdntanJ

Ffrond (DlNlL

Ni Cr^i Al X

C'rCd

T

PI13(RUPi R

PtTBRh/PIS

P(xB RUPffi

Rh B wflmRe

W5%FeJUl2ffi

Na Crr'C@ E

RlB

RmUO%Ah

&

Re C W5% Re/W

PffiRilPIGRh

Pbrd

I r

Wfl

26% Re t{eNi lffi tldyb&rum

W:H

H6AV

5%

Re D w/ne 5% WRe 26%

NirGiUNisI

Rlm dm a

O'C

Pyrmder(mld) t d)

Pyr@er (OOO3

PyrmerROm

Pyrmler lwl

Ptrmder

DTI

Pyffier

DTr/10

Prc@erROA

Pymler

FP|GP lO

Py@er

FPlgp t t

Pyoreler FPGP 12

Py(mer

FPIGP 20

Pywlet

FPIGP 21 firear

Suare

@l lnput Coding

Crm

Seled l@ ltE 6rEe li$ sh@n babry ilot6

(1)

(r)

(l)

(l)

(t)

(l)

(r)

(r)

(r)

(r)

(l)

(l)

(l)

(r)

(t)

(t)

(r)

(l)

(l) t2t

11)

'(4)

'(1

1{)

'(1)

14)

14)

'(4)

14)

'(4)

'(4)

14)

(3)

(3)

Remm.ded

Min C Max 6r{E

0cb6frr rcb6mc

25OC lo l20OC

5)c b /0OC

@

0C b 160@ lo 16il)C

20@

@

0c b r820c b 2aDc oC b 2ilDc b TtnC znc b tao@ rcbafi)c

0 lo a)oOC

0c b ta)oc rcba@

OC lo l l(x)C

0c oc b b

700c r00c

2{nc axxr rc b r30@

,aDc b omc

&)oc b t550c b b r/$c

500c rqlc b 2500c r2@c t500c m@ b b

250@ m@ b l7@c ffib90c

70OC b

I3OOC 5mV lo@C to t850C

40@ gmc b 750c b l rmc qm b

19999

Code

01

03

30

45

70

€

5r

54

12 n

24

25 n n

3

35

04

05

06 m m

11 p a il a2

04

85

s

00

92

Min

Span

100c

1 o(rc 02 r 25C r 50c

600c

60oc llm asoc

500c

I

00c rfi)oc

500c

1900c r

50c

5&C

6mc

I

000c lmc

I 50C

50c

5mv fiv

5(rv tnV hv hv hv

B

5mV hv tnV

B.Da.y lldDltCLy Lt

Tlc* sh@l(, b6 $l€cted lrom lh€ re@mmendd minimum and maimum rarEos shown rn Curue lmlud€ decrfral pinl Fsitbn

Thrs is esfcrally rmponant on lirear raarge hita

NONE

"c

"F

K

MV v

MA

(Or stFjly ur, to 5

6ardss)

' DEimdpftdilail*mthe* raE6

" Ftr lirea nqrts *Eiivdy must rcl tE less lhan slvgdiod tJores (10. (2), (3) aM (4) r€ter to tnFis 8or

50

Alams 1 ard 2

Tvp.

oe$alion Eand

Doviation Hiqh

Deviatih Low

Full Scale High

Full Scale Low

Relay in

Shte

Alarm

!sl li 2nd

Oigil

Cde

ME

DB

OH

OL

FH

FL

3rd Oigil

Code

Ereroised

De emrgid

E

D llole: On VaMe PGilbrer veEion 6ing a Fe€oadr

Pol (FB in @ltrJl 2 I Alam 2 must b€ 'NONE-

Type

Code

0'2omA

4020m4

0-5v

0 10v r5v

2 10V

0m420

4mA20

0v5

0v 10

!v5

2V10

Communicallons

Daeltl

Type Cod€ FuMbn

C&

Oieid RSa2

Digilal FS485

J-Bus o 85232

J-Bus o RS485

NOilE

232

485

J32

J85 l{ore

Baud

Baud

Fde ffi

Fde 4800

Baud Fate 3600

Baud Rale 24m

Bad Rde t2m

Bad Bate 600

Bad Bate 300

NONE

5

48

35

24

12

06

03

ArdogD

Re[an nput Type

Femole S€tpid

Remote Trim

Remote S/P wilh

LGI Tnm

Oulpul marrmum

1sr Oigil x

T

L

Pr@$

Vanable

SetFrnl

E(or

Prelir

1st DEil

S

E lnpul

Code

Type

2nd O€il onwards

Code

Beran Fundron 2nd DEI

Onwards

None

0 20mA

4-20mA

05v

0 10v

NONE

0m420

4mM0

0v5

0vl0

None

0 2mA

4'20m4

05v

0 rov r5V

2 10V

NONE

0m420

4mMO

0v5

0v 10

1V5

2Vl0

Alam

1

RdraBmrsbn

Pre

Variatilo

S€eoint

Em

Aldrn 2

RemelnBj

R€de SeFoint

ReMe Tim

Rmte

S/P wilh LGI Trm

Marimm otrpl Porer

PelL

Cd b

M s

E

P6lir to

(h x

T

L

Alarm channels can andor iloler b usd lor malo€re np(js oulpls il ml reqrred ld alarms hy m refansmsff NlFl ard ore remole mn, is allo*€d wilhrn lhe @nrolbr

Option

Fslon Termrnal

Screw Terminal

Faston 24V addc

Sd# 24V adft

Code

FN

SN

FN24 sN24

49

818

Programmer Coding

BoJlc

Paoduct lnpul output OuFut

2

ALm ALm Cmrc

TvD.

Cmm

Fuml.

Opto

Basic Product

818 Programmer

818 Programmer 4

818 Prqramme, 15

Code

818P

81 8P4

81 8P1 5 lnputs

Thermmuple

Resrslan€ Thermometet

0 2mA

4 20mA

05v

15V

1 10V

1

2

3

Code

TC

RTO

0mA20

4mPO

0v5

1V5

0vr 0

8mVg

Nolel ln lhe inpul coding, only curues where Ihe numbers rn parenthesrs malch lhe numbers above are available

Outputs

Output

1

Oulpul 2

Reverse Adrnq

Drreo

Conrol

Ac!re Control

Conlrol on Oulpul 2

(OpFsile adon Io oulpul 1)

R

D c

Serprnl

Etot s

E

Conlrol by programme' PROG

Note

1

For normal temPralure confol sel*l

Beverse AcIng Control

Nore

Oulpul 2 acton omsle ol oulPUl

1

2

The Retansmrssron oplron rs nol avarlable wlh Analque Comms, or when retransmrssDn sFcilred n

'

Nor available wilh VP/ On/OH conkol

Relay Lrnear

Relay Non Lrnear

Relay ON/OFF

Logrc Lrnear

LogE Non Lrnear

LogE ON/OFF

Tilac Inear

Tnac Non Lrnear

Tnac ON/OFF

No oulput lsolated 0 5v lsolated 0 10V lsolated 1 5V lsolated lsolated

2 10V o 1omA lsolated 0 20mA lsoleted 4 2omA

Oulpul

1

Oulpul 2

RLY

.BLYF

.LGCF

TRI

.TRIF

NONE

0v5

0v 10 rv5

2V 10 omA1 0

0mP0

4m420

BLY

HLYN

RLYF

LGC

LGCN

LGCF

TRI

TRIN

TRIF

NONE

0v5

0v 10

1V5

2Vt0 omA1 0

0mA20

4mro0

Relay Outpul

Tr ac Oulpul

WIhour Fedback Por

FB

NONE

Nole: W(h MVC no Outpul 2 preix s requrred

Wilh oulpul 2 prelx M, S E W only dc outpls aPPly

ON/OFF on Oi PI resrcls O/Pz to ON/ OFF unlessprefirMSEW

I

48

I

Dlgltal lnpuls

Dig

UPl

Dig l/P 2

Nore

Aulo Manual

L@al Romote

Ad4live Tune

Keylock

DIG UP

I up key'

DIG l/P 2 down key'

Parameler S€cuflly

Sell tune

9PZSP1"

PtD ZP|O

1

NO

LF

KL

UK

PS s;

NO

.:

OX

ST

S2

P2

Thsse options musl ll tE selded t4€lher selded no olher rnpul is possibl€

Not avarlable wlh remole trim

Sottware Optlons

FuMion

Manual Key Enabled

Menuel Kev

DseM

Cold

Judion

Non T/C lnpul lnlernal Compensalon

Enemal 0C Rel

Enemal 45'C Rei

Enemal S'C Rei

E o

Cod€

N

IN

0

45

50

Code lnlegral and Oerivalive rn SeG lnlergral and lnlegral and

Derivatve rn Mins

Deivatve rn

Se6 wilh dual PID lntegral and Oerivalive in Mins with dual PID

S

M

SS

Fundion

Power Feedback

No Power FeedDac*

Code

N'

Nol available on dc or vP outputs lherelore enter N

47

818 Controller

Coding

(continued)

Curya

O.plly

Iln

Dl.pl.y

Lr

Unlt3

OIS uP1

Dlo

U?2

Sotuaaa lnpul Coding

Cuda

Sebd lrom the range hst shown b€low

Noles kon Conslanlan J

F€lKonst (DlN)L

N' CriNi Al X

Cu/Con T

Pr1 3"/"Rh/Pr R

PIlO%RilPIS

PI3@O RVPS% Rh B

WA / 26% Re

W5/"F.€1W261"

Nr Crloon E

Pr1P. Bh/Pr4o"/.Fh

W5% neru 26% Re C

Pt20"/. BilPt4o% Rh

Plannel

1

I w/W 26% Re

Nni

18./" Molybdenum

W3"/" Reltl 25a" ee D w/Be 5% w/Re 26%

NicrosiUN6il N

Pllm ohm al 0'C

Pyrometsr (Oo04 Land)

Pyromelsr (O003 Land)

Pyrom6ler BO 26

IVDI

Pyromeler DTI

Pyromeler DT1/10

Py.om€ter RO 23

Pyromeler FPIGP 10

Pyromeler FP/gp

1 1

Pyromeler FP|GP 12

Pyromeler FP|GP 20

Pyromeler FP|GP 2r

Lirear

Square rml

{1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(r)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(l)

(1)

(1)

(l)

(1)

(r)

'(4)

'(4)

'(4)

'(4)

(3)

(3) t2l

'(4)

'(4)

'(4

'(4)

'(4)

'(4)

'(4)

'(4)

R@mm€nded

Mrn E

Md ranges

0c

0c

-250C

250C

0c

0c

200c

0c

0c

0c

200c

0c

0

0c

0c

0c

0c

OC

0c

-200c

800c

700c l

00c r

000c r200c

1SoC

800c

500c

700c

1

00oc

400c

500c

'90o0

800c t

5sc r

400c

50oc

2500c

2500c

3000c

1

700c

900c

1300c

1

850C

750C r r00c

I 99S9

780C r

800c

2300c

2000c

I

200c

22@C

1 l00c

24oAC

2000c

13mC

600c

500c

1

200c

400c

1600c

1

600c r

820c

2300c

2300:

Code

35

38

45

70

48

5l

54

84

05

86

00

92

61

62

63

64 a2

8:)

11

12

23

24

25

2A

29

01

02

03

04

05

06

0€

09

Mn

Span

1

00c l00c

125C r50c

600c

600c r000c

450C

500c

100c r 000c

500c

1900c

1

50C

500c

600c

1

000c

1

000c

1

50C

50c

5mV

5mV

5mV

5mv

5mV

5mV

5mv

5mv

5mV

5mv

5mV

Olspl.y lln/Ol.pl.y Iar

TlEse should be selded kom tl€ r@mmended mrnrmum and maimum ranges shown rn Curye lrclude d€crmal pornl postion - This E esp€cially rmponanl on lirear rarE€

Unll.

NONE

K

MV v

MA

(Or specily up to 5 char&ters)

' O*imal rcrnls not available on lhese rang6s

"

For knear rnNls *nsirvity musl nol LE less lhan 5!VrdEil

Notes (1), (2), (3) and (4) reler lo lnNls Box

46

Communlcslions

Dlgn l

Type

Cod€ Fundion Code

Nom

Digital HS232

Digilal FS,{t5

J-Bus O RS232

J-Bus o RS485

M-Bus @R5232

M-Bus OHS485

NONE

232

€5

J32

J85

M32

M85

None

Baud Hate 9600

Baud Bate 4800

Baud Rale 3600

Baud Rale 24oo

Baud Rate 1200

Baud Rale 600

Baud Rale 300

NONE

96

48

36

24

12

06

03

AElogF

Bemole SoFoint

Femote Tnm

Hemote S/P wilh

L@lTrim

Oulput maximum power lnpul Type

Preiix x

T

L

Proess Variable

Selpornt etot

Hetran

Fundion

Prelir lsl

Drgn

S

E lnput

Code

Code

TyfE

2nd orgil Betan FuncXon 2M O€il

Onwards

Onwards

None

0-20m4

4-20m4

0-5v

0-10v

NONE

0m420

4m420

0v5

0v10

None

0 20mA

4 zOmA

0-5v

0 rov

1-5V

2 10V

-5lo+5V

NONE

0m420

4nizi

0v5

0v 10

1V5

2V 10

5V5

Optlon

F6lon Termrnal

Sdew T6rminal

Faston 24V d&

Sdew 24V a</dc

Code

FN

SN

FN24 sN24

45

818

Controller

Coding lnPln o|rpql

1

818S otnpd

2

Aam Aam

2

Comms Cohm!

Funcl.

Optlon lnputs

Them@uple

R€sislame Thermomeler

0 20mA

4-20m4

05v

15V

I t0v

(1)

12l

(3)

(4)

Code

TC

HTD

0m420

4mA20

0v5

1V5

1Vl0

8mV8

Note ln lhe rnpul coding, only cuNes where lhe numbers rn parenthes6 malch lhe numbers above

44

Oulputs

Reve.se Aclrng Confol

Dtrecl Adrng Confol

Conlrol on

(Opposne

Outrut 2 adon Io output l)

Selrcrnl

Eror

Oulpul 1

Outpul 2

R

D c s

E

Note 1:

For normal temErature control sel@t

Nole

Reverse AcUng Conlrol

Oulpul 2 eton opposile ol oulpul l

2: The Retansmrssren oplon rs nol available wilh Anabgue Comms. or wh6n relransmrssDn sfcil€d rn

1

Relay Lrrear

Belay Non Lrrea

Belay ON/OFF

Logic Lrrear

LogE l{on Lrrear

Logrc OIVOFF

Tr&

Lr@a,

Trie

Non Linear

Triac ON/OFF

No oulrut lslated o 5v lelated 0 10V lsldd

1 5V lelated 2-10V l$lated 0 tomA lsolated 0 20mA lsolaled 4 20mA

Idd V.lve Codrolls

Oulpul

1

Outpul 2

RLY

.RLYF

LGC

.LGCF

TRI

.TRIF

NONE

0v5

0v1 0 rv5

2V10

0mA10

0m420

4m420

RLY

RLYN

RLYF

LGC

LGCN

LGCF

TBI

TRIN

TFIF

NONE

0v5

0v 10

1V5

2V10 omA1 0

0m420

4mA2O

Relay Oulpul

Tnac Oulput

Wilh Feedbacd Pol

Wnhoul Feedback Pol

FB

NONE

NoE:

Wnh MVC no Output 2

Wilh prefir is requ[ed outpl 2 prelx M S, E W only dc oulPUls amly

ON/OFF on O/P1 resrcts O/P2 to ON/OFF unlessprefirMSEW

Alams 1 and 2

Type

Nore

Deviation Band

Devialon High

Deviaxon Low

Full Scale HiJh

Full Scale Low

Relay Slale in Alarm

1sl E 2nd

Digil Code

NONE

OB

DH

DL

FH

FL

3rd Oigil

Code

Erergrsed

De ereei*d

E

D

Note: On Valve Posilioner vc:srcn usrnq a Feedbaak

Pot (FB in outpul 2 ) Alarm 2 must bc'NONE"

Type

0 20mA

4 2OmA

0,5v

0 10v

15V

2 10V

Alarm

1

Relransmrssron

Code

0mP0

4m420

0v5

0v1 0

1V5

Code

SelfDrnt

Eror

S

E

Alarm 2

Remote lnpul Cod€

Remole SetFrnt

Remote Tnm

Bemote S/P wilh Local

Marrmum Outpul Power

Trm x

T

L

Alarm channels can b used lor analogue tnpul, oulpls, nol requrd lor alarms

Noler Only one relransmssron rnpul is allowed wfhrn lhe outpt and one remote conroller

Section

4.0 -

Relerence Section

4.1

Labels and Coding lnstruments are configured lo fre ordering code before leaving the factory. Any changes made to fre configuration of the instrument should be recorded for luture reference.

To establish which features are included in the insfument fre ordering code on the side cover of the instrument may be interpreted using the coding chart shown.

43

PROGBAMS AND BAMPS (C8)

='ABCO

(A) 0

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

No Holdback band dev holdback high dev holdback low dev holdback no holdback band dev holdback high dev holdback low dev holdback normal resolution ramp rate normal resolution ramp raie normal resolution ramp rate normal resolution ramp rate high resolution ramp rate high resolution ramp rate high resolution ramp rate high resolution ramp rate

Segment Times

(B) 0

1

2

3 ramp tn mnutes ramp in hours ramp rn mtnutes ramp in hours

Run/Hold, Reset, Selection

(c)

0 rudhold lront/rear

1

2

3 run/hold rear only run/hold fronVrear run/hold rear only

(dwell in minutes)

(dwell in minutes)

(dwell

(dwell in hours) in hours)

(reset lronVrear)

(reset fronVrear)

(reset rear only)

(reset rear only)

Controller Action

(D)

0

no ramp or p.ogrammer lunction

1

ramp lunction

2 programmer

(ramp set as a rate)

3 programmer

(ramp set as time to target)

4

multi

programmer

(ramp set as a rate)

5

muli

programmer

(ramp set as time to target)

Text in italics applies to the 8185 antroller cnly

42

I coMMUNICATIONS tNpuT/ouTpuT (c7) = 'ABCO'

(A)

0

(unused)

Self and Adaptive Tune

(B) = 0

neitheravailable

= 1

St and At available kont and rear

= 2

St kont and real, At rear only

= 3

At front and rear, St rear only

= 4

St and At rear only

= 5

fast St and

At available lront and rear

= 6

fast St front and rear, At rear only

= 7

At lront and rear, last Sr rear only

= 8

fast St and At rear only

Analogue Communicalion Relransmission type

(c) = o

current

= 1

voltage

Communjcation Hardware

(D) = 0

disital

= I

analogue

Normal lune on instruments wrth cool channel

41

40

CoNTROLLER OPERATION (C6)

='ABCO'

Decimal Point Position

(A) = 0

XXXXX

= .l xxxx x

= 2

XXXXX

= 3

XX.XXX

pyrometer l

flcot

RT linear ol square root

Sets the decimal poinl position lor both upper and lower displays

Auto Manual Selection

(B) = 0

nomarual

= 1

manual lronYrear

= 2

manual rear only

Selpoint

(c)

Track Mode

0 while in remote SP, hold SP1

1 while in manual, hold working SP while in remote SP, hold SP1

2

3 while in manual, working SP tracks PV while in remote SP, SP1 tracks working SP while in manual, hold working SP while in remote SP, SP1 track working SP while in manual, working setpoint tracks PV

Sets the value o[ the working selpoint when the instrument is switched lo manual and also the value of SP1 when switched [o remote. These setpoints can either remain at the value manually entered (HOLD) or take the value of the working setpoint or the measured value (PV).

Communicalions Type

(D) 0

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

Ascii Bi-Synch communication

Modbus

no

parity

integer only

J-Bus

no

parity

integer only

Modbus

even

parity

inleger only

J-Bus

even

parity

integer only

Modbus

no

parity

full resolutron

J-Bus

no

parity

full resolution

Modbus

even

pariry

full resolulion

J-Bus

even

parity

full resolution

CoMMUN|CATTONS (C5)

=

,ABCO

,

Digital Comms Speed

(A) 0

I

96O0 baud

4800 baud

5

6

2

3

4

3600 baud

2400 baud

'1200 baud

600 baud

300 baud

Remote Analogue lnput and Second Setpoinl

(B) = 0

no

remote

remole + local setpoint

SP2 available

SP2 not available

(LS

P)

(fronurear)

2

3

4

5

5 remote + local setpoint

(LSP)(rear only) remote only(fronureao remote only (rear only) output power limit

(heat)(rear only) output power limit

(cool)(rear only)

SP2 not available

SP2 available

SP2 available

SP2 available

SP2 ava ab e

Sets the function ol the input to the analogue communications or remote input..

Analogue Retranmission

(c)

0 none

1 setpoint

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

PV e((o( output power inverted setpoint inverted PV inverted error inverted output power the f unclion of the relransmission signal trom either the analogue communication board or

'oulputs'

2 or 3.

Analogue lnput Otfset

0

analogue input without oifset

1

analogue inpur wih 20% otfset

39

DIGITAL INPUT ADc & SECURITY DEFINITION

(c4)

='ABCD'

Supply Frequency

(A) 0 and Digital lnput 2 fiHz

+l-2Hz supply & 60Hz +/. 0.3H2 supply (default)

1

6OHz +^2Hz supply

2

3

5OHz +t-2Hz and dig in 2

=

6OHz +l-2Hz and dig in 2 =

PID 2

PID

I PID

1

2l

PID

1

4

5

SOHz +l-2Hz and dig in 2

60Hz +l-2Hz and dig in 2

=

= prog.

Wq. no. monitor/step no. monitor/step

'

Digit (C) must be ser to 9.

Parameter lvlodification Security

(B) 0

1

2

3

4

5 no modification of any parameter is possible modification modification of SP1, SP2 only of SP1, SP2, AL1,AL2 only.

modification ot SP1, SP2, and programmer or ramp rate parameters modrfication of SPl,SP2,AL1

,

AL2 and programmer or ramp parameters all paramelers may be modified

C4(B) determines how many of the scloll parameters may be modified when rhe security access is selected

ie. 1)

Switch on the microprocessor board is open.

2\

lf digital input 1 is configured, C4(D) = 7 and dig in I is set.

DIGITAL INPUT 2

(c)

0

none

1

auto/manual

2

remote analogue input enable

3

self tune

4

ramp function

5

runlhold (programmer 818P/4/15 only)

6

hold/run (programmer 818P/4/1 5 only)

7

second setpoint

8

skip current segment

9

refer to digit (A)

DIGITAL INPUT

1

(D) none

1 auto/manual

2

3

4

5

6 remote analogue input enable adaptive tune keylock run/reset (programmer

81 8P/4/1 5 only) digital input

1

- up key digital input 2 - down key (C will be ignored)

I

7

9

Parameter modification security skip current segment second setpoint ln sottware verslons previous to 4.11, C4(D) = 5 has the Iunction reset only.

Note; if a digilal comms board is tined then Dig in 3 has the function, to release keylock atter activation by dig comms.

38

I

ALARM DEFtNtTtON (C3)

=.ABCD'

Prcportronal Band

(A) = o

prop band in percent

= 1

prop band in display units

= 2

prop band in percent

= 3

prop band in display units l l

Single set ol commissioning values

Dual set of commissioning values

Commissioning value set includes; plD, Man, Reset, Rel Cool Gain and Approach

A arm

(B)

0

no alarm 1(relransmlssion possible on output 3)

DH (devialion high)

2

DL (deviation low)

3

DB (deviation band)

4

FSH (full scale high)

5

FSL (full scale low)

6'

digital outpul (prog/amme segment drive)

7

digital output (control via comms)

'818P/4/15 only

A arm

(c)

2

0

1

4

5

6

7

2

3

'8l8P/4/15 only no alarm 2 (remote inpur possible on channel 4)

DH (deviation high)

DL (deviation low)

DB (deviation band)

FSH (full scale high)

FSL (full scale low) digital output (programme segment drive) digital output (control via comms)

Alarm Relay States

(D) = 0

A1 and A2 de-energised in alarm

= 1

Al de-energised. A2 energised in alarm

= 2

A1 energised, A2 de-energised in alarm

= 3

A1 and A2 energised in alarm

37

36

PID AND OUTPUTS (C2)

='ABCD'

(A) 0

1

2 output 1 and output 2 separate output 2 equals output 1' output '1 and output 2 separate output 2 equals outPut 1'

'

Not available on V P version

(B)

1 a no power feedback reverse acting power feedback reverse actlng no power feedback direct acting power feedback direct acting

1

I derivative error driven derlvative

PV driven

(c)

(D)

3

4

5

0

1

2 a

4

5

6

I

7

0

1

Z outpul 1- normal output 2- normal (PlD) outPut 1- raise, outpul 2- lower outpul 1- normal output 2- inverted (PlD) oulpul

1- rcise, oulput 2- lonet output f- inverted output 2- normal (PlD) oulput 1- lower, oulput 2- raise ourpur 1- inverted oulput 2- inverted (PlD) outpul

1- lower, oulPul 2- raise output 1

- raise, oulput2 - lower assymelic valve outPUt 1 - lower, output2 raise assymetic valve

PID

PID

PID

PID

ON/OFF

heat

ON/OFF mol

ON/OFF

heat

no cool valve valve

PID

heat heat heat heat

positioner no cool

PID

PID cool (linear) cool (non-linear)

ON/OFF mol positioner with position potentiometer

heat

OP 2 dig out. Control via prog.

Itens in ilalics applicable to valve positioner model only.

3.3

ConfigurationParameters

,ABCD'

TNPUTS AND UNTTS

(Cl)

=

(A)

0

3

4

1

2

5

6

7 internal CJC external 0'C external 45"C external 50oC internal CJC external 0oC external 45"C external 50"C

CAL TRIM lN pV's

CAL TRIM

IN ENG UNITS

(B) 0

1

4

5

2

3

'"C' ti and td in secs

'"'F' li and td in secs

"'K' ti and td in secs

'"C' ti and td in mins

'"F' ti and ld in mins

'K'

ti and td in mins

(cD) 00

01

02

03

08

09

10

'I

1

04

05

06 o7

12

't3

14

15

'16

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

17

18

19

20

J

JD

K

T

R

S

N

B

WW26ENG

W5,4,V26ENG

E

P1O/4ORHS c

R20l40RH

Platinel

11

WM/26%Re

Ni/Ni8%Moly w3/w25HER ws^v26BOC

Nisil

DTl

DT1/21680

Q003

RO23 (64)

RO26 or K 35-2-3 (54)

Q004

RT100

(48)

(70) linear lo 8mV linear to 20mV linear to 50mV linear ro 8mV(20% oflset) linear to 20mV(20% offser) linear ro 50mV(20% oFfset) square root square root (20% offset) linear-8to+8mV

lvDl

FP/GP

(61)

10

(82)

FP/GP

FP/GP

FPTGP

FPTGP

11

(83)

12

(84)

20

(8s)

21

(86)

123)

(24l,

(2sl

(28)

(2e)

(s3)

(3s)

(38)

(4s)

(62)

(63)

(s1)

(01)

(02)

(03)

(04)

(0s)

(06)

(08)

(0s)

(11)

(12)

INPUT

TYPE

(s2l

(s2) c.J.c.

and

Trim

UNITS

Eurotherm input ade (XX)

35

34

Note: The retainer is handed. When reassembling the instrument ensure that the connector on the retainer aligns with the stakes on the boatds.

7

The daughter board to be removed can be withdrawn by pulling away from the bezel while pushing the remaining daughter boards irrto the bezel.

8. The diagram below shows the location of the various output modules and the @mmunications boards in the instrument. lf any ol hese boards are changed it is necessary to enter configuration as described in 3 1 above, scroll to 'idn' and push the up and down buttons together. Then scroll on to the mnemonic 'CLr' and again push the up and down button together.

POWER SUPPLY

BOABD

COMMUNICATOTIS

EOARD

(oplihal)

MICNOPf,OCESSOR

POTENTIOMETEE

COMPONEMT rcSlTION

CHANNEL 3 (ALABM II cHANNEL 2 TCOOL)

ChatrEl t o/P

(Hst)

Rdsy

Logc

Triac oc

REAF VIEW

Chennd 4

(Altil 4

FCay O/P

Fmob l/P

ChemC 3

(Alsm

RCey

OC o/P l)

ChEffd 2 (C@l)

F.tensmision FlCry

Logic

Tflac

OC O/F

D C Fetacmi$ion

VALVE POSITIONER

FEEOBrcK

POTENTIOMETER

OPTIONS EOAFO

OB

STANOARO OPTIONS

BOARO

(oPrloNAL)

Note: h is possible to rcad whal boards are tined in an instrument by reading parameter

'ldn' as described in 3.1 above and relerring to this table.

ldn='ABCD'

A

B

c

D

Output 4 2l or valve position potentiometer Circuit

Output 3 (alarm

1)

Output 2 (cool)

Output 1 (heat)

A, B, C, D will be set to the number corresponding to the output type fitted as shown in he table below

Code Nu

0

1

4

5

2

3

6 none relay logic triac

DC output or retransmission

Remote lnput

V

P

Potentiometer input

9

To reassemble the unit carry out the above procedure in reverse, ensuring that the bright metal strip on the side cheeks are positioned at the bottom of the instrument, t

I

I

I

3.Return the instrument to its sleeve and switch on the power

Note: ln this node the instrument no longer controls, the control

oupts

being disabled.

4.The upper display now reads CONF and the lower display the first configuration mnemonic c1.

The up or down buttons enable the current value to be shown and it may be adjusted as required

Note: The value

,ABCD" ol

Cl

to CB appears in the form ol a 4 character number relerred to as a) There is no 'time out' in this mode, the parameterwill remain on the display until the scroll button is pressed again.

b) lf an invalid code is entered an 'E' will be displayed and tre same parameter will remain on the display for correction.

c) lf one digit ol a configuration word is to be changed, say C, it is essential that he other three, A, B and D are remembered as they will have to be re-entered.

5. The scroll button enables other configuration parameters to be selected and they may be adjusted as above. The RUN/HOLD button operates as a reverse scroll button bul itdoes not auto-repeat.

6. lf any output modules or communications boards have been added or changed tren scroll to the parameter 'ldn' and press the up and down buttons togeher.

Note: This is essential to secure the new hardware arrangement in the instrument.

7.

When the necessary changes have been made scroll to the last parameter'CLr' and press both the up and down buttons together.

Note: This is essential to secure the new conliguration in the instrument-

8. Switch ofl the instrument, remove from the sleeve and open the configuration switctr. (See

2 above).

9. Replace the instrument in the sleeve and power up for normal operation.

Hardware Changes

(General

Operating

Procedure)

1. Remove the instrument from its sleeve.

2. Place the instrument face down on a flat surface.

3

Release the catches of the board retainer by inserting a screwdriver into the slots of the square cut out on each side of the instrument.

4. Push in towards the centre of the instrument and with the board retainers depressed slide them towards the rear.

5. The side cheeks can now be removed by hinging them about the edge nearest the bezel.

6

Once released the retainer can be slid off of the rear of the printed circuit boards by hand

33

32

3.1

MNEMONIC i8' i20' is0' tr' cJc.

rtL' rth' lcL' lch'

PcL'

Pch'

cLf

l

FUNCTION

These paramenters are associated with calibration and no attempt should be made to alter them without first relerring to maintenance manual HA020172

Motor position potentiometer input calibration (VP only)

Clears error flags and sets syslem

'These mnemonics above are not induded in fre read only configuration scroll list.

Conliguration

Changes

(General

Operating

Procedure)

To change the configuration, of an instrument it is essential that this procedure is followed exactly. ll in any doubt, contact your local Eurotherm engineer.

l.Switch off power to the instrument and remove it from its sleeve.

2.Enable the configuration switcfr as shown

Lrnk Switch

E

Enabled

Dtsabled

Conliguratlon

Switch

=EE8El

E

Eo

E} -noE

-llo=

Microprocgssor

Board

Note: This operation can be simplilied by using a configuration key, pafl no J80221

11 , in which case it is not necessaty to remove the instrument from its sleeve, only to turn the power ofl while the key is being inserted.

Section

3.0 -

Conliguration

The 818 conroller is microprocessor based and therefore most of fre changes to the input, outputs, alarms and options are performed in software (configuration). Some of these software changes are also accomplished by hardware (printed circuit board or switch link) changes.

Changes to the configuration are under the security of a hardrivare switch. However, configuration can be read without operating the switch and whilst the instrument is still contolling. To enter the read only mode of tre configuration, scroll down througb tre long scroll until the mnemonic 'Sbr' appears on the display. Wih he scroll button still depressed also depress tre down button. The first of the configuration mnemonic 'C1' will appear on the lower display. To reveal the numerical value of 'C1'depress eifrer he up or down button.

r0L oh rrL nh riL rih

SPh

S2L s2h

Ah1

Ah2

Add

clL

c1h c2L c2h c3L c3h c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7 c8 idn dsL dsh

The scroll button will index trrough bunon to reveal fre configuration mnemonics. Use fre up or down tre numerical value of any mnemonic.

Values or mnemonics in the configuration list will time out in he same way as fre long scroll.

A complete list ol the configuration mnemonics witr their function is given below.

MNEMONIC FUNCTION lnput, CJC, unils and ti+td times

VP, PID or on/off, ouputs and power feedback

Alarm definitions and security definition Digital inputs,ADO

Communications

Controller put output Communications type

Programmer options

Output hardware definition

Low limit of display range

High limit of display range

Low limit

High limit of main sepoint

Low limit of second sepoint

High limit ot second setpoint

Alarm hysteresis AL1

Alarm hysteresis AL2

Low output 1 when analogue

High calibration of output 1 when anaolgue

Low calibration of output 2 when analogue

High calibration ol output 2 when analogue

Low calibration of output 3 (alarm 1) when

High calibration of output 3 (alarm l) when analogue retransmission.

Low calibration of analogue comms output

High calibration ol analogue

Low limit of retransmission comms output output (Eng units)

High limit of retransmission output (Eng units)

Low limit of remote analogue input (Eng units)

High limit of remote analogue input (Eng units)i8'

31

30

2.4

Response

to

Broken Sensors

Sensor break heaVcool output power, (Sbr) may be set to a value between 0 and 1001" (+t-

1OO% break. 'Or' is displayed in the upper display and output is set to the value defined in ,Sbr'.

for instruments). This will define the output condition in the event of an input sensor

Note: lnput types that have potential dividers or current burden resistors will not detect broken sensor.

For 818VP sensor break output, (sbr) may be set to a value oleither 0 or 100% to define output condition in the event of an input sensor break. 'or is displayed in the upper display.

For be

'Sbr'

=

0

the 'lower' a pot input is configured.

output will be continuously active. For 'Sbr'

=100 the 'raise' outpui will continuously active. (Assuming direct output action is configured). Pot limits will operate if

For a VP with position potentiometer a short or open pot will indicate 'or' in the lower display.

VP control action is not affected.

Note: Max and min pot limits are ignored during position potentiometer fault.

(

I

11) Press the raise and lower buttons together

Note: Failure to carry out this part of the procedure will cause an eror message to be displayed when returning to user mode.

12) Remove the instrument from its sleeve and open circuit the lower of he two switches on the rear of the micro board (See paragraph 3.1)

13) Replace the instrument into lts sleeve.

This calibration procedure rescales the potentiometer, under the mnemonic'op' making maximum and minimum selected position now equal to 100% andO9. respeclively.

ln auto control the he valve movement is limited to these or the potentiometer limit values if hese are set closer.

UNE

EARTH

NEUTBAL

L

2 -1,'

0 co,l

9

I

3 N

1 LINE

5 cltl

6 LOAD

7 -1

2

3 a coM

6 coil

7

8 l olG

N

9

LINE cH2

2S

21 LOAO cH3

31

ALI t2 ltP I

21 cHa

34

AL2

36

Motor

Supply

-)

Connections for PcL and Pch calibration procedure

2.3.6

Potentiometer Limits

Calibration of potentiometer is achieved as described in 2.3.5.

Travel of the valve positioning motor may be limited by use of the parameters PL (low pot limit) and Ph (high pot limit).

The drive to output close is removed when the pot position is less than PL, and drive to output open is removed when Ph is exceeded.

Note: in the case of a laulty potentiometer pot limits are ignored. Limits are also ignored in manual.

Position pot limits must NOT therefore, be used as safety limits - this should be accomplished by ad.justing the mechanical stop on the motorised valve.

The position pot limits are enabled both in automatic control mode and while tuning. These may be used to reduce the maximum valve excursion while self-tuning is active.

The limits cannot be changed while self-tune is

active.

Zg

2.3.2

vrce versa.

Note that output limits HL and CL are not available to VP applications, however and PL are available to limit valve operation.

pot limits Ph

After tuning, check the

cont

Typically, t-he auto{uned travel time, when the

Pl valve

trim 'ut' as described in 2.3.1.

nt of activity of the valve.

time of approximately half the motor loop. lf valve activity is significant

2.3.3

abled, as the standard PlD, controller, (section 2.2.2)' ll may be higher value of adaptive trigger point (Atr) in order to prevent which will occur with larger values of minimum on time or VP update time.

2.3.4 ManualTuning

(VP)

Commissioning

thi

VP loop may be achieved manually, in which case the Zieler Nichols method described in section 2.2.4 should be used.

2.3.5 Position Potentiometer Calibration

(Model 818VP with postion potentiometer option only) ihe calibration of the valve positioner potentiometer should be carried out with the i wired as below, to the valve motor it is going to control, Calibration is achieved in the conftguration mode as follows.

1) Remove the instrument from its sleeve and close the lower of the two switches on the of the microprocessor board. (see paragraph 3.1)

2) Replace the instrument in its sleeve and switch 'on'.

3) The upper display will now read'CONF'and the lower display will read'C1'.

4) Press the scroll button repeatedly until the mnemonic'PcL' is displayed.

S) Use the raise and lower buttons to drive the motor to the position representing the minimum valve opening required.

6) Push the manual button to enter this value

7) Press the scroll button to index on to the mnemonic 'Pch'.

g)

Use the raise and lower buttons to drive the motor to the position representing the maximum valve opening required.

9) Push the manual button to enter this value.

28

10) Push the scroll button again to index on to the mnemonic 'Clr'.

S/P rEMP

M€asured

Valus

TIME

(b)

(b) cbl

= XpI%) x span - undershoot

100

'cbh'can be set in a similar manner for situations where the measured value approaches setpoint from above.

The cutback values are always set in engineering units. They define the poipt where the power starts "cutting back" from its m€uimum or minimum value as the process variable approaches the setpoint.

2.3

Valve

Positioner Controller (Software version 4.00

or

lateo

The instrument leaves the factory with commissioning values installed, suitable for many typical applications, (see table 2).

On loops where these values are not suitable, identified by the measured value oscillating or recovering sluggishly from a disturbance, the commissioning values will have to be modified by one of the three following methods-

1) Self Tune

2) Adaptive Tune

3) Manual Tune

!n all cases the first step is to commission valve parameters

.3.1 Commissioning

Valve

Parameters

Measure the valve travel time, while the valve is being raised from the lower limit to its top limit, and enter this as the 'tt' parameter value. lf the valve has significantly different travel times depending on configured and the direction it is being driven, then asymmetric valve operation may be the 'ttd' parameter may be set to match the'down'travel time of the valve.

Measure, or read from the valve motor specification, the minimum on-time for a pulse to move he valve and enter the 'ot' parameter value. Minimum on-time is limited within the controller to a maximum ol

10% of the travel time (tt).

Larger values of 'ot' would result in oscillation due to this limiting the resolution of output position. The minimum on time should not be set lower than he minimum response time of the valve.

S€t tte VP update time, 'ut' to its minimum value, (0. 1 sec) if a reasonable value is not known.

After tuning prooess

PID parameters 'ut' may be adjusted if excessive valve activity is noted due to noise. The VP update time can be increased up to one quarter of the derivative time, without effecting the previcus tuning. lf the level of the valve activity is still higher than acceptable (this is not very likely) then the update time should be left at this value, derivative should be turned otf and the instrument retuned. This will result in more sluggish Pl control, with minimum valve activity. Large values of VP update time decrease the activity, but also increase the amplitude of hunting round setpoint.

27

OO

CONTROTTER/

PROGRAMMER

EUROTHER}I

CONTROLS

lnstqllolion

instruclions

WARNING

STANDAHD PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN USING

TEMPERATU RE CONTROLLERS.

When designing any control systems it is €ssential to consid€r what will happen il any individual part ol the system malfunctions.

ln a temperature control application, lor example, systam remains permanently switched on.

lhe danger is that lor some reason the heating

This could happen il:

1,

Thermocouple or sensor becomes'detached'rrom the system i.e, is no longer measuring the actual temperalure achiev€d.

2.

Thermocouple or th€rmocouple wiring be@m6s short cirqrited.

3.

Compon€nl failure within the controller in such a way as to l€av€ lhe output switched on.

4.

Microprocessor or sottware lailure in a system.

5.

Failure of valve movement or valve linkage.

6.

Bemot€ setpoint to controller is laulty.

7. Operatio eg. (a)

(b) el.

ith high output power set.

8.

Any lac* ol maintenance in seMceable parts.

.........and many other unloreseen situations.

ll leavlng the

heater on

all

the tlme can cause damage

elther to the plant ltsell or lts contentsr

then an lndependent protectlon d6vlca must be provlded.

The best lorm o, protection is a completely independent'policeman'. This is a separErte overtemperature alarm with its own thermocouple or sensor and, on alarm contactor or shut olf the valve lo ensure the plant' s salety.

will pull out th6 main e.g.

f*,niil

I unil il nn"a L__t bobtor

800

Conlrolht Pollc.mn

Fumao

A suitable policeman is the Eurotherm

'106 overtemperature alarm.

Note that an alarm relay in the controller is not sutficient protection ,or all eventualities.

Contents

Page

Caution Notes ...........................1 - V I lnstallation lnstrument Sealing.

1

1

Dimensional Delails

Connectbns and Wiring....

Ordering lnlormatbn 81 5................ 5

Ordering lnlormation 81 8................ 7

3

4

Rear Terminal Connections ............ 9

Typical Wiring Schemes ...............

1

5

WARNING NOTE

This instrument has been designed and fully tested

for

single phase operation on supplies up to 264Vac. This not only includes the power supply input

bul all

relay and triac outputs, whatever their funclion, and the terminals to whidr they ate conneded.

Care must be exercised during installation and wiring of this unit to ensure that no connections are made from phases other than the one being used to power the instrument. Failure to observe this precaution may result in instrumenl damage ol failure.

Et rry saloat ha3 b6.r td(en lo emuE th. lodlnologlcal lod

F

ar€ cq|tlnuolrly ertas, lrprwlr€ d out thls Epetfrcalon. llow6re. ptoducB whhh could, ln

*lhour qda. to rioilc., lrBl]{.h tEUl ln o.Jr

erEndrDrts or fiislbru ro thlr spedtbarbn. lt,€ camot accspt reponslrilty lor dar5gB, hll,r 16 ot oryonsa rBullne thea6 lro{rr.

cAUno]l

Before installing,

oprating

or

*rubing

industrial ebc:tronic equipment, please bwing whbh hilhlighls some

red

the fol-

imprtant

parts of the proposed standards

deument

IEC

801 whbh is cunently in

drdt

form.

I

|.lote:

AllEurotherm equipment is designed is thoroughly

b

operate in harsh industrial envirorntents

ard tested.

These guklelines represent good engineering

pincples lor

sale and trouble-free operation

Eurotherm or any other and are

rwmmended

for all

antol

equipmenl whether

fnm suflier.

They shouH b used in

anjurct'an

with

leal

regublions.

OVERCURRENT

It is recommended

PROTECIION that AC power supplies to instruments be protected by luses or automatic circuit breakers rated at not more than 2 Amperes, and must be separated from any bad cun€nt circuits.

VOLTAGE RANNGS

Care must be taken to ensure that maximum voltage ratings are not excseded.

Unless othewise stated in the specificatbn of any particular unit, the maximum roltage which may be applied between any two isolated circuits, or between any isolated

cirolil

and earth, is limited to the highest rated supply vohage for that unit.

Take particular care not lo connect AC supplies to low voltage control inputs sudr as senbor inpuls, logic inputs and outputs.

ENCLOSURE OF UVE PARTS

Some metal parts ol certain types ol equipment can become

eledrically'live'in

some conditions ol normAl operation.

Unless cleady inlended to be panel mounted and accessible during normal operdbn, all units should be installed inside a suilable earthed metal enclosure to prevent live parts being aoessible to human hands and metaltools.

h is recommended that rear terminal @vers (available aS an option on most Euptherm units) be fitted wherever possible.

WRING h is important to connecl all equipment conectly in aeordance with the installdion data provlded lor each type of unit.

lriost connections to equipment require correcl polarity to be maintained and due attention must be given to ensure this.

Unlabelled terminals must not be used as

tie

points" for other wires.

Conductors should be ommensurate with voltage and cunsnt ratings of the units, and should conlorm regulations.

to appropriate standards ol good practice and local codes and

Any questions oncerning the conect wiring of Eurotherm units should be directed to the nearest Eurotherm Sales and Service engineer.

ROUTEING OFWIRING

Care should be taken to ensure maximum separation between low current control or signal wiring and power wiring.

Contrcl wiring relers to those conneclbns lo the input of thE conlroller, analogue or logic orrtputs, digital inputs, remote setpoint inputs and relays switching contrclsignals.

Power wirirg relers to those connec-tbns to relay or triac switched AC supplies, and wiring associated wilh external devices such as contactors, alarm relays or motor speed drives etc.

It la essentlal that cablnets and

phnt.

ontrol

and power wlrlng are routed separately through the

This requires that the mechanir:aldespn must take into account all the different items to be included and the type of wiring involved. The design layout should include the separation described above.

The A.C. supply lo allthe contollers should bE taken from as close to the in-coming souroe as possible and should not under any circumstances be'daisy cfiained'lrom olher equiprnent, especially il it is likely to generate, supply bourne, eleclrbal noise.

For controllers with digital communirxtions it is strongly recommended that screened cable is used and that only one end of the screen is earthed at the "cleanesl" End, usually at the computer. The screened cable should be outed with the control wiring. Do not use'spare' wires in the cable lor other signals.

EARTHING

All earth terminals musr be securely connecled direc'tly to a good local eailh by conductors appropriate to the currenl ralings ol the units.

Most Eurotherm instruments have internal circuits nscessary which are isolated

or'floating'.

This is to prevent the oeurance ol an 'earth loop" in signal circuits. To avoiri possible shock hazards in the event ol an internal fault causing breakdown ol insulation, it is recommended that all equipment connected to any Eurotherm unit be enclosEd in an earthod metal endosure. Sheaths of thermocouples (or other sensors) should be properly earthed by a separale conduclor (instead ol being dependent on eadhing via the mactine framewok).

SUPPLY ISOLATORS

Every electri:alsystem should be provided with means for isolating the system from the

AC supply to allow safe working during repair and maintenarrce. Thyristors and triacs are not adequate means of isolatirg the supply and should always be backed by a suitable mechanical isolator.

SUPPLY IMPEDANCE

Control cabinsts and equipment should be sited as close to the incoming supply as possible. This is essential on high powor systems using thyristors drivirp large transformer loads. ln all cases, both inside and outside the cabinet, long supply cables should be

tr

Itr

avoided. lf they are unavoidable, conduclors of an adequate rating must be used.

Avoid running instruments from a supply which has shared wiring with high current circuits, particularly if lhese are switched by contaclors or thyristors.

PLANT AND PERSONNEL PROTECNON ln control applications it is essentiallo consider what will happen if any individual part of the system malfunctions.

Where excessive deviation of a controlled parameter due to equipment lailure oould cause damage to machinery or materials, or injury to personnel, it is recommended that an additional separde unil, such as the Eurotherm 106, wilh its own separate sensor, be used to give alarm indication or to shut down the process or both, as may be appropriate.

Note:

.Alarm relays" litted inside the controller

itself

may not give sutlicient proteaion in all possible circumslances. When "alarm unils" or "alarm boards'are used they should be ctecked for correct operation and calibratiolr at regular intervals.

HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES

No product should be connecled to a circuit which passes into or through a hazardous area unless appropriate prscaulions are taken (even though the instrument itself may be located in a safE area). Such an installation should conform to the requiremenls ol the relevant local regulations.

Unless categorlcally stated In the publlshed speciflcatlon of any partlcular unlt,

lt

should be assumed they are not suhable for dlrect uso ln areas sublect atmospheres.

to

hazardous

PROCEDURE IN THE EVENT OF TROUBLE

Belore beginning any investigation of a fault, the electrical supplies to all equipment concerned should be switched ofl and isolated. Units suspecled of being fauhy should be disconn'ected and removed to a properly equipped workshop lor tesling or returned to the manulacturer personnel for and

repair.

Any attempl to troubleshoot while installed could be hazardous to equipment.

IF IN DOUBT, ASK!

lf you have any questions regarding'any aspect of installing, bperating or servicing your

Eurotherm equipment, please contact your nearest Eurotherm Sales and Service engineer.

i i

SPECIFIC REOUIREIIIENTS

FOR WtRtNG 815/81I CONTROLLERS.

1.

EARTHING

There are three earth terminals on an 815/818 controller, terminals 2,7,19. These are supplied all connected together and terminal 18 should be used as lhe earth connection taken directly to the supply eadh.

ln environments separated.

of pailbularly

h[h

elecirical noise, these three terminals should be

Terminal 18 should be connected to a local safety earth as close to the controller as possible.

Terminal 2 should be connected to the supply earth.

Terminal 7 should be connected to the system earlh.

(See sketch)

2-M-rnr

7-

18

-

RF-tr ktbmnidd. d.

er6

8r8

1 g 2 7 tr

0r6

818 l! 2 7 ta

815

818

\Local

Earth

IJ

LN 7e,

L

€ffi,Hffi ndb.,H.h-

Cdir E a dgml

€dreEt ard AFflrodrb[ tEdtirg hiuLd

Frr o.6U.

oeqrD

2.

SENSOR WRING

Care should be taken in the routeing of sensor wiring to ensure it is kept away from power wiring, motor wiring and heavy duty contac,tors. This is partiollarly important when the sensor is located a long distarrce from the controller.

lf it is unavoiriable screened to include sensor wiring in a duct with power wiring then cable should be used lor the sensor wiring with the screen connected to the controller earth only.

3.

DIGITAL INPUTS

These inputs are not isolated from used lhe input sensor and they should only be

with

contact closure such as a relay contact or a switch which MUST be located very close to the controller. (<5O0mm). The contacts on the relay or switch must be suitable for switching low voltage signals.

Iv

v

Where this is not possible or where the signal @mes from a another system a butfer relay, again with low voltage contacts, should be used located as close to the controller as possible.

4.

COMMUNICATIONSWIRING

Recommended connectlons

for

RS422 and tl85 ln many installations communications wiring willwork wilh simple point to point wiring. ln hostile or distributed environments to meet the lull specification the following should be used:-

Conlroller

Supervisor

TX+

TX-

FX+ m(-

Cdn

Eadh

100()

Screening

Twisled ru( D(

Tl TX

Cdn

+

Long Spurs r€quire exlra termhaling rcsistor (Rt)

RI q

D(

+

D(

TX TX Cqr

+ if necessary

Conlroller

TX +(-) on masrer is connected to all RX +(-) on slaves

RX +G) on master is connec{ed to all TX +(-) on slaves

Always connect +ve terminal to +ve terminal, -ve to -ve.

Recommended cables

lor

commun lcatlons lnterconnectlons

RS485 or 422wrlh screening

RS232with screening

RS2S2without screening

- Belden Type 9729 or equivalent

- Belden Type 8771 or equivalent

- Belden Type 8795 or equivalent

Conlroller

BX

R\ Tl TX

Cdrt

+

Conlroller

RI

RX

+

RX TX

TX

Cdn if necessary

For RS485 the number of controllers + numbsr ol terminating resistors Flt

32

For R5422 the number of controllers + number of terminating resistors Flt

<10

VI

1

INSTALLATION

The instrument plugs into a panel-mounting sleeve which requires a D|N-size 92mm by

92mm cut-out as illustrated. Remove the instrument from the sleeve by turning the screw, in the bottom right-hand @rner, clockwise. (lf the screw is already at its cluntermaximum counterclockwise position il should be possible to exlract the instrument from the sleeve by turning the screw lully clockwise and then counter-clockwise). The instrument will start to withdraw from the sleeve and once the screw has been turned to its furthest extent the instrument can be withdrawn by hand.

Remove the top and bottom mounting clamps from the sleeve by gently levering outwards and easing downwards inside the sleeve.'lnsert the sleeve through the cut-out via the front ol the panel. Fit the mounting clamps in the slots lrom inside the sleeve and from the rear of the mounting panel tighten with a screwdriver.

By hand, ease the instrument into the sleeve until the top and bottom edges of the bezel meet the sleeve moulding. Turn the screw in the bottom right-hand corner clockwise until

tight.

The instrument will be pulled completely into the sleeve, engaging the rear terminals and be fully secured.

Note:

Do not att€mpt to dismantle the instrument without referring lo the Maintenance

Manual.

'lnstrument Sealing

Supplied within the packing of the instrument, in a separate polythene bag, is a gasket to seal the instrument sleeve against the panel surlace to the lP64 standard.

ll sealing of the instrument is not required this gasket need not be f ilted and only the installation instructions above need be followed.

Fitting the gasket should be carried out as Sogn as the instrument is removed from the packing. Remove the instrument lrom its sleeve and place the sleeve, with the electrical connedions upp€rmost, onto a llat surface. Remove the rear terminal cover and ensure that the mounting clamps are not fitted.

Remove the gasket from its lormer (see diagram 1) noting that two sides of the gasket have a cut out profile.

Diagram

1

Gasket

Profiled side of gasket

Diagram 2

Place the the gasket onto the rear of the sleeve with two profiled sides aligned with the sides of the sleeve that carries the mounting clamps.

Drop one of the unprofiled edges over the side of the sleeve until it enters sleeve (see diagram the cut out in the

2).

The opposite edge can now be eased over the rear terminals. Ease the whole gasket down the sleeve into its position at the rear of the bezel.

The sleeve can now be mounted into the panel cul-out and assembly continued as described in the installation instructions compressed above. When fully this gasket increases the projection of the bezel in front of the panel by 1.5mm.

External Connections

ments, electrical noise environ-

All Eurotherm instruments are designed to operate in harsh industrial and are rigorously tested

to

ensure correct functionality under these conditions'

However, a lew seisible piecautions taken when wiring the units can help guarantee optimum perlormance.

'Forthe optimum instrument per{ormance to be guaranteed it is recommended thatthe following are adhered to:

General

Always route signal leads and power leads separately, ideally in earlhed metal conduit' connections to ancillary equipment, such as contactors, must be taken directly f rom the supply and NOT f rom the supply terminals of the instruments'

The wiring

of

logic inputs must be kept separate from the other instrument wiring' where screened twisted pairs are used the screen must be earthed at one end only, preferablY at the instrument

Earthing

-

Thermocouple lnPuts-

Resistance Thermometers-

Logic lnputs/OutPUts-

Analogue Control OutPuts-

Logic Control OutPuts-

Retransmission Signals-

Relay Outputs-

An effective eafih system must be provided.

lf more than one instrument is installed each instrument must be seperately eafihed to a common earlh point, NOT linked together.

Use screened comPensating cable.

Use screened cable.

Use screened twisted conductors.

Use screened twisted

Pairs

Use twisted Pairs

Use twisted pairs.

Use standard cable.

2

DIMENS ONAL DETA LS t-

96 mm

TIME

v

I

E

I

D

IE

FAMP I xoto I

.9

.^.

Panel cut-out

92 r 92 +0.8

'0 mm

201 mm Excluding Terminal Cover

E

E

(o o)

Dimensions apply faslon versions gasket fitted to both screw and

of

sleeve without the

219 mm lncluding Terminal Cover

9 mm max. thickness

3

The instrument is supplied wilh a terminal cover which provides elecirical safety.

The Use ol shrouded receptacles on the faston version of the sleeve is recommended.

CONNECTIONS AND WIR NG

Electricalconneclionsaremadeviamulti-wayterminalblocksontherearoftheinstrument. All connections are low current and a 16/0.20mm wire size is adequate. Labels on the instrument and sleeve indicate the specilic connections for the instrument. The instrument supply should be lused externally, in accordance with local wiring regulations.

EI FUI=C-TH=F:F,1 i:riiri;.:r :ril.:rrj

:rri+l-n:'5':'i' li-rdei'.ic:

!

I 3 i''l

i'

r..-' i-

.i, li j ii i,' i j i iiE J i.lii

E i

4 S -q i i i

i

c:.. rr il-, :. 1.:j',:_.i,i_'":-_.i7_11

EI i-.,;l

E[i=tO-T- I-+EF:f.1 r,ii:'--i:;:. l;li;ii

:i:j,i---:r::,i;

:,ir', :'i

;,.)'ti:i;: i t.lil:ii.:;ii

ilii

i

::

i,',,.,1i. i

;_.,.j'!jr ii'iJi,,: -;, ! l', r-. : 1i.l--'ij-i.l- l-l!

H-.d e

,,1 t;'r-- :--rr

.1,],:i;tral iq.0tPt

iiil

iiq lril r r'

iii,Dili

lir0

it7,!,t,i, iarlr i rr LJF::

1?.!ig

in

i

l,!.liq

ir,

?

jr,t

'i ltr

-,]

'i',::iiilS irarIe

!t

1i.

lii tih

!ss

i.I.

Ri+

\!i'J,i3:l i5.).i-

15.Ti+ iF:ilg.c)

ia.Ii-

l6.S;{:tv

E;rth

l-larde

.; r'r tjts=:

An example of the labels used on the 818 instrument.

An explanation of the construclion of the coding system used on the label on the side of the instrument and the sleeve is given on the next pages.

4

Basic Product

Banc Conroller

Programmer Conlroller

Code

81 55

81

5P lnputs

Thermocouple

Resrslance

0'20mA

4-20mA

0-5v

15V

0 lov I

I

Avarlable

Coded

01 02 03,

04 05 06,45

70

Code

TC

RTD oo

0mA20

4mA20

0v5

1V5

0vr 0

Alarms

Type

None

Devralron Band

Devralron Hrgh

Full Scale Htgh

Full Scale Low

1sr

I

2nd

0rgrl Code

NONE

OB

DH

DL

FH

FL

Relay Slale

Energ sed

De ene.grsed

3rd Drgrl

Code

E o ln lhe Programmer versron 81 5P lhe

Alarm oulputs may be assrqned lo lhe program segmenls ll thrs oplron rs requfed spec ly lhe Alarm leld as

Type

Assrgned lo

Proqrammer

Code

PROG

5

I

Bas c

Producl lnput

1

Output Output

2

A arm A arm Comms

Type

Comms

Funct

Outpuls

OutPuU lnpul 2

Conkol onOutput2

(opposde acton lo oulpul

1)

Flelransmrssron

Pr@ess vanable ol -

Setpornl

Remote lnput ol

SetFinl

Tilm gP wlh

Local Tnm c

S x

T

L

Note Outpul a heat

I as BeveGe Acnng ts rdeal lo dnve oulpul stage on a lemperalure confol loop

Oulpul 2 is always the oppos[e acnon ol outpul

1

Oulpul

1

OulpuU lnpul 2

Relay Inear nelay Non Lrnear

Relay ON/OFF

Logrc Lrnear

Logrc Non Lrnear

Logrc ON/OFF

Tnac Lrn€ar

Trac Non Lrnear

T.ac ON/OFF

No oulpul lsolaled 0'5V lsolaled 0-10V lsolated 1-5v lsolated 0-10mA lsolat€d lsolaled

0-20m4

4-20m4

RLY

RLYF

LGC

LGCF

TBI

TRIF

NONE ov5

0v 10

1V5 omAl0

0m420

4nA2O wilh oulpuuinpul 2 prelix M, S, X, T or L only D C oulpuUlnputs apply On/ofl on OP1 reslircts oulpurrnpul 2 lo on/ofl unless pre,rx

M,S X,TorL

RLY

RLYN

RLYF

LGC

LGCN

LGCF

TR

IRN

TRIF

NONE

0v5

0v10 rv5 omA1 0

0mA2O

4m420

Communications

Drqrtal

Type Code

NONE NONE

Drgrtar

Orgrral

R5232

R5485

232

485

NONE

Baud Rate s00

Baud Bale 4800

Baud Rale 3600

Baud Rale 2400

Eaud

Baud

Baud

Rale 1200

Rate 600

Rate 300

Codc

NONE

96

48

36

24

12 ffi

03

lnput Coding

Curye

Selecl lrom lhe range |sl shown below

Lrnear lron/Conslanlan J

Fei Konsl (OrN) J

Nr CilN, Al K

Cu/Con T

Pr r30/o Rh/Pl F

Pl 10o/o Rh/PT S

NrcrosrUNrsil

Fecommended

Mrn & Max ranges

- 1999 lo 8000

0C lo

60oC

OC to

6O0C

0C lo 1200C

- 250C lo a00C

0C lo 1600C

0C lo 1600C

0c ro r300c

Span r00c

I

00c

125C r50c

600c

600c

150c

Code

04

05

06

45

00

0r

02

03

Rl 100 ohms al ooc 200C

Io

60OC

50c 70 r Nole For Inear nputs sens lrvrly musl nol be less lhan 5!V/drgrl

Display Min/Oisplay Msx Unlls

These should be selected lrom lhe recommended mrnrmum and maxrmum ranges shown rn curve

NONE

K lnclude decrmal pornt posrlron 'Thrs rs especrally rmpoilanl on lrnear range

(Or specrly up lo 5 characlers)

Programmer

81 5P

All olher modelsend code wrlh soltwareoplons

Ramp Scale/Owell Scale

Ramp Scale Code

SP unrls per mrnule

SP unrls per hour

MN

HR

Holdback

Holdback

No Holdback

Owell Scale

Dwellrn mrnules

Owell rn hours

Code

MN

HR

Codc

H

N l

Display

Display

Mn Max

Units

Dig l/P1

Dig SofiwaE l/P2 OPtions Remp Dwell Holdback

Option

Code

Screw Term nal

Faslon 24V ac/dc

Screw 24V ac/dc

S

F24 s24

Oigital lnputs

Org l/P

Serl Tune

Keylock

Parameler Secunly

Ranp

ST

KL

PS

RP

Addrlronal Opl,ons 8l5P Pr@rammer Only

Drg uPl D,q l/P2

Skrp Segmen

Bun/Hold

Holdi Run

Fesel ss

RH

T

T

RS

Soltware Options

Cod€

Enabled

Dlsabled

E o

Cold Juncl on

Non T/C lnpul lnlernal Compensalron

Exlernal 0'C Rel

Exlernal 45oC Flel

Exlernal 50'C Hel

Code

N

IN

0

45

50

Code Code lniegral and

Deirvalrve rn

Seconds lnlegral and

Oer valrve rn s

N a

Note Not avarlable on dc oulouls lherejore enler N

When code is being entered any lield not required can be left blank.

6

7

ORDERING INFORMATION 818

Ba3lc Prodqct gasrc Conlroller

Conlroll6/P,ogramme,

Cd€

818 S

B1a lnputs

Cde

Feestance Thormom€le,

0-20m4

4-20m4

0sv

0 10v

(2)

(3J

TC

FTO

0mAm

4mA20

0v5 rv5

0vr0

EmVB

(4)

Nole ln lhe rnpul codrng onlycufres wh6re lhe numf.s,n parenlhees malch ih€ num*rs ahve are evailable

Alarms 1 and 2 rvw

DevElron Band

DevralDn Hrgh

FUU Scale Hrgh

1sr E 2nd

Drg( Code

NONE

DB

OH

DL

FH

FL

Rel?y State 3Id Drgil

Code

Energ,sed

O€ gne,grsed

E

D

P.qrrmm.r Output.

ln lhe 8l8P rl edher alah is not .€qurred th€ Alarm O/P can b€ allEatd to

P.ogramme, sqmsnrs ll thrs luncron

.equtrd sFcrly as

Elow rs

PFOG

Nole

On Valve tus{oner vsrson usrng a Fodback

Pot (Fg rn oulpul 2) Alarm 2 nust b

NONE

0'20h4

4-20m4 o-5v r5v

0-10v

36lFrnt

Eror

Code

0mA20

4n'A20

0v5

0v10

Code

S

E

Remol6 Sstprnt

Cde x f

L

Alarm channets ca. f !sd tor analogue rnputs and/or outputs rt not

Nol€ Only on€ rerransd,ssron outDUt and one remole rnput

's atrowetwrth,n

2

Comms

I tutpl

I

I

E.k

Outputs

O,rscl

(Oo@s{eaclDn loouloul 1)

F o

S€trcrnr

E4ot

S

E

Not6

Note

1

Fo, normaltomfratu.e c6kol$lEt Revsr$ ktrngConkol

Oulgul 2 aclo. oppsilooloulgur i

2

The Fetransmrss'o. opton E not availaDl€ w{h Analogue

Comms o, when raransm'ssDn sfcdrod rn Ala.m

1

OulFl

2

Relay ON/OFF

Loglc Lrnea.

Logrc ON/OFF

Tnac ON/OFF

Nooulpul lsolated 0-5V lsolald 0. l0V lslared 0,20mA

.LGCF

TRI

.TBIF

NONE

0vs

0vro

0mA20

Molor VslvG

Contrcller

Rslay Oulpul

TnacOulpul

Wilhour FdMck tur

FB

NONE

Wilh outpul 2 preh

M S E W only dc outpuls apply

'ON/OFF on O/Pr resrrcts O/Pz ro ON/OFF unless prenr

M S E W

RTVN

LGC

LGCN

LGCF

TAr

TRIN

TFIF

NONE

0v5

0v 10

1V5

0mAl0

CmA20

4m420

Al.rm

Communicslions

Oigit.l

O'9rral RS2l2

Org,lat BS4E5

Code

NONE

232

465

NONE

BSud Rare 96@

Eaud Rare a€00

Baud Rare 3600

Eaud Rare 2400

Baud Rare r200

Eaud

Eaud

Rare

600

Rare l0o

Code

NONE

96

48 l6

2A

!?

6

0l

T

L

Sel@'nl

E.ro,

0-2OmA

4 zOmA o-5v

0 rov

Code

2nd O,gil

NONE

0mA20

4mA20 ov5

0vr0

0 20nA

4 20mA

05v

0 10v r5v

2 10V rsl

D,9

|

S

E

. Code

2.d

O'o,l

NONE

06A?0

0v5

0v10

2JtO

5V5

Optaon

lnpul Codlng

Cura [email protected]

Fd@(olr{l

L

,{ CrlNl x

X

Ct/rcon T

Hra* mrPt R

Pl!6aMtS

wrw2.ia

W6* n

F.

flza$ t{o,Eo

E a!ff fli

P6*

FhrPtlGt m

PhtHrr wrwmR.

twill lttt

MoaytdM

W*i.ffiefin

O tf,n 3* Wn ti@Inad ztt

0)

(r) ll)

(!l

ti)

(r) ttl

(tt ol

(r)

(t)

(r,

(t,

(!l

(!l

(t)

(r,

(rt

(rl

Rmaidd fraU.rrm

SF

@b@

0c! oc

-2!tcbtac

20c b cbre aqE

GSIGG rc5la&

GStm csaI@

GsZEC cb rm riEc

0cb2E

G5l2m

Gbzl@

0cblt@

@ b 2.0@

6b2@C

Ebt$c

. Ic.: Fo.trhfrt drtt d dla t-h

,E

!E

iztc

EG

m

G

rm

a5&

!06

IG

s(

t!o(

!d

G

+V.rdgX

Prro dnt I o.c

Pt6lrpoald,

Pyrmfr(@LdD

PyeC

RO2t ryffirrot hM.b

Oft l,,rffi.

OTt /2't

PrrilrAO2,

680

PrtffiF lPtO

PFilFPTOPII

PrdrrFP,oP ra

PfEn trF"I€t2o

FyrffiF?i@2r

|,tu t+d

1.'

1.'

1.t

1.)

1.t

'(.1

'(.t

'(.1

1.'

1a,

't) o

FI

-2m5 t@

&!t5rc

Tmbta@

!6b 5m rqrbSarc r20cbztdE rsE5re

Gsrrlc

TGbIG rqEbrGt6

GEb

7SC l@5t!@

-@5 tacca h

Ss s(rc

56V

!ilv

lilV hv

Scv

!ilV

5cv

,nV

56v

5aY silv hv al a a!

u aa

It ca

G m aa

5l sa

IG m

,2

Ol.raryH

OLttr

I.r

li.I frr,5b

!d6..rbh

mrrMmg6 l6r(aM

EnE&,rnt b.aFd, lErry.

'OrciEl a.ialaoh

nr|.G

d

Ud.

'{ONE r

(q r.d, rre btcnfGo, ih.(rI

,.lt b iwb d(.)

Udll.

Dis Dlo SohwaE v?1 ttP2 Optlons F.mp Owrll Holdb&l Cuda

II

Ol.dry

Xn

Option

Fel.niU

F.52'Yft

ScE 2aVde

Co{

Ftl st

Ftll/z' sma

)

I

I

I t

I

Olgilal lnpuls

NONE

Drg uPl

NO NO

LR T

Res6l Prograome

DlG uP r up rey l.

OIG UP 2down keyl

Peramotsr Securly

S€ll lun€

Ramp

Run/Hold Programme

HddFun Programme

Seond &rprnt

Skrp S€gmenl

Progaamme

KL

RS

UK s2

'

* ;

*

BP

BH

HF s2

SS ss

'Thrsoptons musr oe seleclod log6ln€r ll sbcld noolhsilnpul rs

Programmer

818P

All olhsr modelsend code w(h soffwareoptons

Famp Scale Cde

MN

HR

Holdkl

Holdback

Cde

H

N

Dwell Scate Code

HB

Al.rfr R.l.yr Oilv.n kom

Progranm.r SGgmant!

ll alarm I and/or alarm 2are no[equtred as alarmsor.etansmrsonlheroutputstaFscan

be dilv6n kom rhe sqmentsol the lh,s pr€ram lealureenter PROG rntothe.qurod

For ata.m

letd

Sottware Options

Cde

Enabled

Drebled

E

D

Non T/C lnput lnlornal Compensaton

Erle,nal 0oC Rel

Errernal 45oC net

Erle.nal 50.C

Ret

Cde

N

IN

0

45

50 lntegral and

Seconds

Code s

Cde

N a Nole Not availabts on dcor Vpoutpuls lhereloreentor

N

When code is being entered any lield not required can be left blank.

8

9

I

8

1

1

815

818

5

8

1

2

3

LINE

RFI

N (Mp)

1

2

3

+

RFI

815

818

1s

!r'

REAR TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

1 L

2 FrF lo tl cofu

3 N

I

5

CH1 oPl t2

3

4 coM

9

6 5

I

7 t-i;

I 6

@M

{

l9 cH2 28

DIG

IN

20 otP 2 29

2r 30 cHs 31

ALI 72

25

CHl

33

!4

l/P r 26

AL2 35

27 36

SUPPLY

Power supply 85V to

264V. The LINE is connected to terminal

1 and the Neutral to terminal

3.

The supply earth is connected directly to terminal 18 unless a local safety earth is used.

For instruments with the optional

24

voll a.c. or

d'c.

supply' connect the 24 volt supply to terminals 1 and

3.

lf this supply is d.c. the positive must be connected to terminal 1.

815

818

7

RFI

Safety Earth

This terminal is the safety earth for the instrument and is connected to the instrument side covers.

Suppression Earth

Terminal 7 is con nected to the radio f requenry interference (RFl) network.

When despatched from the

factory,

terminal 7,18 and

2

are connected together. ln most cases it is acceptable to connect these terminals to the supply earth. For instruments installed in conditions of high electrical noise, see page lV.

815

818

25 )C

UP+

N

)c uP-

SENSOR INPUTS

(See pase lV)

DC Signals

lnputs are connected to the terminals 25 and

iniut ir!"ognit"i

by

is

60mV

dc for

voltage

26' inputs'

Maximum mA inputs the input 1 code ol the instrument containing

p"g".

S and 7)

willbe

supplied with a 2'5Cl resistor'

Ln, Je" eniosed'in

a block on

ih" ,"",

terminals. The resistor terminatesthe incoming control signal. For high voltage and pyrometer inputs a potent'iometer onto

if,"

rear terminals.

chiin

is enclosed into a block placed

The terminals on this block are also numbered 25 and26.

(

I

I

I

I

I

i

I

8

1

1

5

8

25

26

Ttc+

1lC-

I

8

1

1

I

5

25

26

27

vt

Thermocouple

Thermocouple connections are made to terminals 25 and 26.

When the instrument has been configured for intemal cold compensation (GJC), compensating cable lunaion

d

the cofrect type lor the thermocouple used or the thermocouple itself must be wired to these terminals. Copper wire must NOT be

used.

ll an sxternal

GJC is to be used then copper wires must be used to wire between the rearterminals of the instrument and the cold junction oven/rce reference. The correct compensating cable or thermocouple wires must be connecled from this cold junction oven/ice reference, lo the thermocouple.

Resistance Thermometer

Platinum resistance three-wire thermometers are connected to terminals 25,26 and 27.

Resistance thermometers with other connections can also be used. Below is shown all possible connections.

Fonh wirs insuhted lrorn all othd conmclbm

I

8

8

I

1

1

5

8

1

1

5

8

otPl

4

5

6

28

olP2

29

30

25

26

27

) r-

25

26

27

ThreeWire

25

26

27

Two Wire FourWire

'

Note: Only when three conductors between the bulb and the rear terminals have identical resistances will the lead resistance

erpr

be minimised.

OUTPUTS

NOTE: Termlnals 4 andlor 28 only must

be

taken to the llve

supply.

Then inadvertantly plugging a d.c., retransmission, d.c.

output, d.c. input

or

logic output instrument into that sleeve will not damage the instrument.

Relay

Relay outputs are connected to terminals 4, 5 and 6 for output

1 and

28,29

and

30lor

output

2.

The rehys are shown in the deenergised state, ie with the instrument unpowered. lf the inslrument has been configured as reverse acting then the relay will energise when power to the load is required for a conventional temperature controller. The relay contact rating is 2Al

264V r.m.s.

10

815

818

815

818

815

818

8

8

1

1

I

5

30

29

5

6 o/P1

I

otP2

+

5

6

+

29 otP2

30

:

Logic

Logicor.rtpuls are connected to terminals 5 and 6 for output 1 and at terminals 29 and 30 for output

2.

These outputs are isolated dc signals with lime proportioning or on/otf action. This output

is

not available

lor the

valve positioner version

of the

818 contrcller.

lsolated DC

lsolated dcoutputs ar6 conneded to terminals 5 and 6loroutput

1 and at terminals 29 and 30 for output

2.

These dc outputs are individually isolated lrom all other sections of the instrument.

This output is not-available forthe Valve Positioner version ol the

818 contioller.

I

I

1

1

815

818

I

5

4 olP1

6

28 otP2

30

Triac

With controllers provided with triac output, connections are made to terminals 4 and 6 for output 1 and to terminals 28 and

30lor output

2.

The live supply is connecled to LINE terminals

4 and28 respectively. One side ol the load is connected to the

LOAD terminals, the other side ol the load should be connecled to the neutral line. The triac is rated at 1Al264V rms.

On the Valve Positioner version O/P1 and O/F2 is used to'raise' and 'lowe/ the valve. The assignment of either OP1 or O/P2 to

'raisE'and the remaining output to 'lower' is set in the configuration.

11

I

I

1

1

5

8

815

818

AL1

31

32

33

34

35

36

At2

coM

*7

N/O

I

ALARMS

Controllers are provided with relay alarm outputs which are internally connected to terminals'31, 32 and 33 for Alarm

'l and to '34,35 and 36 for Alarm 2. Terminals 32 and 35 are N/C when the relays are de-energised. When energised, the vohages at terminals 31 and 34 are switched through to the output terminals

33 and 36 respectively. Relay contacl rating is 2N264Y rms.

Gontacl suppression is provided between the N/C contacls and the wiper with the relay de-energised in alarm (fail safe). Suppression is prdvided between the N/O contacts and wiper with the relay'energised in alarm'.

I'

818

34

35

36

'By ensuring that terminals 31 and/or 34 only are taken to the live supply inadvertently plugging an instrument with

a

retransmission alarm output into lhis sleeve will not damage the instrument.

NOTE:

Al2

is available as an alarm on allversbns except the valve posilioner with a feedback potentiometer.

Valve Positioner instrument with feedback potentiometer

On this

version, terminals 34,35 and

36 are

used to conneci the feedbac* potentiometer,with a resistance between 100 and 1000 ohms, to

the

inslrument. The

'Valve open' end of the potentiometer is taken to terminal

34 and the 'valve closed' ond is taken to terminal36. The slider is wired lo terminalS5.

815S

81 5P

818

t9

)lGftt

21 coM

D G TAL INPUTS

For digital inputs the switch is made by linking terminal I 9

(DlG lN 1) or terminal 20 (DlG lN 2), to terminal 21, the

COMMON.

These lnputs are NOT termlnals

lsohted

from the slgnal

lnput

5,

26 and

27.

(See page lV.)

19 DIG IN

1

20 )rG tN 2

21 coM

Terminals 19 and

20

can

be

used

to

remot€ly switch

sevsral

internal functions

by

contact closure

to

the

COMMON

terminal2l.

The functions which can be switched are:-

Control

(Auto/Manual)

Ramp (Disable/Enable)

S€Foint (LocaURemote)' Programme (Hold/Run)"

Adaptive Tune

(off/On)'

Programme (Run/Hold)"

Keylock

(Ofl/On)

Sepoint (One/fwo)'

Prog. Reset

(Ofi/On)"

Prog. Segment (Retain/Skip)"

Parameter Security (Offlcn) Parameter Scroll (None/Up)'

Self Tune

(Off/On)

Parameter Scroll (None/Down)'

-

Only available on instrument type 818

"

Only available on instruments sutfixed wth

a'P'

12

13

8

8

1

1

5

8

13

't4

15

16

17

18

Rx+

RX-

TX+

TX-

coM

{r.

DIG TAL COMMUN CATIONS

(See page lV)

Digital Communications - RS4g5 (422)

Terminal

1

7 is the common and is normally connected externally to sarth via the communir:ations bus.The

RS 485 interlace utilises terminals l S and I 4 for the positive and negative receiver lines and terminals 15 and 16 for the positive and negative transmitter lines.

815

818

815

818

818

13 FX

15

17

TX coM

10 DAB

11

12 coM

15 VP+

Digital Cornmunications - RS232

Terminal

1

7 is the oommon line. Terminal

1

3 and 15 are the receivEr and transmitter lines for the RS232 interface.

Digital Communications Modification -

RS232 and RS485(422)

Terminals 10 and 12 are used to re-enable the lront panel buttons and

d[ital

input 1 and 2 if these have been disabled by either thE RS232

or

RS485(422) digital communications.

Whh these terminals open the digital comms can enable and disablE keylock' and 'Dig

in lock.

lf terminals 10 and 12 are shorted by relay contacts, switch or open collec-tor transistor these facilities are disabled

lrom the

digilal communications

link.

lf lKeylock'and

or'Dig

in lock' have been set by the

'digital commsthey areturned off as soon asterminals

10 and 12 are |oined and while they remained ioined these features cannot be set via the digital comms link. When terminals 10 and 12 are opened both the

'Keylock'and 'Dig in lock'will be'otf'and will only be reinstated when written to, by the status and optional status words.

NOTE: There is no isolation between this input and the communication bus.

REMOTE INPUTS

Terminals 15 and 17 are used lor the remote input to

the

analogue communications

board,

terminal

15 being +ve and 17 -ve.

I

17 COM

I r

I

815

818

818

818

815

818

818

29

30

:

35

36

+

14 POT +

15

VP+

17 coM lf neither ol the above inputs are being used and alarm

2 on the 818 controller or output 2 on the 815 controller is not required then a remote oulput can be led into thEse channels il a d.c. input board is fined. The connsctions in this case are terminals 35 and 36, 35 being positive, lor the 818 and terminals 29 and 30, 29 being positive, for the

815.

With mA inputs (See pages

5 and 7), use a 50O resistor.

External Potentiometer

I

nput

lf lhe remote input is to be provided by an external potentiometer rather that an analogue signal wire to lerminals

14, 15 and 17 as shown. The potentiometer should be

10K ohms.

16 OlP +

17 coM

29

30 f

32

+

33

RETRANSMISSION

Terminals 16 and 17 are used lor a retransmission output if a analogue communications board is fitted.

Terminal '16 is +ve.

NOTE: There is no isolation between terminals 15,

16 and 17.

lf no cool channel is required and on model 818 the analogue communications board is not fitted and alarm 1 is not used as a retransmission then a

re

transmission board can be fitted into channel 2, the cool channel to give a retransmission signal. will appear on terminal 29 and 30, terminal 29

This being +ve.

lf alarm 1 is not required and the analogue communications board is not litted and the cool channel is not configured as a retransmission output then a relransmission board can be fitted in to alarm 1 output. This willgive a retransmission signal out of lerminals 32 and 33, 32 being +ve.

The retransmission signal can be configured in software to be one of the following:-

Process Variable

Setpoint

Error

I

Only

available on model

Power --l 8te

I

I

14

15

TYPICAL W RING SCHEMES

815/818 DRIVING A SINGLE PHASE LOAD USING DIGTTAL COMMUNICATIONS AND

KEYLOCK FACIUNES

815/818 code (815s€18s-TC-R0V5-NONE-NONE-NONE485-96-S/SN 03-0-1200IC-KL-

AM-E-rN-M-P)

Note: All wiring and lusing to be carried out in accordan@ with local regulations (UK; IEE wiring regulations)

Eartr L

N

Fuse proteding cabl6

(

\

)

RS4:I2 Bt S

Fuse

I

5

4

1

L

2 RFI

10

I

3 l3 t4

ll

RFI t8 lr

SdeU

Eanh

815 t9

2l

2'

u

t)

31

Sryitch to adiwle lGylod(

460 SERIES

7

R)(- RX+ TX- TX+

SUPERVISOR

Local

Sdety

Eailh

Heder

I t

I i

815/818 DRIVING A 3 PHASE HEANNG LOAD AND CO}TTROLUNG UOUTD COOI.ANT

81s/81 g code (81 5s181 8s-RTD-RLGC41?IN-NONE-NONE-NONE-NONE-F/FN

70-80-

+1

50"C-AM-PS-D-N-S-P)

I

lr

II

I ii:

II:

lig

I

fr

5

T

i

a

*

f

I

,l

I

i

I

I

T

ir

I

t

ll

I

N

)

E

-

rIs

16

17

815/818 DRIVING ASINGLE PHASE LOADWITH ALARM WARNING AND OVER

TEMPERATURE TRIP

815/818 code (815s€18s-TGRRLY-NONE-DHD-FHD-NONE-NONE-S/SN-01-0.400-"C -

ST-KL-E-rN-M-P)

L

N Earth lncoming Fuss lo protecl cables

1

L

RFI

3 N

818

J

lnstrument Fuse

Mule Bulton

Siren

31

Relay

Alarm Lamp

RFI

Salety

Earlh

I

Ov€rtgmperaturs

Conlactoa

Conlrol

Conlaclor

+

_

rtc

Healer

Note: Alarm 1, terminal 31

,

32 when actived will sound the siren. Closing the mute button will energise the relay, mute the siren and illuminale the alarm lamp. Alarm 2, terminals 34 and 36, will operate the over temperature contaclor in an on/off mode.

818 VALVE POSMONER, CONTROLLING A GAS FIREO BOILER

81 8S-RTD-RVPR.CFB.NONE-NONE.NONE-NONE'SN 7O-O-1 OO-OC-NO-NO-E.N-M-N

+

I

c

F o

E

E dolqo

-

rEr

oIE

9t6

o

t.

dt

U

G oB

UG

J o

G

E ts

'

G

U

8

@ a

G

I

I

6

R T

$B o o

- oor or3

.Er

g;fr t

t

I

6

Ef

1?

EA

18

Eurotherm Conlrols Componies

UK Regionol Soles ond Service

Southern Areo

Home Counties, South ond

Soulh Cqst

Midlonds Areo

Midlonds, Soulh Woles,

Eost Anglio & South Wes,

Eurolherm Conirols Linrited

Forodoy Close, Durringlon

Worlhing

Wesl Sussex BN I 3 3PL

Telephone (0903) 693379

Teiex 871l4 EUROWG G

Fox {0903) 265982

Eur olhenr Controls Limited

Miller House

Corporolron Slreel, Rugby,

Woruickshire CV2l

2DW

Telephone (0788) 56201

1

Fox (0788) 536249

Norlhern Areo

North Wqles, Scotlond ond Northern Counlies

Eurothernr Conirols Lirniied

4/5 Cheihom Courl

Colver Rood Worrington

Cheshire WA2

8RF

Telephone 10925) 5721

1 ) felex 629852

Fox

(0925) 4l 3099

Overseos Componies

Austrolio

Eurotherm Pty. Ltd.

Telephone Sydoey \21 47 77O22 felex AAI 4362

Fox(21 47/7756

Also regionol offices

Hong Kong

Eurotherm Limited

Telephone Hong Kong (5) 8733826

Telex 69257 EIFEL HX

Fox (5) 8700

1

48

Austrio

Eurotherm GmbH

Telephone

Telex

Wien

10222)

I

I

3200 El AUT/A

187 60)

Fox lo222l

7

87 605 lrelond

Eurolherm lrelond Limited

Telephone Noos (045) 79937

Telex

Fox

0500'60745 ETMA El

(045)

75 I 23

Belgium

Eurolherm B.V.

Telephone Antwerpen (3) 3223870

Telex 0463331

/

EIENL

B

Fox

(3)

32 I 7363

Itoly

Eurotherm S.p,A.

Telephone

Telex

Como (3 I ) 977

1

03

380893 EUROTH

I

Fox (31) 977512

Denmork

Eurotherm A/S

Telephone Copenhogen

131) 87 1

622

Telex 3231 7 TELMET S

Fox

131)

872124

Jopon

Eurolherm KK

Telephone Tokyo (3) 33638324

Te ex 0232401 6 EUROIA

J

Fox (3) 33638320

Also regionol offices

Fronce

Eurolherm Automolion

SA

Telephone Lyon (78) 66

1

943

Telex 380038 EURTERM

F

Fox (78) 352490

Also regionol offices

Koreo

Eurolherm Koreo Limited

Telephone Seoul (2) 5548507

Telex EIKOR K23 I 05

Fox (2) 5539655

Germony

Eurolherm Regler GmbH

Telephone Li nburs (06431

)

2980

Telex 484791 EUROT D

Fox

(06431) 2981 l9

Also regionol offices

Netherlonds

Euroiherm E.V

Telephone Leiden

(/l)

4l 1841

Telex 39073

EIBNL NL

Fox

17

1) 41 4526

Soles ond Seryice in over 3O counlries

For countr ies nol listed obove oll enquiries/orders lo:

Eurotherm Controls Limited:

Exporl Depl , Forodoy Close, D!rrington, Worthing, West Sussex, BNI 3 3PL Englond

Telephone (0903) 268500 Ielex 871 14 EUROWG G Fox (0903) 265982

Printed in Englond 0793

New Zeqlond

Telephone

Fox (9)

Auckiond

3581350

(9) 35881 06

Noruqy

Eurofherm A/S

Telephone Oslo

Fox (66) 803331

(66) 803330

Spoln

Eurolherm Espono S.A.

Telephone (1) 6616001

Fox (l

) 661

9093

5weden

Eurotherm AB

Telephone Molrno (40) 435460

Telex 3231 7 TELMET

S

Fox (40) 435520

Swifzerlond

Eurotherm Produkte (S<hweiz) A.G.

Telephone Zurich (1 ) 81

03646

Telex 827577 ESAG

Fox (1) 8108920

Unifed Kingdom

Eurolherm Conlrols Limited

Telephone Worlhins (0903) 268500

Telex 871 I 4 EUROWG G

Fox (0903) 265982

Also regionol of{ices u.s.a

Eurolherm Conlrols lnc.

Te ephone Reslon (703) 471 4870

Telex 899449 EUROTHERM RSTN

Fox

Also

\7O3)

4373182 regionol olfices

HAO21445 lssue 6

(D

TEN'IPERATURE

CONTROTTERS

EUROTHERAA

CONTROLS

PROCESS AUTOMATIO

RECORDERS

nstqllqtion

qnd

operqt

on

hondbook

6i"n,r,,

lnstallation and Operation

Handbook

Parameter

DescrlDtlon

UK usA

0Plo

Low (power) output limit

Uil

or -

UAIJ

(cool)

-

r0ul] IUUil /o

OPH, High (power) outpul limit

IUU]) IUUl)

-

fiAIJ IUUI

5bI]P Output setting when in sensor break

1[V[H

Heat cvcle time

OD

-

ru0fl IOUfl

ontH

Heat output min.

on time

1[V[I

Cool cycle time

0l l0

ltosici ?0

(relav)

0l

OP

H"to

(s0mS)

lontf

Cool output min. on time

mtr

VP motor travel time

IIJ

ltosicl ?0

(relav)

0t

I

Are not used for Valve Position Control.

0.t

AP

Huto

(s0mS)

OD

999.9

999 9

999.9

999.9

999 9

/o secs

SECS

SECS secs cn5

Rddr

Comms list

Communications address

I e5q

Operation

Soto

[.onF

Full and Edit level

Goto level

-

1PEr

FA,

'FuLL' lt n-

rnnF

Configuration level password e

D

lPEr

1PEr 1PEr a

9999 conF

9999

2208e and 2204e Controller 1-2'l

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Alarms are used to irlert an operator when a pre-set levcl has been cxceeded. They lre norrnally used to switch an output (sec l. l0)

-

usually a rclay

-

to provide extcrnal ltctions ttr the process.

Soft Alarms arc indication only and do not opcrate an output.

Events are generally delined as conditions. which occur as part ol'thc opcrlttion ol'thc plnnt

They

<Jo not rcquire opcrator intervention and, therctirrc, do ttot causc an llarnr tttcssagc to bc displayed. They can he attached to operate nn output (rclay) in thc sutnc way as an alartlr.

This scction shows graphically the operation oi difterent types of alarm uscd in the indicator

The graphs show changes in PV plotted agtrinst time. The PV lray be dcrived liorn input l.

input 2 or the main PV derived from input I &

2.

Alarm Type py

Full Scale High

<-

Process Variable (PV)

Deviation High

Setpoint (SP)

Deviation Low

Full Scale Low

Bale of

Change

Output State

Full scale low

Deviation low

Deviation

Deviation band

Full scale

Rate of

Figure 1-17: Alarm Types

1-22

2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Operation

Hysteresis is the difference between the point at which the alarm switches ON and the point at which it switches OFF.

It is used to prevent relay chatter.

Blocking Alarms only occur after the start up phase when the alarm has first entered a satb state. The alarm is only indicated the next time it is active. lt is used, fbr example, to ignore start up conditions which are not representative of runriing conditions.

Latching Alarms see 7.1.1.

Delay a settable time between an alarm occurring and it being displayed on the indicator

L

Alarms can operate a specitic output (usually a relay). Any individual alarm can operate an individual relay or any combination of alarms can operate an individual relay. They are either supplied pre-configured in accordance with the orclering code or set up in configuration level.

See Chapter 5 fbr turther intbrmation.

Alarm

1

Alarm 2

Alarm lnput lail

Sensor break

nor

Relay output

5En5

dtE

,NU

Any combination of alarms can operate the relay

Typical alarms are shown

Figure 1-18: Attaching Alarms to an Output

2208e and 22Me Controller

1-23

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Up to 4 Alarms may be configured. Each alarm is given a name to describe its tunction see table below: lf an alarm is not configured it does not appear in the list below

FL

L, 5t

4

Alarm List

't-24 ln place of dashes, letters indicate alarm as follows

-F5L

Eull Scale Low

-F5H

-dE"

-dH,

lull

Scale ![igh

Deviation Band

Deviation High

-dLo

-L

cr

-Hcr

Deviation Low low gulrent

!!igh gulrent t---

100

+

Alarm l

+ oriElto

change

2nd press

e---

a

Alarm 2

+ V

or

Ja

lto change

3rd press l---

0

+

Alarm 3

+

or

A to change

4th press

{---

0

+

Alarm 4

+ V orla

lto change

Lbt

T]FF

5th press

+

Loop break lime

+ V

or to change

Press to return to list header

Figure 1-19 To Set Alarm Trip Levels

2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

When an alarm occurs, the alarm mnemonic (e.g. lF5Hl will be indicated by a double tlash in the HOME display. Similarly, if more than one alarm occurs the relevant mnemonics are flashed in the HOME display. The double flash will continue whilst the alarm condition is present and is not acknowledged.

Press

o and '

together to acknowledge the alarm

If the alarm condition is still present when the alarm is acknowledged, it will be indicated by a single flash of the alarm mnemonic and this single flash will be repeated fbr as long as the alarm condition remains. When the alarm condition disappears the indication will also disappear..

If the alarm condition is no longer present when the alarm is acknowledged, the flashing message will disappear immediately on acknowledgement.

If a relay has been attached to the alarm output (see Chapter 7 'Alarm Operation'), it will operate when the alarm condition occurs and remain in the operated condition until the alarm is acknowledged AND it is no longer present

2208e and 2204e Controller 1-25

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Thcse indicate that a lault exists in either the controller or the connected devices.

Display shows

What

it

means

EEEr

5hr

Lbr

LdF

55rF

HLr F

HtEr

What

to

do about

it

Electrically Erasable

Memory Error:

The value of an operator or configuration parameter has been corrupted

This fault will automatically take you into configuration level. Check all of the configuration parameters before returning to operator level. Once in operator level, check all of the operator parameters belore resuming normal operation. lf the fault persists or occurs frequently, contact your supplier

Check that the sensor is correctly connected Sensor Break: lnput sensor is unreliable or the input signal is out of range

Loop Break:

The feedback loop is open circuit

Load failure lndication that there is a fault in the heating circuit or the solid state relay

Check that the heating and cooling circuits are working properly

Solid state relay failure lndication that there is a fault in the solid state relay

Heater failure lndication that there is a fault in heating circuit

This is an alarm generated by feedback from a

TE10S solid state relay (SSR) operating in PDS

SSRx Load Doctor-see Electrical installation

Chapter

2.

lt indicates either an open or short circuit SSR, blown fuse, missing supply or open circuit heater

This is an alarm generated by feedback from a

TE10S solid state relay (SSR) operating in PDS

SSRx Load Doctor see Electrical inslallation

Chapter

2.

lt indicates either an open or short circuit condition in the SSR

This is an alarm generated by feedback from a

TE10S solid state relay (SSR) operating in PDS

SSRx Enhanced Load Doctor-see Electrical installation Chapter

2.

lt indicates either a blown fuse, missing supply or open circuit heater

Check that the correct modules are fitted Hardware error lndication that a module is the wrong type

no. ro

No l/O module

Modules are configured but not fitted

This error message normally occurs when preconfiguring a controller without installing any of the required l/O modules

't-26

Figure 1.20a Diagnostic alarms - continued on the next page

22OBe and 22O4e Conlroller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

Thcsc indicate that a fault cxists in cither the controller or the connected dcvices

Display shows rnEF

LLLL

HHHH

Err

I

Err?

Err)

Errl

Er.5

Pur F

LUEr

Remote input failure.

fhe

PDS input is open circuit.

(PDS Also known as SST

-

Smart Setpoint

Transmission)

Check for

PDS input open or short circuit wiring on the

Out of Display range, low reading

Out of Display range, high reading

Check the value of the display range

Check the value of the display range

Error 1: ROM self-test fail

Error 2: RAM self-test fail

Error 3: Watchdog fail

Return the controller for repair

Return the controller for repair

Return the controller for repair

Error 4: Keyboard lailure

Stuck button, or a button was pressed during power up.

Swilch the power off and then on without touching any of the controller buttons.

Error

5:

lnput circuit lailure Return the controller for repaif

Power failure. The line voltage is too low

Tune error. lf any one stage ol the tuning process exceeds 2 hours the tune error alarm occurs

Check that the supply to the controller is within the rated limits

Check response time ol process: check that the sensor has not failed: check that the loop is not broken. Acknowledge by pressing'page' button and 'scroll' button together.

Figure 1.20b Diagnostic alarms

*lf

the user has disasscrnbled and reassemblcd the instrument, this error can occur ilany connectors are not seatcd properly.

2208e and 2204e Controller

1-27

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

't-28 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

2

Chapter

2

INSTALLATION

2.1

!NSTRUMENTLAYOUTS................

2.1

.2

Outline Dimensions Model 2208e

2.1

.3

Outline Dimensions Model 2204e

2.2

INTRODUCTION

2.2.2

Controllerlabels...........

2,3

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

2.3.2

Unplugging and plugging-in the controller.

2,4

WIRING

2.4.2

Wire Sizes

2.4.3

Wiringconnections..

2.4.4

Sensor input connections..............

2.4.5

Outputs

1and2

connections

2.5

PDS MODES

2.6

SNUBBERS.......

2.7

TYPICAL SINGLE

LOOP

WIRING

DIAGRAM

2.8

RS

232485t422 COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS

..........

2.8.2

Wiring of EIA-485 serial communication 1inks.............

2.9

DEVICENET

WIBING TO

SERIES 22OOE

CONTROLLERS

.

2.9.2

DeviceNetTerminal Functions

2.9.3

Wiring lnterconnections for DeviceNet Communications...........

1

9

10

11

12

12

13

8

4

4

4

4

5

2

3

3

6

6

7

7

I

2208e and 2204e Controller 2-1

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

@

@

@

@

o

Figure 2-1

:

22OBe 1lA DIN controller

KEY

1.

Display screen

2.

Latching ears

3.

Panel sealing gasket

4.

Panel retaining clips

5.

Label

6.

Sleeve

7.

ConnectionTerminals

8.

Keypad

2-2

@

o

Figure

2-2i

2204e 114 DIN controller

22OBe and 2204e Controller

Panel cutout

92 x 45mm ft {t

+0E

+06

3.62x1 .77in

-0 {t

{_0-r {.02

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

48mm

(1.89in)

I

103mm (4.01in)

96mm

(3.78in)

?D.D.O

a0 0.0

Recommended

Omm minimum spacing of l.+in) controllers

'l t A

I

38mm

(1.5in)

(Not to scale)

Figure

2-3:

Outline dimensions Model 2208e controller

103mm (4.01in)

96mm (3.78in)

96mm

3.78in

l0^0.0

IODD

Panel cutout

92 x 92

'o +o

8mm

3.62 x 3.62

-o +o o3in

Recommended minimum spacing ol controllers

1omm

(0.4in)

-l

t I

38mm

(1.sin)

(Not t0 stule )

Figure

2-4:

Outline dimensions Model 2204e controller

The controller plugs into a plastic sleeve, which in turn fits into the panel cut-out shown in

Figures 2-3 and2-4.

22o8e and 2204e Controller 2-3

lnstallation

I nstallation and Operation Handbook

The Models 2208e and 2204e are precision temperature controllers with sell tuning. They have a modular hardware construction which provides two control outputs, two alarm relays and one communications port. Two logic inputs are provided as standard. In addition the Model 2204e has an optional plug-in l0A relay heating output.

The labels on the sides of the controller identity the ordering code, the serial number, and the wiring connections.

Appendix A, Understanding tlrc Ortlering Code explains the hardware and software configuration of your particular controller

To install the

controller

L

Cut the panel to the relevant hole size shown in Figure 2-3 and 2.4.

2.

lnsert the controller through the front of this cutout.

3.

Spring the upper and lower panel retaining clips into place. Secure the controller in position by holding it level and pushing both retaining clips lbrward.

Note: Ifthe panel retaining clips subsequently need removing, they can be unhooked from the side with either your fingers or a screwdriver.

The controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching eitrs outwards and pulling it forward out of the sleeve. When plugging the controller back into its sleeve, ensure that the latching ears click into place to maintain moisture sealing protection.

2-4

2208e and 2204e Controller

I nslallation and Operation Handbook lnstallation

Please read Appendix B, Safety and EMC infbrmation befbre proceeding.

WARNING

Please ensure that the

controller

is correctly configured

for

your application. lncorrect

configuration could

result in damage process being controlled, and/or personal injury. The to the

controller

may either have been configured when ordered, or may need

configuring now.

See Chapter 5, Configuration.

The wiring connections are sl.rown in fi-eure 2-5. Outputs I and 2 are factory lltted rnodules which can be any one of the types shown in tigure 2-8. Check the ordering code on the controller side label to dete rrninc which have been fittcd.

Model 2208e connections

Output

1

Output

2

Comms

E]

EI

E

EI

EI

E] t r

Line

Neutral

85 to 264Vac lnput

Ground lnput

Common

Output 3

Output 4

]

+

PV

I

Pt100

Figure

2-5:

Model 2208e wiring connections

*The ground conncction is not requircd lbr electrical saf'ety but nrust be connected to ensure EMC

.Do nol performance use unused is terminals optimised as wire holders.

2208e and 2204e Controller 2-5

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

All electrical connections arc rr.rirdc to the scrcw tcrnrinitls at the rear of thc controller. They accept wire sizes fiom 0.5 to

I .-5 rnm' 116 to 22 AWC), and are protcctcd by

I

hingcd cover to prevent hands or metal making accidental contact with live wires. Rear tenninals should be tightened to a torque of 0.4Nm (3.5 lb in).

The wiring connections are shown in ligure 2-6. Outputs I and 2 are factory llttcd rtodules which can be any one of the types shown in I'igure 2-8. Check the ordering codc on the controller side labcl to determine which havc been titted.

Model 2204e Connections

Line

B

A

R

B

U

S

Line

B

U

S

B

A

R

4A

49

4C

I

H

G

TI

4D

5A

5B

5C

5D

C

U

R

R

E f

!l

6A

6B

6C

6D

I

U

o

P

U

T

Output

1

1A

'tB

Output 2 2A

28

3A

Output 4

3B

3C

NO

Comms

HA

HB

HC

+

HD

LA

HE

LB

HF

LC

*or

AA

N

L

*"f AB

AC

VI

NC

Line

Neutral

Vac

'Ground' lnput

1

Output 3

Pt100

Figure

26:

Model 2204e Wiring connections

*The ground connection is not required lbr sat'ety purposes hut tnust be connected to ensure EMC pertbrmance is optirniscd.

*Do not use unused terminals as wire holders.

22OBe and 2204e Controller 2-6

lnstallation and Operation

Handbook

lnstallation

The connections lbr the various types ol input are as follows:

Thermocouple

Resistance thermometer mA input

VI VI

V+

2.49ocurrent sense resistor

Volts or mV inputs

VI

V+

+

PV

Figure

2-7:

Sensor input connections

Sensor inputs should not be paralleled

Outputs land2canbeanyoneof thetypesshowninthetablebelow,configuredtoperform any one of the functions shown.

To check which outputs are installed, and their configuration, ret'er to the ordering code and the wiring information on the controller side labels.

(24,

Relay: 2-pin

2il

Vac max.)

Logic: non-isolated.

(1

SVdc at 24mA)

Line

1B

+ +

Heating

Cooling

Alarms

+

*PDS modes 1 or 2 (SSRx

Load DoctorrM Functions) _NJ-L

Heating

Cooling

Alarms

Heating or cooling

(1A,

Triac

30 to 264Vac)

DC control: isolated

(19Vdc, 20mA max)

+ DC not in available output 2

PID Heating or cooling

*Logic output can also

-PDS

Mode I & 2 are be conligured as logic input on module 24.

only supported in Module

I

A.

Figure

2-8:

Outputs 'l and 2 connections

2204n and 2204e Conkoller 2-7

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

PDS is a proprietary technique developed for bi-directional communication over a single pair of wires. There are several operating modes.

In SSRx Load DoctorrM a logic output delivers a power demand signal to a

TEl0 solid state

(SSR) relay and the SSR responds with a single load circuit failure message.

In SSRx Enhanced Load DoctorrM a logic output delivers a power demand signal to an SSR and the SSR responds with the ON state rms load current, and two tault messages - SSR failure or heater circuit failure.

The controller is supplied with 'snubbers' (l5nF +100Q) which should be wired across the relay or triac outputs when switching inductive loads such as mechanical contactors and solenoid valves. The snubbers are used to prolong contact life and to suppress interference when switching such loads. Snubbers pass 0.6mA at I l0Vac and l.2mA at240Yac, which may be sutficient to hold in high impedance relay coils. They should not, theretbre, be used in such instal lations.

WARNING

When a relay contact is used in an alarm circuit ensure that the current passing through the snubber when the relay contact is open does not hold in low power electrical loads and thereby interfere with the failsafe operation of the alarm circuit.

2-8 22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Snu

Cooling Power

Fuse

'lA(T)

1B

Output

1 logic heating

HB

HC

HD

Output 2

Triac cooling

j,il

r!

rA1

1'

^;

Ed

E]

l.l

I'l

ll-]

-l ao

Controller

Fuse

2A(T) lnstallation

Line

Neutral

Cooling

Solenoid Valve

-

Solid State

Relay such as

+

TEl0S

Heating power fuse

(load dependent)

Heater

Thermocouple

Figure

2-9:

Typical wiring diagram, Model 2208e Controller

2208e and 2204e Controller 2-9

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

The communication option can be either of four types shown in the table below

HB

4-wire EIA-422 serial communications'

A

(RX +)

B'

(Rx -)

Common A

(TX +)

A (+)

B

(TX

2-wire EIA-485 serial communications'

Not used Not used Common B (-)

EIA-232 serial communications

Not used Not used Common A B

PDS Setpoint input Not used Not used Not used Signal

*The 4-wire EIA-422 communication board can be modified to support 2-wire 485 communication. Please consult factory.

Figure

2-10:

Communication connections

Common

2-10 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook lnstallation

PC

Locd

Esth

232

Ccrn

TX X

Standard EIA-485 is a 2-wire connection which allows up to 32 controllers to be multi-dropped from a single communications link over a distance of up to 1.2Km. To ensure reliable operation of the communications link,

(without data corruption due to noise or line reflections) the connections between the controller should be made using a twisted pair of wires inside a shielded cable with the connections terminated with resistors in the manner shown in this diagram. This diagram also shows the use ol a

Comms converter to connect the 2-wire EIA-485 link into a standard EIA-232 computer port.

Univssd Covstq

HE

HF+

HD

S eris

2000IM

Ccnlrdle(

Common and Local

Earth cannot be connected together

Locd

E ath

B

Cm

-'

Locd Eslh rEJ

N

C-m lsdolio

Borier

Up to 32 mlrdlss s lntstcre Unils rDr' be irduGd m the rclwk

B

Cryn

HE llF +

HD

Fc, screly roGcns

6 not ffinec-l to lood rlh hse

Ssi6

2000rM

Cmlrdls

Note:

Al tsrinofim rgislss ae

220 ofm

I /4W obon mrpcsllim

Locd gGrG ae ot egJipotentid Whse sepsote zcrres

L-6 ing o gdvdc is dots egJipolstd is noi o/cilclle trire into

Figure

2-11:

2-wire ElA.485 wiring

2208e and 2204e Conltollet

Ssi6

2000tM

Cmtdls

HE

HF +

HD

2-11

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

This section covers the DeviceNet digital communications option fbr the model 2208e and

Z2O4ePlD controllers. To configure DeviceNet communications ret'er to pages -5-16 and 5-17

HA

HB

HC

HD

HE

V+

CAN

H

SHIELD

CAN-L

Red

White

None

Blue

Black

DeviceNet network power positive terminal. Connect the red wire of the DeviceNet cable here. lf the

DeviceNet network does not supply the power, connect to the positive terminal of an external

1

1-25

Vdc power supply.

DeviceNet CAN-H data bus terminal. Connect the white wire of the DeviceNet cable here.

Shield/Drain wire connection. Connect the

DeviceNet cable shield here. To prevent ground loops, the DeviceNet network should be grounded in only one location.

DeviceNet CAN-L data bus terminal. Connect the blue wire of the DeviceNet cable here.

DeviceNet network power negative terminal.

Connect lf the the black wire of the DeviceNet cable here.

DeviceNet network does not supply the power' connect to the negative terminal of an external

1

1-25

Vdc power supply

Notes:

Power taps are recommended to connect the

DC power supply to the DeviceNet trunk line. Power taps include:

A Schottky Diode to connect the power supply V+ and allows fbr multiple power supplies to be connected.

2 fuses or circuit breakers to protect the bus from excessive current which could dam;lge the cable and connectors.

2-12

22O8e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Card

Top

5-Position

COMBICOM

V+5

CAN-H 4

Drain

3

CAN.L 2 v-1

Red wht

BIU

Blk

2200e Conkoller

HA V+

HB

HC

CAN.H

Drain

HD CAN.L

HE

HF (SLAVE)

Address

1 1

Diag

DB.9M

RDY RUN oo

NET MON

Typical lnterface Card

(MASTER)

2200e Controller

HA V+

HB CAN-H

Drain HC

HD CAN.L

HE

HF (SLAVE)

Address 12

Network Supply

24Ydc (

11%)

250mV p-p Ripple

V+

2200e Conkoller

HA V+

HB

HC 121c)

*

HD

HE

I

HF

(SLAVE)

Address N+

vv

Da sy chain to further instruments

*

Fit to last instrument in the chain

Figure 2-12: 2-Wiring Connections lor

22OOe Series DeviceNet Controllers

2-13 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation

I nstallation and Operation Handbook

2-14 22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and ODeration Handbook

3

Chapter

3

ACCESS

LEVELS

3.2

THE

DIFFERENT

ACCESS LEVELS........

3.3

SELECTING

AN

ACCESS LEVEL....

3.3.2

Returning to Operator Leve|............

3.4

Edit level

3.4.2

Hiding or revealing a complete list

3.4.3

Promoting a parameter

Access Levels

..............1

2

5

6

6

3

5

2208e and 2204e Controller

3-1

Access Levels lnstallation and Operation Handbook

This chapter describes the different levels oi access to the operating parameters within the

2208e and 2204e controller.

There are three topics:

.

THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS

.

SELECTING AN ACCESS LEVEL

.

EDIT LEVEL

Operator

Full

Edit

Configuration

lPEr

ln this level operators can view and adjust the value of parameters defined in Edit level (see below).

FuLL ln this level all the parameters relevant to a particular configuration are visible. All alterable parameters may be adjusted.

Ed,

t

ln this level you can set which paramelers an operator in Operator level is able to view and adjust. You can hide or reveal complete lists and individual parameters within each list, and you can make parameters read-only or alterable. You can also promote parameters to the home list. (See Edit level al the end of the chapte0.

[.onF

This special level allows access to set up the fundamental characteristics of the controller.

Figure

3-1

Access levels

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

3-2 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Access Levels

Access to Full, Edit or Configuration levels is protected by a password to prevent unauthorised acccss ll'you need to change the pzrssword, see Chapter 5, Configurution

Press

D

until you reach the access list neaaer'Fff 5'

trtr5

L, 5t

Press the S<:roll button ladE

I

C}

L-'

The passworcl is entered from the

'lodE'

display

Enter the password using the or buttons.

Once the correct password has been entered, there is a two second delay afier which the lower readout will change to show 'PH55' indicating that access is now unlocked.

The pass number is set to

'

I' when the controller is shipperl tiom the factory.

Note; A special case exists

if

the password has been set to

'0'.

In this case access will be permanently unlocked and the lower readout will always

.to*'PH55'

Press the Scroll button to proceed to the

'f,oto'

display.

(lf an incorract password has been entered and the controller is still

'locked' then pressing Scroll at this point

trr" H[[5

list header.) will simply return you to

Note: From this

codE

display, configuration level by pressing

To escape, press

U and

D

can access

"read only" and together together

2208e and 2204e Controller 3-3

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Access Levels

[oEB

F"L

L v

U

Hcr5

L, 5t

The' Eoto'

disptay allows you to select the required access level.

Use codes

V and to select from the tbllowing display

1PEr:

operator level

FuLL:Full

level

Edr t;

Edit tevet canF : Conti guration tevel

Press the Scroll buttr-ttr

If you selected either '0PEr will be returned to the

,

FrL L ot Ed,

t

le vel you

'H[[5

ritt header in the level that you chose. lf you selected

'conF ,you will get an alternative display showing

'fonF'

in the upper readout

(see below).

(j lanF

PH55

\-r

n5k

[,anF

When the

'fonF'

display appears, you must enter the

Contiguration password in order to gain access to

Configuration level. Do this by repeating the password entry procedure described in the previous section

The configuration passworcl is set to 'P' when the controller is shipped from the factory. If you need to change the cont-iguration password, see Chapter 5,

Configuration

Pres.s tlrc Scroll button

The first display of contiguration is shown. See chapter 5

Configuration for details of the contiguration parameters.

For instructions on leaving configuration level see

Chapter 5, Confi gurat ion,

2208e and 2204e Controller 3-4

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Access Levels

To return to operator level from irnd select

'DPEr' on the

either'FuLL'o.'Ed,

'[oto'

display.

t'

level, repeat entry of the password

In 'Edit' level the controller will automatically return to operator level if no button is pressed for 45 seconds.

Edit level is used to set which parameters you can see and adjust in Operator level. lt also gives access to the 'Promote' t-eature which allows you to select and add

('Promote') up to twelve parameters into the Home display list, thereby giving simple access [o commonly used parameters.

Setting operator access to a parameter

First you must select

Once in

Edr

Ed, E tevet, as shown on the previous page.

t

tevet you select a list or a parameter within a list in the same way as you woultl in Operator or Full level. That is, you move from list header to list header by pressing the Page button, and fiom parameter to parameter within each list using the Scroll btlton. However, in

Edit level what is displayed is not lhe value of a selected parameler but a code representing lhe parameter's availability in Operator level.

When you have selected the required parameter, use the availability in operator level.

and buttons to set its

There are lour codes:

FLtr

Makes a parameter alterable in Operator level

Pro

Promotes a parameter into the Home disptay list

rEFld Vrt".

a parameter or list header read-only (it can be viewed bur not aLrered)

H,

dE

Hiaes a parameter or list header.

For example:

L

HL

Er

v

The parameter selected is the set point for

Alarm 2 - Full Scale Low

It will be alterable in Operator level

22OBe and 2204e Conlroller 3-5

Access Levels lnstallation and Operation Handbook

To hide a complete is selected only

(lt is not possible two to u have to do is hide the list header.

rEHd

ana h dE.

ich will always display the code;

If a list header

'L,

5E'.1

Scroll through the lists to the required parameter and choose

the'Pro'

code. The parameter is then automatically added (promoted) into the Home display list (the parameter will also be accessible as normal from the standard lists. a maximum of l2 parameters can be promoted.

Promoted parameters are automatically'alterable'.

3-6 2208e and 2204e Controller

Tuning lnstallation and Operation Handbook

4. Chapter

4

TUN NG

4.

Chapter

4 TUNING

4.1.

WHAT

IS

TUNING?....

4.2.

AUTOMATIC

TUNING

4.2.1.

Heating and Cooling Output Cycle Times

4.3.1.

Typical automatic tuning cyc|e..........

4.3.2.

Calculation of the cutback values

4.4.

MANUAL TUNING

4.4.1

.

Setting the cutback values

4.4.2.

lntegrating action and manual reset.............

4.4.3.

Automatic droop compensation (Adc).....

.............1

2

5

5

6

I

7

8

3

3

4

22OBe and 2204e Controller 4-1

Tuning lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Before tuning please read Chapter

l,

Operation, to learn how to select and change a parameter

This chapter has three main topics:

.

WHAT lS TUNING?

.

AUTOMATIC TUNING

.

MANUAL TUNING

In tuning you match the characteristics ofthe controller to that ofthe process being controlled in order to obtain good control. Good control means:

Stable 'straight-line' control of the temperature at setpoint without fluctuation

Acceptable overshoot or undershoot of the temperature setpoint

Quick response to deviations from the setpoint caused by external disturbances, thereby restoring the temperature rapidly to the setpoint value.

Tuning involves calculating and setting the value of the parameters listed in Table 4- I

.

These parameters appear in the

Pr

d

list.

Proportional band lntegral time

Derivative time

Low cutback

High Cutback

Relative cool garn

Pb The bandwidth in display units over which the output power is proportioned between minimum and maximum.

t,

Determines the time taken by the controller to remove steadystate error signals.

td

Determines how strongly the controller will react to the rate-oi change of the measured value.

Lcb The number ol display units below setpoint at which the controller will cutback the output power in order to prevent overshoot on heat up.

Hcb The number of display units above setpoint at which the controller will increase the output power in order to prevent undershoot on cool down.

rELf

Only present if cooling has been configured. Sets the cooling proportional band by dividing the Pb value by the rEL.C value.

Table 4-1 Tuning parameters

4-2 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Tuning

This method automatically determines the value of the parameters listed in table 4- I on the prevlous page.

The 2208e and 2204e use a 'one-shot' luner which works by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in the measured value. From the amplitude and period of the oscillation, it calculates the tuning parameter values.

If the process cannot tolerate full heating or cooling being applied during tuning, then the level of heating or cooling can be restricted by setting the heating and cooling power limits in the

Output list. However, the measured value mus! oscillate to some degree for the tuner to be able to calculate values

A One-shot Tune can be performed at any time but normally it is performed only once during the initial commissioning of the process. However, ifthe process under control subsequently becomes unstable (because its characteristics have changed), you can re-tune again for the new conditions.

It is best to start tuning with the process at ambient temperature. This allows the tuner to calculate more accurately the low cutback and high cutback values that restrict the amount of overshoot or undershoot.

Before commencing a tuning cycle, set the values of cycle time) in the op (output

IV[H

(heat cycle time) and

f V[.f

lcoot list). These values apply if you are using a logic, relay or triac output. They have no effect on a DC output.

A logic output switching a solid state relay can be set to values such as I sec.

A relay or triac output should be set to 20 sec.

22OBe and 2204e Conkoller 4-3

Tuning lnstallation and Operation Handbook

l.

Set the setpoint to the value at which you will normally operate the process.

2.

In the

'Htun'

list, select 'EunE' and set it to

'on'

3.

Press the Page and Scroll buttons together to return to the Home display. The display will flash

'tunE'to

indicate that tuning is in progress.

4.

The controller will induce an oscillation in the temperature by turning the heating on and then off. The first cycle will not complete until the measured value has reached the required setpoint.

5.

After two cycles of oscillation the tuning will be completed and the tuner will switch itself off.

6.

The controller will then calculate the tuning parameters listed in Table 4- I and will resume normal control action.

Ifyouwant'Proportionalonly'or'PD'or'Pl'control,youshouldsetthe'tr'o.'td'

parameters

rc lFF

before commencing the tuning cycle. The tuner will leave them off and will not calculate a value for them.

For valve position tuning and set-up, please refer to Appendix D

4-4 22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Temperature

Setpoint

Tuning

Tlme

Low cutback and High cutback are values that restrict the amount of overshoot or undershoot that occur during large step changes in temperature (for example, under startup conditions).

If either low cutback or high cutback is set to 'HuEo' the values will be fixed at three times the proportional band, and will not be changed during automatic tuning.

2208o and 2204e Controller 4-5

Tuning lnstallation and Operation Handbook lf for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results, you can tune the controller manually. There are a number of standard methods for manual tuning. The one described here is the Ziegler-Nichols method.

With the process at its normal running temperature:

l.

Set the Integral Time

'tr I

and the Derivative Time

'Ed' rc

1FF

.

2.

Set High Cutback and Low Cutback,

'Hcb'

and

'Lcb',

to

'Euto'

3.

Ignore the fact that the temperature may not settle precisely at the setpoint

4.

If the temperature is stable, reduce the proportional band

'Pb'

so that the temperature just starts to oscillate. If the temperature is already oscillating, increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating. Allow enough time between each adjustment for the loop to stabilise. Make a note of the proportional band value

'B'

and the period ol oscillation 'T'.

5.

Set the Pb, ti, td parameter values according to the calculations given in Table 4-2.

Proportional only

P + I control

P+l+Dcontrol

ZxB

2.2x8

OFF

0.8xT

1.7xB

0.5xT

Table 4-2 Tuning values

OFF

OFF

0.1

2xT

4-6 2208e and 2204e Conllollet

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Tuning

The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. If unacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up or for large step changes in temperature, then manually set the cutback parameters

Lcb

anO

Hcb.

Proceed as follows:

l.

Set the low and high cutback values to three proportional bandwidths (that is to say,

lrb

=

Hcb=3xPb).

2.

Note the level ofovershoot or undershoot that occurs for large temperature changes (see the diagrams below).

In example (a) increase

lcb

Uy the overshoot value. In example (b) reduce

Lcb

Uy ttre undershoot value.

Example (a)

Temperature

Setpoint

Example (b)

Temperature

Time

Where the temperature approaches setpoint from above, you can

t"t

,'lcb in a similar manner,

?2OBe and 2204e Controller 4-7

Tuning lnstallation and Operation Handbook

In a full three-term controller (that is, a PID controller), the integral term

'ti'

automatically removes steady state errors from the setpoint. If the controller is set up to work in two-term mode (that is, PD mode), the integral term will be set to

0FF.

UnO.t these conditions the measured parameter value may not settle precisely at setpoint. When the integral te.rm is set to OFF the manual reset(coderE5) appears in thePr

d L, 5t

in'FuLL'Access level.

This parameter represents the value of the power output that will be delivered when the error is zero. You may set this value manually in order to remove the steady state error.

The steady state error from the setpoint, which occurs when the integral term is set to OFF, is sometimes ref'erred to as

'droop'.

Fldc automatically calculates the manual reset value in order to remove this droop. To use this facility, you must first allow the.temperature to stabilise. Then, in the autotune parameter list, you must set

FdC to

'tFLt'.

The controller will then calculate a new value for manual reset, and

s*it.h Fdc

to 'mFIn'.

Fldc .on be repeated as often as you require but between each adjustment you must allow time for the temperature to stabilise.

4-8 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

Chapter

5

CONFIGURAT ON

5. Chapter

5

CONFIGURATION.............

5.1 SELECTING

CONF!GURATION LEVEL.......

5.2 SELECTING

A CONFIGURATION PARAMETER................

2

3

5.3

LEAVING

CONFIGURATION LEVEL

5.5

NAVIGATION

DTAGRAM (PART A)

3

5.4 STEPS INVOLVED IN CONFIGURING

A CONTROLLER..................

3

4

5.6NAVIGATION

DTAGRAM (PART B)

5.7

CONFIGURATION

PARAMETER

TABLES.

5.8 CONFIGURATION OF

DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

5.8.

1

. To Configure the Function and Baud

Rate................

5.8.2. To Sel lnstrument Address.....

s.9 DEVICENET..........

5.9.1. The EDS Fi|e......

5.9.2. ODVA Compliance..

...............16

..................16

..................1 7

..17

..17

..17

5

7

1

WARNING

Configuration is protected by a password and should be carried out by an authorised person. Incorrect con{iguration could result in damage to the process being controlle{ and./or personal

injury. It

is the responsibility of the person commissioning the process to ensure that the configuration is correct.

Whenever the configuration level is accessed, all controller outputs are held in the power oflf state and control operation is suspended

2208e and 2204e Controller 5-l

Configuration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Selecting

conf

iguration level

.HOME' display

Press Page button repeatedly until Access

List appears

ar0

e0I]

l'

'

:

:'- '

t5

L, 5E

1st press

f.odE

I

PH55

2 secs

V A

to enter password default = 1)

:ll the password

-

has

: ibeen set to '0' iaccess is ipermanently unlocked i& the lower

readout

ialways shows PASS i i

: i

:

2nd press

(,

oto conF

V

to select fonF

:Note: Selecting i0PEl-'

FuLL' or Ed' E iwill allow direct entry ito these levels at this ipgi.,tl...........

3rd press

(, tonF

?

PHs5

V A

to enter password

(factory default = 2)

4th press

I nSE fonF

D

IP

LonF

Repeated pressing ol "Page" button selects configuration list headings in a continuous loop

Figure 5.1

5-2 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Selecting

a

configuration parameter

(continued from previous page)

[.onF

e

G

1st press

I

n5t

fonF

Select the desired Configuration List using the i'Paoe' button l-ltll

lTll

i

:See navigation

:headings diagram for the full list of

2nd press

Un,

E of

V

or

l\

to select

oft

of

t

or oft iContinue to press Scroll button to

:access all parameters in the list before

:returning to List header

Leaving configuration level

:ii;;;;;;;;i;;

IiEi ;;tii

:Exlt dlsplay appears

Configuration

I/ or Z\ to select VE5

After a 2 second delay the screen will blank and revert to the "HOME" display

STEPS

INVOLVED

IN CONFIGURING

A CONTROLLER

The navigation diagram which follows shows thegeneral location of parameters which detrne the way in which the controller works. They are grouped under headings.

The actual parameters shown in your controller may ditfer slightly since some appear only as a result of selecting others. A full list of possibilities is included in the PARAMETER

TABLES which tbllow the navigation diagram.

22OBe

a

d 2204e Conlroller 5-3

5-4

Configuration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

navigation diagram

(PART A)

Instrument Input

User cal.

L

, n5h

LonF

C,

I

"t

nnnn

ItrL

P'd

Hct rEu

tn

PrrF

on

PdLr

FoP on

5brt

5b0P

'P

[.onF

<t

I

nPL

htc rnEL

OD

IODD

UHLI

OD

UHL t00

H

fr

H"to

tPL

F no

OF5H

0fl

OFF bLoc no

L

tch

no

Alarnrs

Logic input

2

Logic input

I

Output 3

Config Config Config

Config

EL

[.onF

LH

[.onF

Lb

lonF

HH

[.onF

tol l"ll

O

F5 H

I

L

td

LoEl 9 bLoc no

UNE

5PE d, Ir

LEch no

See table B

HLE

F5L bLoc no

tsE;it

!sl

L Ech no oc no

SUMMARY

Step through List Headers using the 'Page' button

tr

Choose a parameter from a using the 'Scroll' button list

t;

l-l

Change value using the 'Raise/Lower' buttons

V

The first four headings set up the controller functions, as follows:

,^

lnstrument Config. - Groups those parameters associated with the display and control action lnput Config. - selects the input sensor type

User cal Config. - to calibrate to exlernal reference sources

Alarms Config. - sets up the alarm types

Fig

5.1a

Navigation Diagram (Part A)

2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

navagation diagram

(PART B)

Comms

Output

I

Output 2 itLi

HH

[.onF

IH

f

nnF

EH

lonF

tr_!n

ll

Output 4

fonF iial

cm5 iL" ll

,d

dIDP r v v nod

t

unc

001

Func

d,E

IOA irl output

lonF

Password

I

L'Ll

PH55

E.onF

["1

t_6l

lql

Ert

no untr

HEHt

HET,P

I cnFP e

9500 nonE

See table B

See table B

5En5

nor

See table B

See table B

+

5En5

nor ull

5En5

tnu

OuLl

OD

H

Fig

5.1b

Navigation Dlagram (Part B)

2208e and 2204e Controller 5-5

Configuration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Headinq lnpuUOutput Functions Wirinq Terminals

The first four headinqs set up the controller functions as follows:

'

n5t

[.anF

,

P

EonF

Sets up displav and control parameters

Selects the inout sensor tvoe

tHL

[.onF

HL lonF

To calibrate to external reference sources

Sets uo the alarm tvoes

Not aoolicable

Not aoolicable

Not aoolicable

Not aoolicable

The remaining headings configure the controller inpuvoutput functions.

The upper readout corresponds

to

rear terminal numbers associated with a particular i/o

LH lonF

Lb [onF

HH

fo"F

Sets uo the action of looic inDut

I

Sets up the action of looic inout 2

Sets uo the action of the relav on outout 3

LA

LB

AA to AC

HH LonF

lH

EonF

PH

fnnF fR

EonF

\H fo"F

Sets uo dioital comms. tvoe

Sets up the outout I module

Sets uo the outout 2 module

Sets up the action ol the relav on output 4

Sets the action of the 10A outout relav in 2204

HA to HF

14&18

2A&28

3A to 3C

4A to 6D

PR55 EonF

Fr,

To choose new oasswords

I

fnnF

To leave confiouration level and return to ooerator level

5-6 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

conflcuRATION

PARAMETER

TABLES

Name Parameter description Values Meaninq

,

n5t

lnstrument confiquration un, t lnstrumenl units dEcP Decimal places in the displayed value

IhrL

Control type

Hct Control action cooL

PrrF

Type of cooling

Power feedback

d,r

L,n

O,L

He0

FHn on

PdLr

Bumpless Manual/Auto transfer when using PD conkol

DFF no

VE5

FoP Forced manual output no yE5

5brl

Sensor break output

I

fH,

Load current scalino tactor

5b0P

HoLd tqq

.t

oF

"lt nonE nnnn nnn-n

nnnn

0nfrF

P,d rEu

Centigrade (default UK)

Fahrenheit (default USA)

Kelvin

Disolav units will be blanked

None

One

Two

On/otf control

PID control

Reverse acting (required for temperature control) - output decreases on approach to setpoinl.

Direct actino

Linear

Oil (50mS min on time)

Wate(non-linear)

Fan (0.55 min on time)

Power feedback is on

(compensates for changes in supply voltage)

Power feedback is otl

Non-bumpless transfer

Bumpless transfer (auto to manual and manual to auto)

Non-bumpless transfer

Bumpless transfer (auto to manual and manual to auto)

Go to pre-set value (maintains output at a known, sale level)

Freeze output (maintains output at value immediately betore break)

See Chaoter 9

c

a

Factory default parameter values and states are included where applicable and are indicated by the shaded areas in the following tables.

2208e and 2204e Controller 5-7

Conliguration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Name Parameter descri Value Meaninq

,P

, nPt lnput confiquration lnput type

NOTE:

)Lc htc

Llc rLc bfc ntc

tlc

5lc

PLP

rEd

[.Ec

J thermocouple (default USA)

K thermocouple (default UK)

L thermocouple

R thermocouple (PUPI1 3%Rh)

B thermocouple (Pt30%Rh/Pt6%Bh)

N thermocouple

T thermocouple

S thermocouple (PUPtl 0%Rh)

PL 2 thermocouple

1

00o platinum resistance thermometer.

Custom downloaded input type. The delault is C thermocouple, or the name of the downloaded custom input will be displayed

After selecting an input type, do not forget to adjust the setpoint limits in Full Access level mU

Linear millivolt (Also mA input via an external 2.49Q current sense resistor)

,oL t

Linear voltaqe

.nf,l

lnout ranoe low Displav low ranqe for input rnEH

LJI.

lnput ranqe hioh

CJC ref. temperature

(CJC does not appear tor linear inputs)

H"to

0"8

rt5"t

Disolav hioh ranoe {or input

Automatic cold junction compensation

0"C external reference

45'C exlernal reference

'

nPL

Displayed Value

50"t

50"C external reference

Linear lnout Scalinq

-

The next 4 parameters onlY appear if a linear input is chosen lnput value low

UEL}I

'

nPH lnput value high

Displayed reading low UHLL

UflLH

lnP

UflLI

I nPl

Sensor break input impedance trip level

Electrical

1

rP;

lnPut

DFF

H"to

H,

H, H,

Displayed reading high

Sensor break detection is disabled

Appears for mV or V inputs only

Trip level set by the sensor input table

Trip level set at 7.5KC)

Trip level set at 15KQ (musl be selected when

uolt

input is enabled)

5-8 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

Name Parameter on Value Meaninq tHL

HdJ

User calbration confiq.

User cal enable no vFq

Pntl

User calibration point low

PnhH User calibration ooint hioh

See Chapter 6

- User calibration

User calibration is disabled

User calibration is enabled

0 This is the value (in display units) last at performed a low point calibration which a User t00 This is the value (in display units) at which a User last oerformed a hioh ooint calibration

DFSL Low point calibration offset

0 Offset, in display units, at the user low calibration point'Pnt.L'. This value is automatically calculated when oerformino low ooint calibration.

OF5H High point calibration offset

0 Offset, in display units, at the user high calibration point'Pnt.H'. This value is automatically calculated when oerformino a hioh ooint calibration.

*lf

User calibration is enabled, then the User calibration parameters will appear in the Input list of Operator Full access level. See Chapter 6, User calibratiotr.

2208e and 2204e Controller 5-9

Configuration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Name Parameter Values

Ht

HLI hl

or

LErh

HI?

bLoc

L

Erh

Hrl

hl

or

Alarm confiquration

Alarm 1 Tvpe

Alarm 1 Blockino(1)

Alarm 1 Latchinq

Alarm 2 Tvoe

Alarm 2 Blockinq(1)

Alarm 2 Latchino

Alarm 3 Tvpe

Alarm 3 Blockino(1)

LEch Alarm 3 Latchinq

Hl r{

Alarm 4 Tvoe

b[or

Alarm 4 Blockinq(1)

LEch Alarm 4 Latchinq

Values

As table A

no'

VES

no'

VE5

As table A

nn'

VFS

no'

YE5

As table A

no'

VE5

no'

VES

As table A

no'

VE5

nn'

VF5

Defaults if not specified

NFF no na!

OFF nd nd

NFF no no

DFF no no

Table A: Alarm tvDes

DFF

F5L

F5H

No alarm

Full scale low

Full scale hiqh dEu Deviation band

Deviation hioh dH, dLo

Lcr

Hcr

Deviation low

Low current

Hiqh cunent

(l

)

Blocking allows the alarm to become active only after it has flrst entered a sat'e state.

c

a These are

'soft' alarms ie. Indication only. They would normally be attached to an output. See Chapter 7 lbr a step by step guide.

5-'t 0 22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

LH

,d

Func

Looic inout 1 confiouration ldentitv ol inout

Funclion

Functions

LoE' nonE mFln

rnt

5P?

t,H

Hc.HL

Locb r5Et

5Ebv

HnP5

Lb Loqic input 2 conliquration Functions

As oer Looic inDut 1 exceDt 'HnPS' not available

Action on contact closure

Looic inout

None

Manual mode select

Remote setpoint select

Setpoint 2 select lntegral hold

Acknowledge alarms

Lock keypad

Ramp/dwell reset

Standby - ALL outputs

=

OFF

PDS load current input

See Chapter information

I

for further

Actlon on contact closure

22OBe and 2204e Controller

5- t1

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

Name Parameter on Functions

HH

,d

Func

Outout 3 confiouration ldentitv ol outout

Functions rEL V

Function nonE

d'E

HEHt

r00r

For Function

5En5

= d,

6

oo to table B on oaoe 5-14

Sense of output (always appears)

nor tnU

Meaninq

RelaV

None

Function set by dr 6F

Heating output

Coolino outout

Normal (heatrng & cooling outpulsl lnverted (alarms de-energised in the alarm state\

HH Comms module confiq Functions Meaninq ldentity of the option installed Pd5' PDS setpoint input

'd

ar5

EIA 485 comms module

Func

lFunction

The lollowing

I

I

I

I parameters will appear if the EIA-485 option is installed

.r5

|

voour. protocol

I

The following

I

I l"o"E lruon" parameterc will appear it the PDS setpoint inpul option is installed.

I

fl""E

I

ruo Pos function

I

SP,

P

I

PDS setpoint input ilHl r

PDS disolaved value low Ranoe = -999 to 9999

UHtH PDS disolaved value hioh Ranqe = -999 to 9999

The following bF"d parameters will appear if the function chosen is Modbus protocol

Baud Rate

le00'

eq00' t{800'

9500'

l9?0 l9?0

trszoot

'PrLY Comms Parity nonE No parity

E"En ndd

Even parity

Odd oaritu

-rE5n

Comms Resolution F"LL

lnE

Full resolution lnteqer resolution

*

Not used with some communication protocols. Please consult factory

5-12 2208e and 2204e Conkoller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

Name Parameter Function Meaninq

IE Outout I confiouration Function Meaninq

'd

ldentity of module installed nonE rELV

No module fitted

Relay output

Func Function dt frP

Lo[

55r nonE

dfJ

HEHt

t00L

DC output (isolated)

Logic or PDS output

Triac output

Function set by d, f,F

Heating output

Cooling output only appear foru d

=

dfCP

DP Retransmission of output demand only appear toru d

=

dfOP

only appear foru d

=

dfOP

PU

E,,

only appear foru d

=

dfOP

Onlyappearfon

d=lof,

'5P

55r.

I

Onlv aopear lor, d

=

Lof,

For Function

55r P

= d,

f,

qo to table B on next paqe

5En5 Sense of output

nor

rnU

Retransmission

Retransmission of process value ol error

Retransmission of setpoint

PDS mode

t

heating

PDS mode 2 heatinq

Normal (e.9. heating and cooling) lnverted (alarms - de-eneroise in alarm)

DC outout scalino For r d = dlfrP the followino oarameters aoDear

[]utl

DC output minimum

0"tll

DC output maximum omA to

'0utll'

'0"t1' to 2omA

2208e and 2204e Controller

5-'1 3

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

Table B The followinq parameters appear il

'dl E' is chosen as the function.

d' EF Digital output functions

Any number of the functions listed can be combined on to the output.

Usethel^-andLv]

buttons to select a desired digital function. After two

norH cLr

t- -

-

e---

l---

-

No change

Clear all existing functions

Alarm 1-

Alarm 2-

Alarm 3'

Alarm 4-

Manual/Auto seconds the display will blink and return to the 'nofH' display. Use the arrows again to scroll through the function list.

mHn

5br

Lbr

HtrF

LdF

End

Sensor break

Loop break

PDS Heater fail

PDS Load failure

End of program The previously selected function display will show two decimal points indicating that it

5PHn

55rF

PV out of range

PDS Solid state relay failure

New alarm has been added to the output.

nrEL

rntF ttDP

tt

5H

Remote setpoint failure

PDCTX short circuit

PDCTX open circuit

*ln place ofthe dashes, the last three characters indicate the alarm type as per table A in the

AL list:

eg lF5L

= Full Scale Low

If an alarm is not configured the displayed name will diff-er:

".g.

'HL l'

will be shown, for the first alarm

2208e and 2204e Controller 5-14

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

Name Parameter on Function Meaninq

EH

,d

Func

OutDut 2 confiquration ldentity of module installed

Function

Outputs

Function nonE rEL V

Lo[

55r

nonE

dtE

HEHt

t00r

Meaninq

No module fitted

Relay outpul

Logic output

Triac output none

Function set by dr f,F

Heating output

Coolino outout

Logic inputs nFln

rmt

Manual mode select

Remote setpoint select

5PP

t,H

Fc.EL

Locb

Setpoint 2 select lntegral hold

Acknowledge alarms

Lock buttons (keypad) r5EE

5tbv

For

Func

= dl

I

qo to table B on previous oaoe

5En5 Sense of output

nor

rnU

Ramp/dwell reset

Standbv - ALL outDuts = OFF

Normal (heat and cool outputs) lnverted lalarms - de-eneroise in alarm)

3 ration As per output AA confiquration

YH

'lOAmo heatino outout

As oer Outout 3A confiouration

Available on 2204e onlv.

PH55

PTT P

Password list f-uLL or

td, t

level password (default

= 1) rnF P Conflouration level Password (default = 2)

Er,

t

Exit no vE5

2208e and 2204e Controller

5-1 s

Configuration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

The 2208e and22O4e controllers can be tltted with the tbllowing digital communications modules:-

El-Bisynch

DeviceNet

2-wire RS485

4-wire R5422

RS232

2YE

2FE

2AE

2DN

All devices on a nctwork must have the same Baud Rate, Parity and Resolution

HH

lonF

Comms configuration list - HH

,d fn5 llentity

of module

This is a read-only parameter displaying the identity of the module fitted

Func

Ir5

Function

Set Func has been

= f m5 to select the protocol. Ensure that the correct Comms module litted. To disable comms set

Func to nonE.

500

Baud Rate

Press ,

a or

^

to set the Baud Rate. The choices are:-

1200.2400,4800, 9600, 19,200 for Modbus and El-Bisynch

125(K), 250(K), or 500(K) for DeviceNet

Parity and Resolution can be set by the same procedure. These will normally be set to None and Full respectively

22OBe and 2204e Controller software versions 3 5-1 6

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

All devices on a network must have a diftbrent node address.

lnstrument address is set in operator level.

Exit configuration level. This is described on page 5-3.

Comms list

From the HOME display, press the Page button until you reach the c,n5 list

Address

Press the raise or lower buttons until the desired address is set.

The choices are:-

0 to 99 for Modbus and El-Bisynch

0 to 64 for DeviceNet.

Configuration

The following is applicable to DeviceNet only

The EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) file for the Series 2200e is named 2K2DN.EDS and is available from your supplier, or electronically by going to Web site (www.eurotherm.corn).

The EDS file is designed to autornate the DeviceNet network contiguration process by precisely detining vendor-specific and required device pararreter intormation. Following a data sheet metaphor, the EDS file describes a device's conligurable parameters, including its legal and default values and the public interfaces to those pararneters. Sottware contiguration tools utilize the EDS files to configure a DeviceNet network.

This interface has been tested to comply with the tulI requirements of the ODVA (Open

DeviceNet Vendors Association) conformity tests.

2208e and 2204e Controller 5-17

nstallation and Operation Handbook Configuration

5-1 8 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook User Calibration

6

Chapter

6

User

calibration

6.8

What is the Purpose of User Calibration?.................

6.9

UserCalibrationEnable................

6.10

Singlepointcalibration..........

6.11

Two point calibration

6.12

Calibration points and Calibration offsets

1

4

5

2

3

6

2208e and 2204e Controller

6-1

User Calibration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

This chapter has five topics:

.

WHAT lS THE PURPOSE OF USER CALIBRATION?

.

USER CALIBRATION ENABLE

.

SINGLE POINT CALIBRATION

.

TWO POINT CALIBRATION

.

CALIBRATION POINTS AND CALIBRATION OFFSETS

To understand how to select and change parameters in this chapter you will need to have read

Chapter 2 - Operatiott, Chapter

3'

Access Levels and Chapter 5 - Corrfiguration.

The basic calibration of the controller is highly stable and set for life. User calibration allows you to offset the 'permanent' factory calibration to either:

l.

Calibrate the controller to your reference standards

2.

Match the calibration of the controlter to that of a particular transducer or sensor input

3.

Calibrate the controller to suit the characteristics of a particular installation.

Usercalibration works by introducing zero and span offsets onto the factory set calibration.

The factory set calibration can always be retrieved.

6-2 2208e and 2204e Controller

User Calibration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

The User calibration facility must tlrst be enabled in configuration parameter 'Rd-J' in tt

f

level by setting the

HL conF

lirt to

'?E5'

This will make the User calibration parameters appear in Operator'FuLL' ter, t.

Select configuration level as shown in Chapter 5, Contiguration

The User

calibration configuration

List

IHL

lanF

Press

D

until you reach the

'fHL

conF tist

'ress tlrc Scroll huttort unlil you reaclt

U

User calibration enable

Use

A

or

V

to select:

RdJ

VE5

?E5:

Calibration enable

no:

Calibrationdisabled

U

ErE

no

EE

Press

U and

D

together to Eo to tlrc Exit display

Exit

configuration

Use

A

or

V

to select

'VE5' and retum to Operator level

22OBe and 2204e Controller 6-3

6-4

,

L

,

P

5

t

v

U

IHL

U5Er

()

IHL

5

Lo

C)

User Calibration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Your controller is calibrated for lif-e against known ref'erence sources during manutacture. A calibration offset is often used to allow the controller to compensate for sensor and other system errors. The nonnal procedurc is to set up the system under test against a known independent ref-erence, as fbllows:

Set up the process to be calibrated such that the known ret'erence displays the required value

(temperature).

Observe the reading on the controller. If it is dil't'erent, proceed as follows:

Select

'FuLL

Access level as described in Chapter

3

lnput list

header

Press

D

until you reirch the input list header

Press Scroll until you reach the

'lRL'

aitpt"y

Calibration type

Use

A

Selecting or

V

ro setecr either

'FFft'

o, 'U5Er

'FHtt'

will reinstate the tactory calibration ancl hide the following User calibration parameters.

Selecting

'U5Er'will

reinstate any previously set User calibration and make available the User parameters, as fbllows:

Press lhe Scrrsll buttort

Calibrate low point?

A

Use or

V

,o ,.1s61

,VE5'

Selecting

'no' will hide the next parameter

Press lhe Scroll buttott conlinued on lhe nexl page

2208e and 2204e Controller

User Calibration lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Hd)

5frfr

Adjust the low point calibration

The controller will display the current measured input value in the lower readout.

Use or

V

to adjust the reading to the rel'erence source value, if di

After a two second delay the display will blink and the reading will change to the new, calibrated value. You can calibratc at any point over the entire display range

This is a single point calibration which applies a llxed olt.set over the lull display range of the controller.

The calibration is now complete. You can return to the tactory calibration at any time by select

'FHtt'

in the CAL display shown earlier.

U

Press

Home display and

D

together to return to the

To protect the calibration against unauthorised adjustment return to Operator level and make sure that the calibration parameters are hidden. Parameters are hidclen using the

'Ed,

t'

tacility describe in Chapter 3.

The previous section described how to perform a single point calibration which applies a fixed offset over the full display range of the controller. A two-point calibration is used to calibrate the controller at two points and apply a straight line between them. Any readings above or below the two calibration points will be an extension of this straight line. For this reason it is best to calibrate with the two points as far apart as possible.

Proceed as lollows:

l.

Decide upon the low and high points at which you wish to calibrate.

2.

Perfbrm a single point calibration at the low calibration point in the manner described above

3.

Set the process under calibration such that the known ref'erence exhibits the required higher Process Value (temperature) and allow to stabilize.

4.

Press the Scroll button to obtain the high calibration point as shown in the tbllowing diagrams.

2208e and 2204e Controller 6-5

User Calibration

IHL

5

H,

Calibrate high point?

Use

A

or

V

to select 'Hr lnstallation and Operation Handbook

()

Hd)

Et]B O

Press the Scntll buttott

Adjust the high

point

calibration

The controller will disptay the current rneasured input valuc in the lower readout.

A V

Use or value,

il

diflerent.

to adjust the reading to the ref-erencc source

Atier a two second delay the display will blink and thc rcading will changc to the new, calibratcd value.

Thc calibration is now cornplete. You can return to thc factory calibration at lrny time by select

'FHtt'

in the

fHL

display shown earlier.

Press

U

and

D

together to return to the Home display

To protect the calibration against unauthorised adjustment return to Operator level and make sure that the calibration parameters are hidden. Parameters are hidden using the

'Ed,

L'

facility described in Chapter 3.

If you wish to see the points at which the User calibration was perfbrmed and thc value otfsets introduced these are shown in Configuration, undcr

LHL of

the

lo"F.

The parameters are:

Name

PnLL

PnEH

DF5L

OF5H

Parameter description

User low calibration point user nrgh calrDratlon pornl

Low point

Meaninq

This is the value (iLdisplay untts) last oerformed an

'Hdll'

?adiusi

This is the value (irldisplay units) last oerformed an

'HdJH'iaoiusi at wntcn a user low calibration).

at which a User hiqh calibration).

calibration offset Otlset. in disolav unlts. at the user low calrDratron point'Pnhl '

Htgh potnt caltbration ottset ofiset, rn drsplav unrts, at Ine user nrgn callDratlon

ooint'PntH" .'

2208e and 2204e Controller 6-6

Alarm Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

7

Chapter

7

ALARM CONFIGURATION

7.1

DEFINITION OF

ALARMS AND EVENTS....

7.1.1

TYPES OF ALARMS

7.2

DIGITAL OUTPUT

FUNCTIONS

7.3

STEP1

.

CONFIGURING

THE FOUB'SOFT'ALARMS

7.4

7.5

7.6

1

5

STEP 2 -

ATTACHING

AN

ALARM TO A PHYSICAL OUTPUT......

6

STEP

3.

GROUPING

ALARMS

ON

A SINGLE

OUTPUT 7

STEP 4

-

REMOVING

ALARMS

FROM

AN OUTPUT......................

7

2

2

4

The 2200e series controllers are capable of very sophisticated alarm strategies and, although setting up ofalarms has already been covered in previous chapters, this scction has becn included to enable operators and commissioning engineers to design their own strategies fbr optimum plant operation.

2208e and 2204e Controller t-l

Alarm Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

See also section

l.l

I fbr furthcr intbrmation on Alarms.

Alarms are used to alert an operator when a pre-set level or condition has been exceeded. They are normally used to switch an output - usually a relay - to provide interlocking of the machine or plant or external audio or visual indication ol the condition.

Soft Alarms are indication only within the controller and are not attached to an output (relay).

Events - can also be alarms - but are generally dellned as conditions which occur as part of the normal operation of the process. They do not generally require operator intervention.

Events are ref'ened to as

Digital Output Functions in the manual (see Table B, page 5- l4).

For the purposes of the operation of this instrument alarms and events can be considered the same.

The use of alarms in the 2208e and 2204e controllers is extremely versatile.

Up to 4 alarms can be configured. Any combination of these 4 alarms can be attached to any one or more outputs, or any number ol the available

"soti" alarms can be combined to operate a single output.

Note: In a three term controller at least one of these outputs is used to maintain the required temperature of the process.

Outputs lA and 24 Are plug in modules.

Normally used tbr control outputs, eg. Heat and Cool, but can be used tbr alarm outputs.

Outputs AA and 3,A Are fixed relays.

Normally used tbr alarms or events, but can be used as control outputs.

l0A Output 4A (22O4e

Only)

ls a plug in l0 Amp relay output.

Normally used to switch heaters directly in control mode, but can be used as an alarm output.

7-2 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Alarm Operation

Thcre arre seven process alarm types listed below. Alurm Types are lbund in configuration rnode under the Alarm Contig. List.

ALARMS

Full Scale

High

The PV exceeds a set high level

Full Scale

Low

The PV cxceeds a set low level

Deviation

Band

The diftbrence between PV &

SP is outside a set band

Deviation

High

The difl'erence between PV &

SP is higher than a set lcvel

Deviation

Low

The difl'erence between PV & SP is lower than a set levcl

High

Current

The measured current returned from a PDS slave is highcr than ir set level.

See also Chapter 9.

Low

Current

The meirsured current returned liom a PDS slave is lower than a set level. See also Chapter 9.

Each alarm can be set to:

Latching

Alann is indicated until acknowledged

(Ofi, Auto, MAN)

Auto Acknowledge:

(LEch EuEo)

If the alarm is acknowledged while the alann condition is still prescnt. it will cause the alarrn to reset as soon as the irlarm condition is removcd.

ManualAcknowledget (

LEch

mHn)

If the alarm is acknowledged while the alarm condition is still present. it will be ignorcd. A ftrther acknowledgement is required when the alarm condition has been removed to cause the alann (o reset.

Blocking Alarm occurs after it has been through a start up phase not in alarm condition.

Sense Of

Output

Relay energised or de-energised in alarrn condition. See also sections l-12 dnd'7.4.

Soft

Alarms

lndication only and do not operate an output.

See also Section

Ll

I tbr lurther information on alarm types.

2208e and 2204e Controller 7-3

Alarm Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

In addition there are nine

"digital output tunctions" used as events or alarms depending upon the requirements of the process under control:

Sensor Break

Loop Break

Load Failure

Manual

PV Out Of Range

Remote SP Fail

Heater Fail

SSR Fail

Program END

New Alarm

The input is open circuit

The controller does not measure a response to an output change

Used with PDS Mode 1 load failure. See also Chapter 9.

Controller in manual mode

Process Variable too high or too low

No signal measured at the remote set point input terminals

Used with PDS Mode 2 heater open circuit. See also Chapter 9

.

Used with PDS Mode 2 solid state relay open or short circuit. See also Chapter 9

Signals the end of a program

Signals a new alarm

The Sense of the Output can be set to relay energised or de-energised in the alarm condition for any of the above functions.

7-4 and 22O4e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Alarm Operation

Soft alarms are indication only and do not operate a relay

Go To Configuration Level

Reler to Chapter 5

Press "PAGE" Xey as many lEl times as necessary to find Alarm Configuration

lonF

PH55

I

HT

LonF

Press "SCROLL"

keyl(4

to the alarm which needs to

---)

be configured

Press "SCROLL" key

Kfl

to choose alarm 1 latching or non-latching

---)

HLI

dE"

<-

Alarm Type choices are

0FF

orr

F5L

rult Scate Low

F5H

Eutt Scate High

dEu

deviation Band

dH'

Qeviation High

dlo

deviation low

Lcr

Lowcurrent

Hcr

High gulrent

LEch

no <-_ Choices No/Auto/Man

Press

A

Press "SCRoLL" to choose alarm 1 key lCAl

blocking

>

bLoc

no

Choices Yes/No press

A

Press "SCROLL' key

lGl

to repeat for alarms 2 - 4 to return to list header

--->

Figure 7.1

22OBe and 2204e Controller 7-5

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Alarm Operation

This may be necessary if:

l.

The instrument has been supplierJ un-cont.igured or it is required to re-contlgure

2.

Alarm relays are added

Press "PAGE" xey lEl as many times as necessary to lind AA Configuration

[.onF

PH55

J

HH

[.onF

Press "SCROLL" t<ey l(fl to identification of output type (this is read only)

--)

U

td

rEL9

Press "SCROLL" key to output Function

---)

F untr

d,

I'

Press "SCROLL" to elgital output key

[(l|

function

---)

d,

EF

noch

EF

)F5H

Figure 7.2

Use

A

Other

1.

HEHt

2.

t00L

3.

IlonE or are: to select dr

I

Use a

A

or

V

buttons to gital function e.g. lF5H Other choices are shown in the table on the next page. After two seconds, the display will blink the and return to

'noch'

(ns change) display.

Use the arrowS again to scroll through the function list. The previously selected function will show 2 decimal points indicatino that it has been added to the output, i.e., JF.Sll

5En5 rnu

Use

A

or

V

f to select:

.

inverted (relay de-energised in alarm)

2.

direct (relay energised in alarm)

7-6

Keep pressing "SCROLL' button to return to list header

2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Alarm Operation ln the prcvious exarnple one alarrr condition is allocatcd to onc output rclay

Thc 2208c ztil22O4e controllers allow alarnrs and events to bc grouped on to a single output

These cvents are shown in the table below.

noch

[Lr

I

l

e ri

No change

Clear all existing f unctions

Alarm 1'

Alarm 2'

Alarm

Alarm

3'

4'

*

Scc Tirble B pa-re 5- l4

d,

EF

noch

EF

)F5

Press

1ttsoft until you reach the to attach to an output, returns

The display to no change after 2 sec.

accepting the condition.

d'

EF

noch

Press until you reach the

2nd soft the output, returns to no change after 2 sec.

accepting the condition.

5F

5br

Repeat for all alarms to be attached to the chosen output

Sce also section

l.l2

fbr turther inlirrrnatiorr on alarrn grouping.

Figure 7.3

22O8e and 2204e Controller

d,

EF

noch

EF

[Lr

Each time you scroll through the table of alarms, note that 2 decimal points appear confirming acceptance that the particular alarm has been attached to the output, i.e., JF5H,

5br,

etc.

Press

A

once to show clear

After 2 sec. the lower readout reverts to no change clearing all events from the chosen output.

Figure 7.4

7-7

Alarm Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

7-8 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Valve Positlon

8.

ChapterB

MOTORISED VALVE CONTROL....................1

8.1.

Parameters For Motorised Valve

Control......

........,.....2

8.2.

Commissioning the Motorised Valve

Controller

........2

8.2.1.

Adjusting the minimum on-time

'0ntll'

2

8.3.1.

Auto Tuning

8.3.2.

2200e Valve Positioner Set-up Table

3

3

22OBe and 22Me Controller

8-1

Valve Position lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Thc 2208e rrnd 220,1e cun be contrgurcd standard PID control lor rnotonsed valve control as irn elltcrnrtivc to tllc algorithrn This algorithnr is dcsigncd spccilically lbr positionirru nrotoriscd vllvcs.

The motoriscd valvc algorithrn opemtcs in the Vclo< i/_r' tnodc. which does Itot requirc

l

position f'eedback potcntiorneter for control ptlrposcs.

The lbllowing ptramctcr list will appclr in the navigation dia,grarn shown in Chlptcr

ll

il'your controllcr is conl'igured lbr rnotorise(l valve control.

Name Description Values

OP mtr

0PLo

DPH'

0ntH

Output

list

Valve travel time in seconds.

This is the time taken lor the valve to travel from its fully closed position to its f ully open position.

0PLo is the low output power limit

0PH, is the High output power limit

Output pulse minimum on time, in seconds

Min

DD

Max

999 9

Default

)00

-

t1cfr

fi?0

-

IDDfr

- t000 tnnn

IL'U IJ

IODD

E"to

999 9 OP

Table

8-1

Motorised valve parameter list

Proceed as lbllows:

l.

Mcasurc thc tirre taken fbr thc valve to be raised t'ronr its f'ully closed to its l'ully opcn position ancl enter this as thc value in seconds into the'mtr'pararneter.

2.

Sct all the othcr pararreters to thc def'ault values shown in Table 8-1.

The controller can then be tuncd using the automaLic or manual tuning techniques.

The default value of 0.2 seconds is satisfactory lirr rnost processes. Thc rninirnum on time detcnnines how accurately thc valve can be positioned. The shorter the tirnc, the more precisc the control. However. il'the time is set (oo short, process noise will causc an cxccssively busy valve.

8-2 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Valve Position

Belorc thc auto tune is activatccl, thc parametcr clnnot be."t to DFF whcrr

td

parameter rnust he set to ir nurneric value. Thc

td ln

auto tune is activlted. When thc luto tune is complctc, the auto tune will sct the

td

parametcr back to tfr" DFF position.

Name ltr

IF

AH

Descri ton Value

Confiquration Mode ln the I

n5t

configuration list set the f

ttL

to

"P

Module 1A r d needs to be a rELY or a 551-.

The Func for 1A should be configured tor

HEFE

(Open Valve)

Module 2A r d needs to be a rEL 9 or a 551-

The

Func lor 2A should be configured for [0C1

.

( Close Valve) uP

HEHt

tcol mtr

DPLo

APH,

0ntll

UPC5

Valve travel time in seconds.

This is the time taken for the valve to travel from its fully closed position to its fully open position.

Low output power limit

High output power limit

Output pulse minimum on-time, in seconds.

Home List

Calculated posltion of valve

)08

-

t00fr r00.0

D?

o/o ol motor travel time

Table

8-2

Valve Positioner Set-up Table

The following operating parameters do not effect the 2200e when the valve positioner option has been configured: f Vf

H

Heat Cycle Time f Vf f

Coot Cycle Time

ont

I

Minimum on time for cooling

2208e and 2204e Controller 8-3

Valve Position lnstallation and Operation Handbook

8-4 2208e and 220te Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics

9

Chapter

9

LOAD CURRENT MONITORING AND

D|AGNOSTICS........

..................1

9.1

LOAD CURRENT

MONlTORING AND DIAGNOSTICS

...............,.,,,2

9.2

EXAMPLE

WIRING DIAGRAM (FOR MODE

1

& 2

OPERATION)....3

EXAMPLE

WIRING

DIAGRAM

(FOR

MODE

s OPERATION)..................4

9.4

OPERATION .........................5

To Read Load Current (modes 2 and 5 only)

............. ............... ..5

9.4,2

To Display Load Current Continuously in the Lower Readout (modes 2 and 5 only)...

9.4.3

Display Modes

9.4.4

How Heater Alarms Are Displayed.........

9.5 TO

SET

THE ALARM TRIP LEVELS......

9.6

RELAY OUTPUTS...

9,7 TO

CONFIGURE PDS LOAD

CURRENT

DIAGNOSTICS

9.7.1

To configure the Logic Module for PDS modes 1 or 2.........

9.7.2

To configure logic input a for pds (Mode 5 only) .................

TO

CONFIGURE LOW

AND

HIGH CURRENT

TRIP ALARMS

9.9 TO ATTACH

SOFT

ALARMS TO A RELAY

OUTPUT

9.10

THESCALING FACTOR................

9.

10.1

To adjust the scaling factor...

11

12

12

22OBe and 2204e Controller 9-1

Load Cunent Monitoring and Diagnostics lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Current flowing in a system ol'clcctrical heating elements (the 'Load') can be displayed on the controller by using a

TEl0

SSR fitted with intelligent current transfbrmer, PDCTX, or an SSR or contactor with an external PDCTX.

Load current rnonitoring and diagnostics may be used with any time proportioned output, fitted in tnodule position lA, and uses the logic output wires which drive the SSR to return signals back to the controller These signals represent the RMS value of the Ioad current durin-q the ON period, or load related alarrn conditions. It is not designed for analogue outputs i.e. phase angle control.

It is also designed li>r single phase operation only

There are three modes ol'opcration:-

l.

Mode

1

This is used with TEl0 SSR only. It detects it' there is a break in the heater circuit. This includcs heater or SSR open circuit. A single Load Failure alarm message is displayed on thc lowcr readout of the controller.

2.

Mode2

This is uscd with TEl0 SSR plus PD/CTX intelligent current transfbrmer, and provides:-

Display of true RMS load current On the lower readout of the controller

Low current alarm Analogous to Partial

Load Failure (PLF) supplied in some

SSRs

High current alarm Activated when the heater exceeds a set limit

SSR short circuit

Heater failure

Displays the true RMS current in the ON state to the load.

Provides advanced warning of lailure of one or rnore heaters in parallel

Typically used where element bunching may occur

This will apply l'ull power to the heaters which could result in an over temperature condition. This alarm

Drovides early warning.

lndicates open circuit load conditions

3.

Mode 5

This mode is lbr use with contactors or other devices which do not use the PDS logic outliut lrom the controller as the drive signal. For example, a time proportioning logic,relay or triac output. Mode 5, therelbre, requires an additional input to the controller to display the Ioad conditions. It uses the digital input terminals tbr this. as shown in Figure 9-2. Mode

5 provides the same f'eatures as mode 2 with two additional alarms:-

Current Transformer Open Circuit

Current Transformer Short Circuit

An alarm is shown if the PDS connection to

PDCTX or SSR become disconnected

An alarm is shown if the PDS connection trom PDCTX or SSR are short circuited

9-2 22O8e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics

Hardware Required l.

SSR type TEI0/PDS2 OR

2.

lntelligent current translirrmcr typc PD/CTX + contactor or zero voltage switching SSR

2208e or 2204c contrcller configurcd tbr PDS mode 2 option using logic output. This rnodule must be litted in module position l. (ordcr codc M2).

LN

Controller

Fuse 24(T)

Alternative current regulator arrangements:-

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

M o^

D:

vil

Ey lD

1 tl

E

E

2 o

M

M a

E

tl

E

E

E

E rfr

+

(E

E

Heater power fuse

(load dependent)

The TE I0/PDS2 contains integral power regulator and intelligent PDCTX

The PDCTX can be supplied separately for use with any SSR or logic thyristor unit as shown in the diagram below.

The output drive capability of the PDCTX is

5V at 7mA maximum

This represents a single turn through the

CT

ToL

To logic output

1A&18

PDCTX lntelligent

Current

Transformer

To

Heater

1C

Heater

Figure

9.1

Connections for Mode 1 & 2

Warning

Take care that the controller is correctly wired for the mode of operation which is configured. Failure to do so may be hazardous in some situations.

2208e and 2204e Controller 9-3

Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Hardware Required

l.

Eurotherm intelligent current transfbrmer type PD/CTX + contactor

2.

2208e or 2204e controller contigured tbr PDS mode 5 option using logic, relay or triac output. Thismodulemustbetlttedinmoduleposition

l.

Digital inputLA(ordercode

M5) must be configured to accept PDCTX input as described in the contiguration section ol this appendix.

N

L

E

E tl

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

Mr-

DXE

Yiln

EY-

1

Sl

I

1E

E

rE

M

S c o

M

E

PV

+

{=

E

Conkoller

Fuse

2A(T)

Heater power fuse

(load dependent) lontactor +

)DCTX node 5

Heater

The controller will have the order code M5 in the Logic Input position.

Figure

9.2

Example Wiring Connections For Contactor Operation (mode 5)

Warning!

Take care that the controller is correcfly wired for the mode of operation which is configured. Failure to do so may be hazardous in some situations.

22OBe

a

d 2204e Controller 9-4

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics

From the 'HOME' display, Figure I.4,

Press[]

Gluntil

HnrP5 is shown in the upper display

HnP5

5

RnP5

Current will be displayed in the lower readout. See also'Display Modes' below.

It will revert to the

HOME display after

45 seconds or 10 seconds if an alarm is present

This display will be shown if:

l.

The controller is unable to resolve the reading

ll.

The controller is obtaining a reading

lll.

The measurement has timed out i.e. current has not flowed for 15 seconds, in mode 2.

From the'HOME' display, Figure 1.4,

Press

r9l

until d, 5P is shown in the upper display plsss 1.161 ll

vl

until FlmP5 is displayed in the lower display d,

5P

HnP5

Cunent will be displayed in the lower readout continuously when the controller reverts to the HOME display, see also

'Display Modes' below.

SSR RMS On State Current

This is the default state when high or low cunent alarms are contigured. The load current displayed is the steady state true rms current measured during the ON period.

The minimum on times are:-

Mode

Mode

2

5

0. lsecond

3 seconds

Meter Mode

Meter mode applies to mode 5 only. If low current alarms are not configured the current displayed is a filtered instantaneous RMS value. This behaves like a damped analogue meter

It may be used in applications where the current sensor is not linked to control, tbrexample, telemetry, indication.

2208e and 2204e Controller 9-5

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics lf an alarm is present it will flash a four character mnemonic in the lower display

Actual

Temperature

(PV)

)

Should

HOME Display oP1 oP2 ec0

lL[.r

(r

V

The Alarm Messages are:lf more than one alarm is active, the display will alternate between the alarm messages and the default parameter in the lower display

The following two messages are alarms which are produced as a result of failure within the process. ln place of dashes the alarm number will appear

i.e

l, ?,

l,

or

I

-Llr

Alarm number

- Low Current

Used for partial load failure detection. To avoid nuisance tripping due to supply voltage variations set to a value at least 15% below the minimum normal operating current

-H[.r

Alarm number

; High Culrent

Used for load overcurrent protection To avoid nuisance tripping due to supply voltage variations set to a value at least 15% above the maximum normal operating current.

Note: This alarm is not intended to provide instantaneous safety protection from short circuit fault conditions

The following message is a diagnostic alarm which appears for mode 1 operation only

LdF

HLr F

Load Fail This

No includes Jailure of current is being drawn while the controller output demand signal is on the heater circuit or the SSR

The following four messages are diagnostic alarms produced as a result of failure within the equipment or wiring connections. They appear for modes 2 and 5 operation only

Heater Fail

55r F SSB Fail

tr0P

It.5h

Current

Transformer

Open Circuit

Current

Transformer

Short Circuit

The load is continuously on while the controller output demand signal is off lndicates that the PDS input is open circuit

Mode 5 only.

lndicates that the PDS input is short circuit

Mode 5 only.

2208e and 2204e Controller 9-6

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics

From the HOME display

press

until the

HL

L, 5E is displayed

Press

G

button until the desired alarm number is displayed

Press

A or

V to adjust the alarm trip level

To select the Alarm

List header

HL

L,

5E

t?)

+-

le JorY indicates the alarm number;

---

indicates the alarm type:e.g.

Lfr or

H[.r

To select the diagnostic alarm parameter found under the Alarm List header

The alarm trip level is set to 123

The tixed relay output connected to terminals AA to AC in a l/8 or l/4 DIN controller is normally used for alarm purposes. In addition, any plug in module can be used for alarms provided they are not already being used lor another purpose , such as control. Any one or more alarms can be attached to an output, which will operate when an alarm occurs. Contacts are rated at 2A 264Y ac tbr operating external beacons or audible devices.

22OBe and 2204e Conkoller 9-7

Load Cunent Monitoring and Diagnostics lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Configuration of PDS load current diagnostics is in fbur parts:-

l.

Configure the Logic Module fbr PDS Mode I or 2 operation. lf the control device is a contactor or standard SSR, configure the LA digital input tbr mode 5 operation.

2.

Configure the Low and High Current trip alarms.

3.

Attach the alarms to operate an output relay.

4.

Set up the Scaling Factor.

First

enter

Configuration

Level. See Chapter 5

Press' lH

'"

fonF

is until the displayed

Press

,d

G

Ll to show

Press

Func

G

to show

Press

I

ror

v to show

55r I

or

55r

? as required.

Press

5En5

[9]

to.no* pr"..

i r=l to show

nor o. v

I

IH

lonF

,d

Lof,

Fr+',

5En5 nor

This opens the configuration list associated with module position 1A

This shows the identity of the module

The module identity is lsgic output

This shows the function of module

The module function

'I is set to PDS mode

This sets the output signal to normal for heating control

9-8 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Load Cunent Monitoring and Diagnostics

tr"..

il

,'

lbutton until the

LH [onF

is displayed

LH lonF

Press

,d

G to show

,d

LoE.'

This identifies the

LA input as logic and is read only pressilgltoshow

Func press ll

^

I or

[l to select HrnP5

v

ll

F untr

RnP5

To configure the input for the PDCTX.

The system is designed to operate in either mode 2 or mode 5 configuration only.

Selecting both simultaneously will disable the output. However, mode I and mode

5 may be used together.

2208e and 2204e Controller 9-9

Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostlcs lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Alarm I will be contigured as Load Current Low

Alarm 2

llcr;

will be configurecl as Load Current High

(Hcr;

Pressll

"Ibrtton

untilthe

HL [onF

is displayed

FL lonF

This opens the configuration list which contains the

Alarms

HL'

L[.r

After 0.5 sec the display will blink to show the alarm type has been accepted

To select alarm

1

To make alarm 1

=

Low Current

Press

o

ll until

HL?

(alarm z) appears pressi^11 to show

Hfr orflvt

HLE

H[.r

After 0.5 sec the display will blink to show the alarm type has been accepted

To select alarm 2.

To make alarm2=

High Culrent

Note:- The above alarms are known as SOFT ALARMS because they are indication only.

9-1

0 2208e and 2204e Controller

Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Any one alarm indicated above may be attached to an output (normally a relay). Alternatively any combination o[alanns nray be attirched to operate a rclay using the procedure below:-

Press "PAGE" key as many times as necessaryto FlFl

[.onF

Press

G

until d, f,F appears

RH

[.onF

d,

E.F

no.ch

Any output module can be configured for an alarm output provided it is nol used for any other purpose, eg as a control output.

ln place of FlFl you should select the module required, i.e.

lF, ?8,

lH

tor

lF

2204 only) d, 6F

= Elgitat functions noch

= no change

Press

A or

v until the first alarm you wish to attach to the AA output is displayed e.g. HErF

Repeat the above step for every alarm to be attached to the output

'"'"'t',

\s

Y

E sec

After 0.5 second the display will revert to noch to attach the alarm

Each time you scroll through the table of alarms note that two decimal points appear. This confirms that the particular alarm has been attached to the output, i.e.

55rF

etc

Htr.F

nor

Alarms Connected to a

Relay Output

Soft

Alarms

dtE

5En5 t

nu

Output

Module

To remove alarms from an output press

I

lo,

This will clear all alarms attached to this output.

l-.Y.1 untit fLr appears in the lower c.lisplay

2208e and 2204e Controller 9-1

1

Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics lnstallation and Operation Handbook

The value of the current displayed on the controller is scaled using the scaling tactor. This is tbunclinther

n5t fonF ti.t.

ltisset,byclefault,to l00andassumesasingleturn through the current transtbrmer.

lf

two turns are made through the current transfbrmer it will be necessary to adjust the scaling tactor to 50 to obtain the same reading.

Under normal conditions you should not need to change the scaling factor.

If, however, you wish to change the sensitivity of the cunent reading, lbr example, to read very low currents you may necd to change the number of turns through the PDCTX and/or adjust the scaling factor to compensate. See also note I below.

Press

, button until r

n5t fonF

is displayed

r n5E

[.onF

Pressl

G

I until

Lf

H,

is displayed

L[.H,

Press,

a or

V to change the scaling factor

Minimum Resolvable Current

TEl0

44 RMS.

Itis

not possible to read currents lowerthan4.A when usingaTEl0.

PDCTX 4A RMS for a single turn through the PDCTX

Should you wish to read currents lower than 44, using a PDCTX it is necessary to increase the number of turns through the PDCTX and adjust the scaling factor to compensate.

For example: To read LOA wind 4 turns through the PDCTX and adjust the scaling factor to

25 as shown in the table below.

Maximum Resolvable Current

TE

I

0

Determined by the maximum range of the SSR

PDCTX l00A (or

100 ampere turns)

Finally Exit configuration level. See Chapter 5.

9-12 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Retransmission

10 ch

apter

10

RETRANSMISSION

1

10.1

10.2

What is retransmission.............

To configure retransmission.........

10.3

10.1

10.1

10.1

scaling retransmitted output signals

1

To Range Retransmitted Output 0P... .

.

...

2

To Range Retransmitted Setpoint

5P

or Process Variable PU....

3

To Range Fletransmitted Error

Err

.2

3

4

4

5

5

2208e and 2204e Controller 10- l

Retransmission lnstallation and Operation Handbook

The controller can be configured to generate an analogue output signal which represents a selected parameter.

The parameters which can be configured for retransmission are:l.

Process Variable

2.

Setpoint

3.

Error

4.

Control Output

The retransmission signal is available as 0-20mA, 4-20m4,0-5V, l-5V or 0-l0V and is connected to terminals

lA

and lB when module

lA

is fitted as a DC module.

10-2 22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Retransmission

A DC module must be fitted in module position lA.

First enter configuration level.

See Chapter 5.

Then:-

Press

L button until the

lR lonF

is displayed

,F

[^onF

Press

,d c

to show

,d

dl.0P

Press

Func

G.toshow

Pressl^lorlv

to select the parameter for retransmission

Press

G

to show

5En5

This opens the configuration lisl for module 1A.

This is the identity of the module fitted in this position

The module must be a DC output dfIJP

Func

The choices are:nonE

Control Outputs

HEHt

t00L

Retransmission

OP

PU

E,,

,5P

5En5

nor

Output turned otf

Heat control output

Cool control output

Output demand

Process Variable

Error

Setpoint (working) lf

Func is a retransmission parameter the value ol 5En5 has no etfect.

22OBe and 2204e Controller 10-3

Retransmission

Press

0uEl

lu

l"rtoshow

0"tl

OD

Press

cltoshow

0utH

0uh.H

?0fr

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

The retransmitted output signal can be limited by adjusting these parameters.

To reverse the output, set

0"tl to

?00 ana OutH to

lfr.

The analogue output signal may be set between 0 and 20mA. A 4-20mA output is achieved by applying an offset as described below.

A 0 to l0Vdc output may be achieved by fitting a 500 ohm resistor across the output terminals

lA

and 1B. A 0 to svdc output may be achieved by fitting a 250 ohm resistor across the output terminals

I

A and

lB.

Suitable resistors are supplied with the controller.

% Output

0utl

OULH

10-4

For output of 0-100% = 0-20mA set

0utH

to 2o.o and

OuEl to o.o

For output of 0-100% = 4-20m4 set

0utll

to 2o.o and

0uLl

to +.0

22OBe and 2204e Conkoller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Retransmission rnAH

rnEL outt

rnEH

0

rnEL outl

2208e and 2204e Controller

For output ol 0 - 1000oC = 0-20mA set 0uE.L to o.o and 0"hH to zo.o

and

rnf,l

to o.o and

rnf,il

to tooo

OUtH

rnf,l

is the low limit of the input range rnf, H is the high limit of the input range

These are found in the , described in Chapter

P

f onF list as

5.

lf the range limits are not set the retransmitted output is the maximum inpul range as stated in the order code,

Appendix A.

0utll

The retransmitted output value is dependent uoon tne

, the ranoe limils

rnf,H

and

P

f onF list of the controller.

rnf,I

set in

The following examples are given to illustrate the retransmitted error values:

Example 1:

Type K thermocouple, rnEL

=

-zoo rnEH

= +2OO

Retransmitted Value

OmA for an error of -200

1OmA for an error of 0

20mA for an error of +200

Example 2:

As above but

rnf,l

Retransmitted Value

=

-1 o and

r

nEH

= +OO

OmA for an error of -10

0.0487mA for an error of 0

20mA for an error of +400

Note:

To read a negative error it is necessary to set

rn[l

to a negative limit

10-5

Retransmission lnstallation and Operation Handbook

10-6 22OBe and 2204e Contloller

Understanding the Ordering Code lnstallation and Operation Handbook

A

Appendix

A

UNDERSTANDING

THE

ORDERING CODE

The 2208e and 2204e controllers have a modular hardware construction with the option of tbur outputs and one communications port. Two logic inputs are provided as standard. In addition the Model 22O4ehas an optional plug-in l0A heating output.

The ordering code is in two parts: the hardware code followed by the sofiware code. The hardware code specifies the hardware build ofthe controller, and the sotiware code the software configuration. The sotiware code is optional.

Type KT/C 0 to 1000'C

JIlc 32lo

2192"F

Software code Hardware code

IIIIIIIIIIIIIII

t/o

1

Model

Number

VO2 Supply

Voltage

Output 3

Function

Comms

Language

Manual

Sensor input

Range mrn

Range

Max

Display units

Options

Figure A.1

2208e and 2204e Controller A-1

Understanding the Ordering Code lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Hardware code

2208e

22O4e VH ENG

VC

Controller

Valve

Posilioner

On/Off

Alarm unit

VH

85-264vac

XX

None

Relay: 2-pin

R1

Unconf igured

RU

VP raise O/P

RH

PID heating

FH

High alarm

1

FL

Low alarm

1

DB

Deviation band

1

DL

Low dev. alarm

1

High dev alarm

1

Logic: non-isolated

Ll

Unconfigured

LH

PID heating

Ml

PDS mode 1 note

1

M2

PDS mode 2 note 2

Triac

Unconligured

TH

PID heating

TU

VP raise O/P

DC control -isolated

D3

Unconligured

H6

0-20mA PID heating

H7

4-20mA PID heating

C6

0-20mA PID cooling

C7

4-20mA PID cooling

DC Retrans. (isolated)

Select from lable A

FH

FL

None

2-pin

Unconrigured

PID cooling

VP lower O/P

High alarm 2

Low alarm 2

Deviation band 2

Low deviation alarm 2

High deviation alarm 2

Hi &Loalarmsl&2

Logic lnput

SB

SR

M5

Auto manual select

Setpoint 2 select

Alarm acUreset lntegral hold

Standby mode

PDS remote SP select

CTX mode 5 current input

So-

Fitted unconligured

PV relrans

Setpoint

Output

Error

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-5v

1

-sV

0-1

0v

A-2

None

Unconligured

PID heating

PID cooling

High alarm 3

Low alarm 3

Deviation band 3

Low deviation. alarm 3

High deviation alarm 3

High and Low alarms

PDS Alarms

LF

Heater break

HF

Current monitoring heater break

SF

Current monitoring xx None

Iitted unconfiig.

PID heating

None

Modbus protocol

2-wire RS485

4-wte R5422

RS232

El-Bisynch

2-wire RS485

2AE

4-wircRS422

R5232

No manual

English

French

German

Italian

22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Software code

Understanding the Ordering Code

5

Standard sensors

J thermocouple

K thermocouple

Min 'C

-210

-200

-200 max

1200

IJI Z

T thermocouple

L thermocouple

N thermocouple

R thermocouple

-200

-200

-50

400

900

1

300

1

768

1

768 S thermocouple

B thermocouple

Platinel ll therm'ple

-50

0

0

-200

1

820

1

369

8s0

RTD/PT1 OO

Cuslom sensors ('replaces C thermocouple)

-C thermocouple

0

2319

W5%ReAlV26%Re

(Hoskins)

W3%Re/lv25%Re

E thermocouple

Ni/Ni18%Mo

Pt20%Rh/Pr40%Rh

WAA/26%Re

(Englehard)

W/vV26%Re

(Hoskins)

W5%ReAlV26%Re

(Englehard)

W5%RelVV26%Be

(Bucose)

Pr10%Rh/Pt40%Rh

Exergen K80 lR pyrometer

0

-200

0

10

0

-200

-45

0

0

0

2399

1

000

1

399

1

870

2000

201 0

2300

2000

1

800

650

Process inputs

M

-9.99 to +80 00mV

0 to 20mA

4 to 20ma

0 to 5Vdc

1 to 5vdc

0 to 1ovdc

Min ooo

-999

-999

-999

-999

-ooo

Max

9999

9999

9999

9999

9999

9999

Min "F

-340

-325

-325

-325

-JZ)

-58

-58

3?

3?

-325 max

2192

2500

750

1

650

2370

3200

3200

3310

2496

1

562

32

4200

32

-Jla

32

32

32

50 aa

392

4350

1

830

2550

3398

3632

36s0

4172

3632

3272

F

K x

Fahrenheit

Kelvin

Linear

AM

SR

No function

Manual select

Remote setpoint select

Second setpoint lntegral hold

Alarm acknowledge

Standby mode

CTX mode 5 current

Control action

Reverse acting

(standard)

DP

Direct acting PID

Power feedback

Enabled on logic, relay & triac heating outputs

Power feedback disabled

22OBe and 2204e Controller A-3

Understanding the Ordering Code

Notes: lnstallation and Operation Handbook l.

PDS heater break detect will transmit the power demand to a

TEl0 solid state relay and read back a heater break alarm.

2,

PDS current monitoring will transmit the power demand to a

TEl0 solid state relay and read back load current and open and short circuit alarms.

3.

Setpoint limits: lnclude the decimal position required in the displayed value

-

up to one for temp€rature inputs, up to two for process inputs

4.

An external lVo cufient sense resistor is supplied as standard. Ifgreater accuracy is required, ao.l%o 2.49d1 can be ordered as part number suB2Ig249R.l.

A-4 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Safety lnformation

B Appendix

B

SAFETY

and

EMC INFORMAT ON

This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when it will meet the requirements of the European Directives on Sat'ety and EMC. Use in other applications, or tailure to observe thc installation instructions ol this handbook may impair sat'ety or EMC. The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation.

Safety

This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73l23lEEC, amended by

93l68lEEC, by the application of the sat'ety standard EN 6l0l

0.

Electromagnetic

compatibility

This controller confbrms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive

89l336lEEC, amended by 93/68/EEC, by the application of a Technical Construction File. This instrument satistles the general requirements of the industrial environment detrned in EN

50081-2 and EN 50082-2. For more inlbrmation on product compliance ret-er to the Technical

Construction File.

GENERAL

The intbrmation contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. While every effbrt has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information, your supplier shall not be held liable tbr errors contained herein.

Unpacking and storage

The packaging should contain an instrument mounted in its sleeve, two mounting brackets tbr panel installation and this operating book. Certain ranges are supplied with an input adapter.

Ifon receipt, the packaging or the instrument are damaged, do not install the product but contact your supplier.

If the instrument is to be stored befbre use, protect from humidity and dust in an ambient temperature range of -30"C to +75"C.

SERVICE

AND

REPAIR

This controller has no user serviceable parts. Contact your supplier tbr repair

Caution:

Charged capacitors

Belbre removing an instrument from its sleeve, disconnect the supply and wait at least two minutes to allow capacitors to discharge. It may be convenient to partially withdraw the instrument trom the sleeve, then pause belore completing the removal. In any case, avoid touching the exposed electronics of an instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve.

Failure to observe these precautions may cause damage to components of the instrument or some discomtbrt to the user.

2208e and 2204e Controller B-l

Safety lnformation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Electrostatic discharge precautions

When the controller is removed from its sleeve, some of the exposed electronic components are vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone handling the controller. To avoid this, before handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself to ground.

Cleaning

Do not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible.

Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces of the product.

INSTALLATION SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS

Safety Symbols

Various symbols are used on the instrument, they have the following meaning:

A

Caution, (refer to accompanying

the

_l_

Functional earth

documents) -=

(ground) terminal

The functional earth connection is not required fbr safety purposes but is used to ground RFI filters.

Personnel

Installation must only be carried out by qualitied personnel.

Enclosure of live parts

To prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live, the controller must be installed in an enclosure.

Caution:

Live sensors

The logic and PDS outputs are electrically connected to the main PV input, (thermocouple etc.). If the temperature sensor is connected directly to an electrical heating element then these non-isolated inputs and outputs will also be live. The controller is designed to operate under these conditions. However you must ensure that this will not damage other equipment connected to these inputs and outputs and that service personnel do not touch connections to these I/O while they are live. With a live sensor, all cables, connectors and switches for connecting the sensor and non-isolated inputs and outputs must be mains rated.

22OBe and 22O4e Con|Iollet B-2

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Safety lnformation

Wiring

It is important to connect tlre controller in accordance with the wiring data given in this handbook. Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or other low level inputs and outputs. Only use copper conductors lor connections, (except thermocouple). Ensure that the wiring of installations comply with all local wiring regulations.

For example in the UK, use the latest version of the IEE wiring regulations, (85767

I

).

ln the

USA, use NEC Class I wiring methods.

Power !solation

The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker that disconnects all cunent carrying conductors. The device should be mounted in close proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the operator and marked as the disconnecting device for the instrument.

Earth leakage current

Due to RFI Filtering there is an earth leakage current of less than 0.5mA. This may af tect the design of an installation of multiple controllers protected by Residual Current Device, (RCD) or Ground Fault Detector, (GFD) type circuit breakers.

Overcurrent protection

To protect the internal PCB tracking within the controller against excess currents, the AC power supply to the controller and power outputs must be wired through the tlse or circuit breaker specitied in the technical specitication.

Voltage rating

The maximum continuous voltage applied between any connection to ground must not exceed

264Yac.

The controller should not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection.

Under tault conditions such a supply could rise above 264Vac with respect to ground and the product would not be safe.

Voltage transients across the power supply connections, and between the power supply and ground, must not exceed 2.5kV. Where occasional voltage transients over 2.5kV are expected or measured, the power installation to both the instrument supply and load circuits should include a transient limiting device.

These units will typically include gas discharge tubes and metal oxide varistors that limit and control voltage transients on the supply line due to lightning strikes or inductive load switching.

Devices are available in a range of energy ratings and should be selected to suit conditions at the installation.

2208e and 2204e Controller B-3

Salety lnlormation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Conductive

pollution

Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller is mounted. Forexample, carbon dust is a form ofelectrically conductive pollution. To secure a suitable atmosphere, install an air filter to the air intake of the cabinet. Where condensation is likely, for example at low temperatures, include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet.

Grounding of the temperature sensor shield ln some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while the controller is still powered up. Under these conditions, as additional protection against electric shock, we recommend that the shield of the temperature sensor is grounded. Do not rely on grounding through the framework of the machine.

Over-temperature

protection

When designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part of the system should

fail.

In temperature control applications the primary danger is that the heating will remain constantly on. Apart from spoiling the product, this could damage any process machinery being controlled, or even cause a tlre.

Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include:

.

the temperature sensor becoming detached tiom the process

.

thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit;

o

the controller failing with its heating output constantly on

.

an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition

o

the controller setpoint set too high.

Where damage or injury is possible, we recommend fitting a separate over-temperature protection unit, with an independent temperature sensor, which will isolate the heating circuit.

Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failure conditions.

B-4 22OBe and 22Me Controller

lnstallalion and Operation Handbook Safety lnformation

INSTALLATION REOUIREMENTS

FOR EMC

To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary as follows:

.

For general guidance refer to EMC lnstallation Cuide, HA025464.

r

When using relay or triac ottputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable for suppressing the conducted emissions. The filter requirements will depend on the type of load. For typical applications we recommend Schat'fner FN32l or FN6

| 2.

o

lf the unit is used in table top equipment which is plugged into a standard power socket, then it is likely that compliance to the commercial and light industrial emissions standard is required. In this case to meet the conducted emissions requirement, a suitable mains filter should be installed. We recommend SchatTner types FN32l and FN6l2.

Routing of wires

To minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the low voltage DC connections and the sensor input wiring should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where it is impractical to do this, use shielded cables with the shield grounded at both ends. ln general keep cable lengths to a minimum.

22OBe and 2204e Controller B-5

Safety lnformation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

TECHN!CAL

SPECIFICATION lnputs

General

Range

Sample rate

Calibration accuracy

Resolution

Thermocouple

Li nearisation accuracy

Input filter

Zero offset

Types

Cold junction compensation

RTD/PTIOO hocess

Digital

Type

Bulb current

Lead compensation

Linear

Type

Application

+ l00mV and 0 to lOVdc (auto ranging)

9Hz

(l l0mS)

0.25Vo of reading,

+ I LSD or +

I

'C/F

< lpV for

+ l00mV range, <0.2mV for l0Vdc range

<0. I 7o of reading

1.0 to 999.9secs

User adjustable over the fully display range

Refer to Sensor inputs and display ranges table

Automatic compensation typically >30 to

I rejection of ambient temperature change

(incorporates INSTANT ACCURACYTM cold junction sensing technology).

External references 32, I I 3 and 122"F (0,45 and 50'C)

3-wire, Ptl00 DIN43760

0.2mA

No error for 22 ohms in all 3 leads

-9.99 to 80.00mV, 0 to 20mA or 0 to lOVdc

(All configurable between limits)

Contact closure

Manual select, 2nd setpoint, keylock, setpoint rate limit enable

Outputs

Relay

Logic

Triac

High current

Analog

B-6

Rating: 2-pin relay

Rating: change-over, alarm relay

Application

Rating

Application

Rating

Application

Rating

Application

Range

Application

Min: l2V, l00mA dc Max: 24, 264Yac resistive

Min: 6V, lmA dc Max: 2A, 264Yac resistive

Heating, cooling or alarms

I

8Vdc at 20mA (non-isolated)

Heating, cooling or alarms

PDS mode l:

SSRx Load DoctorrM logic heating with load failure alarm

PDS mode 2: SSRx Enhanced I-oad DoctorrM logic heating with load/SSC failure alarm and load current display lA, 30 to 264Yac resistive

Heating or cooling l0A, 264Vac resistive

Heating

Isolated 0 to 20mA or 0 to l0Vdc (configurable between limits)

Heating or cooling

22OBe and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Salety lnformation

Communications

Digital

Tuning

Alarms

Transmission

PDS

Protocols

Setpoint input

Control

functions

Control

Modes

Application

Auto/manual standard

Setpoint rate limit

Cooling algorithms

One-shot tune

Automatic droop compensation

Types

Modes

EIA-485 2wie,ElA-472 4 wire or EIA-232 rt t200,2400,4800, 9600, 19,200 baud

125K, 250K,500K for DeviceNet

Modbus@, EI-Bisynch, DeviceNet

Setpoint input from master PDS controller

PID or PI with overshoot inhibition, PD, P only or On/Off

Heating and cooling

Bumpless transfer

0.01 to 99.99 degrees or display units per mlnute.

Linear; Water (non-linear); Fan (minimum on time), Oil, proportional only

Automatic calculation of PID and overshoot inhibition parameters

Automatic calculation of manual reset value when using PD control

Full scale high or low. Deviation high, low, or band

Latching or non-latching. Normal or blocking actlon

Up to four process alarms can be combined onto a single output

a

2208e and 2204e Controller B-7

Safety lnformation

General

Display

Dimensions and weight

Supply

Temperature and RH

Panel sealing

Electromagnetic compatibi lity

Safety standards

Atmospheres lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Dual, 4 digit x 7 segment high intensity LED

24o4ei 96W x 96H x l03Dmm (3.78W x

3.78H x 4.06D inches) 600g (2loz)

2408e- 48W x 96H x l03Dmm (1.89W x

3.78H x 4.06D inches) 32Og(lloz)

85 to 2@Vac -157o, +lUqo. 48 ro 62H2.

l0watts max operaring: 32 ro l3l"F (0 ro 55'C), RH: 5 to

90% non-condensing. Storage: l4 to 158'F (-10 to 70"C)

IP 54

Meets generic emissions standard EN5008l-2 for industrial environments. Meets general immunity requirements of EN50082-2(95) for industrial environments

EN6l0l0, installation category 2 (voltage transients must not exceed 2.5kV)

Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which this controller is mounted. This product is not suitable for use above 6.562ft (2000m) or in corrosive or explosive atmospheres withoul further protection.

B-8 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Contents

MODELS

22OBe

and 2204e

TEM

PERATU

RE

CONTROLLERS

INSTALLATION AND OPERATION HANDBOOK

1

Chapter

1

OPERATION

1.1

FRONT

PANEL LAYOUT

1.2

GETTING

STARTED.....

1.2.1

Viewing The Process Value and Setpoint..

1.2.2

To Adjust The Setpoint

1.2.3

Viewing The Display Units ......................

1.2.4

1.2.5

Use Of The "SCROLL" Button l-o I ..........

Use Of The 'PAGE' Button I

:l

................

PARAMETER

LISTS

1.4

manual or automatic control.....,

1.4.1

SelectingAuto/ManualOperation

1.4.2

How To Manually Adjust Output Power

1.5

SUMMARY

1.6

Selecting SETPOINT

1 OR

SETPOINT 2.......

1.7

RAMP DWELL

FUNCTION

1.7.1

To Set up a Ramp/Time Program.......

1.7.2

To Run the Program

1.7.3

Power Failure During Program Run....................

1.8

Location of Parameters - Block Diagram.......

1.9

NAVIGATION DIAGRAM

(Part A).......

NAViGATION Diagram

(Part B)....,

1

1

1.10 parametertables.............

10.2

Alarm List

10.3

AutotuneList...................

1 .1

1

.1

1

.1

1

1

1

1

1.1

1

.1

.1

.1

.1

0.5

Setpoint List .....

0.6 tnput t-ist............

0.7

On/Off List.........

0.8

Output 1ist.........

0.9

Communications List

0.10

AccessList...............

alarms.......

't.11.1

Types of Alarm Used in the 2200...

1.12

1.12.1

1.12.2

1.12.3

SETTING ALARM LEVELS

ALARM INDICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT....................

DIAGNOSTIC ALARMS

Page

......1-2

1

-4

1

-4

1

-4

1

-5

1

-5

1-8

1-8

1-9

1-10

1-1

1

1-1

1

,1-12

,1-12

1-13

1-14

1-15

1

1

1

1

1-16

17

17

18

1

1

1

19

-20

-20

1

-21

1

-21

1

-21

22OBe and 2204e Controller Handbook Part No. HA026696 lssue

2.0

Sept -00

Contents lnstallation and Operation Handbook

2

Chapter

2

lnstallation2-1

2.2

INSTRUMENTLAYOUTS.......................

2.2.2

Outline Dimensions Model 2208e

2.2.3

Outline Dimensions Model 2204e...

2.3

lntroduction................

2.3.2

Controllerlabels...........

2.4

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION......

2.4.2

Unplugging and plugging-in the controller.....

2.5

wiring........

2.5.2

Wire Sizes

2.5.3

Wiringconnections.

2.5.4

Sensor input connections.............

2.5.5

Outputs 1 and 2 connections.

2.6

PDS

modes

2-7

Snubbers..

Typical single loop wiring diagram.....

2.9

RS 23A4851422

Communication connections.....

2.9.2

Wiring of EIA-485 serial communication |inks...........

2.1O

Devicenet Wiring to Series

2200e

Controllers

2.10.2

DeviceNetTerminal Functions.....

2.10.3

Wiring lnterconnectionsforDeviceNetCommunications

3

Chapter3 ACCESS LEVELS

3.2

THE

DIFFERENT

ACCESS LEVELS

3.3

SELECTING

AN

ACCESS LEVEL

3.3.2

Returning to Operator Level ............

3.4

Edit Ievel...

3.4.2

Hiding or revealing a complete list..

3.4.3

Promoting a parameter.

.2-2

2-5

..2-12

..2-13

3-1

...................3-2

...................3-3

..................... 3-5

...................3-5

..................... 3-6

3-6 a-2 22OBe and 2204e Controller Handbook Part No. HA026696 lssue

2.0

Sept-0O

lnstallation and Operation Handbook

4.

Chapter

4

TUNING

4.1.

WHAT

IS

TUNING?

4.2.

AUTOMATIC

TUNING

4.2.1

.

Heating and Cooling Output Cycle Times...........

4.3.

How to Tune..........

4.3.1

.

Typical automatic tuning cycle..

4.3.2.

Calculation of the cutback values

4.4.

MANUAL

TUNING

4.4.1

Setting the cutback va|ues..........

4.4.2.

lntegrating action and manual reset ............

4.4.3.

Automatic droop compensation (Adc)..........

Contents

4-7

4-8

4-8

5.

Chapter 5

CONFIGURATION

5.1

SELECTING CONFIGURATION LEVEL

5.2

SELECTING A CONFIGURATION

PARAMETER

5.3

LEAVING

CONFIGURATION LEVEL

5.4 STEPS

INVOLVED

IN CONFIGURING

A CONTROLLER s.s

NAVTGATTON DTAGRAM (PART A)

5.6NAVIGAT|ON

DTAGRAM (PART B)

5.7

CONFIGURATION

PARAMETER

TABLES

5.8 CONFIGURATION

OF DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

5.8.1. To Configure the Function and Baud Rate...........

5.8.2. To Set lnstrument Address

s.9 DEVICENET..........

5.9.1. The EDS Fi|e,.....

5.9.2. ODVA Compliance......

6

Chapter

6

User calibration

6.8

What is the Purpose of User Calibration?

........

6.10

Single point calibration

6.11

Two point calibration.

6.12

Calibration points and Calibration

offsets

5-17

5-17

.

5-17

.6-4

.6-5

............6-6

5-1

5-2

5-3

5-3

5-3

5-4

5-5

5-7

.4-1

.4-2

.4-3

.4-3

..4-4

2208e and 2204e Controller Handbook Part No. HA026696 lssue

2.0

Sept -00

Contents

I nstallation and Operalion Handbook

7

Chapter 7 ALARM

CONFIGURATION 7-1

7.1

DEFINITION OF

ALARMS AND

EVENTS

7.1.1

TYPES OF ALARMS

7.2

DIGITALOUTPUT FUNCTIONS.......

7-2

7-2

7-4

7.3

STEP1

.

CONFIGURING

THE FOUR 'SOFT'ALARMS.................7.5

7.4

STEP 2 -

ATTACHING

AN

ALARM TO A PHYSICAL OUTPUT....7.6

7.5

STEP 3

-

GROUPING

ALARMS

ON

A SINGLE

OUTPUT..............7.7

7.6

STEP

4.

REMOVING

ALARMS

FROM

AN OUTPUT....................7.7

8.

Chapter

8

MOTORISED VALVE CONTROL..........

.8-1

8.1.

Parameters For Motorised Valve

Control

.................8'2

8.2.

Commissioning the Motorised Valve Contro1ler.........................8-2

8.2.1.

Adjusting the minimum

on-time'0ntH'

8.3.

MOTORISED VALVE

8-2

APPLICATIONS...........

.............8-3

8.3.1.

Auto Tuning .....

8.3.2.

2200e Valve Positioner Set-up Table

8-3

8-3

9

Chapter 9 LOAD CURRENT

MONITORTNG

AND DIAGNOSTICS

9-1

9.1

Load Current Monitoring and Diagnostics.........

9-2

9.2

Example Wiring Diagram (For mode

1 & 2

operation)...............9-3

Example Wiring Diagram (for mode

5

operation)...............................9'4

9.4

Operation

9-5

To Read Load Current (modes 2 and 5 only)

9.1

.2

To Display Load Current Continuously in the Lower Readout (modes 2 and 5 on 9-5

9-5 9.1.3

Display

9.1.4

How Heater Alarms Are Displayed

9.5

To

Set

The Alarm Trip Levels

9-6

9-7

9.7

TO CONFIGURE

PDS

LOAD CURRENT DIAGNOSTICS.............9.8

9.1.5

To conligure the Logic Module lor PDS modes 1 or 2 .......................9-8

9.1.6

To configure logic input a for pds (Mode 5 only)

To Configure Low and High Gurrent Trip

9-9

Alarms

..........9-10

9.9

To Attach Soft Alarms To A Relay Output

9.10

the scaling factor.........

9.1

.7

To adjust the scaling factor...........

9-1

1

9-12

.........9-12 a-4 2208e and 2204e Controller Handbook Part No. HA026696 lssue

2.0

Sept-oo

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Contents

10

Chapterl0 RETRANSMISSION......

10.1

What is

retransmission.............

........10-2

10.2

Toconfigureretransmission.........

10.3

scaling retransmitted output

signals

10.'1.1

To Range Retransmitted Output

10.1

.2

To Range Retransmitted Setpoint

0P................

...... 1O-4

5P

10.1.3

To Range Retransmitted Error

Err......

or Process

.................l().4

Variable PU.

10-3 f O-S

... 10-5

)

Appendix A

Appendix

B

UNDERSTANDING

THE ORDERING

CODE

........

A.1

SAFETY & EMC INFORMATION

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

B-1

B-6

This product is covered by one or more of the following US Patents:

5,484,206 and 5,793,754; Additional patents pendang.

pOStO@ is a registered trademark of Eurotherm.

INSTANT ACCURACYTM, SSRX Load Doctorrm and SSRX Enhanced Load Ooctor ru are trademarks ol Eurotherm."

2208e and 2204e Controller Handbook Part No. HA026696 lssue

2.0

Sept -00

Contents lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Symbols

in

Use

n

This Handbook

Useful information

A

Caution, (refer to the accompanying documents)

d

Button Operation

+

Functional earth

(ground) terminal a-6 2208e and 2204e Controller Handbook Part No. HA026696 lssue

2.0

Sept-OO

I nstallation and Operation Handbook

1.1

FRONT

PANEL LAYOUT.....

1.2

GETTING

STABTED..

1.2.1

Viewing The Process Value and Setpoint...

1.2.2

To Adjust The SetPoint

1.2.3

Viewing The Display Units.............

1.2.4

Use Ol The "SCROLL" Button I

o

1.2.5

Use Of The 'PAGE' Button

...............

PARAMETER LISTS.....

1.4

manualor automatic control

1.4.1

Selecting Auto/Manual Operation...............

1.4.2

How To Manually Adjust Output Power......

1.5

SUMMARY

1.6

Selecting SETPOINT

1 OR

SETPOINT

2

1.7

RAMP

DWELL

FUNCTION.

1

1.7.1

To Set up a RamP/Time Program

.7

.2

To Run the Program.

1.7.3

Power Failure During Program Run ......'......'

1.8

Location of Parameters - Block Diagram.....

1.9

NAVIGATION

DIAGRAM

(Part

A)...

NAViGATION Diagram (Parl

B)

1.10

parametertables...............

1

1.10.1

HOME DisplaY

10.2

Alarm List.........

Autotune List...............

1

1

10.3

10.4

.t0.5

1

1

10.6

10.7

PID List

Setpoint List...............

lnput List

On/Off list...............

1

1

1

10.8

Output List .............

Communications List

Access List ...............

1

10.9

10.10

1.11

alarms

1.11.1

'1.12

Types of Alarm Used in the 2200

Alarm relay output..............

1.12.1

1.12.2

1.12.3

SETTING ALARM LEVELS.......

ALARM INDICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT..

DIAGNOSTIC ALARMS......

2208e and 2204e Controller

Operation

1

1

1

1

22

23

24

25

26

18

19

20

20

21

21

21

22

1-1

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

Output l ----' oP1

22OBe oP2

<-

Outpul 2 e0.0.8

ecB0 e

UpPerreadout

{-

Lower readout

SP2 REM

<-

PDS Remote Setpoint

<-

Setpoint rate limit active

SetPoint 2 active

Manual mode

-;'

----f

1-2

Output 1

--)

Setpoint 2 active

Manual mode

-+

Page

Scroll

Down

Up

Button Button Button Button

Figure

1-l

Model 2208e lront panel layout

2204e oP1 oP2

+-

Output 2

<-

Upper readout a

D

+

Page

Button

SP2

(j

e0

0c

@ fRrrN I h-ror o

I

+

Scroll

Button

+

Down

Button

+

Up

Button

+-

Lower readout

+-

Remote Setpoint

1-

Setpoint rate limit active

Figure 1-2 Model 2204e front panel layout

2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

MAN

RUN

D

CT

oP1 oP2

SP2

REM

When lit, it indicates that heating output is on.

Output

1

Output 2

When lit, it indicates that cooling output is on.

Setpoinl

Remote Setpoint

Manual light

Run light

Page

2 button

When lit, this indicates that Setpoint 2 has been selected.

When lit, this indicates that the PDS remote

Setpoint input has been selected. 'REM' is also used to indicate that user comms is active.

When lit, it indicates that manual mode has been selected

When lit, it indicates that Setpoint rate limit is active.

Press to select a new lisl of parameters.

Scroll button

Down button

Press to s€lect a new parameter in a list.

Press to decrease a value in the lower readout.

Up button Press to increase a value in lower readout.

L

Figure

1.3

Controller buttons and indicators

For Valve Positioning, please reter to Appendix D 'Motorised Valve Control

2208e and 2204e Controller 1-3

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Thank you for selecting the 2208e12204e controller

This section shows the principle of operation.

Install and wire up the controller in accordance with Chapter 2 and switch on. Following a 3 second self'-test sequence, this is the display you will see,

Output 1

)

el0

U

V A

{

Output 2

{

Actual Temperature (Process Value)

+

Required Temperature (Setpoint)

Figure 1.4 The "Home Display"

The display may flash an alarm message. Refer to the Parameter Tables later in this chapter for a complete list and meaning of the messages.

oP2

OD

,110fl

a

Press and hold to decrease temperature

Pd Press and hold to increase temperature

Figure 1.5 The lower readout shows the setpoint

After 2 seconds the lower readout

will

'blink' indicating that the new value has been accepted

For everyday use you may not need to do anymore than this

1-4 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

0.-5 sec

el.0

I

' f

' F

Display Units

D"gr"". Centigrade

Degrees Farenheit

' lr

Degrees Kelvin

No units - Linear inputs

e00

rYo 0

@

dd

Momentarily press either button

Figure 1.6

Pressingl' orl'' lwill llashthedisplayunits

for0.5secs

L lf you get lost, pressing

LL o

I

and

i

' I together will return you to the Home display

Pressing the scroll button will display the output power level. Continued pressing will display turther parameters in the operator scroll list.

2nd press

OP t00fr

+

Output

+

Actual output level %

)

3rd press m-F

H"Eo

a

Manual/Auto

a

Actual state

Keep pressing Ll]ll to return to the

Home display or select further parameters (if available)

Figure

1.6

Upper readout is parameter name. Lower is value

2208e and 2204e Controller 1-5

1-6

I nstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

The "PAGE" button

[9!

accesses parameter LISTS.

Parameters are settings in the instrument which, generally, can be changed by the user to suit the process. Examples are: Alarms, SelfTune, etc. They are found under headings called

LISTS and a full set is given later in this chapter.

0.2 sec.

e0fl

,r{00 alfl t

'lst press e0.0

,r{I0

2nd press

HL

L, 5t

3rd press

Htun

L, 5t

Keep pressing

E

select more list headings to

Flgure

1.7

Press liEi] to choose a paramete? list

L

a The actual list headings may be longer or shorter than indicated above and you can customise this for the operator's convenience in EDIT level, Chapter 3.

t

2208e and 22Me Controller

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

,

Press

to choose a LIST - "ALARMS" is a good one. This list allows you to set the alarm trip levels. The parameters which appear in the list will vary according to the configuration of your controller.

0.2

Alarm

List e0fr

Irt0fl

el0 t

2nd press

HL

L,

5E

d

1 st press

There are 4 alarms in the controller. The first character is the alarm number. The following three letters indicate alarm type as follows:

-F5L

rutt Scale Low

-F5H

tutt Scale High

-dH,

Deviation High

-dLo

Deviation Low

-dEu

Deviation Band

-Lcr

Lowcurrent

-Hcr

High culrent

Disabled alarms will not be displayed.

ChapterTgivesafull description of alarms.

(l e

200.0

Now press the SCROLL button

T

t---

50.0

+

Alarm

1

2nd press to level

+

Alarm 2

V

change to kip level

Keep pressing

1.

to scroll through further parameters

2.

to return to list header

L

Figure 1.8 Choose a list. Press

lGl

to select a parameter

If, at any time, no key is pressed within 45 seconds, the display will always return to the

"HOME" display.

A complete description of the parameter lists is given on page l- 14.

22OBe and 2204e Controller 1-7

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

The controller can be used in two modes:

Automatic mode

-

in which the output power is automatically adjusted to hold the temperature at the required value. The controller normally operates in this mode.

Manual mode - in which the output is manually adjusted by the Operator. ln this mode the

'MAN' light will be on.

One other mode is available:

Remote setpoint - The setpoint ts generated as an input signal from a master 2000 series controller. ln this mode the REM light rs on.

2 sec./.-

I

400

Irt0.0

el0

t

@

2nd press

1 st press

DP t00.0

+Output

+Actual output level %

3rd press m-F

nFn

+

Manual/Auto

+

V

or

A

to select

H"to

nFln automatic mode manual mode

Keep pressing to return to "HOME" display

Figure 1.9 Auto/Manual select

22OBe and 2204e Controller 1-8

(l

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

L oP1 oP2

< Actual Temperature (Process Value)

+

Output Power Demand

4

Manual lndicator on

Press and hold to decrease power a

V A

Pd

Press and hold to rncrease power

Figure 1.10 The "Home Display" in manual mode

Manual mode is generally used tbr test and commissioning purposes, take care not to leave the controller in this mode since damage or personal injury could occur.

To step through list headers press the Page button

IGI

,n1;1 the required header is obtained

To step through parameters within a particular list press the Scroll button required parameter is obtained

l(}luntil

the

To change the value (or state) of a parameter press the Raise button l\ or the

Lower button

V

The remainder of this chapter provides a complete list of all parameters available.

2208e and 2204e Conkoller 1-9

Operation

I nstallation and Operation Handbook

The instrument has the facility to select two setpoints. This may be useful, for example, where it is required to switch control between two different setpoints or to control in a standby condition, thus avoiding the necessity to change the setpoint manually each time.

This may be done in two ways:l.

By an extemal switch or relay contact wired to a digital input

2.

Through the front panel using ttre 5P tist e0fr

,Y0fl

Press to sebct 5P list

Setpoint

List

5P

L, 5t

When setpoint 2 is selected the SP2 beacon illuminates.

Press scroll button to

55EL

55Er

5Pt

+

Press chanoe sPl

l+Jorivl

between 5P to

I and

Flgure 1-11 To Select Setpolnt 1 or 2

1-10 2208e and 22Me Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

The ramp dwcll Iirnction is selected by turning the setpoint ratc limit parameter

5Prr

tn o value. It can be sct to RUN in two ways:-

L

Through the l'ront panel using tne 5P ti.t

2

By an extcrnal switch or rclay contact wired to a digital input conllgured lbr resct

tr5EEl.

When closect the program will reset. Whcn open the program will run. To run thc prograrn l'rom the initial rcsct state, it is necessary to tlrst close thc switch then open it.

The controller will then ramp I'rom setpoint I to setpoint 2 at a rate set by thc

5Prr

parameter.

When thc controller reaches setpoint 2 it ctrn remain at this level for a timed period, using the durEll prram"ter.

At thc cnd ol the dwell period the nction of the controllcr is determined by the End Type pararnctcr

EndL.

Sct setpoint I to the value at which to start thc rarnp. Set setpoint 2 to the value which you wish to ramp to. This is described in the prevrous sectlon.

Now press c il until

5Prr

is displayed

Press a or V

to set the

SP lamp late in units per minute

5P..

?00

ln Run mode the controller will ramp from SP

1 to SP 2 al20.O units per minute

Press scroll button to duEll

Press

A ol.

Y

dwell time in minutes to set the

duEll

500

ln Run mode the controller will dwell at

SP 2 for 60 minutes

I

Press scroll button to End.t

Press ur

to choose the action required at the end of the dwell time

End.E

r5Et

ln Run mode the controller will reset at the end of the dwell time.

Other choices are:-

HoLd The orooram will oo into Hold

5Ebv The program will go into standbv

dwtll

The program will dwell for an unlimited period

Figure

1-12

Ramp/Owell Program

2208e and 2204e Controller 1-1

1

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

From the previous view, press scroll button to ProE

Pr"r.

Ll choose

run

or

L v to

Pr olt run

To reset the controller to start conditions, select

r5Et

In Full access level the Status ofthe program can be read as follows:-

From the previous view, press scroll button to 5EHt

5rHr

rnP

The status may be any one of the following: rnP duEll

End

OFF

Ramping from SP1 to SP2

Dwelling at SP2

The program is complete.

tt

Endt

= r5EE, End will flash briefly before changing to OFF

The program is in the reset state

A program may also be reset or run using an external switch contact if a digital input has been configured. See Configuration scction.

Figure 1-13 To Run the Ramp/Dwell Program

l.

DuringRamp. Atierreturnolpower,theworkingsetpointwill servotothecurrentPV value, and the ramp continues to SP2 tbllowed by the timed dwell.

2.

During Dwell. Atter return of power the working setpoint will servo to PV, the ramp continues to SP2 followed by full programmed dwell. In eff-ect this causes the program to restart.

i

Use the Hide, Reveal and Promote t'eatures to customise the display for a programmer

See Chapter 3.

1-12 2208e and 2204e Controller

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation a

The controller consists of a number of internal tunction blocks connected together to create a temperature controller. Each tunction block has a number of parameters tbund in lists to which the user has access. The block diagram shows location of these parameters within the controller

Ied

@

Display

Parameters

e0.0

?1n

For example

Output power

Setpoint

Auto/Manual

Contro

Parameters

PLANT

N PUTS

Timer

PLANT

OUTPUTS

Remote

SP

TCs

PRT

Pyrometer mA. mV,

Volts lnput

JPV

Setpoint

SP

E rl,ot

PID

Cool oP1 oP2

Digital Comms

Alarms

Alarm

1

Alarm 2

Alarm 3

Alarm 4

Other alarms

These are available in configuration level only

2 to 5 logic inputs

Logic lnputs

LA, LB,

Module 2

Logic l/P

Digital

Comms

Functions listed in

LA,/LB conf lists

Relay

/l nvert

OP

PV

Err

SP

Retrans-mission

Retransmrssron

Relay,

Logic, triac, mA, Volts

R5232

R5484

R5422

Relay

Logic, tr ac mA,

Volts

Figure 1-14 Controller Block Diagram

2208e and 2204e Controller

1

-13

I nstallation and Operation Handbook

Operation

Home

Lst

?0fl

?0fi

OP t00D

5P

?OD

Alarm

Lst tr Autotune

LSt

HL

Lr 5E

Htun

@

tunE

OFF

I7;I tYJ

Hdc

OFF

PID(r)

Lst

Pb

50

t,

100

td

50fl tr Setpoint

Lst tr

55EL

5Pt

@

5Pl

e0fl

5P?

0fr

Lcb

Huto

Hcb

Euto

The navigation diagram shows a Iull list of possible parameters. However, some may not appear because they are dependent upon the particular controller variant.

5P

ll3

tD1fr

5P tfi3

0fr

5Pel3 tD0fl

5P?H3

I

Figure 1.15a Navlgatlon dlagram

1-14

5Prr

DFF and22O4e Controller

lnstallation and Operation

Handbook

Operation

)

a

lnput

.tr

Output

List

F, LE lI

0F5t

0fr

On

Off

r=r

List(1)

LlJJ

Comms Access

Lst

HttS

L,5E

EDEE

tr

Return to

Home Display

5b0P

IDED

LVLH

?0fr

ontH n

EVLT

5il

onE.f

ID

0PLo t00D

tr

0PH'

Dfr hv5H

ID

hv5f

t0

Htdb

Dfl

Hddr

@ codE

Pn55

6oto

DPEr

lonF

0

IVotes,'

1.

Either the PID list or the On/Otf list will be present depending upon the type of control in use.

2.

The last three characters depend upon the type ol alarm configured

3.

Absolute setpoint limits are set in configuration, see Chapter

E

4.

UP05 only for

VP. Befer to VP Appendix D.

s

HrnP5 is Mode 2 or Mode 5 PDSIO.

6.

mtr

used for VP version. Reter to VP Appendix D.

7.

Beware! Used for calibration. See chapter 6.

8. ls only available il using PDSIo@ comms in the HA slot.

9. u5P is available if using ramp to setpoint.

Complete lists or individual parameters normally hidden in Operator level. To see all the available parameters you must select Full level. See Chapter 3, Access Levels

Only displayed when option selected

2208e and 2204e Controller

Figure 1.15b Navigation diagram

't -15

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Thc tables which tbllow list all pararneters that arc availablc in Full operator level

Name Parameter

Description

Default Value Min

Value

Max

Value

Units Customer

Settinq

UK USA

Display mnemonic

Brief description of parameter or function

Factory conf igured value

M

Customer

Settinq

UK

Home uPo5

OP w\P

5P

Home List

Measured Value and Setpoint(SP)

Valve positioner output power

% Output Level

Working setpoint

Setpoint

SP=25" SP=75'

F

AS display nn

U.U

t00fr

"kot mtr

-

IDDfr t00fr

AS displav

-999

9999 AS displav

100 FmP5 HnP5 Heater current

(PDS modes 2 and

5) n-H Auto/manual select

Fl, ,r-

-

FI.,F.

d\P

Configure lower readout of home

5Ld 5Ld display

[o.,E'

EhE;

5E:r

L'd

Customer lD n n

U n

U ggqq been used t

2208e and 2204e Controller

1-'16

lnstallation and Operation Handbook Operation

L

I

Alarm 1 set point value

D 0

AS disolav

l

?---

Alarm 2 set point value

Alarm 3 set point value

D

0

0 n

U

AS disolav

AS disolav r{

-dH,

Alarm 4 set point value

Deviation High alarm

0 0

AS displav ln place of dashes, the last three characters indicate the alarm tvoe. as follows:

-F5H

Full Scale High alarm

-999

9999 as disolav

-F5L

Full Scale Low alarm

-dE"

Deviation band alarm

-999

9999 as disolav

9999 AS disolav

9999

AS disolav

-dLo

Deviation Low alarm

-L

cr

Low current alarm

-Hcr

Hioh current alarm

D u

9999 as disolav

nn

AIUPS

,00 AMPS

H9 Hysteresis 0 9999

AS disolav

Lbt

Looo break time OFF NFF 0 9999

SECS

trnE

Self tune enable

Hdc Automatic droop compensation

(Manual Reset) enable (only present if

tr

set to

OFF)

DFF mFln

OFF mHn

OFF mFln

0n

tHLt

2208e and 2204e Controller

1

-17

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Pb

t,

Ed

rE5

Proportional band lnteoral time

Derivative time

Manual reset

(appears when tr set to OFF)

Cutback low Lcb

Hcb CutDack high rEL[.

Relative cool oain (set 1)

?0fr

t50

50

OD

)0

150

EO

0fr

I

NFF

OFF

000

9999 as displav

9999 seconds qqqq seconds t00D

/o

H"Eo Huto 0 9999 as disolav

F"to

tfr?

H"Eo tflD

0 9999

AS disolav

0Et

9.99

t

e

1-18 22O8e and 2204e Controller

lnslallation and Operation Handbook

Default Value Mln

Value

Max

Value t a

5P List

55EL

L-r

Select SP1 or SP2

Local or remote setpoint select

Loc

5Pt

Loc

5Pt

Loc

5P?

rmt

5Pt

5P?

Setooint 1 value

Setpoint 2 value e5 e5

t0 t0

0

As disolav ranoe

As disolav ranoe rn.5P

Remote setpoint lorl

Local trim

5P IL

5P IH

Setpoint 1 low limit

Setpoint

t

high limit

D

0 n

U tD00

As disDlav ranqe

0

la

As disolav ranoe

As disolav ranoe

e

r00 As display range

5Par_ Setpoint 2 low limit

t?

As disolav ranoe

5P?H

Setpoint limit

!

f;igh t000

e

r00 As display range

Locl

Local setpoint trim low limit

-en

-lq5

As display range

LocH Local setpoint trim hiqh limit re00

?BE

5Prr

Setooint rate limit NFF

d-Ell

Dwell time

EndL End type

OFF

NFF

OFF

r5Et r5Et

As display

0.1 to 999.9 minutes

r5Et

range

As disolav ranoe hoLd

5tbv

ProE Program control

rE5 rE5

duEll

runl

r5EE

5tFt

Status of program OFF OFF rnP duEll

End

OFF

Operation

1-1

I

2208e and 2204e Controller

Operation lnstallation and Operation Handbook

Mln

Value

UK USA

*F,

Lt

lnput filter time constant

0F5t PV Olfset mU

1.5

r.6

The next 5 parameters will appear if User calibration has been enabled in configuration level. To perform a user calibration refer to Ch 6.

tHL tHL.5

FH[t

will re-instate factory settings and disable User Calibration. Default setting

FEIT

U5Er will re-instate any previously set User Calibration otfsets and make available

User Calibration Darameters as follows:

User calibration select nonE nonE H,,

Lo' nnnF

Ril-

Adiust calibrated reference source

The followino two oarameters are alwavs present in Full Access level but not in Operator level

[.

J[_" Cold Junction compensation temperature

Millivolt inout

999.9

SECS

2P,

-999

9999 as disolav

* A minimum filter time constant of one second is recommended to provide sufficient noise immunity.

-

Do not make adjustments to the

EdJ parameter unless you wish to offset the controller calibration.

lst

This set of parameters onlv aopear if On/Otf control has been confiqured hV5H Heat hvsteresis 0 0 9999 as display

hvSr

Cool hvsteresis 0 0 0

Hldb

HeaVCool dead band

I I D

9999

S displav

9999 as displav

1-20 22OBe and 22O4e

INTERNATIONAL SATES

AND

SERVICE

AUSTRALIA

Eurotherm Pty. Ltd

Telephone Sydney

(+61

2) 96348444

For

(+61

2) 96348555

JAPAN

Densei-Lomdo K K

Eurolherm Division

Telephone Tokyo

(+81

3) 571 4 0620

Fox

(+81 3) 57140621

AUSTRIA

Eurolherm GmbH

Telephone Vienno l+

Fox

(+43 l) 7987605

43

1) 7987 601

DENMARK

Eurotherm Donmork A,/S

Telephone Copenhogen

(+45

38) 871622

Fox l+

45 38) 872'124

FRANCE

Eurotherm Aulomotion SA

Telephone Lyon

Fox

(+33 478) 664500

(+33 478) 352490

KOREA

Eurotherm Koreo Limiled

Telephone Seoul

(+82 2) 4788507

Fox

(+82

2) 4888508

Telex EIKOR K23I 05 BELGIUM

Euroiherm B V

Telephone

Fox

Anhrerp (+32 3) 3223870

(+32

3) 321 7363

NETHERLANDS

Eurotherm B V

Telephone Alphen o/d

Ryn

(+31 172) 411752

Fox l+31 172) 417260

NEW ZEALAND

Eurolherm lnternoiionol (NZ) Limiled

Telephone Aucklond (+64 9) 26359OO

Fox:

(+64

9) 263590'l

NORWAY

Eurotherm A/5

Telephone Oslo (+47 67) 592170

Fox

(+47 67) I

I 8301 GERMANY

Eurolherm Regler GmbH

Telephone Limburg (+49 6431) 2980

Fox(+49643,l)298119

Also regionol offices

HONG KONG

Eurotherm Limited

Telephone Hong Kong l+852) 28733826

Fox (+852) 2A70O148

Telex 0802 69257 EIFELIiX

INDIA

Eurolherm lndio Limiled

Telephone

Fox

Chennoi l+9144) 4961129

(+9144) 4961831

SPAIN

Eurolherm Espono SA

Telephone

Fox

(+34 9l

) 661

(+34 9l

) 661

9093

6001

SWEOEN

Eurolherm AB

Telephone Molmo (+46 40) 384500

Fox

(+46 40) 384545

SWITZERLAND

Eurolherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG

Telephone (+41

55) 4154400

Fox

(+41 55) 4l

5441 5

IRELAND

Eurotherm lrelond Limited

Telephone Noos

Fox

(+353

45) 879937

(+353

45) 875123

ITALY

Eurotherm SpA

Telephone Como (+39 3l)

9751 I

I

Fox l+39 31]] 977512

Telex 380893 EUROTH

I

UNITED KINGDOM

Eurotherm Limited

Telephone Worthing (+44

I 903) 695888

Fox

(+44 r 903) 695666

USA

Eurolherm lnc

Telephone Reslon

Fox

(+

(+l

703) 443 0000

I

703)

669

I 300

Web m.eurotherm com

ED 21 hilp ://www. eu rolherm. co. u

k

(

@ Oopvrighr l,lurrrrhcrnr Linrircd 2000

AJI rights stricrlr rcscoed. No prrr oI rhis documen r ma.v bc srorcd in a rerrier rnl lbrm or hv anr means sirhour prior u,rirren pcrmission liom l,lurorhenr ll srsrcm, or l,imiced Ercn efforr has becn rrken (r ensure rhc accuracv ol'this specilicarion Ho*cyer in order to mainruin our tcchnological lcad wc are conrinuouslr improvingour products which crruld. rirhrrut norice, rcsult in anrcndnrenrs or omissions ro this spccificerion ill]il1lil il[]llililililil1uililililtililililflt

HAO26696

Manual

(One channel type only with switch A) lnstallation instnrctions

The electronic system in the time switch is protected against normal inlerference Under adverse mains supply conditions, H V. spikes etc

, it is possible that the electronic systems can be influenced lf this occurs, a reset is necessary (cap.

1

0) Time switch will then require re-programmrng.

To reduce risks of interference to a minimum, please note following points belore installation:

Requirent lnstal l.

1 Set the clock (cover removed) example: day 3 (Wednesday)

16:35 h

Action

Connect to mains.

Press MODE key (4), index until indicator appears over O

Press TBANSPORT key (1 ), index until point flashes over

"3":

Wednesday

Press ENTEB key (2)

1

Do not install time switch in close proximity to any heavy duty contacts, thyristor controlled circuits or wiring associated with heavy duty circuits

2

Use ditterent phases of supply to operate the time switch and the voltage free switch circuits

3

Where it is impossible to isolate trom inductive loads a surge suppression circuit should be used.

4. Where there are inductive or capacitive loads in excess of

1

6 A, contactors or relays should be used.

Result ln display appears 00:00

Pointover 1 (Monday) flashes

\

Point remains over 3 (Wednesday), lirst digit of hour indication tlashes "0"

Caution

Press TRANSPOBT key (1 ) no. "1 " Ilashes.

until

Press ENTER key (2)

No. 1 flashes

No- +. emains, second digit of hour indication tlashes

The installation and assembly ot electrical equipment may be carried out only by a skilled person.

Press TRANSPORT key (1 ), until no.'6" llashes.

indtx

Press ENTER key (2)

No. 6 llashes.

Press TRANSPOHT key (1 ), until no '3'Ilashes.

index

Press ENTER key (2)

No

3 tlashes

No 3 remains, second digit of minute indication flashes '0".

Press TRANSPORT key (1 until no "5" Flashes.

), index

No

5 llashes

To correct input errors; Press'CL" (3) and start again (Day of we€k, time)

Press ENTEB key (2) Time is stored, running is lndicator has moved over starled. r

-

I

I

I

r:, Ilnl

J.U.

E,r: :l

2. Programme switching times.

(cover removed) example: days

1

2

:

Monday

Tuesday

4 = Thursday

07:30 h switch B, ON

Press MOOE key (4), index unlil indicator appears over "PB"

Press ENTER key (2)

Press ENTER key (2)

Press TRANSPORT key (1 )

Press ENTEB key (2)

_Continue

('1) to press TRANSPORT key until tirst digit of hour indication tlashes "0"

Press ENTER key (2)

Poinl over 1 (Monday) tlashes.

Point over '1 remains, point over

2 = Tuesday

Poinls flashes.

----+ ove|l and 2 remain, point over 3

:

Wednesday flashes

Points over 1 and 2 remain, point over4 = Thursday flashes.

PoiOF over'1,2 and 4 remain, point over 5 llashes

Points over week first digit of hour flashes "0"

No 0 remairls, second digit flash

'0"

No.0 remains, second digit flashes Press TRANSPoRT key (1 ), until second digit of hour indication Ilashes '7" index

Press ENTER k'ey (2)

n

-'l

.w

'.u.-

Press TRANSPORT key (1 ), until no '3" llashes index

Press ENTER key (2)

Press ENTER key (2)

Press TRANSPORT key (1 ) until

''ON" for switch B tlashes

Check inputs

Press ENTER key (1)

Hour indication remains with '07" lirst digit ol minute indication llashes "0"

First digit of minute indication flashes "3"

No. "O7" and digit

"0" ot

"3" remain,

".*nd

Z

Switching

"ON" lor time'07:30" remains, switch A flashes

Week days and switching remains,'"ON" lor switch-B time .

flashN

Switching time is stored. Point

rI

-l

Ltt

.1rn'r-.P;

n

-r.'1

Ll t.l

f]

u

-r*.

n-l

Ltt

-t lu,

-."i,

Bedienungsanleifung (Bei 1-Kanal-Schaltuhren ist Schalter B nicht vorhanden) lnstallatiorishinweise

Die hochkomplexe EleKronik dioser Schaltuhr ist gegen Storeinfl0sse

0blicher Art geschota. Bei Auftreten extrem hoher Storspannungsspitzen im Wschselstromnetz sowie bei auoergewohnlich hoher StOreinstrahlung le8t sich eine Beelnllussung nicht vollig ausschlieBen. Nach einem so verursachten Fehler kann die Schaltuhr durch ein Resst (Absatz

I

0) wleder in betriebsbereiten Zustand gebracht werden.

Um Storungen aul ein Minimum zu reduzieren, sollten bei der lnstallation tolgende PunKe beachtet werden:

Wa3 wlll

man? lnbetriobnehmen

1

. Die Schaltuhr nichl direkt neben Storsendsr wie z.B. Schaltschotzen, hohe Strome f0hrenden Leitungen, Magnetventilen, Tyristorsteuerungen etc. montieren.

2

Di€ Betriebsspannung der Schaltuhr und die Schaltspannung f0r dle potentialfreien Kanalausgenge sollten getrennte Phasen haben

3. Direld geschaltete induldive Verbrauchor sollten mit passenden Entstorglieclern wie Varistoren, RC€liedsrn etc. entsl6rt werden.

4. lnduldive und kapazitive Vsrbraucher belasten die Relaiskontakte der

Kanalausgange extrem stark. Pr0fen Sie daher, ob Trennrelais oder

Schotze eingebaut werden sollten

Was

tun?

Schaltuhr an das Netz

Wb3 passlert?

anschlieBen lm Display erscheint 00:00

1.

Uhzsit einstellen (ohne Deckel)

Beispiel:

3. Tag (Mittwoch) 16:35 Uhr

Bingtaste (4) dr0cken, bis Zeichen oberdemUhrensymbol

O

steht.

Schritt-Taste (1) drocken, bis

Punkt oberTag 3 (Mittwoch) blinkt.

Taste "Ente/ (2) dr0cken.

Punkt obor der 1 (Montag) blinkt.

Punld oberTag 3 (Mittwoch) steht und die ersto Stelle der Stundenahzeige blinK mit'0".

AchtUng!'

Einbau und Montage elektrischer Gerate d0rfen nur durch eine

Elektrolachkraft erlolgen.

schrltt-Taste

(1

Zifier '1" blinkt

) drocken, bis dle

Tasts "Enter" (2) dr0cken.

Schritt-Taste (l) drucken, bisdie

Ziffer "6" blinkt.

Tsste "Enter' (2) dr0cken.

4t,

.,L

Zltle(

Stelle

"1" stehl und die rueile oe, strjirodnariieige oiinn.

Zifrer "6" steht und die erste Stelle der Minutenanzeige blinK.

-

Schritt-Taste (1

Zifter "3"

) drtickon, bis die bllnkt. r

Taste "Entsr" dr0cken.

Zifler "3" steht und die zweite

Stelle der Minutenanzeige blinkt.

+

r

I

tr.

t-w

J-.u.-

Schritt-Taste (1 ) drocken, bis die

Zitfer ?5' blinkt.

Bel Falscheingabo Tasts 'CL' (3) drocken und n",

]-

Taste "Enter" (2) tlrocken.

','t

Uhzeit ist gespeichert und lauft.

DoppelpunK

"Auto" steht.

ilischen

Stunden und Mlnuten bllnkt. Zeichen 0ber

+

2. Schaltzeiten programmieren

(ohno Deckel)

Beispiel:

Tage 1, 2 und 4 (Montag,

Dlenstag u. Donnerstag)

07:30 Uhr Schalter B ElN.

Ringtaste (4) drocken, bis Zeichen

0ber "Pr" steht.

Punkt ober der 1 (Montag) blinkt.

Taste "Enter' (2) drocken.

Taste "Enter' (2) dr0cken.

schritt-Taste (1 ) drocken.

Taste "Enter" (2) drucken

Schritt-Taste sooft drtlcken, bis dle srste Stelle der Stundenanzeige mit "0" blinkt.

Taste "Enter" (2) drEcken.

Pkt. ober 1 steht, PK. ober 2 blinkt

Punlde 1 u. 2 stehen, Punkt 3 blinK

Punkte 1 u. 2 stehen, Punkt 4 blinkt

>\

Punkte 1, 2 u. 4 stehm, 5 blinkt

Punkte 0ber den Wochentagen 1, 2 und 4 stehen. "0" blinld.

Schritt-Taste (1

)

Zitfer'7" blinkt dr0ck6n, bis die

Taste 'Enter' (2) drock€n.

Etste Stelle der Stundenanzsige

'0" steht, die ileite blink mit "0"

Erste Stelle der Stundenanzeige

"0" steht, die ileite blinK mit "7"

Dle Stundenanzeige steht mit'07', dle erste Stelle der Minutenanzeige blinkt mit "0"

->

Schritt-Taste (1

)

Zlfler "3" blinK.

dr0cken, bls die

Taste 'Enter' (2) driicken.

Taste "Enter" dr0cken.

Schritt-Taste (1 ) dr0cken, bis die

Anzeige'ON' bei Schalter B blinkt

Schaltseit kontlolller€n.

Taste 'Enter" drUcken.

Zlllern"OT"

Slelle und'3" stehen, zweite d

Minutenanzeige blinkt "0"

Schaltzelt steht mit "07:30' und die

>\

Anzeige "ON' bei Schalter A blinK.

Wochentqge und Schaltz€it stehen, dle Anz. "ON" bei Schalter B blinkt.

\

Dle Schaltzeit ist gespeichert.

Punkt 1 (Montag) blinKfordie gabe der nachslen Schaltzeit.

Ein-

Weitere 15 Schaltungen konnen eingegeben werdsn

L. di6 PrMi.mmiar,"-a haaad6t

'LA-air atr ah,,alla6 W^.h66ta.

n

-1.

-1

LI I.J

3. Display the stored switching operations

(cover removed)

4 Cancel a programmed swilching time

(cover removed)

15 more swilching lunctions can be programmed switching time

When programming is finished, press MODE key (4), until indicator indicates "AUTO'

Actual time and day and the state of the channel switches are indi-

E,l?fl

;fl

',118 ll,,i l$i,,'8 i,fi for the switches A and B

"Jl% J' this day are indicated in full hours

"+

Press MODE key (4), until indicator remains over position"?"

Press TRANSPORT key ('l

)

Press TRANSPORT key (1 ) again

Press MOOE key (4), until indicator remains over position"?"

Press TRANSPORT key (1 ), until switching time to be cancelled is displayed index

Press

"CL'key

(3) ln the display only the indicator shows over "?'

Firsi switching time t. A is indicated

Next switching time is indicated

Switching times will be displayed in s€quence, separated lor A and B ln the display only the indicator showsover"?"

-

\

Selected switching time remains indicated lndicated time is cancelled. ln the display appears

"-:-" \

aaa a

o

5. Switch ON or OFF by hand (test)

(cover on)

6. Manual override state of switch

(cover on)

Press MODE key (4) again for position "AUTO" or tor "PR', if you want to replace cancelled input with new switching time lndicator over position 'AUTO"

Press 15 key lor switch

A or B lndicator over press t key position "AUTO", lor switch A or B

State ol switch is displayed.

oN or oFF changes in sequence

displa-yed

\,

Position ot switch will be changed from ON to OFF or OFF to ON. The next switching will be as programmed.

2

-l

I

U

I

7. Switch permanent ON or OFF

(cover on)

8

Cancel permanent ON or OFF

(cover on)

9. Changs time summer-winler

(cover removed)

10 Cancel all inputs. (reset)

(cover removed)

Picture without cover lndicator over position "AUTO"

Select permanent function ON

OFF

A or B and keep key depressed or with the HAND key for switch lor

3 seconds.

lndicator over position "AUTO"

Keep key lor adequate switch

A or B depressed for 3 seconds

Press MOOE key (4), index until indicator appears over symbol O

Press ENTER key (2) tw i c e.

Correct second digit actual hour using TRANSPOBT key (1 ).

Press ENTER key (2)

Press ENTER key (2) t w i c e

Press keys (1 ) and (4) together

Picture with cover

ON PEHM or OFF PERM appears in the display

I

l-r

ON

ON

PERM or OFF PERM

-* or OFF wlll be displayed.

Time and day ol week is indicated, day ol week ilashes.

- a

1 fi. ''l -l

l-

r-.1.

I

r

Point over day of week and first digit of hour indication remain, second digit of hour indication tlashes.

i

Both digits ol corrected nour indi- cation remain, lirst digil ot minute indication llashes.

)

Newtime is indicated, indicator has moved over position "AUTO".

All inputs are cancelled.

00:0O appears.

q---#;F

ntr.u l

IJ J. I J

e Jl*

Y

a

fl

I

Ringtaste (4) dr0cken, bis das

Zeichen 0ber "Auto" steht.

urlrd angezeigt. Der Schaltzustand der beiden Schalter A und B wird angezeigtir lm-Displiy werden Ober der Uhzeit- anzeige die for diesen Tag programmierten Schaltzeiten in vollen Std.

for die Schalter A und B angezeigt

*

aaa a

o

3. Kontrolle des Schaltprogramms

(ohne Deckel)

Ringtaste (4) drucken, bip das

Zeichen 0ber'?" steht. '

Schritt-Taste (1 ) drllcken.

Schritt-Taste (1 ) dr0cken.

4. Ldschen

(ohne einer Schaltreit

Deckel)

Ringtaste (4) drocken, bis das

Zeichen 0ber "?" sleht.

Schritt-Taete (1 ) dr0cken, bis die zu loschende Schaltzeit erscheint.

Taste "CL" (3) drocken.

Rlntaste (4) dr0cken l0r Positlon

"Auto" oder "Pr', wenn anstelle dar geloschten Schaltzeit efne andere

Schaltzeit programmiert werden soll.

Zeichen muB ubsr "Auto" stehen.

Taste

0

dr0cken.

IorschalterAoderB

Dle nachste Schallzeit wird angezeigt. Die Schattzeiten erscheinen in laulender ReihBntolge, sorliert nach den Schaltern A und

B.

lm Display erscheint nur das

Zeichsn 0ber "?".

Schaltzeit wlrd angezeigt u. steht.

Schaltzeit wird geloscht.

lm Display erschelnt "-:-"

5.

Testschaltungen EIN und AUS

(mit Deckel)

6. Schaltrustand endem

(mit Deckel)

Zeichen muB uber "Auto" stehen.

Taste

0

dr{lsken.

tairSchalterAoderB und

A oder B kann belisbig oft wsrden.

wird angezeigl.

\

Schalter wird von ON in

OFF oder uhgekehrt geschaltet. Mit der ndchsten programmierten Schaltung wird dieser Vorabbefehl

-Z wiedor aulgehoben.

lm Display erscheint "ON oder "OFF PERM"

..-*

7. Dauerschaltung EIN oder AUS

(mil Deckel)

8. Aulhebung der Dauerschaltung

(mlt Deckel)

-.10. Totalloschung

(ohne Peckel)

(Reset)

Abbildung ohne Osckel

Zeichen muB 0ber "Auto" stehen

Die gew0nschte Dauerschaltung

EIN oder AUS muB mit dem HandschalteY t0r Schalter A oder B angewehlt worden und die Tast€ muB l0r 3 Sekundon gedrockt gehalten werden.

Zeichen muB

0ber'Auto' stehen.

Taste f0r don entsprechenden

Schalter 3 Sekunden gedrockt halten.

9. Umstellung Sommer-

Wlnterz€it

Ringteste dr0cken, bls das Zolchon

(ohneDackol)

oberdemuhrensymbol

'Enter'-Ta3te

O

steht.

ilelmal drucksn.

Oauerschaltung wlrd eufgehoben oei Scrrariiiig;ni in oenirosra;mierton Schaltzustand.

Uhrzelt und Wochentag wird angozeigt und Wochentag

blinkt.

PunK 0ber dem Wochentag und die ercts Zitler dsr Stunden steht.

Die ilsitd bllnK.

\

Dle zwelto Stells der Stundenanz6ig€ mlt dor Schrttt-Taste auf dle

'Enter'-Taste drocken.

'Entsr'-TaBts zweimal drUcken.

Tasten (l

) drilcken.

und (4) gleichzeitig

Abbildung mit Deckel

Belde Zillern l0r die neue Stunden-2z7 anzeige stehen. Oie erste Ziffer der

Minutenanzelge bllnkt.

Die neue Uhzeit wird angezeigt.

Zeichen 0ber "Auto" steht.

-

Alls Spsichsr sind geloscht. lm

DlsDlay bllnK'00:00'.

e

t -l,ri tJ

I

e0

l

J

I

I

I -1,.u

I l': I t 1.:U

I t". I

aa

^

{l'

C

5:'r

e

l

l

Achtungl bei abgelaufener

Einige Zeit nach NetzanschluB alle 4 Tasten gemeinsam drocken. Damit wlrd das interne

Testprogramm gestartet. Nach Ablaul erscheint 00:00 n

INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS

JUNE 1983

DESCRIPTION:

The 342 is a

repeat

cycle timer with two

separately adjustable

MOS digital timing circuits, prewired

to provide

flip-flop

operation

of a

DPDT load relay. This

load relay may be

programmed

by

means

of

a moveable push-on connector and pins

on the circuit

board,

to

be energized during the timing cycle of either circuit.

The 342

also has cycle progress annunciation and six adjustable ranges

of

1 sec., 10 sec., 1 min., 10 min,

t

hr.

and 10 hrs. for each circuit.

DIMENSIONS:

INCHES

MILLIMETERS

{f-t

,arctes

#

3n rores t'1,

PNEL

\

"r"r*.^.

PANEL UP TO'1." nK

MOUNTING:

1. Cut out the

large mounting

hole

using

a 3%

inch

Greenlee punch.

2. Drill

the

5/32"

and 13/32" diameter holes as shown

on the

above drawing. lf

the

panel thickness exceeds

7116", these holes should be drilled and tapped for 6-32 and 318-24 threads respectively.

3.

Remove

the 342 from its

housing

and install

the gasket behind the

front

edge of the housing.

4. Slide the

housing

through the 3% inch

mounting hole and rotate

until

the edge marked

5. Bolt the

housing

"top"

is up.

to the

panel using

the

hardware supplied

with

the

timer.

Be sure

to

use the special studs

in the 13/32"

holes. These provide the threads

for

the

two

mounting bolts which go through

the

face

of

the timer.

2

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - 342 Flip-Flop

WIRING

)

= o o

F z o o o

F o

POWEB SUPPLY

OPERATION:

The 342 is a repeatcycle timer that operates continuously through its

two

timing ranges

(T1 and T2), one after the other, transferring

the

relay contacts as

it

times

out of

each range. There is no start

circuit

and the timer resets on power interruption.

The

first timing

range (T1

)

begins and the relay is energized when line voltage is applied

to

lhe Run terminals

of

the 342. The relay is deenergized when T1 times out

and

it remains deenergized

until T2

times out . . . at which time the relay is energized and the flip-flop cycle is repeated.

The pattern

of

relay operation can be reversed - deenergized during

T1

and energized during

a

push-on connector

from

one

pin

Tz

-by

changing

to

another

on

the circuit board; no wiring change is required.

During

the

timing cycles,

two pilot

lights provide cycle progress indication

in

the minutes and hours ranges, by blinking at an ever increasing rate as the cycle progresses.

This

blinking

pattern occurs every 3% seconds and will consist

of

one

"blink"

during the

first

1O% of the cycle,

two "blinks"

during the second 1tr/o

of

the cycle, three

"blinks"

during the

third

10% of the cycle, etc.

ln the 1 and 10

seconds ranges

the pilot light

is

off

before timing and steadily on during timing.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS - 342

FlipFlop

SPECIFICATIONS

Range

Six continuously adjustable switch-selected ranges

for

each

timing

10 min,

circuit: 1

sec,

10

sec,

1

min,

t

hr. 10 hrs

Minimum Setting

3%

of

range, except 50 ms on 1 sec range

Repeat Accuracy

tlYo of

setting

or

15 ms under constant voltage

(102 to

132V1

and

temperature

(75 to

150"F), increasing

to t5% with

changes

in line

voltage and ambient temperature

Timing Mode

Repeat cycle; resets on power interruption

Load Relay

Type:

Life:

Contact

Plug-in DPDT

100,000,000 operations

(no load) rating:

5A (resistive) at 120 or

240V AC

Pilot Lights

LED cycle

progress a rnunciator

for

each timing circu it.

Power Requi ements

120V

24OY

AC:

AC:

95

to

132V,50/60 Hz;

0.24

inrush; 0.044 running

190 to

264V,50/60

Hz;

0.1A inrush; 0.024 running

Temperatuie Rating

0'to

1So'F (-18" to 6E'C)

Housing

Plug-in design; DIN siz r 96 mm Xg6mm; dust and impactresistant plastic case

Mounting

Standard: hardware

is

provided

to mount timer

from front

of panel through

Optional cut-ou

:

bracket and

hardware

for

surface mounting NEMA

12

molded case

3

4

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS -

342

Flip-Flop

ORDERING CODE

342A200010Px

BASIC TYPE

RANGE

200 Multi-range

1 sec, l0sec,

'l

min, 10 min,

t

hr, 10 hrs

000

Special, use K in features

VOLTAGE AND FREOUENCY o

120150160

R

240/50160

K

Special, use K in features

ARRANGEMENTS

10

Reset on power failure

00

Special, use K in features

FEATURES

P

Basic plug-in timer

S

Surface mounted plug-in timer with

front

facing terminals

x

K

Standard Timer

Special

CT

G&CO

TROTS

K]NG OF PRUSSIA, PENNSYLVANIA 19406

Phone

(21$ 337-5500

Telex

84-6437 o division of Amerkon lVbnufocturing Compong

of

Leod ng

Controil

3o

ul

ons

EUROTHERNA

f:"

$

'V

I a

lf.tt

t

*

t:

a t

tri

I

I

6

rl

0c gt'!

lr'

,)

peroturc ond Plocess Contrro ers ndicotor ond Alorm Units

Products for ntegroted

So utions

Thermosensors

Technico t,,.,,.,,.,,,,91

.11'l'"

EUROTHERM

A

sing e source

of exper$frse*,*

The

Eurotherm Group, now a member of the Siebe plc is internationally recognised as a complete source of products for process and factory automation.

The Eurotherm Group represents five distinct areas of expertise in which we are acknowledged as a leading specialist.

Together they provide a unique combinarion of capabilities, which is strengthened by che global organisation of Siebe, to become one of the largest control companies

in

the world.

The Eurolherm

Group

EUROTHERM

EUROTHERM

CONTROTS

GHESSELT

Temperolure qnd

process

conlrollers, progrqmmers ond power conlrollers

EU

ROTH

E

RTI

DRIVES

ACIDC

molor

speed

controllers qnd inlegroted

speed systems

Chorl recording, moniloring, dolo ocquisition inslrumenls ond

syslems

EUROTHERTI

GAUG

NG

SYSTE'SS

Sheet

thickness meosuremenl ond conlrol

syslems

in exlrusion cooting

EU

ROTH ERTI

PROGESS

AUTOMAT ON lntegroled conlrol ond monogemenl

syslems

...right

scross

fhe

r

d.

A Slebe Group Gompany

CONTENTS

Temperolure

ond

Process

Control ers

Product Selection Guide

Series

2OOO

confiollers ond progrommers

Estoblished controllers

Softrnore utilities

ndicqtor ond A orm Units

Prcduct Selection Guide

t/32DlN

qnd

l/l6DlN

lndicolor qnd olqrm units

l/8DlN

lndicqtor ond olorm units

SEGTIOITI

SEGT

ON o o

Products for ntegroted 5o ufions

2500

T29q)

FC3000

Windows@

Gonft

gurorion so,fiworc

Wonderwore

Digitul Gommun cqlions nterfoce

Product Selection Guide

Single Phose

Three Phose

Communicoting

Accessories

Thermosensors

Thermocouples ond

RTD's

Conneclors

Wires ond Cobles

Selector Switch

SEGT

O

SECT

ON

SECT

O

Principles of PID Control ond Tuning

Thyristor Swirching Principles

Sensor Construction

Digitol Communicotions

Profibus Communicotions

SECT

ON

CE

lnsrollotion Guide

Troining Courses

After Soles Support

Yeor

2OOO

Slolement

o

EUROTHERM

\

Y Y o

D

SEGT

ON o nd cotor

ond A orm Un

ts

2 i

nd colors

Accurate measurement and display of temperature and other process variables are offered by four new models sharing the same styling, operation and confi guration

A universol input sotisfies mony opplicotions ond reduces spores holding

Versolile olorm hondling provides qlert qnd process protection operotor

All models ore plug-in under power, from the front ponel, enobling ropid replocemenl

Anologue retronsmission monitoring for remote process

The top-of-the-ronge mode! 2400 hos two sensor inputs for mox, min, overoge or difference meosuremenl

\

T V

It

I

I

o

SECT

ON Products for n groted Soluf ons

The

2500 provides accurate, secure control which can be physically distributed where the control is required.

DIN roil mounting

Plug-in UO

O

Self tune PlD, vB Coscode control

User wiring

t29

o o o o

The T2900

Mulri-setpoint

Programmer offers a colour touch screen as the interface to 0 versatilc Programmer.

The

T2900 is used

with

the 2500

DIN

rail controller and provides:

Mulfiple poromeler setpoints

,$ulriple digitol evenls

Progrom profile preview

Reol time trends

Logging to floppy disc

n

ows@

Gonf

gurot

on

Sof

ore

fi o sl

F H h-r F.oFr F r*

&DEl> tt iTools runs on Wndows@ 95, 9tl or

NT

personal computers and is designed to be used

with

rhe 2200,2400 series communicating controllers and the 2500

I)IN

raiI corrtroller.

Configure inslruments on-line or off-line

Copy ond clone inslrumenls

Automotic Modbus network seorch

ItrI_U

C\ c Ea..WIE Clbiri

!

\

I

I

SECT

ON

I

D

Products for ntegroted

So utions ef

fe

c ty

IerM

O

ntegroled Component-Bosed

MM

System nTouch'"

nControl'"

O

ndustrioISQL

Server'" o

leg

Contro of fhree

hnse es sl

ve

Loods

Compoct

unit

for

medium power

loods

Economicol

two

Ieg

swilching fhree

ose

So d

Stote Contoclor

Compocl three phose

conlrol

Advqnced

firing

mode

V V

I \

I

I

I

Eurotherm

&

Profibus-DP....\ /e can

offer connections

!

Profibus-DP

Slaves

240A1

24o41

Panel mounting PID temperature and

Process controllers.

For details please turn to page l-10

2500

For details please turn to page 3-2

TG300

r

For details please turn to page 4- I 6

REO

For details please turn to page 3-10

D..lac

ffirhdffi r n,loiaw

2

Prof

Conf

Windows@ based configurator which generates'GSD' files for importing by

Profibus-DP master configuration tool.

For details please tum to page l-25

To other Profibus-DP

Slaves

from

third parties

EUROTHERM

t

Terrpe,olu, e

\

a

I a

E

h ne

An enhanced timer offers five

different

operating modes including simple ramp-dwell programming, timed heatlng/cooling periods and delayed switch on

of

heating and cooling.

24g^ 44 cn

nsof

nu

An optional second thermocouple or

RTD input

allow's rhe 2408 and 2404 controllers to display and control the averuge, difference, minimum or maximum of two inputs.

It

can also be used for simple ratio control or to provide an automatic switchover to a standbv thermocouple

in

the event of a sensor break.

s

TI

This

PC based

utility will

provide fast set-up, secure storage and rapid cloning of Series 2000 controller configurations. controllers

It will

operate

with

all Series 2000 whether or not they have digital commu nications fi tted.

ufol ef

... ee

ng you

n

Gonlro

Temperoture

ond

Process

Contro ers

SECT

ON

I-

L.]

Ser

es

2OOO lemperolure ond Process Gonlro ers

2l

OO

Series

Compoct temperoture controllers

22OO

Mode

It&ode

Series

Generol

purpose temperoture controllers

4X

6

s

24(18

22OOL

/O4

1

l/.l6

DIN high stobility, progrommer/controller

/8

ond

1

/4

DIN high

Series

Fixed

build

controllers stobihty progrommer/controllers

t-4 t-6 t-8 r-ro t-12

.ti:

-a-__-__

Estob

shed

Gontro ers

o

el

9?e

&llodel

94

Mode

8OB

Model I

X

I

Mode

9A2

Model

9OOEPC

I

/.l6

DIN

controller

with o duol 4 digit

disploy

I

/B DIN

controller

with o duol 4 digit disploy

I

/8

DIN

controller

with o duol 4 digit

disploy

I

/4 DlN, high

stobility

progrommer/controller with

o dvol

4/, digit

disploy

I

/4 DlN, high

stobility

progrommer/controller with

o

duol4V digit

disploy

Duol

loop,

progrommoble process controller l.t 3

t.t

4 t-t6

r.r

8

tt.

20

22

er&q

Softurore Ut lit

es

IPSG lnstrument Progromming System

2 O /€on*ig

Series

2000 Configurotion

Stotion

Prof

Profibus Configurotor

t-24

t

-2|5 r -2,5

t

I

2132

I

&2116 2216L

2216

220,4

2204

9le

Simple hcollng ond roollng

Smoll oYcns, Chlllrlr,

fro:c

h ting

ltcrllrrrr

lnicrtion mouldlng

,

Plostics ond rubber

Solid

crtrusion

Wire

erlrusion

Iilm crtrusion,

Plpc

crlruglon

Iood ond brewing

Blending, Boklng

Rcfrlgcrotion

Iermcnlolion

ond

poslcurlrdion

lleoting ond yentilolion

Gos

burnu

ond boilcr ronlrol rE

94

808/809

Pene

S

ze lmml

Depcy

hog

mmer

ilctodccd

Yolve Gonlrcl

D

gllc

Gcmmun ccl cns

DC

Relrommisclon

Remole Setpolnt nput

PcAe Referenco

48x24

48x48

48 x

48

48 x

48 48x96

96 x96

48 x96

48

x96

4 disir

4 disir

4 digit

4 disii

4 disit

4 disir

4 disir

o o o

O

O O

a o

O

a

1-4 t -13

1-2

t-6

1-6

t-6

1

-14

r-r6

Temperolure

qnd

Process Contro ers

2416 2404 2404

818

902

900EPC

lleol lreolncnt

Ovens ulnoacs

o o o

48x48

48x96

4 disit

4 disir

o

O

r-8 a o l-r0 o o

Ceromirs ond brirks

Driers lfilns

Gloss

teltlng

furnoree

Iorch

rths lehrs

96x96

4 disit

O

o o

O

O

t-r0

Aerospote ond Aulomotlvc

Corburidng

lurnorcl

Crccp

totl rg

nYlronmenlol chomberc, Autorlmor ngine

tert

beds, lnfro-rcd pelnl

Semironduclor

Crystcl growlng

Dlflusion

ilolcrulor

beom

epitory

Chemiro! ond Phornorculirol

Reotlion vessels

Iermenlers

Prossure,

IIow, lcvcl, Pt

rontrol

96x96

41A

dig*

O

o o o o

r -18

96x95

41tz digit

o o a o o

1-20

l-3

96

x96

5 dislt

o o a o o

1-22 t).

.1.

T

t

Temperoture

ond

Process Contro

ers

I efes

ef r

e m

ro

efs deo for:

t

v t

Smoll ovens

Chillers

Sterilizers

Trqce

heoting

Heol

seo

ing

Available in compact U32 and 1/16

DIN

panel sizes, the 2100 series uses advanced PID algorithms to give stable 'straight line' temperature control.

Self tuning is included to optimise the control performance

without

the need for specialist knowledge or training.

.\

rrnirclsrLl inprrr allows selection of nine internally stored thermocouple types and the Pt100 resistance thermometer. Other

input

linearisations may be factory downloaded. Linear inputs can be scaled to the desired display range.

'l\r o ou tl'rrrts are configurable for heating, cooling or alarms.

'l'hrcc

irrrcrnrrl rrlrrrnr scrPoints are provided, configurable as high, low or deviation alarms. Alarms can be 'blocked' on start-up to prevent unnecessary operator alerts.

I lcirtcr tiriltrrc can be detected when the controller is used

with

a

TEI0S

Solid State Relay.

'lrrcrilc buttons ensure posirive operation.

-l'he o[)crrrtor inre rircc can be customised to present only those parameters that an operator needs to see and adjusr, while all other parameters are locked away under password protection.

Model

Model

2132:48W x 24H x I03D mm

2116:48W x 48H x

I

03D mm

Specificotions

Conlro mcdes:

PID or

OnlOff

Supp y vohoges:

85 -264Yoc, 5.Owotts moximum

20-29Yoc or dc, 5.Owotts moximum

Operctlng cmblenl:

0-55'C, 0-90%RH non-condensing

npuls:

Nine stondord thermocouple types.

Pt

l00.

4-2OmA lineor. Custom input ovoiloble

Output

rcl

ngs:

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resistive

Logic: 9Vdc, 18mA

Pone sec ing:

1P65, NEMA 4X, plug-in from front ponel

Dcto sheel:

HA026r 58

Romp-dwell progromming

Simple heat treatment profiles can be programmed using the

inbuilt

setpoint ramp generator and dwell timer.

Tenrperoiure

Dwe time

Setpoi nl

Ronrp

Tinre

1-4

i

I

I

Reor

lerm no

conncclions

Erlerna

Bera!

tu4odu e

,IB

'IA

OH

Solid

Slale

Belay

(Logic)

18

1A

V-

V+

I/C

Pil 00

L]

.o

"0",

I

l

249

Seils0r rfDUl5

Model 2132

r)

ABAANL

a2

Neul al

Lrnc

35 264Vr.

20 2gvr0idc

24

24

Loi. i o tige s!Dp !

Ordefng

codes

Exleau

Relav i\4odu e

-1A

-.lB

OF

Solid

Slals

Relay llodei

Nilmber

Supply

Vollage

0utpul lLoqic)

1

IVanlal

IIIIIIITTIII

Sensor ln|)rl Min

Low volla0e supply

Model 21

.15

output

1

24

A+

L L ne

85 264Vac

Neiltral

?_

r

AA

AB

N

0ulpul

2

L

RelJ,/)

V+ vil

I,/C PT

OO

J

24

249

20-29Vactdt

Setsor fpLts lJn'ls trl

SelaV

Modille

21XZ 1132 DIN Controller

2116

1116 0lN Controller

Function

CC PID Controller llF

0n/otf Controller

TC

PID Controller +

Til

0n/0tf Contr' + Timer

Supply Voltage

VH 85-264Vac

VL

20-29V dc or ac

Manual xxx

ElIG

FBA

GEB ilED

SPA

SWE

IIA

No manual

English

French

German

Dutch

Spanish

Swedish

Italian

XX No lunction

Logic output

LH

Heating

[C

Cooling

Ml

PDS heater break detect (note

1

)

FH High alarm

1

FL

Low alarm

1

DB

Dev band alarm

1

DL

Dev low alarm

1

0H

Dev, hlgh alarm

1 t{W New alarm

Logic lnpul

AC Alarm acUreset l(L

Keylock

TM Trmer 0fl/0n

0utput 2 (Relay) xx

FH

RC

No funct on

Heatrng

Coolrng

FH tt

AL

Hrgh alarm 2

Low alarm

Hrgh alarm

2

2&low alarm 3

08

Dev band alarm 2

DL D6v low alarm 2

0H Dev high alarm 2

NW New alarm

Eromple ordedng code

2132. CC. vil.

EilA -

fi

.

RC.

l.

0

- tOO0 - C

- XX - XX

Sensor lnpul

S

B

P z

R

t

T

N

J

K

Standard Sensor lnpuls

J

Ie rm ocou ole ermocouole ermocouDle le-Nicrosili Nisil rermocouole-Pt/Pt1 3%Rh rm0c0u rm0c0u

)te-Pt i Pt10%Hh

)le-PUPt3U%Hh

-6%Hh nel ll Thermocouple

RTD/PT1O(] DIN 43760 c

D

E rm0c0u

Be

1

2

3

Hh Ihermocouole n0elnar0)

I netmocouole

Y

A v

4

5

6 loskins) ThermocouDle

6Re lEnoelhard) ThermocouDle

He {tsucose)

I hermocouole

I

7 ,Rh Thermocouole pyrometer

Process lnputs (Scaled to setpoint min and max)

M

-9.99 to +80mV linear

0 to 20mA linear

4 to 20mA linear

0 to

1 ovdc linear

Min

'C

-210

:201)

-ZOU

-200

-200

-5U

-5U

U

Max

1

200

13/2

4UU

900

1

300

't

/6E

'I

/6U

I 6ZU

-200

Mn 'c

850

Max

U

U

0

1U

U

200

Min

'C

1

999

Max

9999

-1 999 9999

-1999

9999

1

999 9999

'16/u

ZUUU

201 0

23ot)

2UUU

1

800 ljn ts

C

Celsius

F

Fahrenheit

K

Kelvin

X

Linear input

Ext. Relay Modrle

XX Notfitted

R7 Fitted (0perated by the logic output) lnput Adaplor xx

Notfitted

Vl

0-1ovdc

Al

0-20mAor4-20mA

01%currentsense resistor (2 4gfr)

Note

1

Note 2

PDS heater break lransmit the detect will power demand to a TEl0S Solid State

Relay end read back a healer break alarm.

Setpoint min and max : lnclude the decimal points required in the displayed value. Up lo one lor temperature inputs, up to two lor process inputs.

2132, Controller, 85 to 264vac, English manual, Logic heating, Relay cooling,

Type K thermocouple, 0 tol 000'C, no options

I-5

Temperoture

qnd

Process Contro

ers

ef

es ef fe f es

deo for:

Exlrusion -

fon,

Ovens

qnd

furnqces

Gold

slores with optim

sed

woler or oil cool

ng

Available

in

U76, U8 and

l/4 DIN

panel sizes the

2200 series are configurable for PID, On/off or motorised valve control - satisfiring both electrical and gas heating applications. Self-tuning is included to optimise concrol performance.

Modular heating and cooling outputs are provided, plus one or two alarm relay outputs.

The

1/8 and

ll4

DIN

units have two digital inputs to select auto/manual transfer, standby mode, second setpoint or alarm acknowledge.

Thel/4 DIN

model 2ZO4 has an additional 10 amp high current output option.

Digital communications

with

industry standard protocols are available for easy connection to supervisory control and data logging systems.

SimPlc hcrrt trcatnrcnt pnrtilcs can be programmed

' using the internal ramp generator and dwell timer.

Tempero'lure 'time

Dwell k__-_l

Selpoint 2 - -

Model 2216:48Wx48H x l03D mm

Model

Model

2208:48W x 96H x l03D mm

2204:96Wx 95H x l03D mm

Spec

ficotions

Gontro modeg:

PlD, On/Off or motorised volve conlrol

Supply vo lcAe:

85 -264Yoc, I O.Owotts moximum

Ope

tlng omb enl:

0-55"C, 0-90%RH non-condensing

npule:

See sensor inputs in the configurotion coding

Oulput

I

nge:

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resislive

Logic: l8Vdc, 20mA

Trioc: 1A, 264Yoc resislive

DC: lsoloted 0-20mA, ot l2Vdc

Pcne ceo ng:

Model 221 6:1P65, NEMA 4X (plug-in)

Model2208/2204: lP54

Dolo cheetg:

HA025546 (22161

HAO2sss2 (22081

HA025s58 (22041 a o

Ronrp

Setpoint

1

Time

Abolish arrnrctcrs using Eurotherm's'PDS' current monitoring faciliry. Heater current may be displayed and open and short circuit faults detected.

PDS con

2-wire neclion

TEI

OS

Solid

Stote Reloy

+

Model 2216

[.

o

,;li

f

?

Model2208/2204

The I 0A output for the

Model 2404 is wired to odditionol terminols 4A through to 6D.

o lr

AC

a

r-6

Order

ng codes

Funclron

Sulrply

Vollaqe

0[lpul

2

IITIIIEffiII

0illpul 4

0

Co nr ms l\lanual

Model Number

Phasc 1 Controllers

22t6

1/'16 DIN Controll€r

2208

1/8 DIN Controller

22lll

1/4 DIN Controller

Phase 2

2A6e

Controllors'

'1116

DIN Conlroller

22080 1/8 DIN Controller

2An4o 1/4 DIN Controller

Function

CC PID Conlrol l{F 0n/off control

VG Motorised Valve control'

AL

Alarm unit'

Supply Voltage

UH

85-264vac

*

Phase 2 controllerc are required for valve positioning oulputs, the phase 2 communications options and any feature marked with an'.

0utpul

1

XI

Notfrtted

Relay: 2-pln

Rl

Fitted unconligured

FH

Heating output

BU Valve raise output'

FH High alarm

FL

Low alarm

1

'1

DB Dev band alarm

1

DL

Dev low alarm

1

Dll oev high alarm

1

Io0iG

L1

Fitted unconfigured

LH

Heating output tll

PDS heater break detect (note

1 ) ll2

PDS curent

Triac monatorano (note 2)

T1

ft

TU

0c

D3

H6

H7 c6 cl

Fitted unconfigured

Heating output

Valve raase output control (lsolalsd)

Fitted unconfigured

0-20mA PID heatinq

4-20mA PID heat nO

0-20mA PID

4-20mA Pl0 cool ng cool ng

0ulpul 2

XX Notfitted

Rolay: 2-pln

R1

Fitted unconfigured

RG Cooling output

FH Heating output

RW Valve lower

FH

Hlgh alarm 2 output'

FL

Low alarm

2

00

Dev band alarm 2

DL

Dev lowalarm2

0H

Dev high alarm 2

AL

High & low alarms

1&2

Logic outpul

Ll

Fitted unconfigured

LC

CoolinO output

LH Heating output

Logic input

'

Ai{

Auto manual select

S2

Setpoinl 2 select

AC Alarm acldreset

EH lntegral hold

SB Standby mode

8B

PDSIo remote SP sel ils

CTX mode 5 current liP

Triac

T1

TC

TH

TW

Fitted unconfigured

Cooling oulpul

Heating output

Valve lower output

0ulpul 3 0ut|)ul

4

)q

Notfitted

Relay

RF Fitted unconfigured

BH PID heating

RC

FH

FT

DB

DL

PID cooling

High alarm 3

Low alarm 3

Dev band alarm 3

Dev low alarm 3

Dev high alarm 3 DH

AT High & low alarms

3&4

PDS Alarms

Lt

Heater break detect

HF

Current monitoring heater break

SF Current monitorin0

SSB failure

XX Nottitted

RelaI

RF

Fitted unconligured

Bll

Pl0 heatino

RC

PID cooling

FH High alarm 4

F[

Low alarm 4

DB Deu band alarm 4

DL

Dev low alarm 4

DH Dev high alarm 4

A[

High & low alarms

PDS

3&4

Alams

LF

Heater break detect

HF Cutrent monitoring heater break

Sf

Current monitoring

SSR Iaihrre

Nole

1

PDS heater break detecl will transmit lhe power demand signal lo aTE10S

Solid State Relay and read back a

Note heater break alarm.

2.

PDS current monitoring will transmit the power demand signal to a TE10S

Solid State Relay and read back load current and open and short circuit alarms.

10 Amp 0ulpul

U

Notfitted

B5

Fitted

Comms

Phasc 1 Conlrollels l)fi

Notlitted lYt[

[Iodbus 2-wire R5485 lBS

PDS Setpoint input

Phass 2 Conlrollers.

zXX Notfitted

Modbus prolocol zYM 2-wire RS485

2Ft[ 4-wire RS422

24il

RS232

El-Blsynch pmtocol zYE 2-wire 8S485 zFE 4-wire RS422

2AE RS232

PDS input zRS Setpoint input

ManI al nx

E[G

FRA

GER

IIED

SPA swE tTt

No manual

English

French

German

Dutch

Spanrsh

Swedish llalian

0mit for

2216

0mit for

2216

Note 3 Note 3

B

P z

H s

Slandard Sensor lnputs

J l(

T

L ll

J

L

)le e

)le-Nicrosil/Nisil rle-PUPI'13%Rh e-Pt /Pfl0%Rh te-PVPt30%Rh -6%Rh

Platinel ll

G

D rle

- w3%He/w25%He

Y

A w

G

U

E

1

2

I

3

5 le

hermocouple

)%Rh

Thermocouple

:n0lehard)

I herm0c0uDle ioskins) ThermocouDle

,Re

(Enqelhard) ThermocouDle

I

6

I

Process

F

,Re (Bucose) Thermocouple

,Hn

I nermocouDle pyrometer hpuh

(Scaled to setpoint min and max)

-100 to +100mV linear

0 to 20mA linear

4

0

1

0 to 20mA linear to svdc to svdc to 10vdc

linear linear linear

Selpoinl

Min

Min

"C

-210

-200

-200

-zUU

-200

-50

-50

U

Selpoint

Max

Mar

1

200

1372

400

9UU

1

300

1

768

'1768

'1820

Min "C

lvlar

0 2399

10

0 il

0

1399

0

1870

2U00

201 0

2300

0

ZUU

2000

,I

EUO

Min

'c Mar

-999

9999

-999

9999

-999 9999

-999

9999

-999

9999

-999

9999

D ispla y tinits

C

Celsius

F

Fahrenheit

l(

Kelvin

I

Linear input

Digital lnput 1 & 2

XX

No function

AIf

Manual select

SR PDSI0 Remote setpoint select

S2 Second setpoint

EH lntegral hold

AG Alarm acknowledge

SB Standby mode

IllS CTX mode 5 current inDUt (inDUt 1 onlv)

Note

3.

Setpoinl limits: lnclude the decimal points required in the displayed value Up to one lor tempe@lure inputs, up to two tor process inputs

Eromple ordedng ccde

0pti ons

Contlol actio1l

XX

Reverse acting (std)

DP Direct acting

Power leedback

XX Enabled on logic, relay & triac heating outputs

PD Feedback disabled

Cooling options

XX Linear cooling

CF Fan cooling

GW Water coolino

2206. CC. W - U . rE

.

fl

.

tt

.

rtn. ile

- f..

o.

t000 . c

-

tI.

II.

t

2208, Controller, 85 to 264vac, Logic heating, Tiac cooling, Low alarm relay,

High alarm relay, R5485, Modbus comms, English manual,

Upe tol000"C, Digital inpul

1 no function, Digilal input 2 no tunction, reverse acting, power feedback enabled, linear cooling

K lhermocouple,

O

1-7

Temperolure

ond

Process Contro

ers ffe ef le/ l cess f ef

deo for:

Single

qnd

multi-zone qnd

furnqces ovens

Cerom

c

ond

br ck kilns

Env

ronmentql chombers

The

2416 is a high stability controller

with

a wide range of options. Either

PID,

On/off or motorised valve control can be configured - satisfuing both electrical and gas

heating

applications. Dual

PID

settings and advanced 'one-shot' and continuously adaptive tuning algorithms are available to optimise control performance.

Plug-in modules provide outputs for heating, cooling and analogue retransmission.

Itrur

setpoinr prosrrrms can be stored

with l6

rampdwell segments and three event outputs per program.

Temperoture

48W x 48H x l50D mm

Spec

ficotions

Gonlro modeg:

PlD, On/Off or molorised volve conlrol

Suppty voltoge:

85-264Yoc, I 0wotts moximum

2O-29Yoc/dc, I 0wotts moximum

Operotlng lmblonts

0-55"C, 0-90%RH non-condensing

npulr:

See Sensor lnputs in the Configurotion coding

Oulput rotlnga:

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resistive

Logic: 18Vdc, 20mA

Trioc: 1A, 264Yoc resislive

DC: 0-20mA, or 0-1OVdc configuroble

Pcne

rec

ng:

1P65, plug-in from fronl ponel

Doto rheets:

HA025554 (Controller)

HAO25556 (Progrommer)

Evenl I

Event 2 off on

Time

I

ligh

spcccl cligital conrmunicltions

with

industry standard protocols allowing easy connection to supervisory control and data logging systems.

\lulti-zorrc

progranrn.tir.tg can be implemenred

using'PDS'

retransmission to deliver a master setpoint to up to three slave controllers

with

holdback from any slave

if

the temperature deviates from the setpoint by more rhan a set value.

IA

]B

2A

Modu e 2

2B

3A

Module 3

3B

HA

HB

HC

C o

HC

S

HF

HF

L

N

E

VI

/c

Lrne

Neuirol

Eo dh

PT] OO

Abolish ammeters using Eurotherm's

'PDS' current monitoring faciliry. Heater current may be displayed and open and short circuit faulm detected.

PDS 2-wire conneclion

TEIOS

Solid

Stole Reloy

t-8

Order

ng coder

2416

Slandard Pl0 Gontrol

GC Controller only

CG lxBsegProgram

GP lx16segProoram

Pa

4 x 16 seq Program

0n/0fl Conlrol lF

Controller only l{G I xSsegProqram llP I x l6 seg Program ll'l

4 x 16 seg Program

Jtlolorissd value control

VC Controller only

VG lxSseoProgram

VP

1 x 16 seg Program

V4 4xl6segProgram

Supply Voltage

VH 85-264vac

VL

20-2gvac/dc n

None

Belay: 2-pin

R2 Fitted unconfigured

RH HeatinO output

BU Valve raise output

FH

High alarm

'l

FL

Low alarm

1

DB Dev band alam

1

0L Dev low alarm

1

DH Dev hiqhalarm

1

Logic

L2

Fitted unconfigured

LH Heatino output l[1

PDS heater break detect (nole

1

)

M2

PDS curent monitoring (note 2)

Triac

T2

Fitted unconfiqured

TH Heatrng output

TU

Valve raise output

DC control (ilon-isolaled)

02

Frtted unconligured

Hl

0-20mA PID heating

H2 4-20mA PID heating

H3

0-5V PID heating

H4

1-5V PID heatrng

HS 0-10V PID heatrno

XX

None

Rolay:

2-pir

R2 Fitted unconfigured

RC Cooling outpul

RW Valve lower output

FH

High alarm 2

FL

Low alarm 2

00

Dev band alarm 2

DL Dev low alarm 2

DH oev high alarm 2

P0

Program event

1

(not with 8-seg programme0

PE

Program END output

Logic

LZ Fitled unconfioured

LC Cooling output

Triac

T2

Fitted unconfigured

TC

Coolinq output

TW Valve lower output

DC control (ilon-isolaled)

D2

Frtted unconfrgured

Cl

0-20mA Pl0 coolinq

C2 4-20mA PID cooling

C3 0-5V PID cooIng

C4

1-5V PID cooling

CS 0-l0V PID cooling

Module 3

XX None

Felay: 2-pin

R2

Fitted uncontigured

FH High alarm 4

FL

Low alarm 4

DB Dev band alarm 4

DL oev low alarm 4

DH oev hrgh alarm 4 nA

Rate ot change alarm

P0

Program event 2

(nol with 8-seq proq

PE Proqram END output

PDS Alarms

)

Hf

Current monrtoring heater break

SF Cutrent monitoring

SSF lailure

Iogic

L2

Fitted unconligured

Triac

T2

Fitted unconfigured

DC relran (Non-isolated)

D2

Frtted unconligured

Frrsl character

V-

PV retrans

8-

Setpoint relrans

0- output retrans

Z-

Etror rekans

Second character

-1

0-20mA

-2

4-20n4

-3

0-5V

-1

1-5V

-5

0-10v

Comms Manual

I

None

2 wire, RS485

Y2

Fitted unconfigured

Yiil lvlodbus protocol

YE El-Bisynch protocol

8S232

A2

Fitted unconligured

AJtl lilodbus protocol

AE

El-Bisynch protocol

4 wire, 8S422 f2

Fitted unconligured

Fil

Modbus protocol

FE El-Bisynch protocol

PoS lnpul il6

Fitted unconfigured

RS Setpoint input

PoS 0ulput

M7 Fitted unconfigured

PT

PV retrans

TS

Setpoint retrans

0T

0utput retrans xxx

EIIG

FRA

GER ilED

SPA swE

ITA

No manual

EnOlish

French

German

Dutch

Spanish

Swedish

Italian

Note 1.

PDS heater break detect will transmit the power demand signal to a TEl 0S

Solid State Belay and read back a

Note heater break alarm.

2

PDS current monitoring will transmil the power demand signal lo aTE10S

Solid State Relay and read back load currenl and open and short circuit alarms.

Note 3 Note 3

Sensor lnput

L il

B s

P z

J x

Slandard Sensor lnpuls

J Thermocouple

K Thermocouple

T

B

T Thermocouple

L Thermocouple

N Thermocouple-Nicrosil/Nisil

R Thermocouple-PUft

1

3%Rh

S Thermocouple-Pt /Pt1 0%Rh

B Thermocouple-PVPI30%Rh -6%Rh

Platinel ll Thermocouple

RTD/PT1

OO

DIN 43760

Downloaded c

D

E

3

4

1

2

5

6

7 Pr1

0%Rh/Pr40%

E pyrometer

Process lnputs (Scaled to setpoint min and max)

F

-100 to +100mV linear

Y

A w

0 to 20mA linear

4 to 20mA linear

0 to svdc linear

G v

1 to SVdc linear

0 to

1

OVdc linear

Setpoi nl

Mn

Selpoi nt

Max

Min

'C

-210

Max

1200

-200 1372

-200 400

-200

900

-250

1300

-50

1

768

-50

1

768

0

0

1

820

0

1369

-200

Min

'C

850

Max

231

I

0 2399

-270

1000

0

1

399

'1870

0

10

0

0 2000

2010

2300

0

200

-45

Min

'C

-1 999

-1 999

-'1999

-1 999

-1 999

-1 9S9

2UUU

1

800

650

Mar

9999

9999

9999

9999

9999

9999

Display

Units

C

Celsrus

F

Fahrenhert

(

Kelv n

X

Blank

Nole 3

Selpoint limits: lnclude the decimal points required in lhe displayed value

Up to one for lemperature inputs, up to two lor process inputs

0ptions

Control aclion

XX

Reverse acling (standard)

DP Direct acting

Pouer leedback

XX

Enabled on logic, relay and tnac heating outputs

P0

Feedback disabled

Cooling options

XX

Linear cooling

CF

Fan coollng

CW Water cooling

CL 0il cooling

C0 0n/otf cooling

Fronl panel butlons

XX

Enabled il10 Aulo/manual drsabled

Mn Auto/man & rufl/hold disabled

B0

Bun/hold drsabled

Programmer limin0

XX Ramp and dwell in mitrs

HD Dwelltime if hours

HB Ramp rale in units/hour

Ernmp e order ng code

2416. CC. Yil

. t

t.

RC. tU. ft.

ilA. t.0

.

1000 . c.

xI

. xx. xt.

. xx

2416. Conlroller, 85 lo 264vac, Logic heating, Belay cooling, High alarm relay,

R5485, Modbus comms, English manual, type K thermocouple, 0 to1000"C, butlon disabled

Manual

t-9

Temperolure

qnd

Process Contro

ers

ef te/

J CeSS f efs deo for:

Single

qnd furnqces mu qnd l

ki

-zoh€

ns

ovens,

Env

ronmentq chqmbers

S

mp

e

rql

o &

cqscqde

conlrol

Model 2408:48W x 96H x l50D mm

Model 2404:96W x 96H x l50D mm

Specificotions

Available

in

1/8 and 1/4

DIN

panel sizes , the 2408 and 2404 are high stability controllers

with

an extensive range of options. Either

PID,

on/off or motorised valve control can be configured, satisffing both electrical and gas heating applicarions. Advanced 'one shot' and continuously adaptive tuning are available to optimise control performance.

The

controllers accept a rur.3e of plug-in modules for heating, cooling, analogue retransmission, second process value

input

and remote setpoint.

lligh

spced \loclbtrs.

l'lLOFlllL

S

ancl.\S(lll

communications provide easy connection to PLCs, supervisory control and data logging systems.

20 scrpoint l)rogranrs can be stored

with

16 rampdwell segments and eight event outputs.

Ternperoture

Gonho moder:

PlD, On/Off or motorised volve conlrol

Supply vo loge:

85-264Yoc,'l Swotts moximum

20-29Yoc/ dc, I 5wotts moximum

Ope

tlng cmb ent:

0-55'C, 0-90%RH non-condensing

npulr:

See Sensor lnputs in the Softwore code

Output

t

ng3s

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resistive

Logic: 18Vdc, 20mA

Trioc:

lA

264Yoc resislive

DC: 0-20mA or 0-lOVdc configuroble

Pone reo lng:

1P54, plug-in from fronl ponel

Doto gheelc:

2408 Controller: HA025570

2408 Progrom mer: HAO2557 2

2404 Controller: HAO2557 6

2404 Progrommer: HA025578

Profibus Control lers: HAO2629

1

Event I

Event 2 on

Abolish ammeters using Eurotherm's'PDS' current monitoring facility. Heater current may be displayed and open and short circuit faults detected.

PDS 2-wire connectron olf on

Time

IEIOS

Solid

Stote Reloy dA

IB

5C

5D t0A

Oulpul

68

IB tc

ID

2A.

?B

]."r

C o

HC f -

Pl

S

ttl

l-t F

20

3A

3B

3C

Modole 3

3D l8 c o

]D

S

2

]E t

Lne

!

N

Eo rrh

IB

Dq n2 tC

AB

Re oy

AC

1-10

Order

ng codeo

0mit lor

2408

Model Number

2400 1/8 0lN Conkoller

2404 1/4 DIN Controller

240E1 1/8 DIN Profibus

Controller

24011 1/4 DIN Profibus

Controller

Standard PID conlrol

CC Conlroller

CG lxgsegProg

CP 1 i'16 seg Prog

P4

4 x 16 seo Proo

Cl[

20 x 16 seg Prog'

0n/oll Conlrol

IF

Controller only llc lxSseoProg

IP

1 x 16 seg Prog l{4

4 x 16 seg Prog f,il

20x16segProg' lllotorised

YalYe conlrol

UC Valve positioner

UB '1 x

I seo Prog

UP

1 x 16 seg Prog

V4

4 x

'16 seg Prog

Ull

20 x 16 seo Proq'

Suppl\, Voltaqe

VH 85-264vac

UL

20-29Uacldc

'Not available wilh profibus controllers

Module

1 u

Nor litted

Relay: 2-pin

82

Fitted unconfigured

BH Heating output

FU

Valve raise output

Belay: change ovel

B4

Filted unconfigured

YH Heating output

Or alarm I lrom lable A

Logic:

(Ion-isolaled)

L2

Fitted unconligured

LH Healino output il1

PDS healer break detect (note

1 ilz

PDS current

) monitoring (note 2)

Triac

T2

Filted unconligured

TH

Heating oulpul

TU Valve raise output

0C control (lsolatsd)

D4

Fined uncontiqured

HO 0-20mA PID heatino

H7 4-20m4 PID heatino h0

0-5V PID healing

H9 '1 -5V PID heatin0

HZ

0'10V PID heating

Digilal U0 (unconligured)

TI

Triple contact input

TL

Triple logic inpul

TP

Tripl€ logrc output

Dual relay

RR Fitted unconligured

8D

Heat + Cool

8il

VP raise & lower oPs

Dual lriac

TD

Heat + Cool

Til

VP raise & lower oPs

Logic+rclay

LD

Heat + Cool

Dual logic+lriac

GD

Heal + Cool

Module 2

XX Notfitted

FelaI: 2-pin

E2

Fitled unconfigured

RC Cooling output

RW Valve lower output

Relay: change ovot

B4

Fined unconfigured

YC Coolinq oulpul

P0

Program ev€nt

1

(not wilh 8-seg programmer)

PE Program EN0 output

Or alam 2 lrom

Dual relay lable A

RB Fitted unconligured

PP Program events 1 & 2

Logic

L2

Fitted unconli0ured

LC

Cooling output

IJiac

T2

Fitted unconligured

TC

Cooling output

TW Valve lower output

DC conkol (lsolaled)

04

Fined unconligured

CG 0-20mA PID cooling

C7

4-20mA PID cooling

C8

0-5V PID cooling

Cg 1-5V PID coolino

CZ 0-10V PID cooling

Digital l/0 (uncontigured)

Tl(

Triple contact input

TL

Tnple logac inpul fP

Triple logic oulpul

Power supply ils

24Vdc transmitter

0C relran (lsolaled)

Selecl kom Table B

Polentiomeler input

VU Fitted unconli0ured

VS

Valve posihon leedback

VR

SetDoint rnDut

Module 3

I

Nolfined

Belay'.z-gi{I.

82

Fitted unconligured

Belay: change oYor

R{

Fatted unconfioured

P0 Pro0ram event 4

(not wilh 8-seq programmer)

PE

Proqram END output

Or alarm 3 lrom lable A

Logic

L2

Fitted unconligured

Itiac

T2

Fitted unconfigured

Dual r€lay

FB Fitted unconli0ured

PP Program evenl 4 & 5

Digital l/0 (unconfigured)

TX

Triple contact input

TL

Triple logic input

TP

Triple logic output

Powor supply tS

24vdc transmitter

DC remole input

05

Fitted uncorfigured

W2 4-20mA setpoint

W5 0-10V selpoint

WP S€cond PV input

DC retEn. (lrolaled)

Sel@l lrom Table B

Polrntiomrler lnpul

Vl, Fittedunconligured

VE Valve position feedback

VR Setpoint input

Alarm relay

XX

Nol titted

Alarm 4 lolay

BF Fitted unconti0ured

Table A alarm options plus:

Bl

Rate of change alarm

PDS Alams

LF

Heater break detect

Hf

Cutrent monitoring heater break

EF

Cutrent monitoring

SSH lailure

P0

Program event 7

(not with 8-seg prog)

PE

Prooram END outout

1

0amp Oulpul

XX

Not fitted

Bi

Fitted uncontig

FH PID heatinq

Tatle A: alarm codoa

FH

Hioh alarm

FL

Low alarm

DB Dev band alarm

DL

Dev lowalarm

DH Dev high alarm

DO Fitted unconfiOUred

First character

U-

PV relrans

8-

Setpoinl relrans

G output retrans

Z- Efiotrclfans

Second character

-1

0-20mA

-?

-3

4-20m4

0-5V

-4

't-5V

-5

0-10v

Comms

1

XX

Not titted

2 rire.

R$485

Y2

Fined unconrigured

Yil

Modbus protocol

YE El-Eisynch prolocol'

8S232

12

Fined uncon,ioured

Af,

Modbus protocol

AE

El-Bisynch protocol'

4 uira 85422

FZ Fitted unconfigured

FI

Modbus protocol t[

El-Bisynch prolocol'

PDS 0ulpul lf,

Fitted unconfigured

PT

PV relrans

Tt

Setpoint relrans

0T output relrans

Prollbu! ilodole

PB

High speed 85485

Comms

2

XX tloltifled

PDS lnput

116 Fitted unconligur€d

Bg

Setpoint input

PDS out0ul f,

Fitted uncontigured

PT

PV relrans fE

Setpoint retrans

0T outDut relrans

Ma nua

I

m

EXG

FBA

GER

XED

EPA twt lll

No manual

English

French

G€rman

Dutch

Spanish

Swedish

Italian

Note 1. PDS heater break delecl will transmit the power demand signal to a

TEI0S Solid State

Relay and read back a healer break alarm

Note

2. PDS current monitoring will transmit lhe power demand signal to a

TElOS Solid State

Relay and read back load current and open and shorl circuit alarms

Note 3- Selpoint limils: lnclude lhe decimal poinls required displayed in lhe value Up to one lor temperalure inputs, up to two fot process inputs.

Note 3 Note 3

Sensor lnput

5

6

3

4

1

2 c

D

P z

R s

T

t

J t(

Slandard Sensor lnpuls

J Thermocouple

K Thermocouple

T Thermocouple

L Thermocouple

1{

N Thermocouple-Nicrosil/Nisil

B Thermocouple-PUft

1

3%Rh

B

S Thermocouple-Pt /Pt1 0%Rh

B Thermocouple-PVPI30%Bh -6%Bh

Platinel ll Thermocouple

RTD/PTIOO DIN 43760 downloaded

D Thermocouple - W3%ReM25%Re

E E Thermocouple

Ni/Ni1 8oloMo Thermocouple

WW26%Re (Hoskins) Thermocouple

W5%ReAV26%Re (Englehard) Thermocouple

G v

Y

A w

F

I

7

ExegenK80lR pyrometer

Process lnp0lr (scaled to setpoint min and max)

-100 to +100mV linear

0 to 20mA linear

4 to 20mA linear

0 to svdc linear

1 to 5vdc linear

0 to 1ovdc linear

Setpo int

Min

Min

'C

-210

Mar

1200

-200

1372

-200

400

-200

900

-250

1300

-50

1

768

-50

1

/bu

0

1820

0

1369

-200

Min

850

"C

Max

-270

0 2319

0

23s9

1

000

0

1

399

0 1 870

0

2000

2010

10

200

-45

Min

"C

-1 999

-1 999

--

1

-1

999

9999

9999

999

9999

-1 999 9999

-1 999 9999

2300

2000

1

800

650

Mar

9999

Display lJnits

C

C€lsius f

Fahrenheit

I

Kelvrn

X

Linear input

Eromp e orde? ng code

2fi4.

cc -

Jt. u.

rc.

fl

. Jn.

fa. $.

t-o-ro0-a- -t .tt.fl-rt. .rt

2408, PID Controller, 85 to 264vac, Logic healing,

Relay cooling, Low alarm relay, High alarm relay,

R5485, Modbus comms, PDSIO setpoinl retrans,

Type K thermocouple,0 to100O"C, Auto/manual select,

2nd setpoint selecL Manual button disabled.

0pli o ns

I

Di$bled lll

Manual select

3R Remote SP selecl t2

Second selpornt

EH lntegral hold

AC Alarm acknowledqe

BP

SP rate limit enabled

Bll

Run program

H0 Hold program

RE

Reset program

BH Bur/hold prog

IL

Keylock

1{I

Run/Beset

TL

ReseuRun

HB Program holdback

P2

Second Pl0

ST one shot tune enable

AT Adaptive tune enable

F

Selecl lull access level

Bl

Simulates UP button

0iqital lnput 1 & 2

LB

Simulates 00wN button

SB

Simulates SCR0LL bunon

Pg

Simulat€s PAGE button

81

Least sig BCD digil

82

2nd BCo di0it

Bil srd 8CD digil

84

4th BCD digit i5 sth

BCD digit

BO Mosl signilicant dioil

8Y

Standby-all o/Ps oFF tC

Progsynchronisation

SG

Skip segment

(withoul changing SP)

FV Select PV2

AG Advance to end ol se0ment

(& step to targel SP) tl5

CTX (mode 5)

(lnout

2 onlv)

Conlrol aclion

IX

Feverse acting

(shndard)

DP oirect acting

Pouer loodbacl

XX Enabled on logic.

relay & triac heating

P0

Feedback disabled

Coolin0 oplions

XX Linear coolin0

CF Fan cooling

CA Water cooling

CL oil cooling

GO 0n/0ffcooling tronl panol bullonr

XI

Enabled ll0

Auto/manual disabled fB

Auto/man & run/hold disabled

F0 Run/hold disabled

Programmel time unlts

XX Dwell & ramp in mins llD

Dwell lime in hours llB

Ramp rate in units/hrs

1-1

I

Temperoture

qnd

Process Conlrol

ers t

eries ef ure rx*ro eYs

.

deo for:

Plqstic

exlrusion

Ovens

Ch

llers ond

cold stores

Available

in

U16,1/8

DIN

panel sizes the ZZ00L temperature controllers are simple, fixed build versions of the standard 2200 series controllers.

Eurotherm's advanced control techniques give stable 'straight

line'

temperature control. fJnique features include: power feedback which stabilises the controlled temperature against supplv voltage changes and dedicated cooling algorithms which ensure optimum control of fan and water cooled systems.

Simple operation is achieved using

intuitive

displav formats and tactile buttons.

Ordcr

ng codeg

H

2216L 1i16 DIN Controller

22081 1/8 DIN Controller

Control

C

PID Controller ll

0a/olf Conlroller

Supply Voltage

H

85'264Vac x

1

2

Healing 0utput

Not f ed

Log c

Re ay

X

Not litted

Belay outpul

A

Linear coolrng

I

Faf coo rng

C

Water cooling

Logic output

D

Linear cool nq

E

Fan cooInO

F

Waler coolrnq

Alarm 0utput

X

Not litted

Hrgh and lovr alarms

2

Deviation band x

EilG

FRA

GEB

NEO

SPA swE

ITA

No manual

Engl sh

French

G erma

I

Dutch

Sprn sh

Sweden

Ital ian

Sensor lnpul

K

T

L t{ z

Sensor lnpuls

J J Thermocouple

K Thermocouole

T Thermocouole

L Thermocouple

N Thermocouole

RTD/PT1 OO c

F

Celsrus

Fahrcnhe

I

Selpoinl Min Selpoinl Mar

Min 'C

Mar qnn

,

Model 2216L48W x 48H x l50D mm

Model 22O8L:48W x 96Hx l50D mm

Spec

licol

ons

Supp y vo loge:

85-264Yoc, I 0.0wotts moximum

Operot ng omb ent:

0-55'C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

lnpuls:

As per the ordering code below

Output

rcl ngs3

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc moximum

Logic: 18Vdc, 20mA

Pone seo ing:

22161

1P65, NEMA 4X

22081: lP54

Dolo sheet:

HA026t 53

Model 22.l61

+

Model 22081

+

1-12

Temperolure

ond

Process Control

ers

9!e

nr

er lure o tro er deo for:

Smoll Ovens lniection moulding

o

chitlers

Heot seoling

The

9le

is a miniature temperature controller

with

self tuning.

It

has a single build

with

two outputs, a logic

output

to operate a solid stare relav and a relay output. Either output can be configured for heating or cooling.

An additional alarm relav is also provided which can be configured in one of seven different wavs.

scd

2OOO

o

r

todcl

Re oy

Re oy

5

2

3 r

U o r

U

P

A

L

A

R

^t

22161

SUPPLY o

U

T

P

U

T

6

7 f

U

I

N

P

9 t0

Lou <

48Wx48Hxl2lDmm

Spec

f

colions

Gonlro nroder:

PID ond

On/Off

Supply vo loge:

85-254Yoc, <5.Owofts

Ope

I

ng omb ent:

0-55'C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

npulr:

Nine slondord lhermocouples.

Pt l 00

0-20mA, -.l0 to 70mV lineor

Output rol ngr:

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resislive

Logic: 9V dc, lOmA

Pnne recllng:

1P54, plug-in from fronl

Dotc rheel:

HA025731

Order

ng codet

E

Alarm Functions

a

Sensors

I

Range and Prop Band Units

E

o'"''1,'iii,'io!,lil'i''"

otl (no alarm lunction)

Deviation low alarm

Deviation high alarm

Deviation band alarm

Full scale low alarm

Sensor break alarm

Full scale high alarm

Looo break alarm

0

1

2

J

4

5 b

7

RTD

(units'precision display)

0

J

RTD

(tenths'precision

-

FeISAMA display)

1

Constantan

2

K

L

-

- ChromelrM/AlumelrM

3

Felconstantan

4

-Ni0roSil/NiSil

5 N

R

-

Pr s - Pr

-l3%Rh/Pr

-107"Rh/Pr

T

- Cu/Adams

PLll - Platinel

Conslantan

8

l[M

7

B-n-30%Rh/Pt-696Rh

A

I

6

Fange T/G's only

0-400"c

0-400"c

0-800"c

0-800"G

T/C and BTD

Full range r''

Full range'

PB Units

,"% of

400

0

"% of

"c1

800

2

'c3

% span

4

"c5

"F

"F

"F

.F

'c

"c

"C

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

PID

PID

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

PID

PID direct reverse direct reverse direct reverse direct reverse

0

1

2

3

4

5 b

7 l) Propband expressed as % of range

2) Select'reverse'lor heating and 'direct'for cooling applications

3) See Data sheet for range limils

Eromple ordering

code

9l C.O.O-6-3-3-7

9le

controller

with:

high

olorm

reloy, K lhermocouple input,

0

to

800"C,

PID heoting oulput, reverse oction

1-t

3

Temperoture

qnd

Process Contro

ers

fe

e tre

dea for:

48Wx96Hxl2lDmm

Plostic exlrusion

Boking ovens

Furnoces

Ceromics qnd Brick kilns

Mell furnoces

Spec

f col

ons

Control modes:

PID ond

On/Off

Supp y vo lnge:

85-264Yoc, < l0.0wotts

Operot ng omb enl:

0-55"C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

npuls:

Nine stondord lhermocouples

Output ratlngs:

ond PT100

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resistive

Logic: l8Vdc,

20mA

(output I

)

9Vdc,

l5mA

(outpul 2)

Pone seo ng:

1P54, plug-in from front

Dcts gheet:

HAo25733

The

94 is a

PID

or

ON/OFF

temperature controller

with

up to three

output

channels. These can be used in heat only and heat/cool configurations

with

or

without

alarms.

The

94 offers a range of nine standard thermocouple inputs and an

RTD(Prf100)

input.

Self tuning and Ramp to setpoint are standard features and the 94 also includes a selectable second setpoint

facility

switchable from the logic input.

Two of the

output

channels are supplled

with

borh relay and logic outputs. Channel

I

may also be

fitted with

an optional DC output.

The third

channel is

fitted with

an alarm relay.

torler

2OOO o

tc : tode

22OA

OUTPUT 2

Loc.

DC

R l o u

T

T

I

P u

R

Rel.y

L

A

R t-

A

R

I

.

SUPPLY

?2 2l

T

2.

o

U

T

P

U

I

N

P

U

T lr

T^D A c o

))

IXD

B llXD rL

5 RID

F ao'i

- I

DIGITAL

INPUI

PT'O'

1-14

)

E

Easic Producl

Controller

Conlroller with comms

94

94C

E

0utputs

ChannellRelay&Logic

Channel 1 DC 0-20 or 4-20mA

Channel 2 Relay and Logic

(Cool/Alm 2)

Channel 3 Relay only (alarm

1 )

0

D1

0

0

E

Nameplate

Standard Eurotherm 0

E

Sensor Type

RTD

RTD

B

-

.1OO

.99,9

Pt-30%Rh/ft-6%Rh 600

J - Fe/SAMA constantan -200

K

- ChromelrM/AlumelrM -250

L

N

-

-

Feloonstantan

-1 00

NiCroSil/NiSil

0

Platinel

-

llrM

-250

Pr-l3%Rh/Pt

0 R s -

Pt-lo%Rh/Pr

0

T

- Cu/Adams constantan -255

600

600 0

1

820

1

200

1372

900

1

300

1

395

1767

1767

400

0

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8

I

I

Channel Assignment

ch1

ch2

Heat

Cool

Cool

Heat

Heat

Disabled

Cool

Disabled

Disabled

Heat

Disabled

Cool

Heat

Alarm 2

Cool

Alarm 2

0

1

4

5

2

J b

7

tr

Control Type

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

PID

PID

PID

PID

Ch 1 Control and oulpul

0utput Type

Relay

Logic

Belay

Logic

4-20mA DC

0-20mA DC

E

Ch 2 Conlrol and outpul

''

Control

Type

Output Type

ON/OFF Relay

ON/OFF Logic

PID Relay

PID

ON/OFF

PID

Logic

Relay &

Relav & dq

/P do

/P

2

3

,4

]E

0

'I

0

1

2

J

4

5

trg

Alarml &2Funclions

Off (no alarm

Devialion low

function) alarm

Deviation high

Devialion band

Full scale

alarm alarm alarm

Full Scale low

High

Sensor break

Loop break

Alarm alarm alarm

Alarms in combination with sensor break alarm

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 or loop break alarm:

Devialion low

alarm

Deviation high

alarm

Deviation band

Full scale low

alarm alarm

Full scale high

alarm

B

C

I

I

A

l0

Disp. Range and [Jnils

Upper Display

Plop Band

Range

Limilr')

400'C

800"C

Sensor upper

Unils

'C

'C

%

%

Units ol 400 ol 800

limit 'C

% of span

Note: Prop band in % units ol full span

E

Comms Protocol

Prolocol

Parity

Disabled

N/A

EI-BISYNC@

EVEN

JBUS/IUODBUS@ EVEN

Notes

(1)

(2)

(3)

Selection is irrelevant i{ channel 2 output is disabled or contigured as alarm 2

Digital input operative even if channel 2 output is disabled or conligured as alarm

2

Used lor second setp1int selection

Use only selection

I for type B f/C or RTD input.

The effective span is selected here

For selection 2, 5 lhe effective span in the upper range limit.

for selection 8 ef{ective span is the full span 0f the input selected.

,E

2

I

0

1

Ercmple crdcr ng

Gode

9a-O-O-4

-t6-2-O-4- 5-O-O

Reloy heot only,

PID slow cycle,

2

olorms, full scole low ond full scole high olorm functions, lype K input, 0 to 4OO"C , no comms.

l -I5

Temperolure

ond

Process Contro

ers

/

/ ere

ref ldeo for:

Model

847

/849:96W x 48H x I56D mm

Model 808/809: 48W x 96H x l56D mm

Ovens

Furnoces

Driers

Firing kilns

Melting furnoces

The

model 808 serles are

1/8DIN,

temperarure /process controllers and programmers.

With

a range of 'Plug In' modules and software configuration the 808 series covers many applications.

The

808 series offers single loop

PID

or MVC control, while selecting the 'QLPS' option gives the ability of running a four segment profile.

The

features include:-

Self tuning

Choose from:

Heat/cool outputs

Up to

2 alarms

Digital

communications

Ramp to setpoint feature

I

stored program of 2 ramps and 2 dlvells (QLPS)

Vertical (808/809) or horizontal (8471849) orientation

Dual relay/triac motorised valve

output

809/ti49

Auto/manual operation

Specif

col

ons

Somp e frequency:

8 times per second

Supp y vo loge:

80 to 264voc

Pcwer consumpllon:

5.0 wotts

Operot ng lemperolure:

0 - 50"c

Relat ve hum d ty:

0

lo

9

5o/o non-condensing

lnputs choose

I

'l from:

Different sensor lineorisotions or lineor

Outputs choose lrom:

Reloy, logic, trioc, or DC onologue

(808/847 only)

Reloy or lrioc (809/849\

Pone seo ng:

lP54 with odditionol gosket kit

Dola sheel:

HA02379s

Ser es 2OOO

olternat

ve: Mode

22OA

t-t6

Order

ng codes

E

Basic Prodrct

Controller

Horizontal

Controller

Motor Valve

Controller

Horizontal

Motor Valve

Controller

808

847

809

849

[[0ulpulIand2''

Not litted

DC analogue

Logic

Relay

Triac '

Dual relay '

Dual triac s

0

D1

L1

R1

T1

VPR

VPT

E

Alarms,'r

Not fitted

Relay

Logic

0

R1

L1

E

Communications

Not fitted

RS232C

4s422

0 c2

C4 lnpul Adaplor ur

Note (input ran0e: -1 0 to +50 m il livolts)

-40 to +200 millivolts

-200 to +1000 millivolts

-4 to +20 milliamps

-1 to +5 volts

-2 to

+1 0 volts

-5 to +25 volts

0

IAV2

IAl V

IAAO2

IA5V

IAl

OV

IA25V

None

Linear process input and sell tuning

Linear process input, setpoint pr0grammer

& self tuning

Programmer

(80e)

0

OLS

OLPS

OP

I

t

!

E

Conliguration Type

Standardl

E

g

Sensor lnput

Thermocouple type

BB

EE

JJ

KK

LL

Nicrosil/Nisil

N

ll

P Platinel

RR

SS

TT

DC

RTD analogue input

X

(3-wire)

7

(1

)

The complete 1rder Code consists ol both the

Hardware Coding and the Configuration Codrng

(2)

Triac output m?dules not available if configured as an alarm channel.

(3)

Configuration type:

-

Standard: selections fr1n this page

-

Custom: configuration requiring 1ther parameter combinations. call your nearesl

Eurotherm Sales offtce

(4)

Display units lor all adjustable temperalure paraneters

(5)

Fast cycle available only with hardware modules

T1 and

Ll

(6)

1utput 2 alarms are nonlatching, alarm state afftmed by energised output.

(7)

Alarm outputs are nonlatching. alarn state affirmed by de-energised output.

IE Sensor lnput

-250 to +250

-100 to +'100

-1 00 to +400

-75

0 to +400 0

0to 100

0 to 200

0 to 300

0 to 400

0 to 600

0 to 800

0t01000

0t01200

0t01600

200 to

1

800

E

E

E

J K L,N

J K L,N

J K L,N

E J.K.L,

E J,K,

EJ,

J

Input sensors

T

E.K

E. J, K, L.

T

T

7 E, J, L,

PR.S,I.

P,R S T

Z

Z

Linear process inputs only

Note 7 0

1' reso ut on

P, R, S, T.

N,PR

S,

R

R

R

R

RS

B

I

Z

S

S

S

Q

A

B

C

D

K

L

M

E

F

G

H

J

N

P

X

tr

Display Units '

Degrees Celsius

Degrees Fahrenheit

Blank (linear l/Ps only)

F

X

(8)

)ptions for 809 and 849 only.

(9)

The useable range ol the input signal is -10 to

+60nV.

Therefore the lnput Adaptors can be used up to

1 2 times the naximum voltage or cLtrrent shown in tllis ltst.

@

0utpul

1

None (for use with 809/849)

Slow cycling

Fast cycling

:

0 to 20mA dc

4 to 20mA dc

0n/011

Slow cycling, direct

Fast cycling. direcl acting '

0 to 20mA dc, direct acting

4 to 20mA dc. direct acti

tr

0utput

2

Off

(for use with 809/849)

Water cooling

0il cooling

Fan cooling

Full scale low alarm

Full scale high alarm

Deviation alarm

0 to 20mA dc (linear)

4 to 20mA dc (linear)

59b' linear slow cycle

0

1

2

3

4

E

7 o

I

o

0

1

2

5

6

7

8 o

J

4

IE

Alarm outpul

O'I

Low alarm

High alarm

Deviation alarm

0

4

5

6

Ercmplc

codc

8O8-D I

-T -ll

I

.C4.

AAO2.OIPS.EXXX

al

t-4-2Q-6[-Q.

I

OO.c/c

Self-tuning programmer

config, 4-20mA

input

with:

lineor input,

dc

heot,

lrioc

woter

cool,

high

olorm

reloy, R5422

:

O-100

disploy dig

comms, stondord

1-17

Temperoture

ond

Process Controllers

fec

s

ee ej/

Je ldeo for:

96W x 96H x 219D mm

Single ond multi-zone ovens ond furnqces

Diffusion furnqces

Creep testing

O

Autoctoves

Environmentol chqmbers

The

model 818 is a U4

DIN,

Temperature/Process

Con trol ler or Temperatu re/Process Programmer.

Wth

a range of 'Plug

In'

modules and Software

Configurarion, the 818 series can be 'configured' to cover most applications.

The

818S offers single loop

PID

contro[, while the 8l8P/P4iP15 give the ability of running complex profiles.

The

features include:-

Self and adaptive tuning

Dual display

Choose from:

Heat/cool/motorised valve ou tpu rs

Up

to 2 alarms

Ramp to setpoint feature on 818S

I

stored program of 8 ramps and 8 dwe lls on 818P

4 stored programs of 8 ramps and 8 dwells on 818P4

15 programs of 8 ramps and 8 dwells on 818P15

Auto/manual operation

Spec

licotions

Somp e frequency:

8 times per second

Supp y vo loge:

85 to 264Voc, or 20 to 40V dcloc

Pcwer ccnrumpllon:

8.5 wotts

Operatlng lemperolure:

0 - 55"C

Re ot ve humld ty:

0

lo

90% non-condensing

npule chooee lrcm:

3l

Different sensor lineorisotions

*

squore root & lineor

Outputs choose from:

Reloy, logic, trioc, or DC onologue

Pone

seo

ng:

tP54

Dcto sheets:

HA02r479(8r85)

HA02r 480 (818P/4/151

i

1-18

codes t

,

I

Controller

1 stored program

4 stored programs

1

5 stored programs

g

lnpuls

Thermocouple

Resistance thermometer

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-5v

0,1 0v

1

-5V

2-10U

-8mV +8mV

81

81 8P

81

81 8P1

TC

RTD

0mA20

4mA20

0v5

0v10

1V5

2V10

SmVo

E

0ulput 2

Control on output 2

(0pposire to

0P1

)

' 'Betransmission process variable ol

Setpoint

Eilot

Power

No output

Relay linear

Relay non linear

Relay 0N/0FF

Logic linear

Logic non lrnear

Logic 0N/0FF

Triac Linear

Triac non linear

Triac 0N/0FF' lsolated 0-5V lsolated 0-1 0V lsolated

1

-5V lsolated 2-10V lsolated 0-1 0mA lsolated 0-20mA lsolated 4-20mA

Assigned to program option board

With feedback pot

Without feedb'k pot

Beversing acting control

Direct acling control

No output

Relay linear

Relay

Logic

ON/OFF linear

Logic

Triac

ON/OFF

Linear

Triac 0N/0FF lsolated 0-5V lsolated 0-1 0V lsolated I

-5V lsolated 2-1 0V isolated 0-10mA lsolated 0-20mA lsolated 4-20mA

0r

Motor Valye Conlrollel

Helay 0utput

NONE

RLY

RLYN

,.RLYF

LGC

LGCN

O LGCF

TRI

TRIN

IiTBIF

0v5

0v'10

1V5

2V1 0

0mA'10

0mA20

4nM0

PROG

6i FB

NONE

TRI

0v5

0v1 0

1V5

2V10

0mA10

0mA20

4mA20

VPB

VPT c

!,M

None

Deviation band

Deviation high

Deviatlon low

Full scale high

NONE

DB

DH

DL

Full scale low

Assiqned to program

Relay State in Alarm

FH

FL

PROG

3rd Digit Code

Energised

De-energised

Retrans

0-20mA

Signal

E

D

4-20nA

0-5v

0-10v

1-5V

2-1 0V

Belransmission

Setpoint

Etror

Power irr(Siqnal code)

S+(SiOnal code)

E+(Signal code)

W+(SiOnal code) tr

Alarm

2

None

Devraton band

Devratron high

0eviatron low

Full scale high

Full scale low

Assigned to progranl

Relay State in AIarm

Energrsed

0e-energised

Remote l/P

0-20mA

4-20nrA

0-5v

0-t0v

1-5V

2-1 0V

Bemole inpul0r

Remote setpoint

NONE

DB

DH

DL

FH

FL

PROG

3rd Digit Code

E

D

Signal Code

0mA20

4mA20

0v5

0vt 0

1V5

2V't0

X+(Signal code)

Ti(Signal code) Bemote trim

Remote S/P with ocal tflm

Vlax 0/P

L+(Signal code)

W+(Signal code)

tr

0plions

0iqital Communications

None

Digital RS232

Digital 485

JBUS@8S232

JEUS@8S485 l/l0DBUS@RS232 tlt0DBUs@HS485

Analogue Communicalions

Remote lnput Comm

1

Remote setpoint

X+(Signal code)

T+(Signal code) Renrote trim

Remole S/P with local trim

Max output power

232

485

J32

J85 t\432

M85

L+(Si0nal code)

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-5v

0-1 0v

1

-5V

2-1 0V

W+(Signal

Signal code)

Code

0mA20

4m420

E

None

Comms 2

NONE

Faston terminal

Screw terminal

Faston 24V acldc

Screw 24V acldc

(1

)

For normal temperature control select

Beverse jutput

Acting control, 2 action opposite to

1utput

1

(2)

The retransmission option is not available with

Analogue Comms or when retransmission specified in

Alarn

1.

(3)

0N/0FF on 0/P1 restricts 0/P2 to 0N/0FF unless prefix MSEW

(4)

With 1utput 2 prefix M,

S, E, W only dc outputs

(5) apply.

With MVC no )utput

2 prefix is required.

(6)

0n Motor Valve Controller version using a

Feedb'k

,NONE'.

Pot. (fB in )utput 2) Alam 2 must be

(7)

1nly one retransmission output and one remote input is allowed within the controller.

Alarm Channels can be used for analogue inputs/outputs il not required fot alarms

Baud 9600

Baud 4800

Baud 3600

Baud 2400

Baud

1

200

Baud 600

Baud 300

Analogue Communications

Retransmission Comm 2

M+(SiOnal code)

Setpoint

Error

Power

S+(Signal code)

E+(Signal code)

W+(Signal code)

Signal Code

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-5v

0-10v

0mA20

4nM0

0v5

0v10

1-5V

2-1 0V

1V5

2V1 0

96

48

36

24

12

06

03

FN

SN

FN24 sN24

I

)

)

)

IEtrIE

lin

Ni

Type lron Constanlan

Felconst

Ci/Con

T

(olN)

CrlNi AL

Curve/Display Min/Display Max

K

-250C to 1200C

03 ft13%

Bh/Pt

-250C to

400C

04

R

0C to 1600C

05

Pt10% Bh/Pt

S

0C to'1600C

06

Pt30% Rh/Pt6%RhB 400C to

1

820C

08

WlN26'klRe

0C to

2000C

09

W5%ReM26%

Ni Cr/Con

E

10C to

2300C

0C 10

11

780C

12

Pt]0%Rh/P140%

L

W5%BeAV26%Be

Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Bh

0C to'1880C

25

Platinel

1

1

RecommendBd

Range

J

0C to

600C

01

0C to

600C

02

Rh 200C to 1800C

23

C

0C to

2300C

24

0C to

1

200C

28

WW26%Re

0C to 2010C

29

BBcommended lin

Type

Range

NYN|'18%lvlolybednum 0C to

1

100C

W3%Re/25%Re

0

0C to 2400C

WBe5%WRe26%

0C to 2000C

Nicrosil/Nisil ft100 ohm at

N

Pyrometer

Pyrometer

R0

FPiGP

0C to 1300C

0"C

-200C to 800C

23

800C to

1

700C

10

500C to 900C

Pyrometer FP/GP11 700C101300C

38

45

70

64

83

Pyrometer n/rometer

Pyrometer

Linear

Square

FPIGP

FP/GP

121000C to 1850C

20

300C to 750C

FP/GP2l 500Ct01100C

-9999 to 19999

Root

-9999 to 19999

84

85

86

00

92

Display

Selected

Min/Ilisplay Mar lrom the recommend€d minimum and maximum range

lE

Units

None

N0NE oegrees

Celsius

G

0egrees

Fahrenheit

Degrees Kelvin

Millivolts

Volts

Milliamps

Percentage

(0r specify up to 5 characters)

MA

%

F

K

MV

IEIE

Disital Inputs

Dg

None

Auto manual

Local remote

Adaptive tune

K€ylock

DIG UP1 up key

DIP l/P 2 down key

Parameter security

Self tune

SP ZSP

1

PID 2/PID

1

Ramp

Slep program number

Run/resel

Fun/hold

Hold/run

Skio seoment

/PlD g

UPI

NO

NO

AM

AM

LR

LB

AT

KL

U(

-DK

PS

_ST s2

s2

RB

_BH

ss ss

IE Soflware 0ptions

Manual key enabled

Manual key disabled

Cold

Non iunction

T/C inpul lnternal compensation tunction lntegral and derivative in secs lntegral and derivative in mins lntegral and derivative in secs with dual PID lntegral & derivative in l\4ins with dual PID

Funclion

Power feedback

No power feedback

P

N

E

D

N

N

S

M

SS

MM

IB

Bamp Scale

lE

Owell Scale

SP tinits per minule

MN

tr

Holdback

No holdback

Band deviation holdbk

N

H

t-r9

Iemperolure

qnd

Process Contro lers

rec's' er

fe

G r er/

tJer deo for:

96W x 96H x 2l 9D mm

O

Single ond multi-zone ovens ond furnqces

Diffusion furnqces

O

Creep testing

Environmenlol chombers

The

model 902 series are

ll4 DIN,

temperature/process controlle rs or temperature/process programmers.

Wth

a range of 'Plug

In'

modules and software configuration the

902 se ries can be made to cover most applications.

The

9025 offers single loop

PID

control,

while

the

902P1903P1904P give the ability of running complex profiles.

The

features include:-

Self and adaptivc runing

Dualdisplay

Choose from:

Heat/cool/motorised valve outputs

Up to 2 alarms

Digital

or analogue communications

Ramp to setpoint feature on 9025

1 stored program of 8 ramps and 8 dwells on902P

4 stored programs of 8 ramps and 8 dwells on 903P

15 programs of 8 ramps and 8 dwells on 904P

Auto/manual operation

Specil

col

ons

Scmp e frequency:

8 times per second

Supp y vo lcge:

85 Io 264Yoc, or 20 to 40V dcloc

Pcwer consumpl

ons

8.5 wotts

Operotlng lemperolure:

0 -

Re

5s'c nt ve hum dity:

5 lo

90o/o non-condensing

npuls choose lrorn:

3l

Different sensor lineorisolions

*

squore root & lineor

Outputs choose from:

Reloy, logic, lrioc, or DC onologue

Pcne

sec

ng:

I

P65

Dclo sheel:

HA023761

1-20

Order ng

codes

I

)

)

E

Easic Producl

Controller

1 Programmer/controller

4 Programmer/controller

15 Programmer/controller

A

lnprls

T/C, RTD Volts, mV

Current

Pvromeier

E

Channel

1

902S

902P

903P

904P

Belay

Logic

Triac

DC Volts

DC Current

Retrans Volts '

Betrans Cutrent

'''

J c

P

E

Channel 2

Relay (Cool Alarm

1

Prog)'

Logic

(Cool

Alarm

1

) '

Triac (Cool)

DC Volts (Cool)

DC Current (Cool)

Remote l,/P Volts

Remote l/P Currenl

Retrans Volts'

Betrans Current, tr

Channel 3

HRE

HLO

HTB

HDV

H0c

HV

HC

Belay (Alarm

Logic (Alarm

1 Prog) '

1)

'

Retrans Volts

Bekans Current '''

tr

Channel 4

CRE cL0

CTR

CDV c0c

EV

EC

RV

RC

Belay (Alarm

2

Proo)

Logic (Alarm 2)

Bemote l/P

Renote l/P Current

E

Supply Voltage

Analogue Communications or VP Pot

SBE st0 l\rc

85V to 264V

24\l

tr

Digilal Comms

None

RS232

R5422t485

VH

VL

XN

XM

Analogue lnpul Type '

VoltaOe

Cutrent

0utpul

Type

Voltage

Current

VP Pot

"r

IE

Language

OC zc

English LE

French LF

Notes

(1

)

]nly one Remote lnput option may be specified

(2)

0nly one Retransmission 0utput nay be specitied

(3) lf Analogue Comms is specif ied, Remote lnput and Retranmission 1utput are not available in channels 1. 2, 3, or 4

A 10V supply is available for Pot. excitation.

(4) ll

VP Pot. lnput is specilied then a Remote lnput is not possible

(5)

Alarm

1 can only be specified in Channel 2 0R Channel 3, n1t both.

I

)

Type(code=l+1)

Thermocouple

HTD

Pyrometer

0-5v

1

-5V

0-1

0v

2-1 0V

0-20mA

4-20mA

-1 omv +1 omv

0-1 00mV

@

Channel

1

Type(codeH+1+2)

Reverse

Direct

0n/0fi

0/P H

A

0/P

TR)

H

B

1

(RE,Lo

PID (RE LO

Pto

0-5v

TR)

PID

PrD

1.5V

0-'10v

PID

2.,10V

PID

Plo

VP

0-20mA

4-20mA

(BE,LO

TR)

It VP rs chosen Channel 2 function is not available

2

B c

D

E

0

P

A

F

V

D

E

I

A c

F

G

H

1

T

R

lE

Channel 3

tr

Channel 4

Type (code

C +

'1

+

Cool 0n/ofi

Cool Non-Lin

Cool Linear

Non-0C

0-5v

1

-5V

0'1 0v

2.1 0V

c0

CN

CL

0-20mA

4-20mA

RetransType (code 1 + 2 + 3)

2

PVR

S/P

Etror

Power

1

R

H

R

Remole l/P Type (code

1

A

B c

D

+2

S/P

S/P + Tnm

Heat Power

0-5v

1

-5V

0-1

0v

2-10U

0-20mA

4-20mA

Alarm (code

Alarm FSH

Alarm FSL

Alarm DH

Alarm DL

Alarm DB

Prog Drive

Lmt

C+1)

E

E

E

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CP

1

A

B

D

3 s)

B

C

D

L

A

E

F

A

B

C

D

E

F

Type (code A + 1) '

Alarm FSH

Alarm FSL

Alarm DH

Alarm DL

Alarm DB

Prog Drive

Betrans Type

(codeT+1+2)

AA

1

AB

AC

AD

AE

AP

Error

Power

0-5v

1

-5V

0-1 0v

2-10V

0'20mA

4-20mA

TA

12

TB

TC

TO

A

B

C

0

E

F

Type (code S +

Alarm FSH

Alarm FSL

Alarm DH

Alarm DL

Alarm DB

Prog Dnve

Remole l/P

(code lvl +

1

Type

+2)

S/P

S/P + Tnm

Heat Power Limit

0-5v

0-1 0v

2-1 0V

0-20mA

4-20mA

SA

1

SB bL

SD

SE

SP

MA

12

MB

IVD

A

D

E

B c

F

tr

Digilal Comms

EI BISYNC@

JBUS@

MODEUS@

XA

XB xc flfffl[p

Analogue Comms I/P E 0/P

Units

Bemot8 lnpul (code 0 + 1 + 2)

1

S/P

S/P + Trim

Heat Power Limit

0-5v

1

-5V

0-1

0v

2-1 0V

0-20mA

0

0

A

B

D

4-20mA

Valve Position

Betrans

Etror

Power

OP oulpul (code Z + 1 + 2)

12

zA

7B

LV

70

0-5v

1,5V

0-'10v

2-1 0V

0-20mA

4-20mA

@

0isplay Low/High

Select from ranges in linear range table

None

Deg C

Deg

F

Kelvin

[,lillivolts

Volts

Millramps

Percentaoe

@

Linear Range

Lin

TyDe lron Conslantan

Fel0onst

Ni Cr/Ni AL

Ciloon

T

(DlN)

J

Rango

0 to 600C 01

L

0 to 600C 02

K

-250 to'1200C 03

Pt13% Bh/Pt

R

-250 to

0 to

400C 04

1600C 05

S

0 lo 1600C 06 Pt10"a th/Pt

Pt30%Rh/Pt6?"

B 400t01820C

08

WlN26'ktRe

0 to 2000C 09

W5%ReM26%

10 to 2300C 1'l

Ni Crlcon

E

0 to 780C 12

Ptlo%Bh/Pt4o%Bh 200 to 1800C 23

W5%Be/^W26%Re

C

0 to 2300C 24

Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Bh 0 to 1880C 25

Platinelll

0t01200C 28

WAV26%Re

0 to 2010C 29

Ni/Ni]8%Moly

0t0 1100C 33

W3%He/25%Be

D

0 to 2400C 35

W/Be5%WRe26%

0 to 2000C 38

Nicrosil/Nisrl

N

0 to 1300C 45

Pt'100 ohnr at ryro R0

0"C

-200 to 800C 70

23

800 to

1

700C

Pyro FP/GP

Pyro FP/GP

64

10

500 to 900C 82

Pyro FP|GP 1

1

700 to 1300C 83

12

1000 to 1850C 84 c

F

K

MV

MA

1-21

Temperolure

ond

Process Controllers e

e/

ler dea for:

Cerqmic qnd brick kilns

Environmentql chombers

Cqscode control

Oxygen/Corbon conlrol

Temperoture qnd humidiry conlrol

Autoclqves

96W x 96H x 234D mm

The

900EPC is available in four basic product types

- single and dual loop versions of the programmer and the controller.

Each instrument is supplied

with

communication, two logic inputs plus one (single loop instruments) or two (dual loop instruments) inputs for sensor connectlon.

Additional

I/O

is obtainable by

fitting

optional hardware modules

in

the slots A-F to suit your requirement.

The

instrument software is

fully

configurable onsite. However, some application specific hardware may be required for certain types of installation.

5

U

L

Y c

5

Specilicotions

Gontrc modes:

PlD, On/Off or molorised volve positioner

Supp y vo loge:

85-264Yoc, <20.0 wotts

Operot ng cmblent:

0-50'C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

npulc:

Thirty one siondord thermocouples.

PT l 00 ond .Jis

1

00

0-20mA, 0-20Vdc lineor. Custom inpul,

Squore Root

Output rolings:

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resislive

Logic: 18Vdc, 20mA

Trioc: 0.75A 264Yoc resistive

DC: 0-20mA or 0- l0Vdc configuroble

Pone oeo lng:

1P65, plug-in from fronl

Dotrr sheet:

H4O23798

A]

; tsi

8J

8:^ r.t t

U t:

E c o o

U

L

E

E o

D t u

E o

; D

D: l

Df

D5

EI l2

E:

L.i

i!

U

L

E o

D t.1

I

N

1

I u

L

U

T

2

I

N G]

G:

RTD

D

I

G

I

N

H1

TC

! LN

.]

RTD

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1-22

Order

ng

codes

EPC900

I

)

I

)

E

Basic Product

Contlollers

Single

Dual

Programmers

Single

Dual en

DC

SP

DP

A

Applicalion Specilic Features

Standard instrument

Cascadeil)

Controller

Programmer

Ralio

'

Pulsed Burner '''

Controller

Programmer

Gravimehic

Single Controller

Dual Controller

Computed/Derived lnpuls,''

Single Controller

Single Programmer

STD

'l1s

125

64S

155 tbJ

50s

500

71S

725 lnput

1

Thermocouple, RTD, Volts, mV

Pyrometer

Current

Wel and dry bulb

Single Controller

Single Programmer

Dual Loop lnstruments orygen Probe'

Single Controller

Dual Controller

Single Programmer

Dual Programmer

IS tc

W

W

W

IP

IP

IP

IP

E

lnput 2

None

Thermocouple, RTD, Volts, mV,

Pyrometer

Cu rrent

Wet and dr\i bulb

None

IS

IC

1W

I

)

I

)

t t t

)

EtrEEE@

SlotA-F,''

None

0uad Logic lnput

Remote lnput Volts u,

Remote lnput Current ''

VP Pot Feedback

Logic

Triple Logic

0uad Logic

Relay

Dual Relay

Dual Relay Valve Positioner

Triac

Dual Triac

Dual Triac Valve Positioner

DC Volts

DC Current

DC Retransmission Volts

DC Retransmission Current

Digital Retransmission

([\ilaster Comms) ''

Transducer 5V

Transducer

'l

0V

Transducer 24V

N 0ne

LI

DT

W

DV

DC

RV

RC

L3

L4

RE

DR

SV

SC

PP

LO

VR

TH

RD

GA

GB

GC

[[

Power Supply

85V - 264V VH

IE Sollware

Latest Unconfigured

Specific Unconfigured

Specif ic Conf iqured'''

LAT

X.XX

XXXXX

IE

None lnstrument Plus 1'g

IPSG.l

Enhancement

Nofes:

(l ) Coscode requires o single loop inslrument with both input I ond inpul 2 specified

12) Single loop rofio conlroller requires bolh input I ond input 2 specilied Duol loop rolio conlroller or progrommer should be ordered os slondord inslrumenls

(3)

Pulsed burner inslrumenls ore single loop only.

(4)

Conputed or Derived input single loop inslrumenls require both input I ond input

2 specified Duol loop insfrumenls should be ordered os slondord inslrumenls

(5) Duol loop oxygen inslruments will be supplied with o remofe input in slol C lor lhe probe mV.

16) Single loop inslruments con hove only one Remote lnput, which musl be in slol D, E or

F. Duol loop inslrumenls con hove up lo two Remole inputs, one in slot D, E or

F ond one in slol

A, B or C

(7) fhe DigilolRelronsmission Module moy be ploced in slot F only.

(8)

For deloils of how lo specify lhe configurotion prior to shipmenl, confocl your Eurolherm Conhols supplier directly.

(9)

IPSG is supplied os port ol the PLUS option

Only I

IPSG soflwore pockoge is supplied with eoch order.

None

PLUS

IPSG

Errrmplc

GCdot

EPC9OO-5G-Sf

D- 5.None.DY.DY.L3.RY.ilcne-llonc.YH.lAI.llcn3

Sing/e

loop

Controller, thermocouple input, DC heot

ond

cool outputs, plus

o

Triple

logic

output

for

olorms

ond

DC

Relronsmission to

o

recorde

1-23

Temperolure

qnd

Process Contro ers

S s*e

&xxs&rwumemf

Frm*m

h-€f,

ilu!

o't'c #

x*

deo for:

Configurotion

Commissioning

Romp/Dwell progrom ediring

Simple operotor ponels

Recipe qnd doto logging

Instrumenr Programming Svstem or

IPS is a softu'arc producr which is specificallv designed to provide remote access to Eurotherm instruments using

IBM

or compatible personal computers (PC) connected via a serial communications link.

Whether on the shop floor, in the plant control room, or

in

the office, the svstem provides many of the features normallv onlv available on more expcnsrve suPervrson, s\.stems.

Through careful design of the use r interface, using menus and helpr screcns. the IPS svstem is casv ro learn and straightfonvard to install, recluiring

little

or no computer e\peflence.

IPS(i

is a svstem that is suitable for ruscrs rlho rreed a simple recipe slstem or need customised views

of

kev parameters from a group of 1 to 8 l nstru nlen ts.

Specil

col

ons tPs

All IPS products will run on IBM personol computer or compotible with the following specificotion or better:

AT with

I

free seriol communicotions porl

Running DOS 3.1 upwords, or WlN95@ with CGA, EGA, VGA or Hercules disploy

Mouse or other pointing device such os trocker boll.

Extended memory of 1 Megobyte or greoler.

Suppoils

fo

ow ng producls:

2400 Series controllers

2408i lndicotor

94C controller

808 Series of conlrollers

8.l8 Series of controllers

900 Series of conlrollers

TU Series of thyristors

TC Series of thyristors

Ordcr

ng

codet

E

Varianl

E

Communications

I

Upgrade/Bevision

E1 Brsy rch XA IPSG IPSG svslenr

PSG slafdard

LJpqrade

00 revrsron

REV lronr IPSL

IJPGI

Upgridelronr PSG

UPGG

lrcnp

o crdcr{ng

ccde

P9.O.XA-OO.9f I.ENG

IPSG

stondord

syslem, single

pock in

English

E

ouanlity

Srn0le pack

ST1

E

Language

ENG

E

Serial No.

0nl\/ requrred [or upgrades

Eng

I

LSh

1-24

I

)

Temperoture

qnd

Process Conlro

ers

Series

O

6m$&

wwms8on Stclt on

deo for:

Setting-up new configurqlions

Stori

ng

conf

igurolions

Cloning conlro!!ers

This station is used for fast set-up and secure storage ofSeries 2000 controller configurations. The sration comprises two components: a software

utility

that creates and stores configurations on the computer and an interface box which connects the computer ro the con troller under confi guration.

The software can create a new confi guration, retrieve a previously stored configuration or upload rhe configuration from the controller. This configuration can then be modified and downloaded ro the conrroller.

The

interface box connects to the

RSz32 port of the computer.

Connection to the controller is through a special sleeve mounted connector. No additional module or power connection is required to use rhc Series 2000 Configurarion

Station.

Order ng

ccde

2000-col{;c-El{o-srD

Specif cqlions

Supply:

I

'l

OVoc or 240Yoc -+1Oo/o switch selectoble

Operotlng omb enl:

0-55'C, 5-95% Rh non condensing

Dolo sheel:

HAl35667

rofihlrs eonf8 e&rffiSetr

O

Generoles'GSD'files for Profibus-DP moster

Suppods 240gl,24O4l controllers ond T630,

TU ond

TC

thyristor unils

The

Configurator is a

Wndows@ based software

utilty

that creates

'GSD'

files.'GSD'

fi les defi ne the parameters that a PLC or Profibus master

will

be able to address.

The'GSD'file

is imported into a master Profibus Configuration tool which in turn produces a

file

that is used by a PLC or Profibus masrer ro communicate

u'ith

remore devices.

For more information ask for thc Profi bus Communications

Handbook part no. 1J1,l026290.

r blol.rt.

2

PRO? ccdc

-

ENC

lEng

-

.

FRA

GER

rh

lFrcnch

onguogot anguogol

fGermon ongu.rgct

1-25

2132i

2116i

92 lleot treolmenl

OYens

Iurnoces

Iood, doiries ond brewing

Chillers

Cold stores

2108i 2408i

Plostirs ond rubbel

klrusion

I

,,*J*

@/

uriliriet

Powcr

ctotl

j

Oil, gos ond prtrochon ra

I

lerorporc

ond

lulomollrc lulorlovcs

nginc

tcrt

bcdr

Chcmirol ond Phcrmorculltol

R

etion

Ycgdr

Plcsulc,

low, lcYcl,

Ph

rol

Pone 5 ze lmml

D sp rry

Stroln/Pressure teoeuremenl

No. ol Process npuls

D g

fo

Communicol ons

DC

Relrsnsmiss cn

Rernote Selpolnt nput

A

o

Outpufs

PcAe Reference

48

x24

48x48

4 digit green

2

2-2

48x48

4 digit green

2

2-8

96x48 96x48

4 digil green or red

5 digit green or red

O

2

2-4

O

a

2

o

4

2-6

t/t

s/.

8/L

Z6

!8(,t2 r80lz

!9ttc/!zetc

sl u utrrt

v

PUD

rollr,

Pu

@

NO

T'IS

stlun urro

v

Puo rolDrtPu

ndicotor ond A orm Units

2i/2

t

c

Gefor

tts

deo for:

Temperoture indicotion

4-20mA process inputs

Over-temperoture protection

Process volue trip unit

'fhe 2l32il2l76i

are compact high performance 4

digit

units for measurement and display

of

temperature and other process variables in standard

U3Z and

l/16 DIN

panel sizes.

Both models include an optional alarm relay

output

and logic connection for either a second external alarm relay or alarm acknowledge input.

The

universal

input of

the 2132i12116i accepts a wide range of two wire temperature sensors and process rnputs.

Model

Model

2132i:48W x 24H x l03D mm

2116i:48W x 48H x l03D mm

Spec

f

c.rl ons

D sploy:

Green 4 digit 1Omm LED

Supply vo lnge:

85-264Yoc

2O-29Yoc or dc I5wotts moximum

Ope

t

ng omb ent:

0-55"C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

lnpuls:

9 stondord lhermocouple types, Pt100,

Lineor

Sornp

mV/mA e

tes

5Hz

Re sy

oulpul

I

ng:

2A, 264Yoc resislive

Pone seo ing:

IP65, NEMA 4X

Plug-in from front

Dolo shecl:

HAO26157

Feolures

Universal input - covers a wide range of temperature and process inputs

Three alarm setpoints - separate warning and shutdown limits

One or two alarm outputs - alarm alert and shutdown outpurs

Front panel configuration - easy, on-site set-up

Wide-range 85-264Yac, or 20-29Yacldc supply - can be installed world-wide

Plug-in from front - rapid replacemenr, reducing downtime

IP65 and NEMA 4X panel sealing - can be used in wer and dusty atmospheres

2-2

t

l

)

lerm no

conneclions

Alarnr l

Externa

B elav lvlodu le

18

1A

OR

Alann acUreset

18

1A

Model 2132i

+ r)

V- V+ AB

AA

t{L

I/C

Pil00 mA lf p!l

L] tl

2t9

S€nsor rfputs

Alar nr

2

Neulrcl

Llne

Relay

0utput

85-264Vac

20 29Vacrdc

24

24

Lov/ vollaQe s!pplv

Alarm

1

Enernal

Relay i,,lod ule

OB

A iilD ack/resel

Model

2l l6i

Iogic lnpuU0utpul

1A

Lrne

85 264vac

Neukal

Low voltage supply

24

20-29Vacidc

24 l{

rAA

?-la

Alatfr 2

Be ay 0utput

V+ v-

) r/c

J

PrlO0

J

2

49

Sensor tnpuls

-14

-18

Ordering

codes

Model

Num ber

Funclron

Sup p1

Vol la y qe 0ulpul

Aailn?

flelay 0ulpul

Loqro lnpill

ITIIIIITTIII

Sensor nlul Selporil l,,l n

Selpcrnl lil

P,. al llLdt z ln[ ]l

Model Number

21321 1132 0lN lndicator

Conlroller

21161 l/16 DIN lndicator

Function llD lndicator only (Logic l/0 and Alarm 2 relay will nol be lined) lL lndicator with logrc l/0 and alarm

Supply Vollage

VH

85-264vac

VL

20-29V dc or ac

Manua

I

[x

EIG

FRA

GEB

XED

8Pr

8WE

ITt

No manual

English

French

German

Dutch

Spanish

Swedish

Italian

Logic lnput/0utput

XX

Disabled (note

Logic inprt

1

)

AC Alarm acuresel

[L

Keylock l{on-lalched alarm

FH Hioh alarm

1

FL low alarm

1

Latched alarm ll

High alarm

1

L

Low alarm

1 lW

New alarm

Alarm 2 Relay 0utput

XX oisabled (nole 1) llon-lalched alarm fH

High alarm 2

FL

Low alarm 2

AL

High alarm 2 & low alarm 3

Latchod alarm ll

High alarm 2

LA

Low alarm 2 l

High alarm 2 & low alarm 3

IW

New alarm

Sensor lnput

Slandard Sensol lnpuls

J

K

T

L il

B s

B rcrmocornlc-Nicrosil/Nisil rermocnrrnlc-Pt/Pt30o/"Rh -60l"Rh

P z

Faclory Downloaded lnpul c

D

E

1

2

I

3

5

U

I

6

I l

Process lnpulr (Scaled to setpoint min and max)

it

Y

-9 99 to +80mV

0 to 20mA

4 to 20mA

linear linear linear

0 to 1ovdc linear

Selpornl lr,lin Selpornl l/lax

ilin

"C

-210

,[ar

1200

't312

-20

1

300

1820

Min

0

"C

ltlar

2319

2399

2300

Min "c Illax

-1999

9999

-1999

9999

-1999

9999

-1 999 9999

Units

C

Celsius f

Fahrenheit

I

Kelvin

X

Linear input

Ext Relay Module

XX Not fitted

F7

Fitted (operated by the lo0ic output) lnput AdaDtor

IX

Nol fitted

Yl

0-1ovdc

Al

0-20mA currenl sens€ resistor (2 49o

01%)

Nole 1 ll 'NO' (lndicalor only) is specilied in lhe lunclion lield then

'XX' musl be enlered in lhe Logic lnpuuoulpul and Alarm

2 Belay lields.

Nole 2 Selpoinl min and max: lnclude lhe decimal poinls required in the display value: up lo one lor lem pe ratu re i npu ts, up lo two for pr@ess inpuls

Ercmple ordedng ccde ztra. 1,.

41. Js. Erc. rc -

tt

- x - o

-

luo.

c - u

2132, lndicating alarm unit, green display, 85 to 264Vac, English manual, Hemote

Acknowledge, Latched High Alarm Belay Output, Type K thermocouple, 0 to10O0'C, no options

2-3

ndicqtor ond Alorm Units

ic

f

deei for:

Temperoture indicotion

4-20mA process inputs

Over-lemperoture protection

Process volue trip unil

The

2108i provides accurate 4

digit

measurement and display of temperature and other process variables in a standard 1/8

DIN

format.

Two

alarm relay outputs are provided from up to three internal soft alarms. External digital keylock and alarm acknowledge inputs are standard.

The

2108i accepts outputs from all popular temperature, pressure, flow, and level measurement sensors.

Feolures

Universal input - covers a wide range of temperature and process inputs

Two alarm relay outputs - for operator alert and plant

Protectron

Wde-range 85-264Y ac, supplv - can be installed world-wide

Plug-in from front - rapid replacement, reducing downtime

Front panel configuration - easy. on-site set-up

Tactile buttons - friendly operation

96W x 48H x l03D mm

9pec

f

col

ons

Dlsp oy:

Red or green 4 digit

l5.9mm

LED

Supply vo loge:

100 to 240Voc

15q/o, +10o/o

Operot ng omb enl:

0-55'C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

npulss

9 Stondord thermocouple types, Pt1 00,

Lineor mV/mA

Somp e role:

5l1z

Re ay

ou$ut

rcllngs:

24, 264Yoc resistive

Pone sec ing:

1P54, plug-in from front

Dslc sheet:

HA025

1

59

I

1

2-4

I

)

)

I

\

I

r

lerm

no

connealions

3C 3B 3A

Reloy Output 2

1/c

Pit00

249

Reloy Outpul I

V+

VI

AC

A8 AA LC

LB

Key ock ocknow edge/r esel

NL

Ordedng

codes

2108i Note

1

Note

1

Display Colour

Gil

Green display

BD

Red

Supply Voltage

VH 85-264Vac

Belay 0utpul

1

RF unconligured

Unlatched alarms

FH

High alarm

1

FL

Low alarm

1

FA

Rate of change alarm

1

Latched alarm

HH

Hagh alarm

1

L

Low alarm

1

AA

High alarm

1

& low alarm 3

BT

Rate ol change alarm 1

LW

New alarm stalus

RF UncoflIigured lJnlalched alarms

Fll

High alarm

2

FL

Low alarm 2

RA

Rate oI chanoe alatmz

Latched alarm

HH High alarm 2

LA

Low alarm 2

RT

Rate ot change alatm 2 l{W New alarm status

Manual

m

EIIG

FRA

GEB

IIED

SPA swE

IIA

No manual

English

French

German

Dutch

Spanish

Swedish

Italaan

E c

D

Slandard Sensor lnputs

J

J

Thermocouple

X

K

Thermocouple

T

T

Thermocouple

L

L

Thermocouple l{

N

Thermocouple-Nicrosil/Nisil

R

S SThermocouple-PtiPt10%Rh

B

B Thermocouple-PuPt30%Rh

-6%Rh

P

Platinel ll

Thermocouple z

RTD/PT100 DrN

43760

Downloaded

1

2

3

4

5 o/.Re lHoskins) Thermoeoilnlc

6

I

7

Process

M to setpoint min and max)

Y

A v near

Nole

2 A

196

2 4gr) cufienl sense resistot is supplied as slandard. lf greater accuracy is required a 0

1o/o resislor can be specilied in lhe inpul adaplor lield

Min 'C

Mar

-2'10

1

200

-200

1

372

-200

400

-200

900

-200

1300

-50

1768

0

1820

0

1369

-200

Min

0

850

'C

Max

231

I

C

Celsius

F

Fahrenheit

X

Kelvin

X

Linear input lnpul Adaptol

XX

Not litled

Vl

0-1ovdc

Al

0-20mA current sense resistor (2 49o

0l%)

Nole

1

Selpoinl min and max: lnclude the decimal poinls requted in the display value; up to one lor lemperulure inpuls, up lo lwo lor process inpuls

201 0

Min "C

Max

-1999

99S9

Eromple o?der ng code

2lmt.il,.t.Jt.Jt.tt.arc-1-O.tq,o.C,Xr,

2108i, lndicatingalarmunit,greendisplay,85to264vac,Highalarmrelay,Low alarm relay, English manual, Type K thermocouple, 0 to1000'C, no options

2-5

ndicotor ond A orm

Un ts

i e s cess c f

At

I

!

deo for:

Temperoture indicotion

Pressure, flow qnd level monitoring

Differentiq! meosuremenl

Dolo ocquisition ond tronsmission

96W x 48H x l50D mm

Process protection Spec

f

col

ons

Accurate, stable measurement of temperarure, pressure, level, flow and other proccss variables are provided by the 2408i universal indicator. An optional second process value

input

allows the avera3e, difference, minimum or maximum of two vaf ues to be displaved . Large, bright, red or green displays ensure good

visibility in

high and low ambient lighting.

Temperature linearisation functions for nine rhermocouple types and Pt100 resistance thermometers are selectable. Other

input

linearisations can be factory downloaded.

Srrain gauge and pressure sensor inputs can be energised from an internal 5 or l0Vdc supply. An automatic calibration routine is provided to remove zero and span offsets.

For flow measurements, square root extraction is available as standard.

For level measurement, an 8-point

fit

may be applied to any part of the

input

signal to give an accurate displayed value. For applications such as

liquid

volume measurement using pressure sensors

D cp oy:

Red or green 5 digit

l5.9mm

LED

Supp y vo logee:

85-264Yoc

20-29Yoc or dc,

I 5wotts moximum

Operot ng omb enl:

0-55'C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

nputs:

Single or duol;

9 stondord lhermocouple types, Ptl00

Stroin gouge, Lineor mV/mA

Somp e role:

9Hz

Re oy oulpul rol ngs:

2A,264V resistive

D g

to

commun colions:

RS232, 2-wire RS485 ond 4-wire RS422

Modbus@, Eurolherm ASCII ond PROFIBUS prolocols

Pone seol ng:

1P54, plug-in from fronl ponel

Dolo sheet:

HAO26\72

)D aa 3E a^

't'

,\" i paor

-@i$€r-

.l

t

r,r^ri, n

A

Feolurec

Four alarm setpoints - for alert and plant protection

Serial communications - for supervisory control and data acquisition

DC retransmission - fully isolated retransmission to remote control and monitoring equipment

1r

20 29v. .:

2-6

(

t

/

I

(

(

)

I

)

)

Order

ng codes

lllodel

Ntmber

Funclr on

Drsplay

Co loilr

Su pI ly

Vollaqe

Moduie

1 lllodule 2 Mod!le 3

Relay

0ulpul

1

Comilrs

ModIl e

P0st0

Module

Mantral

Function

AL lndicator/Alarm unit

AP

Profibus lndicator/Alarm unit

Display Coloul

GN

Green

BD

Red

Supply Voltage

VH

85-264vac

VL 20 2gvac/dc

Sensor lnput

T

L

N

Slandard Sensor lnpuls

J t(

R s

B

P z

Factory Downloaded lnput c

D

E

1

4

5

2

3

G v

Y

I

6

I

Process lnpuls (Scaled to setpoint min and max)

F

-'1 00 to +100mV linear

0 to 20mA linear (Note 9)

A w

4 to 20mA linear (Note 9)

0 to 5Vdc linear

1 to 5Vdc linear

0 to l0Vdc linear

Module

1.2

& 3

XX

None

Alarm Relay output

(change overl

R4 Fitted unconfigured

0B Select alarm configuration from table A

DC Betransmission

D6

Module fitted unconfigured

First character

V-

PV retrans

S-

Setpoint r€trans

Z-

Etror retrans

Second characl€r

-1

0 20mA

-2

4-20n4

-3

0-5V

-4

'1-5V

-5

0-1 0v

Dual relay (note 2)

RB Module litted unconlig

Triple contact UP

(nole 3)

TX

Module fitted unconfig

Triple Looic lnpul (note 3)

TL

Module litted unconfig

Triple Logic 0/P (note 4)

TP l\4odule fitted unconfig

20mA Transmilter supply

MS 24vdc, 20mA supply

Slrain Gauge Transducel supply (modules 1& 2 only) (note 5)

B3 5V transducer supply

GS

1

0V transducer supply

2nd analogue

(module

3 input only)

D5

Module fitted

For configuration see PV

Function'field below

Conli0uralion ol Maln lnpul

Note 6 Note 6

Min

-210

'C

Max

1

200

Min

'c

Mar

2319

Relay 0ulpul

1 xx

Not fitted

RF

Filted unconfigured

0R select alarm confiouratron trom Table A

Table A

Alarm rolay conli0uralion

(note 1) t{on lalching

FH

High alarm tL

Lowalarm

DB Dev. band alarm

D[

Dev. low alarm

DH

Dev. high alarm

RA Rate-of-change a arm

Lalched alarms

Hl

High alarm

L0

Low alarm

BD oev band alarm

WD Dev low alarm

AD

Dev hi0h alarm

BT

Bate-ot-change alarm llw

New alarm

Note 7

D isplay

Unals

C

Celsius

F

Fahrenhert

(

Kelvin

X

Blank

Digital lnpuls

1&2

XX Disabled (telemetry only) lC

Alarm acknowledge l(L

Keylock

SB Remole setpoint select

PV

Select process value l/P 2

J1 lnitial tare correction on strain gauge input

1

J2 lnilial tare correction on strain qauge anput 2

J3 lnitial tare correction on strain gauqe input

1

J4 lnitial tare cotrection on strain gauge input 2

Comms Module

XX

Module not fitted

RS232

A2

Module litted uncontigured

AM lrodbus protocol

AE

El-Bisynch protocol

BS4B5 (2-wire)

Y2

Module fitted unconfigured

YM Modbus protocol

YE El-Bisynch protocol

R5422 (4-wi10)

F2

Module frtted unconfigured

FM l\4odbus protocol tE

El-Bisynch protocol

Prolihus Module

PB RS485

PDS Module

XX lvlodule not fltted il6

Fitted uncontigured

RS

Setpoint input

Note 8 Note 8

PV Funclion

)0(

No lunction PV = main input

L0

PV = the lowest of input 1 and input 2

Hl

PV = the highest on input

'1 and inpul

2

Fl{

PV derived lrom inpul

1 and 2

BS

Remote setpoint

Manua

I xxr

EIIG

TRA

GEB lIED

SPA swE

ITA

No manual

English

French

German

Dutch

Spanish

Swedish

Itahan

Note 1: By default, alarn 1 will be assigned to relay output

1 and alarms

2, 3 and 4 to modules 1, 2 and 3 respectively

Note 2,

The allocation ol alarms to the dual relay outputs is pelormed in configuration by the custoner.

Note 3: Triple contact or logic inputs can be configured. by the user. for any ol the functions listed under Digital lnputs

1 and 2

Note 4: The triple logic outputs can be configured as alarm outputs or as telemetry outputs via digttal conmunications

Note 5: By default, the transducer supply for input 1 will be installed in nodule posilion 2 and the transducer supply for input 2 in module position

1

Note 6: Setpoint min and max: lnclude the decimal points required in the displayed value; up to one for temperature inputs, up to two for process inputs

Note 7: Select the code required lrom the sensor input table

Note 8: These two fields are used to scale the 2nd DC lnput if it is a linear process input, otherwise it should be left blank

Note

9

For mA inputs, a lok 2 49ohm current sense resistor is supplied as standard- lf greater accuracy is required a 0 1% resistor can be ordered as part nunber: suB2t</249R

1

Min 'C

Max

1999

9999

Eromp e ordering code

2to8, .

il,.

il

. w . Rt -

n

-

rr

.

tx

- tt

- xr - arc -

t

- o

-

1000 - c -

lc

-

xl

2408i, lndicating alarm unit, green display, SS to 264vac, Dual relay, Dual relay,

85485, Modbus@ comms, English manual, Type K thermocouple, 0 tol000"C, Alarm acknowledge, Keylock

2-7

ndicotor ond A orm Units

IT dea for:

Over lemperolure policemon

Sofety unit

The92

is a single build Alarm unit

with

two alarm relays configured in a fail-safe mode, each of these can be used in one of seven different ways.

Each alarm can be used in either a latching or non-latching mode which can be reset externally

with

a remote button, or from the front panel bu t tons.

Scr lndicotor unit

cr

2OOO

olfc ol

yca

todc

Re oy

Reloy

2

3

4

5

A t-

A

R

M

2

A

L

A

R

M

I

21l1l6i

or

SUPPLY

12

R

E s

E

T

P

U

T

I

N

Neuirol

todc

6

7

8

9 l0

48Wx48Hxl2lDmm

Rese

2216

+

"-

J

t,

00

Spec

ficol

ons

Supp y vo lcAe:

85-264Yoc,

<

5.0wotts

Ope I

ng omb enl:

0-55"C, 5-95%RH non-condensing

lnputr:

Eleven slondord thermocouples.

PT1

00

0-20mA, -.l0 to 70mV lineor

Output I

ngs:

Reloy: 2A, 264Yoc resislive

Pone seo ng:

1P54, plug-in from front

Dolo sheel:

HAO2'732

Order

ng

codeg

s2 0 0

Alarm 1 Funclion

Lalching 0peralion otl (no alarm tunction)

Devialron low alarm

Deviation high alarm

Deviation band alarm

Full scale low alarm

Sensor break alarm

Full scale high alarm

Rate-of-change alarm

Ion-latchlng 0peration

Deviation low alarm oeviation high alarm

Deviation band alarm

Full scale low alarm

Sensor break alarm

Full scale high alarm

Rate-of-change alarm

Eromple

Alarnr 2 Funclion code

D

E

F

I

A o

Lalching 0peration olf (no alarm function)

Deviation low alarm

Devialion high alarm

Deviation band alarm

Full scale low alarm

Sensor break alarm

Full scale high alarm

Rate-olchanOe alarm ilon-lalching 0perallon

Deviation low alarm

Deviation high alarm

Deviation band alarm

Full scale low alarm

Sensor break alarm

Full scale high alarm

Rate-of-change alarm

Sensor

0

1

2

3

6

8

4

5 o

A

B c

D

E

F

RTo'1 00r) Pt

0tN43760/851 904

B-Pt-30%Bh/Pt-6%Bh

C-W-5%Re/W-26%Re (Hoskins)

E-ChromelrM/Adams constantan

J-Fe/SAMA constantan

K-ChromelTM/AlumelTM

L-Fe/Constantan

N-NiCroSil/NiSil

Platinel l[M

B-Pr-1 3%Rh/Pt s-Pt-1 0%Rh/Pl

T-Cu/Adams constantan

0

1

2

3

4

6

7 a

9

B

Display Units, Remote Ack

Power Fail Alarm "

"c

"F

"F

0isplay

"c

"C

'c r

.F

"F

Bsm Ack

ALt&2

ALl&2

ALl

AL1

AL2

AL2

AL1 &2

AL,l & 2

AL1

AL1

AL2

AL2

Pwr

Fa

Alm no0 yes

1 noz yes no4

3 yes

5 no6 yes no8

7 yes noA yes

B

I

(l)

Disploy unils seleclion for temperolure inputs only

Remote

Ack seleclion irrelevont for nonJotching olorms

92 Alorm unit with: Alorm

I

full scole high (lotching), Alorm 2 full scole low (lotching), K thermocouple, Remote Ack Alorm

I

& 2

2-8

Products for ntegroled

So utions

SECT

ON

I

)

I

)

I

)

t

I

I

I

I

I

Products for ntegroled

So

ul ons

$,.1rJ

$

i;'i i',.t{i,l

Duol PID controller

ond doto

ocquisition unit

Multi-setpoint progrommer

ond doto

logger

Production process system i er'nt-, lnstrument tools

for

Series

2000

controllers

'':";l.{,

*i'it:::rlfrd

Y

Foctory suite - lnTouch, lnControl

I*r;

:

Seriol interfoce unit

i{-Dc*8

5.,RSE

Universol isoloted interfoce convertor

#M$

Communicotions interfoce

3-2

3-3

3.5

3-6

3-7

3-ro

3-t o

3-lo Ec,

I

-

-

*a t rt

!

r j

Products for ntegroted 5o

utions

25 uo

PX

(on*rwXXer on

&exto

Ae

ux&s&

on tlmif deq for

:

Furnoces

Environmentql chombers

Boking conveyor ovens

Pockoging lines

Conveyor furnoces lmproving PID in plc systems

The

2500 is a high performance dual

PID

controller

with

self tuning, cascade and gain scheduling, rogether

with

mathcmatical functions and combinational logic.

It

is mounted on a

DIN

rail base and takes plug-in

I/O

modules.

It

is designed to be used

with

any device running a Modbus'u

RTU

or Profibus

DP master communications interface, such as the Eurotherm T2900, PC based

SCADA packages, or plc.

Up

to 16 bases mav be daisv chained using standard

RJ45 cables to provide multiloop solutions up to 32 loops.

As well as two

PID

blocks, the 2500 can be used to perform combinarional logic, in addition to remote I/O for data acquisition, monitoring analogue and digital points. Three base sizes cater for up to a maximum 32 analogue and 64 digital inputs and outputs.

DIN

rail mounting allows the 2500 to be mounted rvhere the control action is required, minimising the cost of the wiring sirtce

onll'

the twisted pair communications cable is taken to the User lnterface.

The

2500 may also be mounted directly onto the machine, saving the cost of control cubicles.

'iTools'Wndorvs based configuration software (see page 3-6) is used to set up the

PID

blocks and the I/O, in addition to

the'UserWring'setup

and the connection of the I/O points to the

PID

blocks or to internal variables.

This

allows local mathematical calcularions

(*

- x

/< >,

average, max ...) and combinational logic

(oR,

AND

...).

Benef ts

Advonced

PID

control

Loop integrity

Physico! distribution

'User'Wiring

Locol processinE

Direct inter{oce lo temperolure sensors

Plug in modules (live)

Expondoble

Accurote, relioble, repeoioble process control

Consistent product quolity

Greoter foull loleronce. Simpler foult finding

Reduced wiring costs. Simpler control ponels

Single solution

for

PID ond logic control

Minimises communicolions with the moster

More occurocy, less cost.

Minimises downlime

Only poy for the

l/O

required

Orde; ng ccdc

See

poge

3-4

Specilicotions

/O

and P D somp e rcle:

9Hz (1 1OmSec)

P D blocks:

2 single or 2 coscode, with self tune

Ano

ogue

npuls:

All common t/c, PT100, + l00mV

4-20mA,

Reso

0-l0V ul on:

<21tY,<0.2C

A orms:

4 per PID

loop,2

per input

4 user defined olorms

User w r ng: l6

onologue ond

l6

digilol stotemenls

Gommun col ons:

Modbus'" RTU

Profibus DP

Supp

.l8.0

y vo lage:

to 28.8Vdc

Operot ng ombienl:

0 to 55'C, 5-95%RH

Dlmens ons:

Verticol height: l80mm

Width: 4

l/O

modules l37mm

8llO module

239mm

16l/O

module 422mm

Depth:

I05mm

Dolo sheel:

HA026175

3-2

(

(

I

I

)

I

)

)

)

)

)

I

t

)

t

)

Products for nfegroted Solut ons

T

tr&,$

e$KfE-$*fipefirnf wffi er filrftd

ffis$s

.im

#Fe

deo for

:

Environmentol chqmbers

Heql treotment furnoces

Autocloves

Vocuum furnoces

Kilns

Modbus RTU

'l'he'f2900

is a graphical programmer providing

from I

r.rp

to

16 analoguc setpoinr profiles and from

1to

32 digiral outpur profiles on a single rime base. is designed to rvork rvirh the Eurotherm 2500

DIN

rail

PII)

conrroller. LIp

to l6

It

corrtrollers mav be multidropped from the T2900 providing a maximum of 32

PII)

loops.

The

display of the T2900 is a

l37mm l/4V(iA

acrive marrix colour

LCD

displa.v

wich cold cathode back light, and has a durablc resistive analogue touchpanel lr,hich extends belorv the displav area ro givc 6 exrra funcrion kevs.

A standard 3.5in floppv drsk drive is

flrred

behind an IP65 sealing door, and can be used for loading and saving programs, for logging running dara or for updating the application program, e.g. LIser screens, foreign language files erc.

A u,indou's configurator, which runs <ln a srandard \Mndou's

95/l\T

personal computer mav be uscd to create Programs, and to develop 'User Scrcens', displavs on u'hich the

OEM

defines which variables, butrons and texr are s hou'n.

Inrernatiorralisation is available by selecting the appropriare rexr

file

conraining the foreign language or rhe industry specific u,ords used on all srandard displavs.

European or US date and time formats are also selectable.

Benef ts

Cleor grophicol disploys

Physicol distribution

Locol doto-logging

Simplifies operotor troining

Reduced wiring cost

Simple product/process quolificotion

Coll us

for

help with ordering ond

Orde;lng ccdc

technicol informotion

t2900-24-t

-o-

.t

E-E-O.O-O-312-O.O

-o-t -r.r -2-2-o-o-o-o.o-

T290O Progrommer

ond DotoJogger,

I

/4VGA

TFT colour touch

with floppy

disc

Eurolherrn pro

ecl stud

o

CD

Configurotion

tools

Specificot ons

Progrommer:

Up to 50 Progroms

U p to 500 segments

Up to 16 setpoint profiled per progrom

Up to 32 digitol events per progrom

I

timebose

Grophicol progrom preview

Reol time trend with setpoint pre-plot

Reol Time Clock

Schedule (future stort time)

Run from (mid-progrom stort)

Access leve :

Locked, Operolor, Commission, Engineer

A orms:

Alorm ond Evenl monogemenl, time-stomped

Commun cotionsr/medio:

Modbus'"RTU mosler ond slove (U45)

3.5mm floppy disc for dotologging ond progrom lood/sove

D ognostics:

Heolth reloy contocts ond

LEDs

D mens ong:

144H x l44W formot by 200Dmm

(138mm x l38mm cut-out)

Dolo sheel:

H4026176

3-3

Products for nlegroted

So utions

20

Coll us for help with ordering ond lechnicol informotion

codes

Bose Units

Controller

* 4

l/O

module bose

Controller

* 8

l/O

module bose

Controller

+ 16l/O

module bose

25008/S04/ENG

Conlroller

(note: one required for eoch bose)

For doto ocquisiiion

With

2

PID blocks

With User

Wiring only

Wiih

2

PID blocks ond User wiring

2500C/ACQIO/MODBUS/ENG

/2LOOP

/UW

/2LOOPUW

l/O Modules

(note: eoch module requires o terminol unit)

Anologue lnputs

Universol

Terminol duol isoloted unir with input cJC

Terminol Unit for

Terminol Unit

for

dclPl'100 mA

25OOM/A|2UN|V/ENG

2500T/AI2/TCINONE/ENG

/DclNoNE

/DCISHUNT

Anologue Outputs

Universol duol isoloted outpul

Terminol

Unit

25OOM/AO2UNIV/ENG

2500T/AO2/UNIV/ENG

Digiro! lnpuls

Quod 24V

Terminol input

Unit

25}0M/D\424VIEXTPWR/ENG

25OOT/D\4/UNIV/ENG

Digilo! Output

Quod

Losic 1OmA (24V

Quod 24V

l00mA

(24V required)

2500M/DO4LOGIC/EXTPWR/ENG requiredl

250OM/DO424VIEXIPWR/ENG

Terminol

Unit

Z\OOT/DO4IUNIV/ENG

Reloy Output

Quod 2 omp reloy (3

n/o,1

chonge

Terminol

Unit

over)

2500M/RLY4/ENG

25OOT/RLY4/NOFUSE/ENG

Power Supply

(110/240

to

24Y

for

2500C, if required)

DIN

roil

24Y 2.5 omp supply

2500P/2A5IENG

Accessories

iTools Windows@ configurotion softwore

/s08

/s16

2500C configurotion coble lnterconnecting coble between boses iToolsAVl N/3 .5 /2sOO / MODBUS/STD/NON E/ENG

2sOOA/CABLE/CON FIG/RJ I I /9PI N DFI3MO

2 SOOA/CABLE/MO D

B U

S/N45

/N 4 5 /

3M0 or 0M5 (lenslh)

Terminotion lood (for lost bose in link) 2 5OOA/TERM/MOD BU S/RJ45

{

3-4

)

)

)

Products for ntegroted

So utions

weflfe

o tro

er decr for:

Erlruders tu t

zone furnoces

Kns

Heol

lreolmenl

Corbon

polent

o

The

PC3000 is configured using an

IEC1131-3 compliant PC based tool

with

a function block librarv including

- Autotune

PID

-

Ra.p

Dwell Programmer

- Communication Drivers

Standard multiloop applications are available.

The PC3000 includes sequencing using Sequential Function Charts

(SFC) for start up strategies, shut down and orher machine or process changes.

wscoN

Drivo

Ordering

codes

Coll us

for

help with ordering ond technicol informotion

24O/32O series s2000

@

487W

x

l32H x 320D

mm

Spec

f

col

ons

,/O mcdu es:

An. lnput x 4: mV, T/C, mA, PTI 00

(indiv. chonnel isolotion ond CJC)

An. Output x 4: mV, V

Dig lnput x 14:24Y dc,24OY oc, #c.

Dig Output x 12: Reloy 1A, Logic

GPU:

68020 LCM-plus with 3 ports

(RS422lRS48s/RS232)

Ope

llng temperolure:0-50"C

Re nl ve hum dlty:

5 lo

95o/o non-condensing

Supply:

85-264Y oc tounl

ng:

3U

l9'rock

(12 modules) ponel or bulkheod

Dols sheelz

HAO2223O

Basic

Product

Module

Type

Version

0plion

Exomple ccdes

PGSOOO.A

YlRt OJl3.mY4. . .

PC3000

Controller onologue input module mV

or T/C

PGSOOO.D

.YlI3

O]l3.-2lt11

PC3000

Controller

24V digitol

input module

PC3

OOO.lctPlUS

YlRg

O]l3.tOf,tltl.ilOtEt.32O

PC3000 LocolControl Module

(CPIJ)

0pti on 0plion

3-5

Products for ntegroted Solut ons imdeuss@

Gonl

gurntiom

$o$ wtr&

*or: 25 in

cr&X

€mxa*m'w&Xerclnd

2 & 25 dea for

:

Controller

conf

igurotion

Cloning controllers

Commissioning

Dislributors

Mointenonce deporlments

FPlI

0m

0m trm

0m iTools is a Windons@ based softu'are package designed to configure communicatingZZ00,2400 panel controllers and the 2500

I)lN

rail controllers.

It will

operate on anv personal computer running Wndows@95, 98 or

NT Ir

uses Modbus RTLI communications via a serial port.

iTools rvill scan the network on request, and

identify

any Series 2000 controller chat is connected to the netrvork and has a valid Modbus address. lJsing

Eurotherm's unique 'Remote Interface Protocol' iTools provides a replica of the attached

instruments'fronr

panel.

This

replica can then be used by the operator, using mouse clicks to simulare pressing the buttons.

The

faceplate provides an exact repeat

ofthe

attached instrument, therefore hidden parameters or promoted parametcrs

wiIl

remain exactly as theV are

in

the actual controller.

The

faceplate is an ActiveX'^' component u'hich can be used

within

an-v

ActiveX containe r application, such as Msual Basic forms.

In addition ro the controller faceplate, all the parameters rvirhin the controller are available in a separate window. Each parameter

list

is shown as a folder, and bv clickirrg on

it,

all the parameters

in

that

list

are displayed, together

with their

current value.

Copving the complete set of parametervalues from an attached controller to a

file

can be done at the click of a button - this

file

can

be'cloned'onto

a new controller to provide a duplicate.

BeneI ts

Auto network identificotion

node lmmediote stort up

Cleor porometer

disploys

Minimises set up error

Reduces commisioning time

Clone'sove'ond'lood' Quick,guoronteedconlrollerconfigurotion

Modem/NetworksuPPort

Enoblesworld-wideservice

codes

roo

tslw

N

/

3.

t /

coilP,/mo

DBU9

/ glD,/xo]l

E/E 1lO

Spec

f col

ons

t

n murn ploilorm:

Windows@95, 98,

l6Mb

RAM

Windows@NT,24Mb RAM

VGA (SVGA preferred)

Disk spoce:

-sMb

Gommun collong:

OPC'" Driver for Modbus RTU vio seriol port

Client/Server over MS networks or remote modem

Iorget lnetruments:

2400 ond 2200 with communicolions

Offers replico foceplote

2500:

2500 user wiring

Other Eurotherm instruments will be added

Doto sheet:

HAO26177

3-6

)

Products for lntegrqted

So

ut ons mdervwdre

Fse$mr w terM 2

)

)

)

I

)

I

)

I

)

FactorySuite '" 2000 is the world's

first

integrated, component-based

MMI

System.

Wth

FactorySuite 2000, you have access ro all the information vou need to run your factory.

FactorySuire 2000 runs on the Microsoft@ Windows

NT

4.0 operaring sysrem and the

MMI

and clients run on Windows 95.

The

following componenrs of FactorySuite 2000 are available immediatelv. For other components please conract Eurotherm Controls sales offices or engineers to discuss vour application and obtain complete product information.

lnTouch'" - Visuolisotion

Wonderware InTouch, the world's leading

MMI,

provides a single integrated view of all your control and information resources.

InTouch enables engineers, supervisors, managers and operators to view and interact

with

the workings of an entire operation through graphical representations of their production processes. Version 7.0 for Wndows

NT

4.0

and Windows 95 includes a host of new and updated features including remore tag referencing, ActiveX supporr, distributed alarm handling, disrribured historical data

with IndustrialSQl

Server, updared user inrerface,

QuickFuncrions, and SuperThgs. Additionally, rhe network application development environment allows systems to be developed for use in large PCbased networks. InTouch's legendary ease-of-use and power dramatically reduce the cost and time associated

with

deploying and maintaining operaror interface/MM

J svstems.

Included

with

InTouch is FactoryFocus'n', a porverful, vierv-only node thar enables supervisors and managers to view real-time plant floor data from a desktop PC anpvhere on the nerwork.

q lao /+\ a l2S:O2 il

lnTouch'":

lhe world leoding MMI for visuolisotion;

lnGonlrol'":

for Windows NT-bosed mochine ond process conlrol;

!ndustriqISQL Server'":

the first reol-time relotionol dotobose for the plont floor;

Scoul'":

o robust internet/lntronet lool

for

remole doto viewing

Feolures

Oblect-oriented Grophics:

Fosler developmenl times. Powerful obiectoriented design lools moke il eosy to drow ond monipulole obiects. Supporls

Microsoft's powerful ActiveX technology, ollowing stondord ActiveX obiects to be used with lnTouch.

Animotion Links:

A ronge of onimotion links moy be combined to provide complex size, colour, movement, ond

/or

position chonges.

Dislributed

multiple

Alorming:

Supports

olorm'providers'

simultoneously, which gives operolors the obility 1o view olorm in{ormoiion from muliiple locolions ot the some time.

Distributed Historicol Trending:

Allows you to dynomicolly specify different historicol file doto sources for eoch of the pens on o lrend chort.

These sources con be other lnTouch dotoboses or ony lndustriolSQL Server dotobose.

o f

:I

:r

:r

J

:r

Coll us

for

help with ordering ond lechnicol informotion

3-7

Products for ntegroled 5o

utions

n erwqle clory erM

tnconlrol'" - Windows NT-Bosed Reol-Time Gontrol

InConrrol is an NT:based real-time open architecture control system that allows you to design, create, test and run application programs for controlling your process

-

faster than ever before.

You can create your own automation solution in a variety of graphic-based and text-based languages.

InControl

supports

direct

lnterfaces to a variety of I/O devices, motors, sensors, and other factory equipment and supports both legacy interfaces as well as new open device interfaces.

InControl provides an integrated control solution that replaces proprietary control systems

with

open architecture NT:based control, providing a lower cost control architecture

with

integrated connectivity, powerful processing capability, and easy expandability.

Like

all Wonderware products, InControl is

tightly

integrated

with

InTouch and the components of FactorySuite 2000, providing unprecedented power and

productivity

to the industrial world.

I

Feolures

Open Architecture:

lnControl con be used on ony plotform thot supports the

Microsoft Windows NT operoting system, including flot ponel industriol work stotions, SMP servers ond open industriol controllers.

NT-Bosed:

lnControl is bosed on notive Microsoft NT, loking full odvontoge of oll the reol-time ond extensibility copobilities thot NT provides. lnControl supports distributed conlrol vio DCOM, with peer-io-peer communicotion built into the product.

UO Supporr:

lnConlrol supports populor

l/O

interfoces

for

Open Device

Network lnterfoces os well os legocy

l/O

systems.

!nlernolionol

is

Stondords:

compliont wirh IEC I lnControl

-3, OMAC ond Open Device Network lnterfoces.

Online Feolures:

lnControl supporls o voriety of online monitoring ond editing copobilities including

Process

Monilor stotus, Force

l/O,

Online

Editing, Power Flow Highlighting, ond

Debugging.

I

{ a

I

(

/

(

I

I

3-8

/

(

I

(

(

I

(

(

I

)

Products for ntegroled

So

ut ons rB'r"*

&

ff i,ai,'

ti:sr,ruser,3flSu

$.r- ir

f:

ft#*$a

ffi$-:i

)

)

I

)

) lndustriolSQl Server'" -

FoctorT

Dqlobqse lndustrialSQl

Server'^' is rhe u'orld's

first,

high-pcrformancc rcal-time relational database lor factorv data.

lt

combines the power and

flexibilitv

of a relational database r,r,ith rhe speed and compression of a real-rime sysrem ro integrare the office

with

rhe facton' floor.

Unlike other I)rocess Information N'lanagerrent Svstems, IndLrstrialSQL Server enrbeds Nlicrosofi SQL Server

''.

InclusrrialSQl, Scrver accluircs and storcs pl'rnt deta rrr

firll

rcsolrrtion and intcgrates real-rinre and histuric plant data u

ith

configurarion, cve nr, summary and ;rroduction data.

Powerful Visuolisotion ond Anolysis Copobililies

Displat'rcal-rimc lnd

historic trcnds of anrrlog. discrctc, nncl evenr data on the same graph. Comparc tags ovcr tirne

uirh

rhc pouerful

nrultiple

time scale functiorralitr: Bookmark and annotate intcrcsting data, and calculare and displa,v staristics.

I)cfine

operating regions and monirrrr process lrchaviour u,ith Vector's

XY graphing features.

Simple

lo

use

I)raga

Rrcron Object

likc

a pump fronr

thc

rrcc conrrol ro rhc eraph area ro r

icu

its trgs ovcr

time. Rlint

ancl click on rhc tinre conrrol ro se

lcct

rhe tirne scrtles. Or usc

lctive'[icnd

insidc

ln'lirtrch

ro c'ornplctel\ rrutomate graphing.

ETFbE

DXCga JO t tE C X r DXCg I

. F, a ra q E E rFTE-]ilffiE= Lli:E;-:I@ a

.!

Feolures

Universol Dolo

Access: Engineers, mointenence monogers ond plont floor operolors con view, onolyze ond presenl reol-lime, historicol ond configurotion doto with the softwore of their choice. This includes Wonderwore clients like FoctoryOffice'", lnTouch ond

Scout, commerciol softwore like

Microsoft Office, ond hundreds of speciolized ond custom tools using SQL or OBDC.

Eose

of use:

lndusiriolSQl Server is outomoticolly configured using lnTouch configurolion informotion, reducing implemenlotion time

lo

minutes. Users ond odminislrotors of lndustriolSQL

Server require no knowledge of SQL, occeleroting the poybock of "foctory informotion ol your fingertips".

Relotionol Query Engine:

lndustriolSQl Server's query engine is the most powerful in the business, enobling users to seorch for ond find doto in order to underslond the complex relotionships ond correlotions between physicol plont, monufocturing operoting conditions, process events, producl quolity ond production efficiency.

Event

System:

lndustriolSQL Server's new event syslem oddresses botch ond discrele industry requiremenls. Events con be detected by lndustriolSQL

Server, or by externol opplicotions like lnTouch

or

lnControl. Actions horness lhe power of BockOffice, ond include reporting, publishing on the lnlernel, ond sending e-moil.

:J

3-9

Products for ntegroted 5o

utions ef c! ef

ce

Feolures:

Digirol comms: Convertor ond/or lsolqtor

Convert/isolote betwe en R5232/RS485(RS422) qnd

RS232IRS485 (RS422l

RS485 (RS422) 4 ond 5 wire connection

Bi-direclionol operotion

'

Exponder: Tristqle outpuls

Dimensions: 155(W) x 65(H) x

t

68.5(D) mm

ter

."

o

Jr3I"

so

e

Feolures:

Automqtic driver enoble on

RS485

30-115200 bqud, Iow-EMC drivers

U n

iverso ! R5232, R5422

/

485

2 / 4

-wir e

i nle rf

oce

Port 2 is o multi-mode port; it supports R5422

(4-wire) ond RS485 (2 - ond 4-wire) Low

EMC

R54221485 drivers

7V to 25V

DC

powered lsolotion

lOOo/o

tested

@

2kV

AC

o nc o s ef ce

Feolures:

O

Direct conneclion for digiro! voriobles to q digiro! communicqlions inler{oce

Supports Profibus

DP

ond Modbus@

Supports time propodioning outputs

DIN roil mounting

o%.,

1

-.^ a)

%, o

Doto sheet ovoiloble HA021448

Dolo sheel ovoiloble HA026030

I

I

!

I

I

Dolo sheet ovoiloble HAOl 759l0ENG

3-r

0

)

)

I

)

)

)

t

sEcTE0hfl

E

S

ilGtE

PHASE

ssDA/ssAA

RSDA/RSAA

TET

05

TEIOA

4255

425A

450

460

470 tcto27

TCt O2a

IHREE PIIASE

TE2OOS/fE2OOA

rc2000

TC200r

RS3DA/RS3AA

rE300

rc3000

Ponel Mount Solid Stote Reloy

Bosic

DIN

Roil Mount Solid Stote Reloy

Compocl Solid Stote Reloy

Compoct Anologue Thyristor

Solid Stote Reloy

Anologue Thyristor

Plug-in Solid Stote Contoctor

Plug-in Configuroble Thyrislor

Plug-in True Power Controller

Solid Stote Conloctor

for High

Power

Thyristor

for High

Power

Low Cost, Two Leg, Solid Stote Contoctor

Two Leg, Solid Stote Contoctor

for

Resistive Loods

Two Leg, Thyristor

for

Resistive ond Tronsformer Loods

Solid Stote Contoctor

Medium

Power Solid Stote Contoctor

True Three Phose Thyristor Unit

for

Resistive ond

Tronsformer Loods

4-l

4-12

4-r

3

4-14

4.t

5

4-16

True Three Phose Thyristor Unit

for

Resistive, Tronsformer ond Complex Loods

4-17

TC3CIO

r

commuit c^r llo fU

$eries

ACCESSOR

ES

Fuses

MG Dr

ver

Un ls

Anci

iory

Equ pmenl

Thyristor ronge for Multi-zone Control

4-r8

High

speed fuses

lor

thyristor protection

Drivers

for

high current opplicotions

260

Diognostic Unit,

483

Lood Sequencer, Filters

for

EMC

complionce,

PD/CTX lntelligent Current

Tronsmitter

for

use

with

Series

2000

Controllers

4-20

4-22

4-22

4-4

4-5

4-6

4-6

4-7

4-7

4-8

4-A

4-8

4.I

O

4.ro

I:

,

).

I

t

I

srs

aa

@

SSDA

SSAA

l'-

-

RSDA

RSAA TEI OS

4255 aa

W

t_'

-

450

1c1027 TUIXXo

TEIoA

425A

460

TCr028

HEATER IYPE

Consiont resistonce

Vorioble resistonce lnductive

Tronsformer coupled

TRUE POWER CONTROT

RATING

Moximum current

Controlled phoses

INPUT

FIRING MODE

OPTIONS

PLF ond/or PLU

Currenl limit

Plug in construction

Diognostics

Alorms

Digitol comms

PAGE REFERENCE

75A l00A 50A l25A l50A 500A 500A 50A 125A l50A 500A*

t

I

t t

L

I

L

BB

I

L

I

A

B

I

A

P

I

A

P

A

P

I

A

P

4-4 4-s 4-6 4-7 4-A

4-r

0 4-18 4-6 4-7 4-A

4-10

L

Logic input

A

Anologue input ond logic inpui

B

Bursl firing

P

Phose ongle firing ond burst firing

-- i:t

I

( a i

{

I a

I

(

(

I

I

4-2

(

I l

(

(

1

(

I

(

(

I

I

470

TUTXXT

Two leg swilching

3 wire loods

s

Three leg switching

3 or 4 wire loods

l_ -

I

RS3DA

TE200S

TE200A

TC2000

TC200l TU2XXo RS3AA TE300

TC3000 TC300l a l50A*

500A

A

P

A

P

63A 63A

500A

t200A* 500A 30A 63A

500A

1000A*

B t

2 2

A

B

2

A

BB

2

A

2

A

B t

3

B

3

A

3

AA

P

3

P

4-8

4-ll 4-rl 4-12 4-13 4-r8 4-14 4-t5 4-16

4-17

*

Higher currents ovoiloble using externol drivers

See producl poges

For additional assistance in selecting the appropriate unit for your application, please ask for our Thyristor Selection Guide HA026173

4-3

SS /SS A

mne8

@etnt

S rxg

5o

id

e Phwse

Stote e

oys

nexpensive

Simple to

nstoll hr iiql

.

;fir,

,tti.- :., ,,

Dimengionc lmmf:

58H x 45W x 35D. When mounted on o verticol ponel.

lood type npuls :

SSD&

:

Resistive,

- DC npul

solenoid, etc.

DC

Log c: ON:>4V OFF:

<1V,

Mox:28VDC

npul

mpedonce

:

l.5K

SS

- AC lnput

AC Loglc: ON:>.l00V

OFF

nput lmpedonce :

40K

=

<2OY,

Mox:

280VAC (or DC)

Gurenl

I

ngr:

l0A,25A,40Aond

75A

Yo toge roting :

300VAC

F

ring mode - togic :

Zero crossing switching

Operot ng

tempe

lure :

0"C to 45"C (up to 80'C with deroting)

Dnlo rheel

z HAO26023

{

+

P eoce

nole

These units must be correclly instolled on on oppropriote heotsink in orderto dissipote the heot generoted.

The heotsink con be in the form of o metol plote such os the bockplote of o conirol ponel or one of the proprietory heotsinks ovoiloble from Eurotherm

:

l0A

heotsink size:

50 x 50 x 57mm

25A heotsink size:

77 x 121 x 67mm

40A heotsink size:

I 40 x I 21 x 67 mm

For further informotion on the selection ond supply of these uniis pleose contoct your locol Eurotherm office

4-4

)

\

I

)

)

)

) ffig"!ir*,, ,

,

qe

.,ik

ffiEru

ffisfi

$Utffiq#

B

{e$*

& a: i.rl

S **t

$X,e'i+i,'li

4 conro, ,3

-

3.128 VDC + e* t' Eurorhem

Relay

a N

'.8*5@vAC

Amp

,

\ol"Fut-r,

nexpensive ntegrol

heqtsink

D mens ons lmmf :

25

omp un l:87H

x

30Wx

50 omp un

l:

126Hx

6lWx

l00D l28D

I

OO

omp unit lood type

:

:

126H

Resistive x

l20w

x

l28D lnpuls :

32

onp

un l:87H

x 60Wx

l00D

75 omp un l:126Nx90Wx

128D

'. ;'., { r.. rr, ,It:

_,a

Low vo

H gh npul toge

DC

Log c (!DCl : ON=>4V

OFF

= <lV

Mox

=

28VDC

voltoge

DG

log

c IHDGI : ON:>20V

current:

LDC

l5mA,

HDC

l3mA

OFF:

<1V,

Mox:30VDC

AC logic: ON:>100V

OFF lnput

mpedonce :

40K

:

<20V Mox

=

280VDC

Fir ng mode

Operoting trlounting

.

Logic

3 Zero crossing switching

temperolure :

0"C to 45"C (up to 80"C with deroting)

:

Ponel or symmetricol DIN roil

Dolo sheel

z HAO26O24

RSOA

E

Current

Cutrent

25 anrps

32 drnps

50 arnps

75 arnps

1

00 amps

500v

254

324

504

75A

'I

004

A lnput

Lo!/ !oltage

DC

Fl 0h

!ollaqe DC

Log c

Loq

C

LDC

HDC

A

Language

Enq rsh

Frefch

G e rman

ENG

FRA

GER

External fuses may be ordered separately, see page 4-20 (lnternal fuses on 50, 75 and 100amp units)

External fuses nay be ordered separately, see page 4-20 (lnternal fuses on 50, 75 and 100anp units)

BSAA 500v

E

Cutrenl

25 arnps

32.1 [ps

50 inrps

75 ailps

100 Jrfps

Culrenl

254

324 s0A

75A

100A

A

Language

Efil rsh

Frc fcl

)

Ger n.tn

ENG

FBA

GEF

,w

:*s

4-5

So

id Stote

Re

oys

ond

Power

Conlro ers

I /

I

S ng e crse

Go ocl

yr

slors

Robusl

Symmelr co D

N

ro

mounl

ng

SpeciI colions

Dlmenr

TEI O5

:

onr lmmf : l6A;

I

l5H

x 35W (53W wirh

PLF) x 93D, weighr

3209

25A;

115H x 53W (70W wirh PLF) x 93D, weishr 500s

4OA,',ll5Hx88W(105WwirhPLF)x93D,weighr7709

5OA,

ll5Hxl05W(l23WwirhPLF)x93D,weishr8809

TE

I OA :

Dimensions os TEI0S with PLE Weights; I 64: 5509,

25A

7OOg,40A: 9009 50A: I 2009

Lccd type :

TEI0S resislive or short wove infrored. TE

I0A resistive, vorioble resistonce, short wove infrored or inductive.

npuls : tEl

OS

:

DG

DC

1og

1og

AG 1og c-vo loge c.curnent c.yo

:

32V

(>5V ON : <2V OFF), input impedonce 1K l.ge

:

48V (>30V

ON

: <5V OFF), input impedonce 2.7K

AG

log

c-yo logs

: lOmA (>5mA ON : <0.5mA OFF), input impedonce 10C)

:

100-240V (>85V ON : <

l0V

OFF), input impedonce 9.6K

F

fEtOA

PDS(I) 3 Eurolherm bi-directionol lronsmission system

:

DC

vc

lcge:

0 -

5Vor0 -l0V

inputimpedonce l00K DC

curent

z

4

-20mA, input impedonce 250K

r ng mode :

TEI0S zero voltoge switching (synchronised to line).

TE

I0A fosl cycle, single cycle, odvonced single cycle ond phose ongle

Ope

I

ng temperolure :

0'C to 45'C (60'C with deroting)

Dolo sheetg :

HA023806 (TE I 0S) HA026 I 55

(TE I 0A)

Ordering

codes

E

Current

CuEonl

16 amps

25 amps

40 amps

50 amDs

16t

2i a0

$r

A

Voltage

120 volts

240 volts

480 volts

500 volts

12W ztlllU

{80v

Stxtv

E

lnput universal DC

48 VAC input

100-240 vAc

PDS lr) Heater

Break

PDS

(1)

Detect

Cutrent

Monitorin0 tcc

LTG

HAG ms1

PDs2

E

Language

English

French

German

EXG

FRA

GEB tr

0ption

Pailial load lalluro

None

Belay open in

Relay closed in

Erternal fuses ordered separately, see page 4-20.

00 alarm

PLF alarm

IPF

(1 ) PDS same

(not available with PLF/IPF) uses the two wires to control the switching ol the

TEl0S and to feedback load status

PDS Heater Break Detect will tnnsmit the power denand signal to a TEl0S typically from a

2200 Series controller and read back a heater break alarm.

Similarly, PDS Current Monitoring will transnit the power demand signal to a TE10S and read back load current, open and shoi cicuil alarms.

Erternal fuses ordered separately, see page 4-20.

E

Current

Currsnl

16 amps

25 amps

40 amps

50 amps

't6t

251 aoA

50

A

Vollage l 00 volts l lEY

115 votts

115Y

200 volts 28ry

230 vohs

23oY

240 votts 2{lY

2nvofis ZfN

380 votts

400 votts

415 volts

440 volts

480 volts

500 volts a80u

{txtv tl5V

{,r0u

{00v

500u

For non standard voltages specify the next highest from voltage table and choose auxiliary supply option

E

lnput

0-5v

0-10v

4-20mA

0u5

0v10

{mM0

!I

Firing Mode

Phase

Fast angle cycle

Single cycle

Advanced single

Pf

FC

FGI cycie

SGA

B

0plions

Auxiliary

1

15V

Auxiliary 230V

'

'

Current limil

tr

Langrage

English

French

German

115

230 ct

ElIG

FBA

GER

Auxiliary supply option only requied for voltages not shown in voltage selection box.

(

(

I

(

(

I

I

{

4-6

{

I

I

)

)

t

i

)

)

)

)

)

I

)

I

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

I

I

)

)

)

)

Current

up to

125 omPs

DIN roil

or ponel

mounting

Dimensions (mrnf

: t

5A;

I 34H x 98W x 94D, weight

0.6kg

4OA,63A

t34H x I

t6Wx

155D, weighi

1.2kg

Locd

25A;

134H x 98W x I30D, weight 0.8k9

,l90D,

75A,1OOA,

l25A l90H

x I

lTWx type z

4255 resistive. 425A resisiive (fixed or vorioble), short wove infrored or inductive.

weight 2.0k9

nputs

DG

DC

AG

Log

c-voltoge:

Logic-currenl

Logic-vo

10V(>8VON:<2VOFF) 3200 or24Y

(>l6VON:

<2VOFF),

:

20mA (>5mA ON : <0.5mA OFF), input impedonce 10C2 inputimpedonce

l.5K

loge z

24V I>ZOY ON : <6V OFF) 2KO or 48V (>30V ON :

<l0V

OFF), input impedonce 3K

240V (>90V ON : <35V OFF), input impedonce 9.3K

DC

DG

vo toge :0-5V

(75K),

l-5V

(75K),

0-l0v

(85K) use 0-5V for monuol conirol

currenl :

0-5mA (impedonce I K),

0-l0mA

(imp. 47Ot>),0-20mA (imp.

2704),

4-2OmA (imp. 270Q)

F

I

ng mode z

Operot ng lemPerolure

Mounting

4253zero voltoge swiiching (sychronised

:

0'C io 50"C

:

Ponel, symmetricol or osymmetricol DIN to roil line).

4254

fost cycle, single cycle, slow cycle

Dotn sheet :

HA023781 ond phose ongle.

External fuses ordered separately.

see page 4-20

425S

96 00

E

Gunent

I 5 afrps

25 amps

10:nrps

63 afrps

154

254

404

63A

75 dnrps

1

00 irnps

I 25 Jmps

'

Fan cooled (fan consLtutplion

15 watts)

754

1004

125A

4254

A

Voltage

120 vo ts

210 vo ts

4l 5 volls

440 volls

180 ,i o IS

120V

240V

415V

440V

480V

E

Fan Supply

[]o iif

1

00 volts ll0 lo 120 volts

200 vo ts

220 1o 240 vo ts

000

100v

'110v120

200v

220U241

I

lnput (Logic signal)

E

Language

DC

AC

LGC

ACL

Efglrsh

French

Gennan

EI.IG

FBA

GEB s6 00

E

0plion

No PLtjdetecl on

Belay open rn altml closed rf alann

F lter

Nale Pathal load lailue oDlnn onl'l avJtltl)le rttlh

0C inpul

PLI

IPF

FILT

E xte rn al f u ses o rd e re d sepa rately, see page 4-20.

E

Cuilenl l5anps

25 amps

40 irnps

63 anrps

15A

25A

404

634

75 ailps

75A

100amDs' 1004

125 arnps 125A

'

Fan cooled lfan cansunlplion

1

5 v/afts)

A

Voltage

1

20 volts

210 volts

440 volls

480 volls

500 !'o ts

120V

240v

440V

480V s00v

E

Auxiliary Supply

I 00 volts '100V

I 10V

200 to 120 vo ts 110V120 volts

200V

220 to 2.10 voits 220V240

0-5 volls l -5 volls

0'10 !olts

0'5 nrA

0V5 0 10 mA

1V5 0'20 mA

0V10 4 20 mA

0mA5

0mA'10

0m420

4m420

E

Firing Mode

Phase angle tasl cyc e

Slngle cyc e

S ow cycle

PA

FC tcl

SC

E

Language

Englrsh

Fre n ch

German

Et{G

FEA

GEB

E

0ption

No r)Lrrrenl I r]r

Current

F ller t

00 inrt lPA only)

CL

FILT

4-7

So

id Stqte Reloys ond

Power

Conlro ers d*// rtese u. stfs

450 So

d

Stote Contqctor

460

Anq

ogue Thyr

stor

47O

True

Power

Gonlro er

Specif colions

D mens onc lmmf :

451,461;247H x76W

x236D, weight 3ks

452,

452; 247H

x

l l 4W x 236D, weight 4kg

453,463;

247H x

1

52W x 236D, weight 5kg

454,464;280H

x I 52W x 235D, weight 5kg

47O;249H x l70W x236D, weighr 3.5kg

471 ; 282H x I 70W x 236D, weight 5kg

472; 249H x

1 1

5W x 236D, weight 2.5kg

lood type :

450 resistive. 460 ond 470 resistive ( fixed or vorioble), tronsformer coupled or induclive.

nputr

45O

:

DC

DG

log

c-yc togG

:

>3.5V ON : <2V OF[, input impedonce 2.5K

:

> I .5mA ON : < I mA OFE input impedonce 2.5K

460

Fh

Log

G.GUr?Gnl t

DG

Vo toge :

0-5V 1-5V

0-l0V

input impedonce

l00K

DG

Current :

0-5mA, 0- l OmA, 0-20mA, 4-2OmA, input impedonce 25OK

4fO

z

DG

Vo

loge:

0-5V

l-5V

0-10V, inputimpedonce >100K

DG

Gurrent ng mode

:

0-5mA,

0-l0mA,

0-20mA, 4-2OmA, input impedonce 250C)

:

450 logic firing with zero vohoge switching. 460 ond 470 single cycle, fosl cycle, fost cycle with soft slorl, slow cycle, phose ongle

Ope

t ng

tempe

ture :

0"C to 50'C

Dotc gheer:

HA016953

4-8

:

(

I

(

I

/

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

4

(

I

!

I

I

(

(

I

(

(

I

I

1

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

I

I

I

(

I

(

I

I

(

I

I

t

Ordering

codes

96 00

Fuses internal except

150A lor unit, see page 4-20.

I

Easic Producl

A

Current

15A

25A

40A

55A

75A

100A-

125A'

150A'

/t51

451

451

$2 tt2

15 amps

25 amps

40 amps

55 amps

75 amps

1

00 amps

125 amps

150 amps t

081

082

083

062

113

11{

117

100

1il

'

Fan cooled (23VA) t Requires exTernal luseholder and fuse -see page 4-20

E

Vollage

1

20 volts

240 volts

277 volls

440 volts

500 volts s

10

13

32

28

29

E

Fan Voltage-

1 1

5 volts

230 volts

1

15 and 230V

380 and 230V

440 and 230V

500 and 230V

11

36 t9

43

17

41

'

453 and 454 units only

tr

Language

English

French

German

EI{G

FRA

GER tr

0ption

TTL input

Multi-drive

10 input

21

Partial Load

Failure detection

(open in alarm)

Xl

0vercurrent shutdown (with

PLF option ony)

68

PLF (closed in alarm) 37/83

Filter

No

RtT baseplate

76

Fuses internal except for l50A unit, see page 4-20.

96

I

Basic Product

A

Currenl

Raling

15A

254

40A

55A

754

1

00A'

1

504't

461

461

461

62 fiz

45:l

1il

464

15 amps

25 amps

40 amps

55 amps

75 amps

1

00 amps

125 amps

150 ampst

'

Fan cooled (23VA) t Requires external fuseholder and fuse -see page 4-20

0E1

062

083

062 fl3

11t

117

100

E

Voltage

'l 15 volts

240 volts

277 volls

440 volts

500 volls t0

13

32

2E

29

E

Auxiliary Supply l15and230V

380 and 230V

440 and 230V

500 and 230V

E

lnpul

19

$

41

0-5Vdc

1'5Vdc

0-1 ovdc

0-5mA

0-1omA

0-20mA

4-20mA

000

060

060 m9

071

012

07t

tr

Language

English

French

German

EXG

FBT

GEB

E

Firing Mode

Fast

Slow cycle cycle

Phase lllll lEO

Sinole cycle

160 angle

W2.

Fast cycle with

Phas€ angle start

055

Slow cycle with

Phase angle start lFo

E

Option

No baseplate

PLF closed in alarm (open as standard)

60Hz

76

8t

69

96 00

Fuses internal except for

I

50A unit, see page

4-20.

E

E

Basic Product

470

47-l

471

472

(754 max) mar)' mil)' only) t

410

113

471

117

111

17it

000

'

Fan cooled (23VA) t Requires external fuseholder and fuse -see page 4-20

E

Voltage

1

10 volts

1 15 volts

220 volts

240 volts

380 volts

41 5 volts

440 volls

480 volts

500 volts

Higher cuilenl units available using

Driver and external thyrislors consult Eurotherm Controls

10

51

12

13

a

26

15

N

I

Auxiliary Supply

1

15 and

230V

19

380 400V 415V and

230V

440 and

500 and t3

230V

17

230V U

El

Nominal Current l5A

Model470 O1

254

Model

470

0t2

40A

Model

470 llGl

554

Model470 lh2

754

Model

470 ll3

1

00A

Model

471

11{ l25A

Model

471

117

1504

Model

471 lm

External thyristors Model

472 0m

0-5vDc

1-5VoC

0-1 ovDc

0-5mA

0-lomA

0-20mA

4-20m4

E

Firing Mode

Fast cycle

Slow rycle

Single cycle

Phase angle

Fast cycle with

Phase Angle Start

Slow cycle with

Phase angle start

001

(EO

160

w

0n5 tE6 ue

060

060

069

071 ot2

07it

E

Control Mode

True Power

tr

Language

English

French

German

EIG fn

GER

2t

n

ID

Oplions

Current Limit

(Phase Angle or Phase

Angle Start only)

55

PLF closed rn alarm (open as standard)

E3

60Hz

No

69 backplaie

75

4-9

:v,:r . i, l,

f:=*

'

'lssd

*S*{tflp

Compoct

unit

for high

Power loods

Firing

modes

to suit

qll oqds

,=.,;;

'

" i6u i1,rr,',

,r" r.',

Dirnensions lmmf :

570H x

l33W

x 268D; weight 1Okg

lood type

z TClO27 resistive.

TCl028

resistive (fixed or vorioble), lronsformer coupled or inductive'

npuls

I,, I

.r;

: DG

Log c.voltoge

:

10V

(>5v oN

: <1V OFF), input impedonce 390Q

DG

AG

Lolic.currenl :

20mA (>4mA ON : <0.2mA OFF), inpul impedonce

log

G.yo loge

390Q

,fS

.

DG

Vo

tu:g

: DG

Vo

: l00V to 240V (>85V

oN

: <

l0v

oFF), input impedonce 10K

tsge : o-lv l-5V 0-t0V 2-l0V

(impedonce

68K)

Firing mode :

TCl02Tfost cycle with supply voltoge compensotion.

DC

Current:

0-20mA, 4-2omA (impedonce 250Q) role

:

0-5V

l-5V 0-l0V 2-l0V

(impedonce

50K) DC

Currenl :

0-20mA, 4-2OmA (impedonce 250Q)

TCl028 fost cycle, single cycle, slow cycle, fost or slow cycle with soft stort, ond phose ongle.

Operoting temperoture

tlounting :

Ponel mounting

:

0"C to 50'C (40"C for 5004 unil, 50"C if de-roted to 4504)

Doto sheel

z HA021467

Fuses internal, see page 4-20

96 00

TC1027

E

Currenl

A

Vollage

Baling

300A

.1C0A-

500A'

3004

4004

5004

2.10 !olts

4.40 vo ts

480 volts

'Fan cooled tatal Aux su/Plv 35VA

240V

440V

480V

E

Auxiliary Supply

1 10 volts

1 1

5 volts

220 vo ts

2.10 volls

1

10V

115V

220lJ

240U

0 5 volts

1 5 volts

0 10 volls

2

1

0 volts

0 20mA

0v5

1V5

0v10

2V10

0mA20

.1-20 mA

Loqrc dc Lnpul

10V or 20ilA

Lo0rc ac rnput,

I

00 to 2{oVAC

4mA20

LGC

ACL

E

Oplion

Fr se Farl lVlcroswrlch FUMS tr

Language

E nq

I rsll

Frer ch

Ge rna

I

ENG

FRA

GER

Fuses internal, see page 4-20

TC1

028

96 00

E

CrIIenl

z

Uollage

Baling

300A'

400A'

500A'

7s0At

900A1

1

200A1

1

65041

'Fan coaled t6

SVA)

3004

4004

5004

7504

9004

12004

16504

1

00 volls ll5vots

200 volls

220 volts

210 volls

100v

11 5V

200v

2?0u

240V

330 !o ts ll5 volts

440 vo ts

480 vo ls

500 vo ts

I Above 50AA hyt tstors are external t0 dt tve

Higher cu-]enl ratings available using MC1028 driver and external thyilstu devices cansull Eur1thet nl

3B0V

415V

440V

480V

500v

E

Fan Supply

Nofe (up

115vots volts ro

500A1

000

115V

240V

E

lnpul

0 5 volts

1 5 volts

0 l0vots

2 l0 volts

0-20 mA

4-20 nrA

0v5

1V5

0v10

2V10

0m420

4m420

E

Firing Mode

Phase Jrgle

Sing e cvc e

Fast cycle sott staI

PA

Slow cycle

SGI- Slo'r cyc e

FC viLth sott slad

Fast cycle

Fast cvc e \!lth

sofl starl

Slow c!/Cle vr'rtll

SFC solt start & end wrlh

& end

SDF sc ssc s0s

E

Language

Englrsh

French

German

EI{G

FBA

GER

E

option

Fuse Fall lvlicrosvr' tc l

RMIS Cufl ert

Signal r

D spla_v

60Hz

PLF ope r n alar nr

FUMS

RMS

60H

IPF

4-r

0

)

)

)

)

So

id Stqte

Re

oys

qnd

Power

Contro lers

/re fr ree

se

esstve

s

Feolures

Gompoct

un I for

med

um

power

loqds

Econom

cq

lwo eg

sw

tch

ng

Specif crrl ons

D menr onr lmml :

I 89H (l 95 for fon cooled 53A unit) x

1

I 6W x

1

31 D; weighr 2.3kg, (2.9kg 634 unir)

lood type

:

Resistive

npuls :

TE2OOS

:

DG

loglc :

32V mox. (>5V ON : <2V OFF) olso lOmA - self limiting (>5mA on <0.5mA

AG

lca

c lLAGl

:

53V mox. (>20V ON : <5V OFF), input impedonce 2.2K

AC

log

c IHAGI

:

253V mox. (>85V ON :

<]0V

OFF), input impedonce 9.6K

TE2OOA :

DC

Vo loge :

0-5V 0-10V, input impedonce 100K

OFF), impedonce I K

F

DG

Gurent z

4-2OmA, input impedonce 250C)

r ng mode :

TE200S logic. TE200A burst firing or single cycle

Operot ng lemperolure :

0 to 45'C tounl

ng :

Symmetricol DIN roil or bulkheod

Dolo gheel

z HAO26486

Order

ng

codes

@

External fuses ordered separately, see page 4-20.

E

Currenl

Ralin0

16 amps

25 amps

40 amps

50 amps

63 amps'

A

Voltage

16A

254

40t

504

634

240 vo ts

480 vo ts

500 vo ts

'Fan coolgd (1sVA)

240U

480V

500v

E

Fan Supply

NONE

(below 63A)

1'15 vo ts

230 vo ts

000

1t5V

230V

E

Currenl

Fatlng

16 amps

25 amps

40 amps

50 amps

63 amps

'

'

Fan cooled

(l3VA)

10

25

404

504

5it

@

a

Voltage

20ovolts

230 volts

240 volts

277 volts

380 volts

200t

230V

240U

21W

SEOU

400 volts

415 vons

440 volts

480 volts

500 volts

100v

415V

&utv

{80v

500v

For non standerd voltages specify lhe nexl highest from voltage table and choose auxiliaty supply option

E

lnput Logic

DC

AC 24-48V

100-230v

LGC

LrG

HAC

tr

Mornling

Bulkhead

DIN rail

BKD

DtI

tr

Language

English

French

German

Italian

EIIG

FRA

GEN rA

E

Fan Supply

NONE

(below 634)

115vots

230 vo ts

000

115V

230V

B

lnput

0to5V

0to

10V

4 to 20mA

tr

Firing Mode

0u5 ovt0

{m420

Eurst

Sin0le liring cycle

FC

FGl

External fuses ordered separately, see page

4-20.

tr

Mounling

Eulkhead

DIN rail

E

English

French tr

Oplion

Man ual

EtlG

8r0

DtI

German

FBA ltalian

Auxiliary

1 1

5V'

Auxiliary 230V'

GER

ITA

115

220

Auxiliary supply oplion only requted fot voltages not shown in vollage selection box

4-t I

dr

l:,

ri:"fff .. t'

t.'!

:rr-

'.. l.

:,

i

t:i '.

. il''l'l'-

s

#l;e

+c1**"*

s

oi

t

: o

Economy

three phose

control

Control

of

high

current resistive

loods

D mens ons lmml :

Up to

1

50A; 480H x I 33W x 268D; weight

1

Okg

2504; 480H x248W x268D;weight 16kg

300 to 5004; 570H x 248W x 268D; weight 16.5k9

lood fype

:

Resistive

lnpuls

DC

log

c-vollage

AC Log

DC

vo c-voltoge

:

1

0V (>5V ON : <

I

V OFF), input impedonce 390Q

:

I00V to 24OY (>85V ON : <

l0V

OFF),

tcge :

0-5V I -5V 0-'l OV,2-10V, input impedonce 68K input impedonce 10K

F

DC

currenl :0-20mA,

4-2OmA, input impedonce 250C)

r ng mode :

Fost cycle with supply voltoge compensotion

Operoling temperolure :

0"C to 50'C (40"C for 5004 unit, 50'C if de-roted to 4504)

f,lount ng

:

Ponel mounting

Doto sheel

z HA021432

Ordertng

ccder

96 00

Fuses internal.

see page 4-20

TC2000

E l-oad Conriguration

Threc phase oads

Two srngle phase loads

02

21

E

Currenl

60 arnps

75 amps

100 amps'

150 arnps'

250 amps'

300 amps'

400 anrps'

500 anrps'

Fan cooled

604

75A

1

00A

1

504

250A

3004

4004

5004

E

Vollage

120 volts

240 volts

277 volts

140 volts

480 vo ts

500 vo ts

660 volts

(not

CE)

1

20V

240V

277V

440V

480V

500v

660V

E

Auriliary Supply r''

NONE

1

1

0 volts

1 1

5 volts

'120 volts

220 volts

240 volts

000

1t0v

115V

1

20V

22tU

20tV

(1 )

Auxliary supply only required far analogue inputs u

Ltnits over 754

E

lnputl

0-5 vo ts

1

-5 volts

0-1 0 volls

2-10vots

0-20mA

4-20mA

Loglc dc nput

10v

Logic ac input

100,240v tr lnpul 2

0v5

'M

0v10

2V10

0m420

4n420 rGc

ACL

Three phase loacls 000

Srngle phase loads selecl frorn inprt

1

Ist above

E

Language

Enq rsh

French

Germrn

EI{G

FBA

GEB

E

0ptions

Frrse larl mrcro-

s\,/rtch€s

FUMS

Partral Loail unbalancet lopen in alarnt)

PLU

Parlral [oad

Ufba ilncel

(closed ro alarm) IPU

f

PLU ilPU anlv avdilable far lhree phase applications vith analogue or DC Logic lnput

4-12

t

)

I

)

)

)

Economy

three phose

control

Deloyed firing for trqnsformer loqds

D mens

Up

ons lmmt :

to

1

50A; 480H x

I

|3W x 268D;weight

2504; 480H x 248w x 268D; weight

1

1Okg

6kg

300 to 5004; 570H x 248W x 268D; weight 16.5kg

7504; 560H x 3g0W x 510D; weight 35kg

9004 ro I 2004; 560H x 380W x 51 0D; weight 39kg

Note; 690V units up to 500omps ore the some size os the stondord 500omp unit

lood type

:

Resistive, tronsformer coupled or inductive

npuls :

DC

vo lqge

s 0-5V I -5V

O- t 0V, 2-10V, input impedonce 100K

F

DC

currenl :

0-20mA, 4-20mA, input impedonce 50Q

ring mode :

Fost cycle, slow cycle, logic

operot ng temperoluie : 0"c

to

50'c

(40"c for 5004 unit, 50"C if de-roted to 45oA)

Mount ng

:

Ponel mounting

Dolo sheel z

11AO21432

Ordedng

ccdes

TC2001

CTE BAR s6 00

I

Load Conliguration

Three phase loads

Tlvo single phase loads

02

21

Z

Currenl

60 amps

/5 amps

1

00 anrps

1

50 amps'

250 amps'

300 amps'

400 amps'

500 amps-

750 amps'

900 amps'

1

200 amps'

1

650 anrpsf

.

Fan cooled

900A

1

2004

1

6504 f Above

1

200A th\/ristors are external ta dnve using MC2001 Driver tsee page 4-22)

Fau st)pply of

I 15,,'210V required

60A

754

1

00A

1

504

2504

300A

4004

5004

7504

E

vottage

1

00 volts

1

10 volts

I l5 Vo[S

120 volts

200 vo ts

220 volts

240 volts

380 volts

4

1

5 volts

440 volfs

180 vo ts

500 volts

690 volts

380V

41 5V

440V

480V

500v

690V

100v

110V

115V

1

20V

200v

220U

240U

E

Fan Supply nternal up to

I 200A

'l

15 volts

240 volts

00

115V

2[tU

E

lnput l

0-5 volts

1

-5 volts

0-1 0 volts

2-1 0 volts

0-20mA

4-20mA

0v5

1V5

0v1 0

2V1 0

0m420

4m420

E

lnpul 2

Three phase loads

Srngle phase loads

0-5 volts

1

-5 volts

0-1 0 volts

2-1 0 volts

0-20mA

4-20mA

000

0vs

1Vs

0vl

0

2V10

0m420

4m420

E

Firing Mode

Logrc

Fast cycle

Slow cycle

LGC

FC

SC

I

Control Mode

Supply compensat

Load n

00

voltage

V'

Load

Active current

Power

W

E

Language

Engi s l

Fre nc h

Gerilaf

ENG

FRA

GEH

Bargraph

Bar BAH

lE

Oplions

Fuse fail micro

su/rtches

FUMS

Parlral oad unbalance' '

(open rn alarm)

PLU

Partra load ilnba ance--

(closed in alarnl)

IPU

"

PLU /lPU only available far Ihree phase applrcatDns

Fuses included see page 4-20

Currenl T.anslormer

Current transfor mer fitled

CTE

Note )plton

CTE is used lo supplv ailr."ut information t0 the baryraph and palial load unbalance features

4-13

53 /R ree

se

oi

Stcle

o

t

clor

Features

Economy

three phose contro

Suilqb

e

for resisl ve oqds

Spec

ficol

ons

D menrlonc lmmt :

I 00H x 9OW x 87D

Lood type

:

Resislive, short wove infrored

npuls

DC

Log c

AC

Fh lllDGt

Loglc IHACI ng mcde

:

:

Logic

l5to30Vdc

(ON=>.l5V. OFF

:

90 to 280Voc

(ON=>90V

OFF

<1V), inputcurrenl

l3mA

:

<20V), input impedonce 40K

Operot ng

Dato

lempe

lure : gheet:

HA026025

0'C to 45'C without deroting

Order

ng codes

tr External fuses ordered

0 infrared heater elements) wave

English

French

German

Language

ElIG

FBA

GER tr Erternal fuses ordered

0 inf rared heater elements)

WAVC

English

French

German

Language

EIIG fBA

GEB

4-14

3reeseo

Stcrte

o f ctor

l

)

I

)

tt

I

)

I

\

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

I

)

)

I

I

)

)

I

)

I

I

)

)

)

)

)

I

)

I

)

)

I

)

)

)

)

Dimenslons lmmf :

215H

1235

Lood

for 63A unit)

type

:

Resislive x l55W x

l86D;

weisht 3.1k9 (3.5k9 634 unir) or short wove infrored

npuls :

DC

Vo toge

s 0 lo 5V 0

to l0V

inpul impedonce

.l

00K

DC

Current 3 4lo

2OmA,, input impedonce 250C2

Iidng

mode

:

Logic, fost cycle, single cycle, odvonced single cycle (4 or 6 wire lood configurolion)

Operol ng lemperolure :

0 to 45'C withoul deroting tounting

:

Symmetricol DIN roil or bulkheod

Dolo

sheet:

HA026154

TE3(!t)

00

External fuses ordered separately, see page 4-20 (not recommended for short wave infrared heaters)

E

Current

Baling

I6 arnDS

25 ailps

.10 amDs

50 a[]ps

63 amps

g

Fan

164

2sA

404

504

634

Frn rocreri r 13VAr

NONE

(be 0,,? 63A)

1 1 5

!olls

230 vo ts

Supply

000

115V

230V

A

Vollage

230 /o ls

210vots

277 !olts

330 roils

100 !o ts

4 I 5 volts

,1,10 r0lts

.180,olls

500 volls

230V

240U

217U

380V

400v

41 5V

440V

480V

500v

Fot non slandard vol!alles specly the oexl htqh€sl {rcm |ollaqe lable and choose aLtxtllaty supply oplon

E

lnpul

0to5.,ois

0 ti) l0 !olls

I lo 20inA

0v5

0v10

4m420

E

Firing Mode

Lo! c

S,n!l

|

[YCl€

Bur st 3 c\/c es

Burst l6 c/clcs

1

28 c.,cles

Ad!afc.d s oq c cyc c l4 or 6 wrrel

LGC

FC1

FC8 c16

128 scA

I

Load Conlig.

De ta i3,,rret

0Den delta (6

Slar (3 Y/ rel

Slar i.1 u

30 v/rre)

60 rer

3S

45

E

Mounling

Billkhead

DIN ra

I

8XD

0tr

E

Manual

E ng l1 slr

Frenc h

Germln tal an

EtIG

FRA

GEE

ITA

E

option

ArxrliJrv 115V

Aurrl arri 230V

1 t 115V

230V

ALtxthary vollage supply opllod only reqLilred lor vollages nol shown n seleclion box

4-15

€3 / 3 r

rue ree se yrislors

Lood

True

three phose

conlro

D

ognostic sockel

to q d

commissioning

Dlmens ons fC3OOO

lnmf

:

:

25

to

25OA;480H x 248tN x 268D; weisht 16ks (2504: l8ks)

300

to

500A; 570H x 373W x 268D; weighr 21 kg

TC3OOI:

AsforTC3000plusodditionolT00AtoIO00A;500Hx377Wx519D;weight46kg

Note, 690 volt unils up to 500omp roting ore some size os stondord 500omp units

operot ng lemperolure :

0"c ro

50"c (40'c

for 5004,

50'c

if de-roted ro 4504)

Xlounting

:

Ponel mounting

lnputs

300

fype

:

Resistive, inductive ond tronsformer

DC

voltoge :

0 to

5V I

to 5V 0

to l0V

or 2 to

l0V,

impedonce

l00K

DC

Log c :

5Y

l0V

20mA (>50% ON : <25%

OFF) input impedonce os obove

Fifng

mode

:

Logic, phose ongle ond fost cycle

curenl

:

0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA,

imp.l00e

Dora sheet :

HA023755

TC3000

96

E

Currenl

25 anrps

40 amps

60 amps

75 anrps

1

00 anrps'

1

50 amps'

250 amps'

300 amps'

100 amps'

500 a

254

404

604

754

1

004

1

504

2504

300A

4004

500A

'

Fan cooled 25VA per lan

2 lans l00A-250A

3 tans 30AA-500A

E

Mar linetoline

240 volts

440 volts

480 volts

500 vo ls

240V

440V

480V

500v

I

Auxiliary Supply (20vA)

100 vo ts

110-120V

200 volts

224-210 V

1 00v

110V120

200v

220U240

E

operating Voltage

'1 10

1 1 volts

5 volts

220 volts

230 v0lts

210 volls

380 volts

415 volts

140 volts

110V

115V

220U

230V

240V

380V

41 5V

440V

Athet voilages avatl,tblL)

E

lnputs

0-5 volts

1

-5 volts

0 10 vo ts

2-l 0 volts

0-20nrA

4-20mA

0v5

1V5

0vt0

2Vt0

0m420

4mA20

E

Logrc (0n/0f1)

Phase anqle

Single cycle

BLrrst

E

No ranrp

Soft start ol burst

Soft sta( and end of burst

Firing Mode

Bamp, solt start/end

I cycles

64 cycles

255 cycies

NRP

URP

UDR

LGC

PA

FCI

FC8 c64

255

E

Load Connection

3 Wire delta

3 Wire star

4 Wire star

,,!ith feutral

6 Wrre open cielta

3D

3S

4S

6D

E

load Type

Res strve lndlrctrve

HES

IND

ll!

Feedback Mode

External

0pen Loop

EX v2

OL

I[

Aux. lnputs & outpuls

Feedback retrans

BTB

Externa feedh;lck

(if nrode

EX rs selected)

0-5v

E0v5

0,10v

E0v10

0-20mA

E0mA20

.1 20mA

E4mA20

Second setpoint input

0-5v

w0v5

0- t

0v

w0v10

0-20mA W0mA20

4-20nrA W4mA20

IE

Language

Engllsh

French

Ge rnran lnlernal fuses see paqe 1-20

ENG

FRA

lE

0ptions

FLrse fail mrcro-switch

PLll closed n alailn

FUMS

IPU

4-16

(

/

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

(

I

I

(

I

(

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

I

)

)

\

I

)

)

T,

CSOO

T lood fype

:

Resislive, inductive, tronsformer ond complex loods requiring current limit

lnputs

DG

DG

vo toge :

0 to 5V

I

to 5V 0

to

lOV or 2 to lOV (t

OOK)

curenl

:

0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA (l

00C2)

Log c

s 5V 10V 20mA (>50% ON : <25% OFF) input impedonce os obove

F

r ng modc

:

Logic, phose ongle, fost cycle ond bursl with phose ongle stort/finish

Doto sheel

z HAO21478

TC3001

Current

25 amps

40 amps

60 amp

75 amps

1

00 amps'

1

50 amps-

250 amps-

300 amps'

254

404

604

754

1

004

1

504

2504

3004

400 anrps^

500 amps'

700 amps'

1

000 amps'

1

1

50 ampst

1

350 ampsJ

1

500 ampst

'1800 ampst

400A

5004

7004

1

0004

11504

't

350A

1

500A

1800A

'

Fan cooled 25VA per lan 2 lans 100A-250A

3 fans 300A-500A /00 &

1

000A 0ne fan

1

1

5VA t Ab1ve 1000A lhynstors are external t0 dxve ustng ilc3001 (see page.1-22)

Fan supply of 220 210V requtred

E

Mar. line lo line Vollage

240 vo ts

440 volts

500 vo ts

660 volts lnon CE)

690 volts

240V

440V

500v

660V

690V

I

Auxiliary Supply

110t0

1

20 volts

224 b

240 volts

110V120

220U240

E

operating Voltage

1

00 volts

1 10 volts

1

'l

5 volts

'120 volts

220 volts

240 volts

380 volls

415 volls

440 volts

480 voits

500 volts

660 volts

690 volts

0ther vollages itvailable

41 5V

440V

480V

500v

660V

6g0v

1

00v

110V

'l l5v

1 20V

220V

240U

380V

E

lnpul

0-5 volts

I

-5 volts

0-1 0 volts

2-1 0 volts

0-20mA

4-20mA

0v5

1V5

0v1 0

2U'10

0mA20

4mA20

E

Logic (0n/Off)

Phase ang e

Single cycle

Eurst

Firing Mode

BLrrst/phase ar0le

8 cycles

64 cycles

255 cycles

8 cycles

64 cycles

255 cycles tGc

PA

FC1

FC8 c64

255

HC8

H64

H55

96 00

E

Bamp, soll start/end

No rarnp

Soft start of burst

Solt starl and end of burst

NRP

URP

UDB

@

Load Conneclion

3 Wire delta

3 Wr e star

4 Wire star wrth nertral

6 Wire open delta

30

3S

4S

5D

E

[oad Type

Inductrve

0ther loads

IND

RES

Fuses see included page 4-20

@

Parlial Load Failure

IE

Current Limit

I

Standard cur ve

Shorlr,vave

ff

rnlrared crrrve

lll

Conhol Mode

Vx

0pen loop

I iV transler//

Externa

SD

IR u2

12

W

OL

TR

EX

Current irnit for

Phase

Angle firing

Drg

Ext comms

Fascia

//

LCOM

pot

LINT

0-5V

L0Vs r

-5v

0-1

Ll U5

0v

L0v1 0

2

10V

12V10

0-20mA

L0mA20

4-20mA L4mA20

Frring quench lor Logic and Burst firing:

Dig comms

Fascra

//

CCOM

pot

Ext

CINT

0-5V

C0Vs

1

-5V

0-1

C1V5

0v

c0v10

2-1

0V

C2V1 0

0-20rnA

C0mA20

1-20mA

C4mA20

lf

0nly avaihbb with cotnnunrcaliotis option lE Aur. lnputs & oulputs

Feedback retrans

RTR

Exter nal feedback

( f mode EX is selected)

0-5v

E0v5

0,1

0v

E0v1 0

0-20mA

E0mA20

4-20mA

E4mA20

Second setpornt input

0-5v

w0v5

0-10v w(lvt0

0-20mA W0mA20

4-20mA W4mA20

@Load

Unbalance

Detection disabled 000

Open in a

arm

PLU

Closed in alarm

IPU

lE

Language

French

English

Ge rman

FRA

ENG

GER

IEtComms

Mode/Speed

No

comms

000

Read only at

9600 baud

R96

19200 baud R192

Bead & write at

9600 baud W96

RrO

1

9200 baud W192

Profrbus

BAUT

R&W Profibus

WAUT lE Comms Prolocol

El- Bisynch

JEUSO

[,1ODBUS@

PR OFI B US@

EIP

JBP

MOP

PTP

IE

0plions

Fuse fail microswrtch

PLF closed in alarnr

FUMS

IPF

4-17

ef

es

OC yr

slofs

Feolures

Reduceswrngcosls

Reduces

setup

t

me

Specif calions

Ope t

ng

temPe

lure :

0"C to 50"C

Burst

I

r ng

un

ls for

resist

ve

ocrds (TUXXXOI

D mens

rurr70:

Fon cooled obove I00A lUl27O

Fon cooled obove 75A

TUr cns lmmf :

40

450

: z

2OO

315 to

40

to 25.A tc

OO

to 25OA

5OOA

754

to l25A

2OO

io

2

504

3t

5

tc

SOOA

23 to

4OA

Single phose, one chonnel

Single phose,

Single phose, two chonnel four chonnel

326Hx

500H x

l70Wx l70Wx

192D

570Hx250Wx306D

395H x

430H

x l70Wx

192D

505H x 27OW

570Hx250Wx306D

458H x

192D

l70Wx l92D x256D l44Wx

193D

Noturol cooling

TUt

470

Fon cooled

:

60

to

l25.A

Single phose, four chonnel 675Hx144W x2O6D lU2l7O z

Fon cooled obove

l00A

1U225@

z

Noturol cooling

40

to

734

OOrol

25o.4

315

tc

5OOA

25

ro 4OA

Two se, one chonnel

393H x

1

70W x

I 92D

430H x

l70Wx l92D

505H x 267W

x247D

Two phose, fwo chonnel

570Hx250Wx306D

458Hx'l44Wx l93D

1u2270:

Fon cooled obove 40A

4O

to

25.4

Two phose, fwo chonnel

675Hx170Wx206D

Locd type

:

Resislive

Fir ng mode

3 Burst firing

Comrnun

Fuces col onc :

Modbus, Jbus, El-Bisynch, Profibus

:

Externol high speed fuses to be ordered seporotely (internol ior 25OA to 500A) - see poge 4-20

(

/

(

1

/

(

(

(

4-18

So

id Stote

Re

oys

ond

Power Controllers

Ano ogue

D

mcnd

TU

lfl z

Fon cooled obove 100A

Fon cooled obove

TUr

60A

45t

:

firing

un

ls for

lmmt :

40

ro

l2r[

2OO I'c 2l,OA

3

5 rc SOOA to

IOO

ro

25.A

2OO ro

2rOA

315 rc

SOOA

25 io aOl ol

oads

lfUXXXl

I

Single phose, one si lwo

Single phose, four chonnel

326Hx17OW

x192D

500Hx17OWx192D

570H x x 305D chonnel

395H x 17OW

x192D

430Hx

17OWx192D

505H x 27OW

x256D

570Hx250Wx306D

chonnel

47OH x I 44W x I 93D

Fon cooled lU

471

z

Fon cooled

60

fo 25.A

Single phose, four chonnel

675H x 144W x2O6D

food lypc r

Resistive or inductive

F

rlng rrode

:

Phose ongle or burst firing

Ccmmun

Jucez col

o

:

Modbus, Jbus, El-Bisynch, Profibus

:

Externol high speed fuses to be ordered seporolely (internol for 250A to 500A) - see poge 4-20

Ordering

codes

E Basrc Prodrrct (1

)

E

Current(1)

TU1 170

TU't 171

TU1270

TU1271

TU1450

TU1451

TU1470

TU1 471

TU2170

TU2250

IUzlO

IUl17[

iltln

Ilr1?70

rur271 ru1{50 rula51

IUTfiD

IUra7l

IU2lM ru2250

25 amps

40 amps

60 amps

75 amps

100 amps

125 amps

200 amps

250 amps

315 amps

400 amps

500 amps

1)

Cuffent range dependanl on basic product, see specifications

6t

aor

I

50r

,5t

12Et lnA

25!r

31rl

{trr

50r

E

Voltaqe

'100 volts

1 10 volts

I

1

5 volts

120 volts

200 volts

220 votts

230 votts

240 volts

380 volts

400 volts

4'15 votts votts

'140

480 volts

'rctv r1w r15U

12W

atr

ZN z[u

2&t

38fl

E

Fan Supply

No tan

1 1 5 volts

230 volts

00

115U zixtv

For cooling infomation see specifications tr lnl)ut

G5 volts

1-5 volts

0-10 votts

2-10 volts

0-20mA

4-20mA

EE

IUE tnllt

ulg

0qtl[ a[lz

E

Firrng [\1ode

SinOle cycle

(1 cycle)

Fast cycle

(8 cycles)

Phase Angle

FGI

FGE

E

Languaqe

English

French

Geman

' Analogue fiing unib onty (TUxXl)

Ero fBt

GM

Control 0plron

g

Control Mode

Conlrol and communications

Board

tr

Protocol

El Bisynch

MODBIISfl

JBUSil

PROFIBUS

Voltage Y2

GGC

[D toad Tyr]e (PLF)

Resislive BEs

EP il0P

J8P

PfP

l[

ContnrLrnrcalrons Iilode

Monitor onty

Romoto control

9600 bauds

19200 bauds

Prolibus

''NotTU2170 fint

s

"102 rrm

4-19

geg

High

speed for sem

-conduclor

proleclion

Spec ficertions

D meng

CFU038

cns lmml llureho derf :

8lH

x

lSWx

68D,

CFU45f 95x26

x 86, CFU258

,l40 x 35 x 90, CFU35f

95x79 x86.

FUI 038 8

l

x I 8 x 68, FUI

451

95 x 26 x 86, FU2258

I

40 x 35 x 90, FU276O 24O x 54 x 1O7.

FU3038

8l

x 53 x 58,

FU345l

95 x 79 x 86, FU3258 I 40 x I 08 x 90, FU3760 I 50 x

1 1

4 x 107.

LAl7176022O x50x

ll0 tounl

ng

:

Symmelricol or osymmetricol DIN roil mounling

Erlerno

fuge ond fuseho

dcr

3 ng c

phore:

Currenl

SSAA RSAA TET OS

4255

SSDA

t0A

cFU038/r0A/00

RSDA TETOA

4254

15

/

164

FUr038/16A

FUr038/16A zsA

CFU4sl/2'NOO CFU451/25NOO

FUl038/2sA

FUl

30A

324

40A

CFU451/40A/00

50A

63A

7sA

CFU2'8/7'NOO

I 00A

I 25A cFU451/32NOO

FU1451/40A

FU1451/404

FU2258/50A

FU22s8/634

FU2258/754

FU2760/100A

FU2760/1254

I 50A

4501460

47lD tA171760

Tlrrcc phcrc and

lll

3cdct

:

Currenl

RS3AA

RS3DA

TE2OO

TE3OO

tutt70/71

TUl270/71

TUt450170 tul45t/71 tu2170

TU2270

1u2250

15/164

254

30A

CFU35r/324/00

40A s0A

50A

63A

754

I 00A

'125A

6NOO

FU3038/2sAl00

FUl038/2sA

FU1451/2sA

FU345r/40Al00

FU2258/404

FU32s8/50A/00

FU145l FU2258/404

FU22\8/60A

FU2258/60A FU22s8/604

FU3760/63NOO

FU22\8/75A

FU2258/75A

FU22s8/754

FU2750/100A FU2760/100A FU22'8/100A

FU2760/125A FU2760/125A

FU22s8/1254

(

I

I

I

I

I

(

I

I

(

(

I

/

I a

I

I

(

I

I

(

I

4-20

(

I

I

I

I

1

(

I

,l

(

(

I

(

I

I

I

I

)

)

I

\

)

)

T

)

)

I

Spmr"m, 'lde,,s,l: i';

Sin !e phose

:

Currenl

SSAA/SSDA

RS3AA/RS3DA

RSAA/RSDA TEI OS/TEI OA

TE200S/TS200A

TE30O

4255/42sA 450/460/470

Series

t0A

1s/16A

csr

7573r

2sA

C5175732

C5175732 cH250024 cH260034

CH26OO24

CHs80t63l24OYl

CHI cH260034

CH3

40v)

40v)

cHr

r02s3(440v)

30A

32A

40A

50A

55A

60A

63A

754

I 00A

1254

I 50A

csr

75734

csl

75733

csr csl75734

cH330044 cH330054 cs r

7s909u050

cs'1 73087u063

75735

CSl 75909U080

csr

75909u r 00

Tleree phose ond fU Series

:

Currenl

25A

TC Series

LAr 72468U0s0

40A

60A

75A

1

00A

1254 r

50A

200A

250A

300A

3r5A

400A

500A

700A

7504

900A

I

000A

I t50A

I 2004 r 3504

'1500A r 6504

I

8004

LAI 72468U080

LAI 72468U080 rA'r72468Ur 00 tA172468U125

14172468U200 t4172468U315

14172468U400

14172468U500

14172468U630

csr

75633U900

csr

75632U630 cs t 75632U800

cst zsz33ul i50 csr

75632U r 000

csr

75632Ur 000

csr

75632U I 000

csr

75634Ur 2s0

csr

75633U r 400 cs r

75634U',r 600 cH3300s4

cHr

r 0044 cHr 20094

cs173246U080

CS173087U080

csl73087ur00

cHr20I4

cs173246u125

CH',t20154 cs r 73246U r

60

CH t 20 l s4

csr

74r

23u2s0

t4172468U315

1A172468U400

1A172468U500

14172468U630 cH340025

TU Series cH260034(FOR FUr

csr

73085(FOR FU

r45l

cH3s00s4(FoR FU I 4st / 40A) cs r 73087u050(FoR FU22s8/ 4OA)

csl

73087U080

csr

73087u I 00 cs173246U125

csr73246Ur60

4-21

cfe

Equ

pmenl

lo enhonce

the

use

of

thyr stors

MC

Driver

Units

These units are used to drive external thysistor divices.

Their main purpose is to enable high current systems to be builc up and they are used to extend the current range of the

TC1028 (single phase), TC2001 (rwo leg control) and TC3001(true three phase control). The driver units are included as part of the complete syscem if a high current

'TC'unir

is specified.

The appropriate MC Driver units; MC1028, MC200l or MC3001 are available separately for use as spares or for creating custom high current systems. They can be ordered by using

'MC' instead of 'TC' in the appropriate thyristor code with the current rating coded as '000'.

Diognostic

Unil,

Mode

26o

This is a dedicated mulrimerer designed as a commissioning aid for use with thyristor units which have a diagnostic socket (see page

4-2\.lt

has a rotary switch to select 20 moniror poinrs wirhin the thyristor unit and ouclet sockets which enable rhe point under test to be viewed on an oscilloscope.

filodel

483

Lood Sequencer

Each 4g3 is a four channel sequencing unic, rhe ourpurs are configured as analogue

0-10V or t ogic depending on the selected sequencing mode.

The outputs drive thyristors or contacts and sequence the load switching so as to minimise harmonics or voluge dips (flicker) during the application of muhi-stage high current loads. Up to four can be cascaded togecher to sequence up to 16 loads.

Fi

lers

In order to comply with EMC test standards, in cerrain applications

it

may be to add series or parallel filters to an installation.

Iffilters

are considered to be a necessary requirement, particularly when thyristors are used in the phase angle firing mode, a range of filters is available from Eurotherm Controls.

PD/GtX

PD/CTX is an incelligenc currenr Eansmitrer designed for use wirh series 2000 controllers. These rwo wire devices can transmit load status and RMS load On-state curreDr and also provide diagnostic information on the Solid State Relay switching device. The status and current informacion can be presented on an appropriately configured Series 2000 controller which can be set up to alarm on high and low load currents as well as on status alarms.

4-22

I

)

)

I

I t

)

)

)

)

)

t

)

I

)

)

)

I

)

),

)

I

I

)

t,

)

)

I

)

Thermosensors

fhermosensorg

Thermocoup es

ond

RTD's

Genero

Purpose Fob*icqted

F

exib

e

Sty

e

FS

Minerql

nsu

oted

Thermocoup es

Resislonce Thermomelers

{Prl

OOI

Sensor

Fiit

ngs

Gonneclors

Wires

crnd Cob es

7675

Se ecfor Sw tch

SEGT

ON o

5-2

5-3

5-4

5-4

5-5

5-6

5-6

5-6

5-6

'2--:

").

_/..,,

&

I

I

t:

Thermosensors

efcoesd

's uf

cfure

to g

eci c

lon

The

temperature sensing requirements of many applications can be met bv means of our custom-made assemblies.

Construction ond sheoth moteriols suit your process from cryogenics to to furnoces.

Choice ol J,K, T, N,

R, S

types

Choice of rigid or ftexible thermocouple sheoths. Single ond multiple sensors

O

Wide ronge of instollotion ond mounling firings ovoiloble

5-2

e)

(.)

.-?..-

Whatever your requirements, simply telephone, fax or e-mail outline details and we

will

be pleased to provide a fast and competitive quotation.

Our capabilities include:

High remperoture type

R

ond

S

lhermocouples for use up to 1600'

C.

Heorry duty

PRT

ond thermocouples with integrol 4 to 20mA trqnsmilter

Type'N' (Nicrosil Nisil) rhermocouples in o voriety of configurqlions

O

Cedified cqlibrotion ot customer specified lemperotures

Fu

Sensor Coto ogue oveii ob e.

Ask

Ior

HAO|3208

(

1

(

I

(

I

{

(

i

I

I

I

I

(

(

I

(

I

(

I

(

(

(

I

(

(

(

I

I

l

(

(

(

(

1

(

I

!

I

I

)

)

)

;

)

I

)

I

)

I

i

)

)

)

I

I

I

)

)

)

t

I

)

)

I

)

t

I

I t

I

Thermosensors

e ero ur se

r ceuted

ef c

e5 e for

use up to 350"C

Thermocouple element shearhed in 316 grade stainless steel

with

welded, closed rounded end and flexible connecting cable.

The

low cost, versatile sensors are suitable for a wide range

of

medium temperature applications including rhe plastics industry.

Telephone or fax

with

your required dimensions, lead type and length and we

will

be pleased to build ro your exacr requlrements.

Standard versions ai,'ailaltle frorn srock in rypes J, K and

T

firted

with

2 metres of braided cable in a varierv of lengths and diameters are shown.

I

I f

I

f f

t

I

I t t

T

t

C Type

30ock codc Slyle

FA

General pupose thermocouples including 2 metres stainless steel braided cable and tails

Probe Dio.

4.5mm

4.Smm

1.5mm

6.Omm

5.Omm

6.0mm

4,5mm

4.5nm

1.5nm

6.0mm

6.Omm

6.0mm

4.5mm

4.Smm

4.5mm

6.0mm

6.0mm

6.Omm

Probe Length lO0mm

200mm

3O0mm lO0mm

2O0mm

SOOrl,m l0Omm

2OOmm

3O0mm

l00mm

2O0mm

300mm

l0omm

2O0mm

3O0mm

l00mm

2O0mm

300mm

Order Code

3n-001

3tt.003

3lr-o04

3n-005

3tt.007

3tr-oo8

3t t-017

3n.0t9

3n-020

3n.02t

3t t.023

3n-024

3n.047

3t1.048

3tt.049

3t r.050

3t t.05t

3t t.052

5-3

Thermosensors

exee

for

use up to 350'C

Flexible thermocouple assembly

with

an adjustable bayonet cap to give spring loaded contact for insertion depths up to

200mm. This versatiliry permits use

in

many applications, minimising spares holding. Adaptors are available to suit the bayonet cap.

Available in rypes J, K and

T with

braided or armoured cable.

Telephone or fax wirh your required dimensions, lead rype and length and we

will

be pleased to build to your exact requlrements.

Standard versions available from srock in rypes J and K

fitted with

2 metres of braided cable, are shown.

Stcck code

Sfle

FS

t

TC Type

x

Flexicouples including 2 metres stainless steel braided cable and tails

Probe Dio.

L5r,n

il5nn

Order Code

3tr.033

3tt.031

efclse efces

for

use up

to

.l200'C

Available in rypes

J,KT

and

N. With

grounded or insulated junctions.

With

or

without

leads.

Wth

IP67 heavy duty or miniature heavy dury heads.

Telephone or fax with your required dimensions and we

will

be pleased to build to your exact requirements.

Standard versions available from stock, are shown.

r

K

x

Order ng code Sty e

tC

Heavy duty mineral insulated thermocouple A 6mm diameter probe fitted with a miniature heavy duty head.

I

I t

TC T ype Probe Length

l00nm

20Omm

?00mm

l0omm

200mm

300mm

Order Code

3l?.010

3t3,otl

313-Ot2

3t?.0t3

313.ot1

3r3-Ot5 x x x x x x

t t

I t t

I

TC Type

Stock code Sty e

tA

Mineral insulated thermocouples including 2 metres stainless steel braided cable and tails

Probe Dio.

l.Sll,a

l.5ns

3.0mm

3.0mn

4.imn

4.5mm

l.5ma

l.5mm

3.0mm

3.0ma

1.imlr

4.ina

Probe Length

250na

SOOarl

250lir

50omm

25otn

50frsa

250srt

SOOsa

250m

50Oa,a

250ma

500ll,all

Order Code

3t2-0 t

312-0 2

3t2-Nt

3t2-N2 tt2-@3

312-001

3124

3

312-Ol1

3t2-OO5

3t2.N5

3 2.N7

3

2-008

5-4

(

(

I

Thermosensors

fl

ess ce er

eefs

for

use up to 450"C

Available in 2, 3, or 4 wire configurations, in single or duplex format.

Wth

leads or lP67 hearry duty or miniature heary dury heads or for wall mounting both indoors or outdoors. Telephone or fax with your required dimensions and we

will

be pleased to build to your exact requireme nts.

Standard versions available from srock, are shown.

Stock ccde Sty e RA

General and tails.

purpose 3 wire PRT including 2 metre cable

PRT wrth PTFE insulated cable

Probe Dio

3.0mm

3.Omm

4.Smn

1.5mm

6.Olrlm

6.0nm

Probe Length

l00mm

200na l00mm

2O0nr l00mm

20ilinm

Order Code

3t+020

3tt&02t

3t4-007

3ttt409

3t1.010

3t4-0t2

3 wire PRT with stainless steel 2 metre braided cable

Probe

Dio.

3.0mm

3.0mm

4.5mm

4.5mm

6.0mm

5.0mm

Probe

Length

Order Code

l00mn

3l+025

2o0mn

3l+026

lOOnn

Sltt-013

200mm

3l+015

l00ma

3l+015

20omm

314-0lt

Sfcck ccde Style

RC

Heavy duty 3 wire PRT. A 6mm diameler probe fitted with a miniature heavy duty head.

Probe

Dio.

5.0mm

6.0nm

6.0mm

6.0mm

Probe

Length

Order Code lo0r,m

315-005 l50mm

315-005

200mm

315-007

SOOmm

315-008

5-5

Thermosensors esf s

To enable secure attachment to the process being measured we offer a wide range of fittings including : compression fittings, flanges, bayonet adaptors and thermowells.

ec fs

Standard and miniature plugs and sockets available from stock.

Fittings and connectors available from stock, are shown in the price list.

fes

es

Thermocouples require connecting cable

with

the same temperature characteristics as the probe. This can be actual thermocouple wire known as'Extension Cable' this is always used where the cable is an integral part of the probe.

The

other option is wire

with

the same characteristic over a

limited

temperature range, usually up to 80oC, this is called

'Compensaring Cable'. Resistance Thermometers are connected

with

copper

wire.

Many types of cable are available, telephone or fax with your requirements.

Cables available from stock, are shown in the price list.

e eec l

C

The

7675 is an 1/8

DIN

panel mounted selector unit which

will

provide selection of up

to l2

thermocouples or 6 resistance thermometers (3 or 4 wire) Selection is made via a front panel rotary switch which includes clear indication of the selected channel number.

Order ng code

for up to 12 thermocouples or other 2 wire signals for up to 6 resistance thermometers 3 or 4 wire

Spec

f col

on

Ccnnecllonr:

Borrierlerminolslrip

npul se ecl cn3

Multipole rolory swilch

D

menglons:

48mm(H)X 95mm(W)x 120mm(D) behind ponel

Ponc

Doto

cut-ouls

45mm(H)x 92mm(W) sheeB

HA026169

5-6

(

I

)

)

)

)

Pr nc

p

es of

P

D Gontro ond Tun ng fhyr slor Sw

tch

ng

Princ

p

es

;,

Sensors Gonslruction g ta

Gommun col ons

Prof

bus Gommun

ceil

ons

CE

nstei nl on Gu de

Guslomer Tro n ng ler

So

es Supporl

Yeor 2OOO Stolemenl

Frfrncip

es *#

FHffi

Ifyou need help in choosing the controller most suitable for your application, please do not hesi[ate to contact our technical help desk on:

01903 695777.

Eurotherm controllers will automatically control process variables such as temperature, humidity, pressure, flow rate, level or Ph - in fact, almost any physical variable that can be represented as an analogue signal.

The example below assumes that the variable is temperature, which is the most common, but che principles are equally applicable to all analogue variables.

The

outomotic control loop

The diagram below shows an automatic temperature control'loop'.

It

consists of a sensor to measure the temperature, a controller and a power regulator.

The controller compares the measured temperature with the desired temperature, called the 'setpoint', and

Gontro

method

wwmWwm$

ffimd

ffwmefim

regulates the output power to make them the same.

The measured temperature is referred to as rhe Process Value,

or'PV

for short.

The difference between the setpoint and the measured value is called the 'error signal'.

lnpul

sensors

An automatic controller requires some means of measuring the process value.

Eurotherm controllers will accept an input from almost any type ofsensor.

Linearisation of the measured value,

if

necessary, will be performed within the con troller.

In temperature applications, either a thermocouple or resistance !hermometer

is rypically used. The type will depend on the temperature range and the environment in which it has to operate.

Please reler to the sensor secrion in this catalogue for details of thermocouples and resistance thermometers.

The

Conftol

Automol

Conlro

Meosured c

Gontro Loop

Oven

In applications where it is difficult to attach a fixed temperature sensor, noncontact temperature measutement can be made using infra-red or optical pyrometers. Eurotherm controllers support inputs from a wide range of pyrometers.

Eurotherm controllers vr,ill accept direct inpucs from strain gauges and pressure, flow, or Ph transducers.

In large process control applications, signal condirioners are normally used to convert the sensor measurement into a 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10Vdc signal for transmission to the concroller. In

Eurotherm controllers it is a simple matter to scale these inputs to the desired display range.

Conlroller oulpuls

An aucomatic controller requires some means of varying the hcaring power. or flow rate, or pressure, to the process under control.

The main output types are:

Reloy, which is used to operate a contactor or solenoid valve in heating and cooling applications.

Logic, which is used to switch a solid srate relay. The benefits are: long life, no maintenance and the ability ro rapidly switch heaters which have a small rhermal mass.

Trioc, Triacs are solid state switches primarily used ro operate solenoid valves. They are also ideal for the positioning of motorised gas burner valves.

DC

milliomps or

vohs, used for posicioning control valves and ro drive analogue input thyristors

(used in phase angle and three phase hearing applications).

(

( d

(

1

(

ll

) i

Types

of conlrol

There are chree main types of control:

On/Otl conlrol

PID

control

Motorised Vqlve Positioning

On/Oll Conlrol

On/Off control acrion is shown in the graph below. The heating power is eirher fully On when rhe temperature is below setpoint or fully Off when ir is above. As a resulr rhe remperature oscillates abour rhe serpoinr.

PID Contro!

Most industrial processes such as plasric exrrusion, merals treatment or semiconduccor processing require scable 'straightline' control of the temperature as shown below. Eurotherm controllers employ advanced PID control algorirhms to provide exacrly rhar.

Temperofure

Setpoinr-

ON ofF ON OFF ON OFF ON fime

The amplitude and time period of the oscillarion is a funcrion of lag between rhe hearing source and the temperarure

:::r,*:r*r,

To prevent the outpur 'chattering' as the measured temperature crosses the serpoinc, the controller does not turn On and Offar precisely the same point. Instead a small differenrial known as the 'hysreresis' is apptied. A rypical value is 1oC

On/Olf control is sarisfactory for non-critical heating applications where some oscillation in the temperature is permissible.

Time

PID control is also referred to as

"Three-rerm" conrrol. The three terms are:

P

for

Proporlionol

D

for lnlegrol for

Derivolive

The output of the conrroller is the sum of the above rhree terms.

The combined output is a funccion of the magnirude and duration ofthe error signal, and rhe rare olchange ofthe remperarure or process value

Proporlionol lerm

The Proportional term delivers an ourpur which is proporrional to che size of the error signal. In the example below, rhe proportional band is 10"C and an error of 3"C will produce an output ol

30Vo.

Output P;oportionol

>i

bond

;.1r-t9.c

too7"

3OA"-

I

F3oC error

Proportional only controllers will not, in general, control preciselv at setpoint, bur wirh an oflfset corresponding to rhe poinr at which the output power equals the hear loss from the system.

III

Iechnico!

nformot

on t c eso o

lro

lntegrol oction

The Integral term removes steady state control offsets by ramping the outpuc up or down in proportion ro the amplitude and duration of the error signal. The ramp rate

(lntegral time constanc) must be longer than the time constant of the process to avoid oscillations.

Derivotive oclion

The Derivarive term is proportional to the rare of change of the temperature or process value.

It

is used ro prevent overshooc and undershoot of the setpoint and to restore rhe process value rapidly to rhe serpoinr if there is a sudden change in de mand, for example ifan oven door is opened.

High ond

low

cutbqck

While the PID parameters are optimised for steady state control at or near the setpoint, high and low cutback parameters are used co reduce overshoot and undershoot for large step changes in temperature. They respectively ser the number of degrees above and below serpoint at which the controller will starr ro increase or cutback the output power.

Time

Proporlioning oclion

To obtain 'straighr-line' temperature conrrol, a

PID controller requires some means of varying the power smoothly betwee n 0 and 100%.

Time proporrioningvaries theVoon time of relay, triac and logic outputs to deliver a variable output power between 0 and 100Vo.

The graphs below illusrrate the principle.

ON

5sec

25"/" Avetoge Power

2O sec

Cycle

rime

4i

OFF

I 5sec fime

The cycle time must be short enough to allorv the thermal mass of the load to smooth out the switching pulses. 20 seconds is typical.

Systems with a small thermal mass will need shorter cycle times than can be provided with a relay. In these cases, a solid state relay is typically used with cycle cimes down to 0.2 seconds.

In practice Cycle Time may not be a constant, but vary with

Power De mand, particularlv at the extremes of the range 0-100%.

Io ruduca the overshoot, incruorc rhc

bw.rtbo.k

volue.

607" Averoge Power

20 se<

Cycle

fime

4l

ON

l2se<

OFF

8sec fime lrndcrrtpor

Io rcduce lhc undershoot, docftld5c the voluc.

lry

cuttock

(

(

I

(

I

IV

( 1

(

I

(

I

1

(

I

?

)

I

)

)

)

illotorised Volve Positioning

Motorised valves have rwo windings, one for opening the valve and the other for closing

it.

Control is achieved by sending raise or lower pulses to the appropriate winding. Some valves are fitted with a feedback potentiometer ro indicate their position, while others are not.

to0orised

Rtfso

Windtorg

YshvG

Adoptive tuning

which continuously monitors the error from setpoint and, if instability is decected, will modifo the PID values accordingly.

Other feolures

Eurotherm controllers offer many other control features such as;

.

Transfer between automative and manual control.

.

Remote setpoint inputs

.

Digital communication

.

Setpoint programming with respect to time.

.

Cascade concrol

.

Ratio control

If you would like information about any of these features please contact Eurotherm Controls.

Common

Eurotherm controllers provide a control algorithm specifically designed for use with motorised valves. This algorithm works equally well with or without a position feedback potentiometer.

Automqlic tunlng

In tuning, you match the characteristics ofthe controller to those of the process being controlled in order to obtain good control.

Good control means:

.

Srable,'straightJine' control of the temperature at setpoint without fluctuation.

.

No overshoot, or undershoot, of the temperature setpoint.

.

Quick response co deviations from the setpoint caused by external disturbances, thereby rapidly resroring the cemperature to the setpoint value.

Tuning involves calculating and se tting the P.I.D terms and cutback values. This can be performed manually following the instructions given in the user handbooks or automatically by the controller.

Two automatic tuning procedures are available in Eurotherm

Controllers:

One-shot tuning

which is performed once when commissioning the process and then turned

off.

However,

it

can be repeated as often as required should the process characteristics change.

Y

Thyrisfor

SwitefuEsr

Whot is o Thyristor?

A thyristor is a semiconductor device which acts as a switch. To switch alrernating current requires two devices connected in inverse parallel.

Each device is turned on at the appropriate moment by a trigger pulse applied to the gate and che device will remain on until the instantaneous load current through ir is zero.

The trigger pulses are generared by a driver - the driver riming the pulses to ensure the thyristor unit output follows rhe input demand signal (e.g. from a controller) in the selected Firing Mode.

Eurotherm thyristor units incorporare the thyristor devices, rogerher with the driver and the heatsink which dlssipates the hear generated by the thyristor devices. Many Eurotherm units include internal fuses to protect the rhyristor.

The benefits of thyristor units are numerous. They offer a rellable long rerm alternative to electromechanical devices reducing the necessity for malntenance.

However, rhyristor units are particularly cost effective for fasr sysrems, for complex loads involving transformers and/or heaters whose resistance changes with temperature or time.

They are the best means of controlllng e lectrical heating power.

Thyristor units generally offer improved controllability which gives economy and easy sewiceabiliry, particularly with the plug-in versions (451-464) which reduce down time and maintenance costs.

Almost silent in operation, the units can eliminace the switch on surge by operating in synchronisation with the supply, and therefore offer an improved worklng environment.

Wrf;ure&pEes

FIRING MODES.

Solid slote reloy or logic firing mode

The control input for this rype o[ thyristor is a'[.ogic'output from a

Eurothe rm temperature conrroller and the thyristor operates like a relay or contactor, i.e. when the logic signal is low the thyristor unit is OFF and when

it

is high the thyristor unit is ON.

To minimise interference the thyristor unit switches on at rhe firsr zero crossing of the mains voltage, afrer the logic input goes high.

On

Input

Hort€r

Uoltagp

When the logic inpur goes low, the unit switches offar the first zero crossing point of the heater current.

hpln ll6ater

Vottage ofi s'rpply

\bltage / -l

/t

a\

I

f

Cycle proportioning (fost cycle, slow cycle, single cycle)

This is a means of controlling power by rime proportioning the available power.

The 'burst repetition' rates come under the headings of Fast Cycle, Slow Cycle and Single Cycle and are intended to serve the requirements of differenr applications. The table below gives further details.

Control inputs for this rype of chyristor unit are 0-5V or 4-20mA.

Conlrol

Fost cycle

mode

507o Power

(F.C.)

200ms ON ond

Slow cycle

200ms OFF typicolly

(S.C)

20s ON ond

20s OFF typicolly

Single cycle (F.C.l.) One cycle ON ond one cycle

OFF lIm6

Applicotions

(F.C.) ldeol for simple resistonce loods.

Moy couse supply fluctuotions where supply regulolion is poor.

(S.C) Stroighl line conlrol on lorge thermol moss syslems ond opplicotions where poor supply regulotion would couse flicker on fost cycle

(F.C.1.) Simple resistonce loods ond where thermol moss of lood is smoll or o low noise olternotive to phose ongle firing wilh some heoter moleriols

To minimize interference the thyristor unit always switches on when the voltage across the heater is zero and switches off when current through the hearer is zero.

Each 'burst' is rherefore a complete number of cycles of the supply.

vt

(

I

)

)

)

Phose Angle (P.A.)

In chis mode power is conrrolled by allowing the thyristors to conduct for part of rhe ac supply cycle only, see diagram below. The more power required rhe more the conduction angle is advanced until virtually the whole cycle is conducting for l00Vo power.

The major disadvantage with phase-angle firing is the possible interfere nce generated by the rapid switching action.

"!, \,

Supply Voltsg€

Snpply n

Phqse Angle stort Fost

Cycle

(P.A. stort

F.C.)

This is a varianc of the cycle proporrioning mode in which each ON period consists ofa run up in phase angle over several supply cycles ro full conduction. Once rhis state is achieved che remainder of the ON period will be at full conduction.

lo s cr e lures

Power feedbock

Supply voltage changes will obviously result in power to rhe load changing. To overcome the effect ofsupply voltage changes, the controller which drives the thyristor unit can have power feedback to compensate for this.

Portiol Lood Foilure (PtF)

This is an optional circuir which continuously monitors the load resistance and detecrs an increase, arising for example from failure of one arm of a parallel connected load. When a parrial load failure is detected an ourpur to an external alarm can be given. The PLF setring is adjusted with rhe rhyrisror unir working normally and delivering currenr to the load. A decrease in load resistance is not acred upon.

Overlood circuit

This option is only available with PLF on certain equipment and is designed to detect overload currents ln the region of twice the parrial load failure setting or greater. When it operates, rhe thyristors are prevented lrom firing, a front panel lamp lights and relay or logic alarm output is activated.

Current limit

Wth

low cold-resistance loads, if used wirh cycling modes, the firsr complete cycle could cause a currenr surge and blow a fuse. Phase-angle operation srarrs from zero and rhe phase-angle is advanced slowly until a currenr Iimir threshold is reached to keep the currenr within the safe limits of the element and the wiring.

Inhibit or enoble

Avoltage applied to che inpur ofrhe circuit will stop (or enable) the output

The external circuit is usually arranged so that the thyristor is quenched at switch-on, to enable rhe circuir conditions to stabilise.

Preset deloyed triggering

Preset delayed triggering is used in conjunction wirh cycle proportioning where a mixed inductive/resiscive load such as a transforme r supplied hearer is used. A preset angle can be adjusted corresponding to the 'lag'angle which will prevent inrush surge currents when using zero volcage switching of inducrive loads. Highly inductive toads will require

'sofr-start' or currenr limiting.

Power conlrol

This is not usually required in applications using

a

Eurotherm temperature controller with relay or logic output. Power control requires I and V to be measured and is sometimes required when loads cannot sensibly use

Power Feedback, i.e. those with a low cold resistance.

Power control may be an advantage in open loop non-remperature controlled applications where it is rhe energy input which is to be controlled.

Pulse goting

Gating of the thyristor firing pulses may be necessary on phase-angle thyrisror units particularly lor applications with a leading power factor or cross-coupling between phases. The triggering of the thyristor is inhibited until the voltage has risen through zero. Once the chyristor has fired, the trigger pulses are removed to ensure that the thyristor turns off as the forward direction current reduces to zero. (Again some degrees before che voltage waveform).

vt!

isor s tio

lnstollotion

The thyristors must be insralled in accordance with Eurotherm

Concrols recommendations expressed in the installarion guide supplied with each unit, and also in accordance with local wiring regulations.

It

is important to be aware rhat each controlled phase in a thyristor generates a heat loss calculated ac approximately 2 watts per amp (per phase)load current. Adequate ventilation or forced cooling must be provided to maintain the ambient conditions inside che control panel enclosure within the operating specification.

e

Phase angle firing gives a sharp rise in current when turned on and may cause a distorted supplv waveform. The apparent power factor can therefore be adversely affecred.

Fast cycle, slow cycle and single cycle are all zero switched firing modes with no curre nt waveform distortion and therefore do not affect power factor.

Fuse protection

Eurotherm Controls thyristor regulators are generally supplied with high speed fuses, designed to protect the thyristor device against short circuir currents resulting from load or wiring faults. The high speed fuse does not provide protection against sustained medium scale overload, and it is therefore necessary to fir a standard circuit protecrion fuse (HRC fuse or circuir breaker) in the supply llnes to the regularor.

Plqnt sofety

The thyristor regulator is a control device, and should not be used as the safe means of removing power from the load. Whe n planc or personnel safety is at risk, a circuit breaker or contactor should be fitted in the supply lines to the regulator, and arranged to auromatically trip in the event for example of a plant emergency stop, or over-temperature switch operating.

Mounting ond enclosures

Most Eurotherm thyristor units are designed to work in ambient temperatures up to 50"C.

It

should be nored that thyristor units generate a significanr amount of heat internally through rhe chyristor itself, the fuse and the cabling. A general rule is to reckon that a thyristor unit, and its fluse, will generate 2 watts of heat per amp per phase.

e.g. 100 amp 3 phase thyristor unit type TC3000 will generate 600 wat [s.

With a TC3000 in a standard cubicle 2.1m x 600mm x 600mm with no ventilation the internal temperature will rise 20-30'C.

Adequate ventilation is therefore essential - preferably forced by fan.

Mushroom tops and louvres are not particularly effective in removing this hear.

Personnel sofety

The thvrisror regularor does not provide an effective means of isolarion in its rurned "OFF" or "DISABLED" stace, due to leakage currents through the various protection componencs around the thyristor itself. In particular, when using a 2 phase thyristor to control a 3 phase load, the complete load and associated wiring will be at the porential ol the uncontrolled phase in rhe OFF state.

It

is therefore imperative that an effective means of isolation is provided, and working practices set up to ensure that the regulator and associated circuitry are made safe before any maintenance rvork takes place.

lf in doubt; osk

Ifyou are in any doubt about the application of these or any other

Eurotherm Controls products, please ask for guidance.

Neutrol currents on 3 phqse instqllotions

Under certain circumstances, such as four wire phase angle installations, open circuir heaters or unbalanced loading, subsrantial neutral currents can flow. Neutral cable sizing should the refore be chosen wirh care. With balanced load resistances neutral cable current rating should be twice the line current for safety under all possible ci rcumstances.

Power foclor

In large installations poor power factor may increase the cosc ofthe elecrrical power supplied.

Speciolisl opplicqt:ons

There are many possible circuit connections other than those described in rhis guide . Eurotherm Concrols Applicarions

Department has a wide range of experience in special applications which need particular attention for successful operation.

.

Scott transformers or other 3 phase to 2 phase/transformers

.

lnduction heaters with or withouc powe r factor correction

.

.

.

capacl tors

Bank switched capacitor powe r facror correction equipment

Loads sensitive to dc components, e.g. dc elimination in glass

Loads where the total load controlled by chyrlstor installation represents more than 50% of the local supply transformer capaciry and the supply is shared with other users'

(

(

YITI

)

I

t

)

Some useful definitions

Terms used to describe thyristor stack ratings are defined as follows:

Line volts - Voltage between anv 2 lines of a 3 phase supply.

Phase volts -Voltage between any line and neutral ofa 3 phase supply or voltage between the 2 wires of a single phase supply.

Line current - The full load currenr flowing in one of the three incoming lines in a three phase system.

Phase current - The full load current flowing through one of the three heaters in a three phase load.

ILine

:

IPhase for single-phase or 3 phase srar

For a balanced 3 phase syscem only:-

Line voltage

V:

r/3 phase voltage Vp

Power in a 3 phase load

=3 x Vp x Ip x power factor

:il

*

l't-

x IL x power factor where

Ip:Power/(3 x Vp x power factor) thus

IL:Power/({3

x \rL x power factor)

ens f5 slr c o

The

mosr popular methods of temperature measurement in industrial applications are thermocouples and RTDs.

Thermocouples

Selection

In isolated applications, where rhe load(s) controlled by tbe thyristor regulator(s) form a major portion ofrhe users total electrical load, or where the regulator is in a remote location, supplied via long lengths of distribution cable, problems may be expe rienced with harmonic interference (resulting from phase angle contro[) or voltage dipping effects (resulting from burst firing control).

Ifyou have any selection enquiries please contact Eurocherm

Controls.

Plqtinum Resislqnce Thermometers

Red

White Red Bed

White tbt

Jnclir

Pt100 Pt100

.Irrc0m

@tfrn, ffi d

A thermocouple is formed by connecting two wires of different metals together at a single point. This

junction

is known as the

Hot

Junction. Where the thermocouple wires connect to the terminals of the controller they create another thermocouple

joint

as these metals are also dissimilar. This

joint

is known as the Cold Junction. An

EMF

is generated at the terminals

of

the controller which is dependent on the temperature difference between the hot and cold junctions.To know the temperature at the Hot Junction the controller must correct for the EMF generated at the Cold Junction.

This

process is referred to as Cold Junction Compensation.

2 Wire 3 Wire

The PRT

(or

RTD)

detector is available

in

many different types of construction.

The

resistance of platinum changes

with

temperature at a known rate, the most common standard being 100.00 ohms at

0'C

and 138.5 ohms at 100'C.

In use the accuracy of Platinum Resistance Thermometers depends on the resistance of the connecting leads.

This

can be compensated for

within

the controller by adding a

third

lead.

For short cable runs two wires are often adequate.

The

choice of 2 or 3 wire must be made in the context of the measuring instrument and the accuracy required.

tx

lgitol

Commum&eens&sms

Much of the e quipment described in this caralogue supports digital communications.

This allows a computer system

to

read process data, display it on the screen and to store it away. The link may also be configured to write values to the equipment, thus providing a flexible Machine Interface.

Communications links may also be used to allow one controller to pass parameters such as se tpoints directly co other controllers, allowing more complex control strategies to be implemented.

Digital Communications is preferable to analogue communications (e.g. 0-5V) because:

.

There is no accuracy variation wirh distance

.

No inaccuracy is introduced by the

.

A-to-D and D-to-A conversions at each end

Controllers which use Microprocessors have the data already available, formatted correctly

.

Calibration of the retransmission components is not required

.

One-to-one or One-co-Many communications links are possible

Digiral Communication encodes the data to be rransmitted into two voltage states. Figure I shows how this can be done. The data to be transmitted is broken up into small pieces known as

Words which are then transmitted as a succession of changes of state. Each state, relerred to as a Bir, has the same rime duration. The number of bits sent per second is known as the Baud Rate. There are many ways in which the message content can be broken down into words and in order to be able to re-create the original message ir is necessary for the receiving equipment to know how this was done and the rate at rvhich the bits are being sent. The diagram shows several different ways in which the bits forming a word can be inrerpreted. This interpreration is described by the term "Protocol".

The word Protocol is used to describe more than one element of rhe communications

SttUCtU

TC.

.

Signal

lrvels.

The voltages on rhe link wires and the number of wires employed

:

+/- l2 Volts relative ro a common line

+/- 200mV differential betwee n rhe wires

.

Data Coding. The structure of each byte:

I

Srart /7 Dara / Even parity/l.5 Stop Bits

.

I Start /8 Dara A.,lo

Pariry/1 Srop Bit

Data Structure. The way that the message is actually encoded and transmicted:

.

ElBisync

Modbus

J-Bus

The wiring is covered by a number of recognised standards and the ones used on

Eurotherm equipmen c are:

RS232 */-12 volts nominal (3V min,lSVmax)

3 Wres used, TRANSMIT (Tx),

RECEN'E (Rx) and COMMON

This can only be used with a single device at each end ofthe wiring and is thus a One-to-One link

RS422 Differenrial Mode signalling using two pairs of wires, one pair in each direction +/-

200mV signal required at the receivers. Signalling levels ac the transmitter of 0 and 5Volts

Permits communication from one

"master" device to manv "slave" devices.

RS485 Diflerenrial Mode signalling using either one or two pairs of wires

+l

200mV signal required at the receivers. Signalling levels ar the transmicter of 0 and SVolts

It

is apparent thar there are similarities between RS4ZZ and RS485. They are not, however, identical and the differences are rmpoftant:

.

R5422

-

has a maximum of l0 Standard

L,oads per link. This is the limit to the number of Eurorherm instruments which can be connected onto a single link

.

R5422

-

always uses separate pairs of wires for communication in each direction

.

RS485 - has a maximum of 32 Standard l.oads pe r link. This is the limit to the number of Eurotherm instruments which can be connected onto a single link

.

RS485 - allows EITHER rwo pairs of wires for communication OR a single pair of wires for transmission in both direccions.

When used with two separate wire pairs,

RS485 can thus be seen as a higher capability version of R5422. When used with only a single pair of wires there must be co-operation between instruments at each end of the link in order ro ensure that both ends do not try to use the rvires at the same time. The equipment must be designed to operate in chis way. Instruments designed for two pairs of wires will not communicate correccly on one pair. In using RS485 communications all instrumenrs in the link must be designed for the same wiring arrangement.

OaE Flow

RF FF

FF

DiMon

RFGound

RF rime

J

start do bit lsb d1 d2 d) d4 d5 d6 msb binary (0)100

1001 hexadeimal 4

9

ASCil

I

=73

Panty

(even) stop bt

Figure 1 Structure of a

Word

RF

Signel Okodon

Figure 2 R5422 & RS485 two pairs

Tx

Md

01

Figure 3 RS485 single pair

Add e

x

( t

(

I

nst o ie

Eurotherm Controls products are 'CE' marked to show conformance with two

European Directives:

The Lou' Voltage Equipment

Directive 73l23lEEC

Thc EMC Directive 89l336lEEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC

The Low

Directive

Voltoge Equipment

Products comply with the requirements of rhe Low Volrage Equipment Directive by the application of the following standards;

For Controllers:

EN 61010-1: Safery re quire ments lor e lectrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboracory use

For Thyristor Units:

EN -50178

(Draft) is used for guidance in rhe preparation ofa Safety

Technical File describing rhe safery strategy. This file will be endorsed by a

Notified Body.

Sofety instollotion guidelines

It

is essential to follow che detailed instructions found in the relevant insrallation manual, but two poincs are often overlooked regarding safe installation. Most products are designed to operare in an environment of pollurion degree 2, (only dry non conducting dust) and installarion category

II,

(transienrs and spikes are limited to 2.5kV).

Thryristor units are designed to operate in installation caregory

III

(transients and spikes are limited to 4.0kv). To achieve this

it

may be necessary to install the instruments in a cabinet wirh a filtered air intake and to

fit

transient suppression devices to the mains supply.

The

EMC

Directive

Technical Construction Files approved by a Competent Body show that

Eurotherm Controls products comply with the requiremencs of the EMC

Directive. The lollowing generic electromagnetic compatibility s tandards are re ferenced in compliance testing;

EN 5008.I-l: Generic emission standard, Part 1: Residential, commercial and light industrial

EN 50082-1: Generic immunity standard, Part

l:

Residential, commercial and light industrial

EN 50081-2: Generic emission standard, Part 2: Industrial envtronment

EN 50082-2: Generic immunity standard, Part 2: Industrial envtronment

In some cases to be compliant with the emissions requirements of the light industrial environment it witl be necessary to

fit

an approved mains filrer.

Thyrisror power control unirs are designed to be compatible with only rhe industrial environment. See che specific installation instrucrions ofa producr for more details.

EMC

lnstollqtion guidelines

Atthough each producr will have its own particular installation instructions there are some general good wirlng principles that will improve rhe electromagnetic environment. To help customers with this Eurotherm Controls has published a booklet, EMC Installation Guidelines,

H4,025464 which is available on request.

The following are some o[ the basic principles described in this documenr:

.

Create an equiporential ground by interconnecting all the metal parts of an installation. Ensure there are good

RF connections by using braided cable and clean, paint free contact areas on metal panels. Bond panels at several closely spaced positions.

.

Separate power, digital and analogue signal cable types. The ideal way to this is to use separate metal cable trays. Ilusing a single metal tray then position cables sysrematically to separate different cable types.

.

When wiring inside a cabinet or metal enclosure, keep the cables against rhe metal pane [s to benefit from a screening effect.

.

For very sensitive signal cables or digital communicarions cables use a screened or double screened cable.

.

Route outward and rerurn cable together to minimise the loop area of a circuit. Fit snubbers close to inductive loads.

.

Take care when including filters;

M4ke a good RF qualiry ground connection. To avoid crosstalk bypassing rhe filcer, separate input and output cables. Keep the inpur leads short and preferably shielded.

EtC

ncto ol cn Gulde

Booklet

z HAO25464

The Control House and Eurocaro are registered lrade marks ol Eurothem Controls Limited. Ths Contol

All registered

Hou$ Md Euro@re ar€ a division ol Eurothem Controls Limited ild unregisler€d trademarks are properties ol lheir respective holders xil

(

I

)

)

7

I

I

,r

I

,

I

)

t

t

)

>

I

i

i

I l

)

I

I

I

I t,

)

?

I

) t

P F E ef i'

Why should we troin?

To ensure that your company obrains the besc possible resulrs from your investment in planr and instrumentation.

This is achieved by ensuring that operators, process englneers, system designers operate and maintain your plant, fully undersranding the features and the operation of the equipment that is relevant to their particular function.

Who cqn benefit?

Training has different meanings and expectatlons to different people and different organisations. This can be as diverse as training a machine operator how to operate a particular instrument on their equipment through to rhe Systems designer receiving tuition on advanced programming techniques.

Whqt is on offer?

Due to the widc variation in thc training requirements, Eurorherm Controls offers a wide range of training activicies. These include formal regular pre-defined coutses and training designed to satisry the specific requirements of a particular

The majoriry of courses start with the basic principles of process control, application and or the products of interest, buildlng up to the relevant level of operation, commissioning or support.

Whenever possible emphasis is placed upon practical 'hands on'sessions with operational equipmen t.

Where con held?

troining courses be

The training identified in this document can be undertaken (where appropriate) at one ofour training centres, located at

Rugby in Warwickshire, Warrington in

Cheshire or Worthing in Sussex, at one of your sites, or at another separate but suitable venue.

Customer specif ic courses:

The users of temperature and process control equipment come from a variety of different backgrounds and have a wide range ofrequirements to understand the operation ofproduct that they use. The following provides an indication as to the range ofsubjects for a variety of differenc training sessions.

This list forms a guide only and a course maybe constructed from any mixture of the e lements shown together with any relevant additional activities to provide craining !o your specific requlrements.

Generql conlrol troining:

.

Understanding the elements in Control Systems

Genero! inslrumenl troining:

There are a number of differenr activities, relating to the selection and use of instrumenrs, rhar can be considered separately or in conjunccion with one another.

.

Eurotherm Controls product range

.

Installation and configuracion

.

Getting the best from your process

.

Service and calibration

.

Communications

.

Digital communications

PC3000 System

troining:

.

PC3000 System maintenance activities

Formol courses:

Eurotherm Controls offer courses on

PC3000 Basic programming

ESPA

IZCON -

-

Introduction ro

WZCON forWindows

Process controller

SCADASystem

-

SCADA System

For specific contenr please consult separate course outlines.

These courses run when there are sufficient numbers of candidates interested in parcicipating

( There are typically rhree or four courses per year.)

These courses can also be arranged for rhe exclusive benefit ofa single customer ifrequired.

xtil

Iter-S

es

ort

Eurotherm offers an exrensive support organisation with a full range ofservices to meet your needs. Whether ir is a cechnical query, calibration, repairs, process optimization, training or plant modification rhe supporr teams can solve your problem. In addition Eurotherm has achieved the ISO 9001 standard for quality assurance in design, development, production, installacion and servicing.

A complete ronge of setryices a

Applications advice

O

Product selection

3

Productcustomisation

a

Installation / commissioning

a

Training

O

Process oprimization

O

Traceablecalibrarion

O

On site support

O

Fixed price repairs and modifications

O

Product upgrades and replacement

Technicq! odvice fu

a leading manufacturer with over twenry five years experience, our engineers can offer immediate technical advice by telephone. For application, product or process queries telephone our technical sales number.

Loco! support/ nstionwide bock up

Eurotherm has an international network of locally based sales and sewice engineers to give you on site assistance. These are backed by a central repair facilities and a world class design and manufacturing site.

at 2

O

Stcltemoemtf

Eurotherm Controls has put in place a management team to identifr and take action to minimise che Year 2000 risks to its business from its own operational systems, and to ensure that current versions of producrs sold to our customers are Year 2000 compliant.

For the purpose of this document 'year

2000 compliance' means compliance with the requiremenrs of the British Standard

Instirution Document DISC PD2000-1, "A

Definition

of

Year 2000 Conformity

Require ments".

The discrete temperature/process conrrollers and thyristor products manufactured by Eurotherm Controls are not affected byYear 2000 because they do not have date-related real-time clock function.

The PC3000, EMZ, and Dimension products have date related real-time clock functions. A separate marketing note for

PC3000, EM2 and Dimension units are available on request.

Off-line configuration software supplied by

Eurotherm Controls is Year 2000 compliant.

If your computer system is not Year 2000 compliant

it

may appear, wrongly, thac the software does not function correctly. We strongly recommend that you veriff your computer system for Year 2000 compliance.

Other software supplied by Eurotherm

Controls will be subject to a further marketing note that will also be available shortly.

Since our instrumentation is often used as a component within a system, we strongly recommend that you test the whole of your system to ensure Year 2000 compliance.

I

I

{

-1

XTY

EUROT ERM

CONTROLS

Thermocoup es, Connectors,

P otinum

Resistonce

Thermometers,

Probe Fitt ngs ond

Cob

es

.r

\\

e.-

\ o

Product doto

U

t

Co our

Thermocouple Conneclors, Extension ond Compensoting Wires ond Cobles

I],ISUI.ATION COLOUR

CODES

Exlension & (ompensoling leods

OBI.I

(0Dt

TYPI

(0NDUO0RS +/

BRITISH

BSI

843: I 952

FORMER SIANDARD

AMERI(A}l

ANSr/M( 96.r

GIRMAN

DN43713/43714 t684-3:1989, mod --1

BS

rN60584-3

|

+ + E)(

K

J

I

I

I

N

H rRos ytlrs r

FelKonsr slonlon l/()

H.

,UI,

ut

F

1 1 1

I=

1

JX

+

1 1

1 l(X

+

1

NX

N(

T

(el

(OPPIRAONSIA1{IAl,I

Vx(row Hrcxn)

((u/(onslonlon) (ompensoling for

(

((u/(onslonlon)

+

1

1

+

+

TX

+ l((B

1

+ + uler sheoft

EN60584-3 is indicoled erolure

Ron

1

RG

SG l s; ble of

Thermocoup e Wire

To

erqnces

The

figures shown in the tobles ore

those

oppropriote to

the

meosuring iunction temperoures in the finol column.

Toleronce

closses

to

BS

EN60584-3

TyPe

RCB

SCA

SCB

Notes:

t

Toleronce

Clqss

2

JX

TX

EX

KX

NX

KCA t85pV(t1.5"C) t30pV(t0.5'C)

tl20pV(tl

.5"C) t60pV(t1.5'C) t5OpV(t1.5'C)

KCB

NC

RCA

t

l4OpV(t2.5"C) t60pV(t1.0'C) t200pV(t2.5"C)

tl00pV(t2.5'C) tl00pV(t2.5'C) tl00pV(t2.5'C) tl00pV(t2.5"C) tl00pV(t2.5'C)

t3OpV(t2.5'C) t60pV(t5.0'C) t30pV(t2.5"C) t60pV(t5.0"C)

Coble

Temp

ronge

-25" lo + 200"C

-25" lo

+

100'C

-25" lo + 200"C

-25'to

+ 200"C

Meosuring iunction temperolure

500'c

300"c

500'c

900'c

-25" lo + 200'C

O'to

+

150'c

900"c

900"c

900'c

900'c

Ooto+ t

00"c

0"to+ 150'c

0"to+

100"c

0oto+

200"c

0"to+

,l00"c

0oto+ 200'c

I 000"c

I

000'c

I

000'c

I

000'c

l

Coble temperoture ronge moy be restricted to figures lower thon those shown in the toble becouse of temperoture limitotions imposed by the insulont.

2.

A coble comprising two copper conductors moy be used with type

B thermocouples. The expected moximum odditionol deviotion within the coble temperoture ronge

0'C

to

+

I OO'C is 40pV. The equivolent in temperoture is

,l400"C.

is ot

3.5'C when the meosuring iunction of the thermocouple

ontents

An introduction to thermocouples ond resistonce thermometers.

3

Rigid generol purpose & plostics mochinery thermocouples

Thermocouple notes

...........

Generol purpose thermocouple

style

FA

Flexicouple

style

FS

Melt thermocouple

style FM

.............

Nozzle thermocouple

style

FN

Leo[ thermocouple

style

FL

...............

Wosher thermocouple

style

FW

Exposed iunction ond mognetic thermocouples

Pipe surfoce thermocouple

style

FP

.................

for up to

35O'C

........3

......... 4

................. 5

............. 6

...................... 6

.............7

....................7

.......................... 8

................. 8

Flexible, rugged minerql insuloted industriol thermocouples for up to

l2OO'C

Minerol insuloted thermocouple notes

............

................... 9, 10

Minerol insuloted thermocouples with flexible cobles

style MA

.......................................lI

Minerol insuloted thermocouples with toils

style

MD

Minerol insuloted thermocouples with connectors

style MB

.............

Minerol insuloted thermocouples with heods

style

MC

...........12

..........12

.........13

Generol purpose ond industriol plotinum resistqnce thermometers for high occurqcy up to

45O'C

Resistonce thermometer notes ............

Generol purpose ond oir duct resistonce thermometers

style RA

........................

Heovy duty resistonce thermometers

sfyle

RC

Surfoce ond oir meosurement PRT s ............

lnstollotion fifiings, connectors ond cobles

Sensor instollotion fittings

Thermowells ond thermopockets ............

Thermocouple connectors

Thermocouple extension ond compensoting coble ond PRT coble.

Notes on speciol requirements

Applicotions informotion qnd technicol dqto

Using thermocouples .........

Using plotinum resistonce thermometers

Colour codes for thermocouple coble

Thermocouple wire toleronces ..................

..23

..24,25,26

..27,28,29

............30

............30

All technicol informotion published in ihis cotologue is for guidonce ond not necessorily definitive. All thermocouple ossemblies comply with BS EN60584-3 (=

IEC 584-3) colour codes ond coble toleronces unless otherwise stoted.

All thermoelements comply with BS EN60584-2 Closs

I

or Closs 2 toleronce depending on type. All dimensions stoted ore nominol. Product specificotions moy chonge os o result of product development

Port No: HAO13208 lss4

An ntroduction to thermocoup es ond resislqnce thermometers

Our range provides two alternative types of temperature sensor

-

thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer (PRT).

Genero! guidonce for choosing between the two:

Thermocouples are less expensive than PRT sensors, more versatile, less accurate, more rugged, more sensitive, have a wider operating range, are tip sensitive and can be smaller. Extension cabling is more expensive.Various calibrations are available for different applications

PRT assemblies are much more accurate and stable, permit greater rcsolution of measurement but over a more limited range, are stem sensitive, largcr and more expensive. Extension cabling is by inexpensive copper wire.

Remember the type

of

sensor chosen must suit

the

associated

instmmentation.

Comporison of Sensor Types

Sensor

Plotinum Resistonce

Thermomeler

Plotinum-wire wound or flot-film resistor

Thermocouple

Thermoelement, two dissimilor metols/ olloys

0.5 ro 5.0'c Accurory

(typicol volues)

Long term

Stobility

Temperoture ronge

Thermol resPonse

Excitotion

Chorocteristic

Lineority

0.1 ro

].0'c

Excellent

-200 ro 650'c

Wirewound

-

slow

Film

-

foster

I

-50 secs typicol

Constont current required

PTC resistonce

Foirly lineor

Vorioble, Prone lo ogerng

-200 tol750'C

Sheothed

Exposed

0.,l to

-

slow tip

-

fost

l0

secs typicol

None

Thermovoltoge

Most types non-lineor

Leod resistonce effect

Electricol prcK-up lnter[oce

Vibrotion effects/ shock

Output/ chorocteristic

Plotinum Resistonce

Thermometer

3&4wire-min

2 wire

-

errors result

Rorely susceptible

Bridge

2,3 or 4 wire

Wirewound

-

not suitoble

Film

-

good

Approx. O.4W/"C

Extension Leods

Cost

Copper

Wirewound

-

more exPensrve

Film

-

less expensive fhermocouple

Short coble runs sotisfoctory (e.g. 25m)

Susceptible

Potentiometric input.

Cold iunction compensolion required

Minerol insuloted types suitnble

From lOmV/'C to 40mV/"C depending on type

Compensoting coble

Relotively low cost

Comments ond vqlues shown in this chqrt definitive but ore stoted ore generolised ond nomino!. They ore not intended to be for generol guidonce.

The informotion given shows overoge opplicotion experience, but some of the considerotions con be modified by speciol design or selection

Thermocouples

For practical purposes, thermocouples are divided into rwo categories; base metal types such as Nickel Chromium v Nickel

Aluminium and Iron v Copper Nickel (Constantan) and rare metal types (usually Platinum v Platinum Rhodium). Measuring junctions are formed by a spot weld of the two dissimilar wires usually located inside a protecting sheath

A thermocouple does not measurc the temperature at the "hot" (measuring) junction but is a differential measurement between the "hot" junction and the "cold" (reference) junction. For accurate temperatrre measr[ement, thc reference junction must be held at a fixed, known temperature; alternatively, accurate compensation must be made for any temperature variations of the reference junction.

ln

the majority of industrial applications, instruments con-figured for thermocouple inputs incorporate some form of automatic cold iunction compensation (CJ.C)The temperature of the input termination is sensed and a corrective signal is applied to the measuring circuit of the instfl-lment. High acctrracy automatic CJC is incorporated in all Eurotherm instruments.

For puqtoses of calibration of a thermocouple or the associated instrument, reference is made to standard tables which indicate thermocouple outpLlt versus "hot" jrmction temperature

with

the "cold junction" at o'C.V/here it is impractical to maintain a 0'C cold junction temperature

it

is necessary to accurately measure the "cold Junction" temperature, say at zO'C and to add the value of thermocouple output at that temperature (obtained from the table) to the observed output from the thermocouple to arrive at an absolute figure.

To

determine

the temperature of

the "hot" iunction

we must know:-

i)

The calibration data for the thermocouple

ii)

The measured output voltage

iii)

The temperature of the reference (cold) junction.

IDN"L

Measunng

M6tat B measunng

Copper

BelerenceluncLionsheld aL common lemperature auromarc CJC

3

(_l

Genero purpose thermocoup e sty

e

for

use

up to 350'C.

Thermocouple element sheathed in a 316 grade stainless steel rube with welded, closed rouncled end, and flexible connecting cable.

These low cost, versatile sensors are suitable for a wide range of medium temperatt-re applications including the plastics industry

Orr

range of fittings and adaptors allow for quick and simple installation.

A range of stanclard sensors is available.Alternatively we can offer a custom-made service using the part-numbering system shown.

Ierminqlions

Probe dia

Probe Lenqth Cable Length

Bore toils

SO€D

S oS

Stondord

Connector so@

S oS

Miniolure

Conneclor

K

K

K

Ordering stqndord versions

-

ovoiloble from stock.

Stainless steel thermocouples, type

J,

K orT

with

2 metres junction grounded to the sheath.Temperature rating

-

of with stainless steel braided flexible cable braided cable 350"C. Colour coded to and tails.Thermocouple

BS EN60584.

)

J

J

)

Thermocouple type

J

)

Probe

Probe diom.

mm

length mm

4.5 r00

4.5

200

4.5

300

6.0

100

6.0

200

6.0

300

45

45

45

100

200

300

Coble tyPe

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Order code

3r r

-001

3rr-003

31 l-004

3r r-005

31 1-007

3r r

-008

3t l

-017

3il

-019

3r r

-020

T

T

T

T

T

T

Thermocouple type

K

K

K

Probe

Prcbe diom.

mm

Ienglh mm

6.0

100

6.0

200

6.0

300

4.5

4.5

4.5

6.0

6.0

6.0

100

200

300

100

200

300

Coble tyPe

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Order code

3r r

-02r

3r I-023

311-024

311-047

31 t-048

3r I

-049

3r l-050

31 I

-051

3rr-052

These generol purpose thermocouples hove o grounded (eorthed) meosuring iunction. This orrongement, which is usuol in the industry, meons thot the probe ond extension cobles ore electricolly common. Such probes should be used individuolly with their ossocioted controller or indicotor. They olso hove good thermol sensitivity.

Ordering custom-mode versions

- ovoiloble

on

short delivery time.

Sty e Tip

[orm

FAA

(rounded tiP)

Thermocouple Thermocouple Probe iunction type Diom.

(mm)

lD

Duolex insulotld

Probe

Coble

length

length

3.OO specify

4.5O in mm.

6.OO

6.35

For duplex sensors, specrty

4.50mm or obove specify tn m.

(to one d.p

)

Coble type

Terminotion

Colour code

I

BS EN6O584

B BSI843

Nole

BS EN6O584 preferred e.g. FAA-GSK-3.00-150-2.0-C4-T-l Generol purpose thermocouple, rounded tip, with single grounded iunction,

3.O0mm diometer probe, 150mm long probe, 2.Ometres broided coble, with toils in BS EN60584 colour code.

Yp"

K,

Temperoture roting o[ probes

-

with cobles C3, C4, AC3

350'C. C2

250"C.

Speciol requirements

lf you connot find the right THERMOCOUPLE lor your opplicotion pleose coll Technicol Services 01903 695777

4

L) l l i

/

F

exicoup e sty e

FS,

widely

used

in

plostics

industry, for

use

up to 350'C.

Flexible thermocouple assembly

This versatility with an adjustable bayonet cap to give spring loaded contact for insertion depths up to 200mm.

permits use in many applications, minimising spares holding.Adaptors are available to suit the bayonet cap.

A choice of type J or K standard flexicouples is available.Alternatively we can offer a custom-made service using the pannumbering system shown.

l-;*

Coble Length

Ierminolions

Spring Length

200mm

Bore wtre toils

SO€D

S oS

Slondord

Connector

S oS

Minioture

Connector

Ordering slondord versions

-

ovoiloble from stock.

Thermocouple tyPe

J

Flexicouples with 2 metres of stainless steel braided cable and tails. Stainless steel tip diameter 4.5mm.Thermocouple junction grounded to tip.Temperature rating 350'C. Colour coded to BS EN6O584

K

Iip fiom. mm

4.5

4.5

(obh

Order rode type

Broided

31 I

-033

Broided

3l

I

-034

Ordering cuslom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble on short delivery time.

Style

Thermocouple Thermocouple iunction type

I'8,","..

(mm)

Coble length

Coble type

Terminotion Colour code

FS GS

GD

Single

J

Duplex

K

T

4.5

6.O

8.O

Note

4.5 & 6.0

preferred specify in metres

(to one d.p.)

G4 Broided

AC3 Armoured

T

Toils

MP Minioture plug

SP

Stondord plug

DP

Duplex plug

I

BS EN6O584

B

BSt843

Note

BS EN60584 preferred e.s. FS-GSJ-6 .0-2.0-C4-T-l Type

BS

J, single iunction, 6.0mm diometer tip,

EN50584 colour code.

with 2 metres broided coble with toils

Temperoture roting 350'C.

Specio! requirements

lf you connot find the right THERMOCOUPLE for your opplicotion pleose coll Technicol Services on 01903 695777

5

C) movement.

Me

t

thermocoup e sty e

FM

for

use

up

to

500'C

Designed to withstand the very high melt pressures within plastics extruders and injection moulding machines, enabling direct measurement of the melt temperature

.

Available

with

76mm and l52mm bolt lengths and terminated in a standard round-pin thermocouple plug, the thermocouple junction is insulated from the stainless steel body. Speci$ immersion

depth

required.

Ordering custom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble

on

short delivery time t dL

o

@

@ o

@

I

9mm AF

Bolt lmmersion depih (lo be

12

("

E

EE o o o

<-

Style

FM

Thermocouple tyPe

K

J

Threod

Vpe

U

1/2"

UNF 20

Other threods ovoiloble to speciol order.

Bolt length

(mr)

76

152

lmmersion depth (mm)

Colour code

I

BS EN6O584

B

BSI 843

Note

BS EN6O584 preferred

e.g.FM-J-U-152-5-l

TypeJ,

l/2"UNF20threod,

l52mmboltlength(belowhex) withSmmimmersiondepth.

BS EN60584 colour code.

Alternotive bolt lengths ovoiloble to speciol order.

Nozz e thermocoup e sty e

FN

for

use

up to 350'C.

Nozzle thermocouple

with

choice of 6

x

1.0 metric or 1/4" BSF threaded bolt designed to screw directly into workpiece.The

grounded thermocouple junction is brazed into a nipple at the end of the bolt, allowing the bolt to be screwed in without rotating the flexible stainless steel braided cable.

Ordering cuslom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble

on

short delivery time

Ierminolions

Style

FN

12mm

Thermocouple

Vpe

I

J

K

Threod

TyP"

M

B

6xl

/A'

0metric

BSF

Cable

Length

Coble length

Specify in metres

(to

I

d.p.)

Bore wire toils

SO€D

Stondord

Connetor

S oS

S oS

Minioture

Connector

Terminotion code

T

Toils

MP

Miniplug

SP

Std. plug

Colour

I

BS EN6O584

B BSI843

Note

BS EN60584 preferred

o

e.g.

FN-J-M-2.0-T-|

Type ), 6

x

1.0 metric threod, with 2 metres broided coble ond toils.

BS EN60584 colour code.

Speciol requirements

l[ you connot find the right THERMOCOUPLE for your opplicotion pleose coll Technicol

Services on 0l 903 695777.

6

C) leof

thermocoup e sty e F[ for

use

up to

350"C

Fast response thermocouple mounted on to a stainless steel shim, ideal for fitting under band or nozzle heaters.

\ l, 25mm

-l

Ierminotions

13mm

Cable Length

so

SoS

Stondord

Conneclor

Stainless steel 'leaf'

Bore toils

Miniolure

Connector

Ordering custom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble

on

short delivery time.

Sty

"

Ft

Thermocouple

Vpe

K

J

T

Coble length

Specify in metres (to one d.p.)

Coble

C4

Broided

C3

Fibregloss

Terminotion type

T

Toils

MP

Minioluo

SP

Std. plus"

Colour code

I

BS EN6O584

B

BSI843

Note

BS EN60584 pre[erred e.g.

FL-J-2.0-C4-T-|

Type J with 2 metres of broided coble ond toils. BS EN60584 colour code.

Wqsher thermocoup e sty e

FW

for

use

up to 350'C.

A convenient and easy method of measuring surface temperatures.The thermocouple junction is located on a washer

6mm clearance hole for bolting to the surface.

with a

Ierminotions

6mm clearance

€-

cabte Length

Bore toils

SO€D

S oS

Stondord

Connector

S oS

Minioture

Connector

Ordering cuslom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble on short delivery time.

Style

Thermocouple

Coble type length

Coble Terminotion type

FW

K

J

T

Specify in metres (to one d.p.)

C4

Broided

C3

Fibregloss

C2

PTFE

T

Toils

MP

Minioluo

5P

Stondord-plug

Colour code

I

BS EN6O584

B BSr843

Note

BS EN60584 preferred e.g.

FW-J-2.0-C3-T-|

Type J with 2 metres fibregloss coble ond toils. BS EN60584 colour code.

Temperolure roting

-

with C2 coble 250"C, C3 or C4 coble 350'C.

Other wosher sizes ovoiloble to speciol order.

Speciol requirements

lf you connoi find the right THERMOCOUPLE for your opplicotion pleose coll Technicol

Services on 01903 695777.

o

7

Hinrs & Tips

Exposed unction, qnd mqgnetic thermocouP es

Fast response exposed junction thermocotrplcs

Magnetic thermocouples for ferrous metals

For surface ancl air tempefirture measurement

Fost response lhermocouples exposed iuncrion

.

0.2mm wire with PTFE or 0.315mm

with glassfibre insulation

.

Velded bead

.

I

metfe long

.

Maximnnr 250'C (PTFD,

350"C (glassfibrc)

.

Type KJ

orT

Ordering

Ihermorouple

- ovoiloble from stock type

(oble type

K

K

PTFE

GLASSFIBRE

J

J

T

PTFE

GIASSFIBRE

PTFE

0rder rode

356-001

3s6-004

356-002

356-005

356-003

Mognetic potch thermocouple

* Flexible magnetic patch thermocouple for ferrous metals

*

I

metre twin twisted PTFE insulated cable

*

Fast response

*

Maximum 120"C

*

Insulated measuring

*Type K iunction

Ordering

-

ovoilqble from stock

Order rode

3I9-00r

" Bttllon" mognet thermocouple

* Powerfril magnet disc

*

Grormded hot junction thcrmocouple for ferrotts metals

*

Maximum 250'C

*

lm

PTFE

*Type K insulated fwin twisted cable

Ordering

-

ovoiloble from stock

0rder rode

3r 9-002

Pipe surfoce thermocoup e sty e

FP

for

use

up to 350'C

Thermocouple iunction located on the inside face of a stainless steel clip which can be tightened ensttring good thermal contact.

Range of clip sizes available to suit alternative pipe diametcrs. Fitted with stainlcss stcel braided cable.

Terminotions

Stondord

Connector

Minioture

Connector

+-

Ordering cuslom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble on short delivery time

Sty

"

Thermocouple type

Pioe dibm

Coble length

Terminotion

FP K

J

T

Specif.y

tn mm

Note

Min.25mm

Mox. l20mm

SpeciFy in metres

(to one d.p.)

T

Toils

MP

Mini oluo

5P

Stondird"plug

e.g. FP-K-50-2.0-T-|

Type K thermocouple for 50mm diometer pipe, with 2 metres o[ broided coble ond toils. BS EN60584 colour code.

Temperoture roting 350'C.

Speciol requirements

If

1,ou cannot find the TightTHERMOCOUPLE for yt>ur application plcase callTechnical Services on 01901 6L)5777.

Colour code

I

BS EN6O584

B

BSI843

Nofe

BS EN60584 preferred occurote reodings

8

Minerq

insu

oted

lhermocoup es for

use

up to

I

200"C

Generol

The mineral insulated thermocouple offers an extremely versatile thermocouple system capable of working under extreme conditions.The units comprise a seamless metal sheath in which the thermocouple elements are embedded in

higfly

compressed mineral powder. Mineral insulated thermocouples are therefore self armoured and usually require no extra protection and yet have exceptionally low thermal mass and good flexibility.

Advontoges

-

Stability: The conductors are protected from oxidisation and corrosive environmental conditions so the emf characteristics remain very stable.

Strength: The MI cable can be bent and formed without adversely affecting the performance.The MI probe'can therefore be installed in

dfficult

locations.

Rapid

response:

Its size and the good thermal conductivity of the compressed powder give a rapid response to temperature changes.

Pressure

tight:

The seamless metal sheaths are impervious to liquids and gases and can withstand extremely high extemal pressures.

Applicotion guide

Thermoelemenl tyPe

CopperConstonton (T) tlox. temp.

roting

400"c lron-Constonton (J) 750"C

Sheoth moleriol

l8l8

Stoinless sleel to

BS 3605 832

l8l8

steel to

Stoinless

BS 3605-832

Iypitol opplirolions

Food processing, plostics mouldings

Sub zero temps.

Condensers

Re-heot ond onneoling furnoces. Poper ond pulp mills.

Plostics.

Noles

The

1

8/8 S/S sheoth gives good corrosion resistonce in o wide ronge of industriol opplicotions while retoining good ductility.

The I

8/8 S/S sheoth gives good corrosion resistonce in o wide ronge of industriol opplicotions while retoining good ductility.

Chromel-Alumel (K)

Nicrosil-Nisil (N)

I

I

I

00'c

200'c

25l20

Stoinless steel to

8S3605-805

Nicrobell B'

Engine exhoust.

Gloss monufocture.

Furnoce goses.

Anneoling furnoces. Solt boths

Extends typicol

25/20 stoinless steel opplicotions up to 1200'C plus minimised thermocouple element contominotion

Ihe25/20 S/S sheoth hos good oxidisotion properties ot elevoted temperotures but should not be subsequently monipuloted. Sotisfoctory in sulphur beoring otmospheres.

*Nicrobell

B is o trodemork.

Offers superior stobility ol elevoted temperofu res ond longer element life.

Sheoth moteriol used for ony given thermocouple moy be subiect to chonge due to continuous product development

9

Thermocouple Response Times

The response time for a thermocouple is usually defined as the time taken for the thermal voltage (output) to reach 63% maximum for the step change temperature in question. It is dependent on several parameters including the thermocouple

of

dimensions, construction, plunged into a medium tip configuration and the nature of the medium in which the sensor is located. If the thermocouple is with a high thermal capacity and heat transfer is rapid, the effective response time

will

be practically the same as for the thermocouple itself (the intrinsic response time). However,

if

the thermal properties of the medium are poor (e.g.

still air) the response time can be l0O times greater.

Sheoth

Outside

Diomeler

Types ot

Meosuring

.Junction

Response Time

-

Seconds

6,0mm

6.0mm

3,0mm

3.0mm

l.5mm

l.5mm

'l

.Omm

l.0mm

insuloied eorthed insuloted eorthed lnsuloted eorthed insuloted eorthed r00

3.2

1.6

l0

0.4

0.25

0.14

0.16

0,07

250

4.0

2.0

1.1

0.46

0.37

0.17

0.1 8

0.09

350

4.7

2.3

1.25

0.5

0.43

0.r 85

0.r 9

0.1 I

Volues shown ore for o closed end sheoth.

lmmersion in minerol oil

For exposed meosuring lunctions, divide the volues shown by 10

Tip Temperoture "C

430

5.0

2.5

1.4

0.56

0.50

0.r95

0.21

0.12

700

6.4

3.r5

1.6

0.65

0.72

0.22

0.24

0,16

850

16.0

8.0

4.5

1.8

1.0

0.8

0.73

0.6

Types of iunction

lnsulated or eafthed hot junction units are available.

Insuloted hol iunction

The conductors are welded together and insulated from the sheath and cap closure.This allows the insulation resistance of the probe to be checked.

Eqrthed hot iunction

The conductors and sheath are welded together with the jurction at the extreme tip of the probe. Intimate contact is achieved for accurate surface temperature measurement.

10

o

Minerol insu oted thermocoup es sty e MA for

use

up to 1200'C

W:th flexible connecring coble

Rugged mineral insulated thermocouples from 0.5 to (r.0mm diameter in types K,J,T and N terminating in a flexible connecting cable.The thermocouple junction is insulated from the sheath as standard, but can be grounded as an option.

A popular range of standard thermocouples is available in types K andJ.Alternatively we offer a custom-made service using the part-numbering system shown.

5

Dia Ierminqlions

Probe Length

----* .(-

Coble Lengrh

_____________|

Bore toils S oS

Stondord

Connector

Miniofure

Conneclor

Ordering stondqrd versions

-

ovoiloble from stock.

Stainless steel sheath mineral insulated thermocouples

with

2 metres of stainless steel braided flexible cable and tails.

Thermocouple junction insulated from sheath.Temperature rating of probe

-

fype

K

I100"C, type J 750'C.The cold end plain pot seal is rated to 200'C. Colour coded to BS 8N60584.

Mineral insulated thermocouples have

al

insulated measuring junction as standard, this arrangement, usual in the industry means that the stainless steel sheath and extension cables are electrically insulated from each other.

Ihermoouple

Probe Probe (oble 0rds

Ihernorouple

Probe Probe ftble

Order type diom. length rype rode type diom. hngrh rype

(ode mm.

nn.

mm.

mm.

1.5

1.5

3.0

3.0

4.5

4.5

250

500

250

500

250

500

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

312-01I

312-012

3 I 2-001

312-002

3r 2-003

312-OO4

K

K

K

K

K

K

1.5

1.5

3.0

3.0

4.5

4.5

250

500

250

500

250

500

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

3r 2-0r 3

312-014

3r 2-005

3r 2-006

312-007

312-008

Ordering cuslom-mqde versions

-

ovoiloble on short delivery time.

'

Junction

T/C Probe

Probe

Pot

Seol

Coble

Coble

Terminotion Colour type diom. length length Vpe code

(mm) or AC3

6.00 only e.g. MA-|SK-3.00-500-Pl

-2.}-C1-MP-|

Minerol insuloted thermocouple, insuloted single iunction,

3.00mm diometer probe, 500mm long, ploin typ"

K, pot seol, 2.Ometres long

PVC coble with mini plug BS EN60584 colour code.

Temperoture rqtings of probes:

'IYpe

K

1100'C, Type

J

75O"C,

TlpeT

4OO"C, Type

N

1200'C

Cold end pot seal rated to 200'C

Type "K" Inconel sheathed thermocouples available to special order.

Specio!

requiremenls

If you cannot find the TightTHERMOCoUPLE for your application please call Technical Services on 01903 695-m.

1l

Minerq

insu oted thermocoup es sty e MD for

use

up

to

I

200"C

wirh

flexible toils

Dio

+

- Rugged mineral insulated thermocouples in types KJ,T and N terminating

in

loomm long insulated tails.The thermocouple junction is insulated from the sheath as standard, but can be grounded as an option.

€_ probe tengrh

__-+

1-

Ordering cuslom-mode versions

- ovoiloble

on

short delivery time.

Junction

Thermocouple

Probe

Vpe type diom.

(.m)

Probe

Pot

Seol length

Colour code

1O0mm--*

MD

lS

lnsuloted

K

GS

lD

Grounded

Duolex

J

T

GD insuloted N

Duplex Note

srounded

l)

i:f[f,""''"

O.5O t.OO l.5O

(K

only)

Specify in Pl Ploin

(r onfi nim.

3.OO

4.5O (not I)

P5

8mm

threoded

I

BS EN60584

B

BSl843

Note

BS EN60584 preferred

f;13,0,*,

speciry

3.00, 4.50 or 6.00

e.g. MD-lSK-1,50-250-Pl-l Minerol insuloted thermocouple, insuloted single iunction, typ" K, 1.50 diometer probe,

250mm long, ploin pot seol. BS EN60584 colour code.

Temperolure rotings of probes:

TYpe

K

r100'C,

TypeJ

75o"C,'IYpeT

4oo"c, TYpe

N

1200"C

TYpe K Inconel sheathed thermocouples available to special order.

M

nero

insu oted fhermocoup es sfy e MB for

use

up to

I

200'C

Wirh thermocouple conneclor

+

-Dio

Terminolions

Probe length o o o

o

@

e

Stondord

Connstor

Minioture

Connector

*

t

ffi

Rugged mineral insulated thermocouples in types K,J,T and N terminating in a miniarure (flat pin) or standard

(round pin) thermocouple plug.The thermocouple junction is insulated from the sheath as standard, but can be grounded as an option

Ordering custom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble

on

short delivery time

Style

MB

Junction type

Thermocouple

Probe

Vpe diom. (mml

!5

lnsuloted

K

GS

lD

Grounded

J

Duolex

T insulotLd

N

GD Duolex

Note

grorndid N not ovoiloble in duplex

0.5O (K only)

t.OO

(K only) r.50

3.OO

4.50 (not

T)

6.OO

For duplex, specify

3.00, 4.50 or 6.00

Probe length specify

Terminotion

MP

Miniplug

SP

Std oluo

DP DuplLx

flus

Colour code

I

BS EN6O584

B BSI843

Note

BS EN60584 preferred e.g. MB-lSK-3.00-5OO-MP-| Minerol insuloted thermocouple, insuloted single iunction, type K, 3.OOmm diometer probe

5O0mm long probe, mini plug terminotion BS EN60584 colour code.

Temperolure rotings of probes:

TYpeK llo0'C, TypeJ

75o"C,

TypeT

4Oo"C,

TYpeN

1200"C

TYpe "K" Inconel sheathed thermocouples available to special order.

Speciol

rcquiremenls

If you cannot find the TighITHERMOCOUPLE for your application please call Technical Services on 01903 695777

l2

o

Minerq

insu oted thermocoup es sty e

MC

for

use

up

to 'l

With connecling heod

Rugged mineral insulated thermocouples

Choose from l.Omm to 6.Omm diameter in types

K,J,l

and N terminating in a connecring head from diecast aluminium (standard or miniature), nylon or stainless steel terminal heads.

The thermocouple junction is insulated from the sheath as standard, but can be grounded as an option.A popular range standard thermocouples is available in types K and J.AJternatively, we offer a custom-made service using the part

of

numbering system shown.

92mm

KNE KNE/SUS

92mm

Soio

E

E

FI

-1 o

+

Probelength

KNS N l

I

I i i

Ordering stqndord versions

-

ovoiloble from stock

Stainless steel sheathed mineral insulated thermocouples head.Thermocouple terminating in model KNS miniature diecast aluminium connecting junction insulated from the sheath.Temperature rating of probe

-

K 1100'C,J 750'C. Connecting head ratecl to

loo'c.

Ihennotouple

Probe Probe 0rder typo diom. Iength code nn. lnlll.

J

J

J

6.0

5.0

6.0

100

200

300

3t 3

3t

010

313-01

I

3-012

Thermocouple

Probe probe

Order rype fiom. lengh code

K

K

K mm. mm.

6.0

6.0

6.0 l oO

200

3oO

3t 3-O] 3

313_014

313-015

Ordering custom-mqde versions

- ovoiloble

on

short delivery time.

Style Thermocouple iunction

Thermocoup e iype

Probe diom.

(mm)

Probe

Terminol

length

Heod

Process threod below heod

Colour code

,uc

IS lnsuloted

GS Grounded

K

J

T

N

Note:

N not ovoiloble in duplex

6.O0

4.5O (nor r)

3.OO

specify KNE Stondord in

mm

oluminium

KNS

Smoll oluminium if not reouired

N

Nylon

KNE/SUS

Stoinless

Omit from code

PRt

PR5 t/2"

BSp l/8"BSP steel

Other sizes to speciol order

r

Bs EN60584

B BSI843

Note

BS EN60584 preferred e.g.

MC-|SK-6.00-250-KNE-|

Minerol insuloted thermocouple, insuloted single iunction, type K, 6.O0mm diometer probe, 250mm long probe with KNE oluminium heod. BS EN6O584 colour code

Temperolure rotings of probes:

TYpe

K

1100'C,

TypeJ

75o"C,

TlpeT

4Oo"C, Type

N

1200.C

Probes with KNE, KNE/SUS and N heads can be supplied with in-head

420fiA

transmitters to special order.

Tlpe "K" Inconel sheathed thermocouples available to special order.

Speciol

requirements

IfyoucannotfindtherightTHERMoCouPLEforyourapplicationpleaseca.lJTechnicalserviceson0lg03

69j7jj r3

Resistqnce

Thermomelers

The resistance of a conductor varies according to its temperature and this principle is employed in resistance thermometry. By specifying a concluctor material which displays a stable and approximately linear temperature coefficient of resistance over the required range

, a reliable thermometer can be made.

Since Platinum is chosen for tl're world standard resistance thermometer material, the PRT assembly is the predominant choice for both laboratory and industry.

As a sensing element, Platinum has many virtues. In a pure form it electrically.The relationship between

will

resist contamination and is stable both mechanically and temperatrre and resistance is nearly linear which allows production of accurately interchangeable detectors.

Materials other than platinum are sometimes used but only to a limited extent; only PRT assemblies are therefore offered.

The use of the PRT is in practice much simpler than that of the thermocouple; copper wires are used between sensor and instrument and since the calibration is absolute, no reference or CJC correction techniques are required.

Standard PRT detectors have a resistance of 100 Ohms at 0"C and have a resistance

/

temperatufe characteristic which conforms to IEC 751, classA or B.The resistance change over the range 0"C to 100'C is 38.5 Ohms and is referred to as the Fundamental

Interval.

P qtinum resistqnce thermometer

Proctice

The PRT detector is available in many different types <>f construction but most commonly as a miniature ceramic assembly.The

platinum wire is wound in a small spiral and located in axial holes in a high purity alumina rod. Glass adhesive is used to seal the lead exit points, fired to form a permanent bond. Many shapes and sizes of detector are employed but the maiority arc 25mm tong by 3mm diameter. During construction, the element resistance at 0'C is trimmed to 100 Ohms

with

a very close tolerance.

This detector arrangement, when ktcated in a suitable protecting sheath results in a stem sensing assembly ( sensing occurs along the entire detector body length) as opposed to the tip sensing thermocouple.

Alternative arrangements include the widely used flat film construction which is very compact and has a low thermal mass.

Lead

Configuration

- The accrlracy of PRT temperature measurement is largely determined by the number of leads used between the probe ancl the instmment.Two leads are often acceptable in the case of short cable runs, three or four leads compensating for leacl resistance variations give the greatest precision.The choice of 2,3 or 4 wires must be made in context with the measuring instrument input arrangement; Eurotherm instruments use the industry standard 3-wire arrangement.

Red White

2 Wire

Red

3 Wire

White

il

4 Wire

WhiteWhite

t4

Generol purpose qnd

oir

duct

res

stqnce fhermometer sty e

RA ronge

-100

to

+250'C.

PtlOO sensor available protected by a 316 p;racle stainless steel tube with a welded closed end for general purpose applications.Also

with perforated probe tip for air and gas temperature measurement.Available in various probe diameters and extension cable types.

A popular range of standard probes is available.Alternatively, we offer a custom-made service using the shown.

part numbering system

5 Dia toooo

Probetength-#

Min 30mm

* Coble

Length--ry

Perforoted

Tip

3.0

3.0

4.5

4.5

6.0

6.0

Ordering stondord versions

-

ovoiloble from stock.

Single

2io'c.

ft100 sensor, grade B tolerance, 3 wire, stainless steel probe

with

2 metres flexible cable.Temperature rating of probe

Probe diom.

mm

Probe length mm

(oble tyPe

Iip

Form

Order

Probe

Probe

(sble tode diom. lengh type

MD mm

Iip

Iorm

Order rode r00

200 r00

200 r00

200

PTFE

PTFE

PTFE

PTFE

PTFE

PTFE

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

314-020

314-021

314-007

314-009

3l 4-01 0

314-01 2

3.0

3.0

4.5

4.5

6.0

6.0

6.0

r00

200 r00

200

100

200

200

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Broided

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Closed

Perloroted

314-025

314-026

314-013

314-015

3t 4-016

314-018

316-@r

Ordering cuslom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble

on

short delivery time.

Style

RA

Tip

Form

A

Rounded

C Perforoted

(6mm dio.

only)

Sinole

/D,iplex

S Single

D

Duplex

No. of wires/ element

2B

3A

4

Note

4 not ovoiloble in duplex

Toleronce Probe closs diom.

(mr)

'3.OO

4.50

6.OO

6.35

Probe ength

Speci[y tn mm

Coble length

Coble

Vpe

Terminotion

Specily in metres (to one d.p)

CT PVC

C2

PTFE

C4

Broided

AC3

Armoured

Note

C4 not ovoiloble with duplex

T

Toils

Others on request e.g. RAA-S4B-6.00-100-2.0-Cl-T

Single element PRT, rounded tip, 4 wire, closs B. Probe 5.OOmm diometer, l00mm long, 2metres PVC coble with toils.

Temperoture rotings with

Cl

coble

C2, C4, AC3 coble

,l00"c

250'C

Note: Bell spring or pot seol moy be fitted to "cold" end o[ probe depending on combinotion of probe diometer ond coble type.

Speciol requirements

If you calrnot find the right PIATINUM RESISTANCETHERMoMETER

Technical Services on 01903 695777 for your application please call

T5

Hinfs

& fips

Heovy duty resislonce lhermomelers sfy e

RC

ronge

-50

to +450"C

Ptl00 sensor protected by a 316 gnde stainless steel tube with a welded closed end for use up to 450'C.The probes are terminated in a connecting head. Choose from diecast aluminium

(standard or miniature), nylon or stainless steel terminal heads.

A popular range of standard probes is available fitted

with

the KNS miniature aluminium head.

Alternatively we can offer a custom-made service using the part numbering system shown.

g2mh

KNE KNE/SUS ossembly.

92mm

<-

t

5 oio

Probe

Lengh

+

E

E

KNS N

'l

=l /

{

I

'l

,1

Ordering stondord versions

-

ovoiloble from slock.

Single PtlOO sensor, grade B tolerance,3

Temperature rating of probe 450"C.

wire stainless steel probe terminating in model KNS miniature aluminium head.

Probe Diometer nm

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

Probe length mm

100 r50

2@

300

Order tode

315-005

315-006

315-002

315-008

Ordering custom-mode versions

-

ovoiloble

on

short delivery time

Style Tip

Form

Sinole

/DJplex

No. o[

wires/element

Toleronce Probe

Probe closs

diom.

length

(mm)

RC

A

rou nded S sinole

D du[lex

2B

3A

4

Note

4 not ovoiloble in duplex

6.OO

6.35

Specify rn mm

Terminol heod

KNE

KNS

N

steel

Stondord

Minioture

Threod below heod

Omit from code

oluminium

required.

oluminium

PRs 1/8"

BSP

Nylon

P[t

Other

KNETsus

Stoinless order.

l/2"

sizes

BSP if not to speciol e.g. RCA-S3B-6.00-250-KNE Single element PRT, 3 wire, closs B. Probe 6.00mm diometer, 250mm long with

KNE oluminium heod.

Probes fitted with KNE, KNE/SUS ond N heods con be supplied with in-heod A-2}nAtronsmitters to speciol order.

Speciol requiremenls

If you cannot find the right PI"!\TINUM RESISTANCETHERMOMETER for your application please call

Technica.l Services on 01903 695777.

t6

o

Surfqce ond q

r

meosurement

P

Sensors

Self adhesive patch PtlOO sensor rWall mounting air temperature sensors

All 4 wire sensors allowing connection to any ft100 instrument, 2,3,or

4wke

Pt100 sensors to IEC 751 class B. IOO ohms at O"C

Available ftom stock

Self-odhesive potch PrIOO sensor

Silicone rubber patch

with

self adhesive foil

backing

Dimensions:

Good resistance

Range to oils and

chemicals

60

to

I +250"C

I

metre PTFE insulated cable

Patch:35mm long

x

13mm wide x 2mm

ordef

Gode: 320-OOl

lndoor oir lemperoture PTIOO sensor

Wall mounting moulded case

Maximum 75"C

Mounts on standard electrical conduit

Dimensions:

Case: 85mm x 85mm x

30mm

Outdoor oir temperoture

PTIOO sensor

rvall mounting

Rugged stainless steel probe with waterproof connection box

Recommended for outdoor use, cold stores, etc.

Range -50 to +150'C

Perforated sheath acts as radiated heat shield and mechanical protection

Dimensions:

Case: 80mm x74mm

x

54mm high

Probe:75mm long

x

12.lmm o/d

Specio! requiremenls

If you cannot find the right SENSOR for your application please callTechnical Services on 01903 69j777

t7

Sensor nsto otion

F

ffings

f'he Eurotherm range of bayonet fittings and adaptors allow sirnple and rapid installation of probes with spring kracling to enstlre good contact with the mcasured surface.They are particularly suitable fcrr trsc in plastics machinery.

Adiustoble boyonet littings

3.Omm Grub screw

3.0mm Compression

4.5mm Grub screw

4.5mm Compression

6.0mm Grub screw (suits 184 034)

Boyonel odoplors,

I/8"

BSP

22mm

35mm

48mm

64mm

22mm2 pin (suits 184-052)

0rder code

184-058

1

84-055 r

84 050

184-051 r

84-052

0rder rode r

84-030

184-031

1

84-033

I

84-032

I 84-034

Eurotherm flonge plotes

enable the mounting of probes with compressi<ln tittings.Available in stainless steel and brass,flaugc plates arc particularlv recommenclecl for mounting probes in process ovcns, kilns, heating and ventilation (hrcts

Diameter:

Thread:

Mounting

50nrn.t

l/U" BSPP fcmale

holes:

3 x 4mm diaur. on 40mm pcd

Typ.

Stoinless sleel flonge

Bross flonge

Order rode

184-076

184-077

7

Adiustoble mounling

firings

(compression couplings)

The Eurotherm runge of adjustable moullting fittings (compressitxr couplings) allow the positioning of probcs to achievc thc desired immersion clcpth in the pnlcess.Thel' ltrc also used to couple the probe with a thennowell or thermopocket Brass aud stainless stcel versions are <lffered.

Bross 0rder

Stoinless steel

I

/8'

BSPT x

I

l/8'

BSPT x

.5mm

3.0mm tode

,l84-039 I

/8"

BSPT x

I

5mm

1/8"

BSPT x 3.0mm

l/8'BSPTx4.5mm ,l84-040

l/8"

BSPTx45mm

1

/8"

BSPT x

1/4"

BSPT x

6.0mm

I

84-04]

I /8" BSPT x 6 Omm

6.Omm

351

-005

1

/4'

BSPI x 6.0mm

1/4"

BSPI x1/4"

1/2'

BSPI x 6

1/2" BSPI omm x1/4"

3sr-007

1/4',BSPT x1/4',

35]

00] l

/2

BSPI x 6.0mm

351-009

Nrttc: all adjustdblc tnountirtglitlirtg tbreads 4re tapercd.

Metric to BSP converlor

Ml2 x I to

1/8" BSP

-

bross

female

0rder tode 784436

0rder rode

35r-00r'

184-042 l 84-0r'3

184-044

351-006

35r 008

35r 002

Speciol requirements

If yotr cannot find the right F'lTf-lNG for your application please call'l'cchnical Services on 0190J 6L)5777

l8

Therm

s

qnd thermopoc

A rangs of thermowells.maddned from solid stainless steel stock and themropockets frbricated from sainless steel tube and welded dosed.Allwith llS"BSpp female ftread in rearforprobe fftting.

The drermowells and fter,mopockets comprrcssiog htve al/2"BSPP parallel proceso tbread. |I8"BSP flttings shorld be used to flt the seirsors in the well or pocket.

Thermovrells and pockets also provide allow removal of probes from the prtrcess protecdon for the probe in the case of aggressive media.

without the need fur shwdovm or system

(raining;They

22mnNF

Slqndord itrems

-

oroiloble

from

sbck

Olher sizes qre q\loiloHe to speciol order

Specio! rcquirements

If you cannot fnd tlre

righTImMOVEIt,

fur your application p-lcase callTeclnical Services oir

01903 695777.

19

Thermocoup e connectors ond pone

s

A range of miniature (flat pin) and standard (round-pin) thermocouple connectors.

.

BS colours available from stock

.

Special colours to order

-

short delivery

.

Miniature and standard connectors, in-line and Panel mounting

.

Compensated connections ensure high accuracy

.

Types J,K,IN,E,R and S or Copper-Copper

.

Compatibi.lity with all other makes of equivalent connectors

.

Polarised connector pins guarantee correct polarity

. \Withstand high temperature, 220'C continuous

.

Ruf€ed construction with solid pins

.

Single and multi-way panels available to order

Technicol specificotion

Sizes

(body)

Min. line

plug length Width

depfi

21

Min. line

socket 24

17

17

8

8

Min. ponel

Std line

socket 25 plug 30

17

25

8

13

Std line

socket 38

Std ponel

socket 32

25

25

13

I 3

Ponel cut outs

Min. ponel

socket

8.5 x

17

Std ponel

socket

13 x26

Temperoture ronge

(of the connector NOT the meosuring ronge o[ the thermocouple] -4O" to +220"C

Note: the moximum continuous operoting temperoture for the ponel mounted socket retoining clip is lOO'C

Mox. wire size

Body moteriol

Body colours:

Type K

Type N

Type

E

Type T

Type

J

Type R/S

Copper

0.5mm2

gloss-filled polyesler

BS EN60584-3

Green

Pink

Violet

Brown

Block

Oronge

White

20

Ordering Stqndord items

-

ovoiloble from stock

Miniature and standard connectors

N (pink), in BS EN60584 colours.Types J @lack), K (green),T @rown),

VS (orange), and copper (white).

Stondord conneclors

Connector

Vpe oluo in-li"ne socket

Ponel socket

354-00r

354-002

354-003

K

354-004

354-005

354-006

T

354-007

354-008

354-009

R/S

354-0r 0

354-0r r

354-012

Copper

354-01 3

354-014

354-015

Minioture conneclors

Connector

) type oluo ln-li'ne socket

Ponel socket

354-0r 6

354-017

354-0r 8

K

354-019

354-020

354-021

T

354-022

354-023

354-024

N

354-025

354-026

354-027

R/S

354-028

354-029

354-030

Copper

354-03r

354-032

354-033

Coble Clomps

Typ"

Stondord

-

externol

Mini-externol

Order code

355-002

355-001

Ordering other connectors (including ANSI MC96.l colours)

Style Thermocouple

IM

FMTC

IS

FSTC

Minioture size

(BS colour code)

Minioture size

(ANSI

MC96.i

colour code)

Stondord size

(BS colour code)

Stondord size

(ANSI

MC95.l

colour code)

J

K

T

N

E

R/S

Cu (Copper)

Connector type

M

Pluo

F ln-li"ne socket

FF

Ponel socket with foscio

PF

Ponel socket with lugs

(mini only) e.g.

FMTC-T-M

Minioture plug, type I

ANSI colour code.

Ponels (1

+o 24 woyl ore ovoiloble for use with foscio sockets (stondord ond minioture).

Other connectors, including duplex ovoiloble.

Specio! requiremenls

If you cannot find the right CONNECTOR for your application please callTechnical Services on

01903 695777

2t

o

Hinrs &

Tips

Thermocoup e extension ond PRT cob e ond comPensofing cob e

A range of thermocouple cable in BS EN60584 colotu code is available from stock.

ln

addition we can supply other cable constructions, sizes and colour codes.

.

Wide range of higih quality insulated cables

.

TypesJ,K,IN,U andVx

.

Extension and compensating

.

Various insulations and conflgruations

.

Available in

5O and IOO metre lengths

Ordering stondord cobles

-

ovoiloble from stock

T

)

Thermocouple coble

PVC, flat twin 7/0.2mm

-

Extension and compensating cable for use up

to

105'C

Type

Order tode

Order tode

50m l00m

K

353-002

353-023

353-003

353-024

N

K(Vx)'

R/s(u)'

353-008

353-01

1

353-005

353-014

353-009

353-012

353-006

353-0r 5

*Compensoting coble.

Vx is o compensoting coble for type K thermocouples for ombient temperotures up to 8O'C ond type U is o compensoting coble for type R & S thermocouples for ombient temperotures up to 50'C.

Glassfibre,flat rwin 7/O.Zmm

-

Extension cable for use up to 350"C.

Iyp.

0rder tode

Ordet tode

50m l00n

J

K

353-026

353-027

353-029

353-030

Glassfibre,with

stainless steel overbraid, flat rwin 7/0.2mm

-

Extension cable for use up to 350'C.

Iype

Otder tode

Order code

50m l00m

J

K

353-017

353-018

353-020

353-021

PRT

extension cqble

PYC,4 coresT/O.2 copper with screen.

0rder tode

Order code

50m

I00m

353-084

353-085

Note: use 3 of the 4 cores for your 3 wire connection between PRT ond the Eurotherm instrument

Speciol requirements

If you cannot find the right CABLE for your application pleasc callTechnical Serviccs on 01903 695777.

THERMOCOUPTE CABTE COTOUR CODES ARE

SHOWN

NS DE

TH

BACK COVER

Refer to tbe tecbnical

data

section

of tltis cataloguefor

mone informati.on

about

the cables.

22

Specio Requiremenls

Use the suffix -99 on part numbers for custom-made sensors to indicate special requirement. Common special requirements include:

Bends in probes

Mineral insulated thermocouples can be readily bent to shape by the user. General pulpose thermocouples and resistance thermometers can be ordered with a bend. Speciff the angle of bend and length (mm) from the probe tip. e .g. 99 = Bend

90'l100mm.

Alternolive pnobe lerminotions

Fleible

cables on probes can be terminated as standard in plain tails, miniature or standard plugs.

We can also

offer

the

following terminations: termination:

specify:

3/16"

rngwasher

codeTB

2BA

spade

codeTC

4BA

spade l/4" faston

3mm

blade

codeTE codeTF codeTD

Other terminations can be supplied to special order

Use of thermowells

If a thermowell is specified, the probe length must be around 50mm greater than the specified thermowell immersion lengh.

This allows room for the required compression coupling.Alternatively, if a thread below head is chosen, the sensor and thermowell must be ordered together

4 to 2OmA lrqnsmitters

Thermocouples and PtlO0 probes with connecting heads can be fitted

with

integral 42OmA transmitters. Insulated measuring junctions are required. Please callTechnical Services on 01903 695777 for more information.

Togging of probes

'We can supply probes with rugged identification tags if required. Please callTechnical Services on 01903 695777 for more information.

Certificote of colibrqtion

Ve offer a temperature calibration service in the range -30 to +1200'C with traceability to national standards.We can also organise NAM{S certi.frcation. Please callTechnical Services on 01903 695777 for more information.

NOTE: BS

EN6O584-3 is precisely equivolent thermocouple cobles ond to

lEC

584-3 in defining colour codes their thermol emf toleronce volues.

All dimensions stoted in rhis publicorion ore nominql.

for

23

I

US NG

THERMOCOUPTES

Connection of thermocouples to meqsuring ond control inslrumenls

Ordinary copper connecting wires should never be used, as the resultant error

will

be equal to the difference in temperature between the point of the thermocouple and the instrument (or external reference junction

).

Extension or compensating wire or cable must be employed, and it is essential that the same polarity is maintained. If the polarity is reversed, the error is equal to twice the temperature difference befween the connecting point of the thermocouple and the instrument (or external refbrence junction).

Compensating cable resembles the thermoelectric characteristic of the relevant thermocouple over a limited ambient temperature range,0' to t]0'C typica[y. Since these cables are made from low cost materials, cost savings can be achieved on plant installations c<lmpared

with

running true thermocouple extension cable.

Extension cable (true thermocouple material ) should be used for maxrmum accuracy.

A proctico! guide to the selecfion of thermocouple wire ond coble

Which insulotion?

Moteriol

PVC

PTFE

Glossfibre

(vornished)

Usoble temperoture ronge

-10'C to

105'C

-75"C to 2501300"C

-60"c to

350/400'c

Applicotion notes

Good generol purpose insulotion for "light" envi roriments. Woi"rproof ond very f ler'ible.

Resistont to oils, ocids, other odverse ogents ond fluids. Good mechonicol strength ond flexibiliry.

Good temoeroture ronoe but of fluids.

ioirly

will not orevent inoress

flexibltut

does not provide go6d mechonicol protection.

lnstollofion Notes a)

Always observe colorr codes and polarity of connections for each type of thermocouple. If the correct cable is used but crossed at both ends, the associated instrument

will

show an error eqtral to

twice

the temperature difference between the thermocouple termination and the instrument ambient temperature.

b)

Avoid introducing "different" metals into the cabling, preferably use compensating colour coded connectors for the greatest accuracy, reliability and convenience of installation.

c)

Avoid subjecting conrpensating cable to high temperatures to avoid inaccrracies. Extension cable is superior in this respect.

d)

Do not form thermo-iunctions using compensating cable; only extension cable is valid for this pulpose.

e)

Use screened or braided cable connected to ground in any installation where ac pick-up or relay contact interference is likely."Twisted pair" construction is useful in such sitttations.

D

For very long cable runs, ensure that cable resistance can be tolerated by the instrumentation without resulting in measrrement errors. Modern electronic instruments usually accept up to IOO Ohms or so; they

will

usually tolerate higher lead resistance but some error

will

result. Refer to relevant instrument specifications for full details.

g)

Cabling is usually available with many different types of insulation material and outer covering to suit different applications.

Choose carefi.rlly in consideration of ambient temperature, the presence of moisttre or water and the need for abrasion resistance.

h)

If errors or indicator anomalies occur, be sure to check the thermocouple, the cable, interconnections and the instrument.

Most problems of this nature can be dtre to incoffect wiring but instrument calibration error or faults can occur.

lnterchangeabiliry is facilitated by the use of plug and socket interconnections. Special connectors are available from

Eurotherm for this purpose and thermocouple alloys or compensating materials are used for the pins and receptacles to avoid spurious thermal voltages.The connectors are colour coded to indicate the relevant thermocouple type and are available as

"standard" size with round pins or"miniature" size with flat pins.

24

Thermocouple Accurocies

Toleronce closses for thermocouples to BS EN60584-2

Fe-Con (J)

Cu-Con (T)

NiCr-Ni(K) ond

NiCrSi-NiSi(N)

NiCr-Con (E)

Prl oRh-Pr

(Sl ond

Prl 3Rh-Pr (R)

Pr30Rh-

Pr6Rh (B)

Closs I

Closs 2

Closs 3

Closs I

Closs 2

Closs 3

Closs

1

Closs 2

Closs 3

Closs I

Closs 2

Closs 3

Closs I

Closs 2

Closs 3

Closs I

Closs 2

Closs 3

-

AO +750"C:

- 40 +750"C:

-40 +350'C:

- 40 +350'C:

-200 + 40'C:

- 40 + 1000"C

- 40 +l 200'C:

-200 + 40'C:

- 40 +800'C:

- 40 +900'C:

-200 + 40"C:

0

+1

600'C:

-40 +1500"C

+600 +l 700'C:

+600

+1

700'C:

+0.004

+0.0075

. t

.

+0.004. t

+0.0075 . t

+0.015. t

+0.004. t

+0.0075.t

+0.015 . t

+0.004. t

+0.0075. t

+0.015 . t

+

n

+ (r-r000).0.0031

+0.0025 . t

+0.0025. t

+0.005 . t t or +1.5'C or +2.5"C or +0.5'C or +l .0'C or +].0"C or +l.5'C or +2.5oC

or +2.5"C or

+l

5'C or +2 5'C or +2 5'C or +,l.0'C or +1.5'C or +l.5"C or +4.0'C

Note: t=

ocfuol bmperoture

Use the lorger of the two deviotion volues

loop

Resistonce, Ohms per Combined Metre Approximote (sizes in mm)

(ode

)

E

K

N

T

U

VX t /0.2

38. I

19.3

31.8

44.2

16.2

1.4

16.2

r /0.3r 5

15.4

7.8

12.8

17.7

6.5

0.6

6.5

r /0.508

5.9

3.0

4.9

6.8

2.5

0.2

2.5

7

/0.2

5.3

2.7

4.5

6.2

2.3

0.2

2.3

t3/0.2

2.9

1.5

2.4

3.4

1.2

0.1

1.2

t4/0.2

2.7

1.4

2.2

3.2

t.l

0.1

t.t

23/0.2

1.6

0.8

1.4

1.9

0.7

0.1

o.7

Performonce considerqtion when connecting thermocouples a)

length ofcable runs and loop resistance.

The resistivity of extension and compensating cables varies according to the different conductor metals; the limit to cable lengths which can be accommodated by measuring instruments therefore depends on both the thermocouple type and instrument speci.flcations.A general rule for electronic instruments is that up to 100 Ohms loop cable resistance (i.e. total of both legs)

will

not result in measurement errors.

The table of loop resistances gives values for the popular types of thermocouple. One example is that forTlpe K extension cable which has a combined per metre loop resistance of 4.5 Ohms with 7/O.2mm conductors; in this case, 20 to 25 (lOO+4.5 ) metres is the maximum permissible cable run.The use of larger gauge wires will permit greater lengths of course.

b) Interference and Isolation.

With long runs, the cables may need to be screened and earthed at one end ( at the instrument) to minimise noise pick-up

(interference) on the measuring circuit.

25

Alternative types of screened cable construction are available to special order and these include the use of copper or mylar screening.Twisted pair configurations are offered and these can incorporate screening as required.

Ifith

mineral insulated cables the use of the sheath for screening may raise problems. In certain forms the measuring point is welded to the sheath in order to reduce the response time; the screen is then connected directly to the sensor input of the instrument and is therefore ineffective. In thermocouples where the measuring point is welded to the protection tube it may be necessary to take special precautions against intederence since the sheath tube can in this case act as an aerial.

Even if the measuring point is not welded to the protection tube it is inadvisable to use the sheath of a mineral-insulated thermocouple as a screen. Since it consists of non-insulated material there is a possibility with electrically heated furnaces that

it

can carry currents between the fumace material and the earthing point.These may result in measurement errors.

C,enerally

, thermocouples in electrical contact with the protection tube can easily suffer interference from external voltages through voltage pick-up. ln addition, two such inputs form a cuffent loop through which the two inputs are connected together.

Since such current loops have a large effective croslsectional arca they form a preferred path for the introduction

of

interference.

Thermocouples should under these electrical conditions always be isolated from each other, i.e. the amplifier circuits must have no connection to the remaining electronics.This is a.lready provided on most instruments intended for connection to thermocouples.

Ceramic materials used for insulating the thermocouples inside the protection tube su-ffer a definite loss of insulation resistance above 800 to l000"C.The effects described can therefore appeu at high temperatures even in thermocouples where the measuring iunction is not welded to the protection tube. Here again fi.rll isolation is strongly recommended.

With electrically heated furnaces in the hi€lbtemperature range it is also necessary to consider that the increased conductivity

of

the ceramic insulating materials may cause the supply voltage to leak into the thermocouple. Here again ftrll isolation against supply and earth potential with an insulating voltage exceeding the peak voltage of the supply (heater voltage) is essential.

The isolation of the inputs becomes specially important when electrically heated furnaces are fitted with several thermocouples which are linked to one or several instruments.

26

US NG

P

NU'VI

RES

STANCE

THE

OMETERS

Tolerqnces

for

PtIOO Thermometers ro

lEC

751

Iemo.

('()

200

100 n

100

200

300

400

500

600

650

700

800

850

Resislonre

(ol

18.s2

60.26

100.00

138.5r

175.86

212.05

247.09

280.98

313.71

329.64

345.28

375.70

390.48

(t"()

0.55

0.35

0.15

0.35

0.55

0.75

0.95

I .15

r.35

1.45

0oss A

(to)

0.24

0.14

0.06

0.r 3

0.20

0.27

0.33

038

0.43

o.46

Ioleronre

33

36

38

43

46

08 t3 t8

23

28

(t"() l3

08

03

(loss

B

(to)

0.79

0.93

r.06

t.t

3

1.17

1.28

1.34

0.56

0.32

o.t2

0.30

0.48

0.64

Terminoting rhe Resislonce Thermometer

Fundamentally, every sensing resistor is a

two wire

clevice. When terminating the resistor

with

extension wires, a decision must be made as to

whether

a 2,3

or

4

wire

arrangement is required

for

measurement pu{poses.

A

3

wire system is most commonly utilised in industry and is adopted universally for all Eurotherm instruments.

In

the sensing resistor, the electrical resistance varies

with

temperature.Temperature is measured

indirectly

by reading the voltage

drop

across the sensing resistor

in

the presence

of

a constant current

flowing through it

using

Ohm'sLaw: V=R.I

The measuring

cuffent

should be as small as possible

to

minimise sensor heating; a maximum

of

around

lmA

is regarded as acceptable

for

practical purposes.This

would

produce a 0.

lV drop in

a Pt100 sensing resistor at 0"C; the voltage dropped

which

varies

with

temperature is then measured by the associated

circuitry.The interconnection

between the Pt100 and the associated

input circuit

must be compatible

with both

and the use

of

2,3

or

4

wires

must be specified accordingly.

It

is essential that

in

any resistance thermometer the resistance value of the external leadwires be taken

into

account, and

if

this value affects the required accuracy of the

thermomete!

its effect should be minimised.

This is usually accomplished by connecting the leadwires

into

the modified WHEATSTONE BRIDGE

circuit in

the measuring instrumentation.The leadwires can be 2,3

or

4

in

numbeg often dependant

upon

the requirements of the instrumentation

andlor

the overall accuracy required.Thro leads are adequate

for

some industrial applications, three leads compensating

for

lead resistance improves accuracy, and

for

the highest accuracy requirements

four

leads are required,

in

a current/voltage measuring mode.

Connecting R.esistqnce Thermometers

lo

lnstrumenls

The connection between the thermometer assembly and the instrumentation is made

with

standard cable

with copper

conductors

in

2,3

or 4

core construction.The cabling introduces electrical resistance

which

is placecl

in

series

with

the resistance thermometer.The

two

resistances are therefore cumulative and could be

interpreted

as an increased temperature

if

the lead resistance is

not

allowed for.The

longer

and/or the smaller the diameter of the cable, the greater the lead resistance wi-ll be and the measurement errors could be appreciable. connection,

In

the case

of

a 2

wire little

can be done about this

problem

and some measurement

error will

result according

to

the cabling and

input circuit

arrangement.

The heavier the gauge of the conductors, the less the impact is on errors due

to

lead resistance effects as describecl.

Typically 7/O.2mm

or

l4/O.Zmm conductors are specified

with

insulation chosen

to

suit a

particular

application.

27

Terminotion colour codes

IEC

75t :

1983

Red

White

Red Red White Red WhiteWhite

2 Wire 3 Wire 4

Install,ation

Notes: a)Always observe

colour

codes and terminal designations; the

wiring conliguration of

the thermometer must match that of the

instrument input

arrangement.

b) Avoid introducing "different" metals

into

the cabling; preferably use copper connecting blocks or

colour

coded

(or

other dedicated) connectors

for

greater accuracy,

reliability

and convenience of installation.Alternative

conductor

materials could have "Ohmic" efects

which

may result

in different

resistance values

in

lead wires.

c)

Use screened or braided cable connected to ground

in

any installation where ac pick-up

or

relay contact interference is likely.

d)

For very long cable runs, ensure that cable resistance can be tolerated by the instrumentation

without

resulting

in

measurement errors. Eurotherm instruments

typically

accept

up to

22ohms resistance

in

each of the 3 leads. Refer

to

the relevant instrument specifications

for full

details.

e) Cabling is usually available

with

many

different

rypes of insulation material and outer covering

to

suit

different

applications. Choose carefully

in

consideration of ambient temperature, the presence

of

moisture or

water

and the need

for

abrasion resistance.

f; If

errors occur, be sure

to

check the sensor, the cable, interconnections and the instrument. Many such problems are due

to incorrect wiring or

instrument calibration

error

rather than the sensor.

Interchangeability is facilitated by the use of

plug

and socket interconnections.Various connectors are available

for

this purpose

.

2a

Performonce Considerqlions When Using Resislonce Thermometers

There are various considerations appropriate

to

achieving good performance

from

resistance thermometer sensors: a) Length

of

cable runs and

loop

resistance - Refer

to Installation Notes b)

Interference and Isolation

\With long cable runs, the cables may need

to

be screened and earthed at one end (at the

instrument) to

minimise noise pick-up (interference) on the measuring

circuit.

Poor insulation is manifested as a

reduction in

the indicated temperature,

often

as a result of moisture ingress

into

the probe

or wiring.

c)

Self-heating

In

order

to

measure the voltage dropped across the sensing resistor, a

current

must be passed

through it.The

measuring

current

produces dissipation

which

generates heat

in

the sensor.This results

in

an increased temperature indication.There are many aspects

to

the effects

of

self-heating

but

generally

it

is necessary

to

minimise the

current flow

as much as possible; 1mA or less is usually acceptable.The choice of

current

value must take

into

account the

Ro value

of

the sensing resistor since dissipation = I2R.

Eurotherm furstruments use small values of excitation cuffent such that self-heating effects are minimal.

d)

Stem

conduction

This is the mechanism by

which

heat is conducted

from

or

to

the process medium by the probe itself; an apparent

reduction

or increase respectively

in

measured temperature results.The immersion depth (the length of that

part of

the probe

which

is

directly in

contact

with

the medium) must be such as

to

ensure that the "sensing" length is exceeded (double the sensing length is recommended). Small immersion depths result

in

a large temperature gradient between the sensor and the surroundings

which

results

in

a large heat

flow.

The ideal immersion

depth

can be achieved

in

practice by moving the probe

into or out

of the process medium incrementally;

with

each adjustment, note any apparent change

in

indicated temperature .The

correct

depth

will

result

in

no change

in

indicated temperature.

For calibration purposes l5O

to

300mm immersion is required depending on the probe construction.

The use

of

thermowells increases the thermal resistance

to the

actual sensor; heat also

flows to

the outside through the

thermowell

material.

Direct

measurements are preferable

for

good response and accuracy

but

may be mechanically undesirable.

Low flow

rates

or

stationary media result

in

reduced heat transfer

to

the thermometer, maximum

flow

rate locations afe necessary

for

more accurate measurement.

29

U

I

l(

Colour Codes

Thermocouple Connectors, Exlension ond Compensoling Wires

INSUI.AIION COTOUR

Exlension & (ompensoting

CODES

leods

qnd

Cobles

GELI

(0DE

TYPE

(0]'|DUO0RS +/

BRITISH

BSI

843: I 952

FORMER SIANDARD

AMTRIGN

ANsr/M( 96.r

GTRMA].|

D }l 437t3/43714

E684-3:1989, mod ---1

Bs

rN6o584-3

I

E

O]'|STA}lTA1'| pper

Nickel,

IllAdvonre

+

1

EX

J

I t

I

, telKonst nslonlon l/()

IL

F

+

1

+

G

+

J)(

I

1

+

1 l()(

,UA,

Ll)

+

N urcnos Vtl s r

1

1

NX

N(

il

+ +

(e)

(OPPtR/CONSTA1{IA1{

Vx(row t'rrxn)

(

(u/(on$onlon I (ompensoling for

( ((u(onslonlon)

+ + +

l(O

I

1

1

+ RO scA uler sheqfi

EN60584-3 h indkoled erolure

Ron e of

Thermocouple Wire

To

erqnces

The

figures shown in the tobles ore those oppropriote to the meosuring iunction temperoures in the finol column.

Toleronce

closses

to

BS

EN60584-3

Type

JX

TX

EX

KX

NX

KCA

t85pV(tl.5"C)

t3OpV(t0.5"C)

tl20pV(t1.5"C) t60pV(tl.5"C)

t60pV(t1.5'C)

KCB

NC

RCA

RCB

SCA

SCB

Notes

t

Toleronce

Closs

2

t14OpV(t2.5"C) t60pV(t1.0'C) t200pV(t2.5'C) t1OOpV(t2.5"C) t100pV(t2.5'C)

tl00pV(t2.5'C)

tlOOpV(t2.5'C)

tl

OOpV(t2.5"C) t30pV(t2.5'C) t60pV(t5.0'C) t30pV(t2.5"C) t6OpV(t5.0'C)

Goble

Temp

ronge

-25" lo + 200'C

-25" to

+

100"C

Meosuring iunction lemperolure

500"c

300"c

-25o lo + 200'C

-25" lo + 200"C

-25" lo + 200'C

0" to

+ ]50'C

0'

to

+

'l

00'C

0'

to

+

150"C

0'

to

+

100"C

0" to + 200"C

O" to

+

100"C

0'to

+ 200'C

500'c

900'c

900"c

900'c

900'c

900"c

I

000"c

I

000'c

I

000"c

I

000"c l.

Coble temperoture ronge moy be restricted to figures lower thon those shown in the toble becouse o[ temperoture limitotions imposed by the insulont.

2.

A coble comprising two copper conductors moy be used with type B thermocouples. The expected moximum odditionol deviotion within the coble temperoture ronge O"C to

+

lOO'C is 40pV. The equivolent in temperoture is is ot

'1400'C.

3.5"C when the meosuring iunction o[ the thermocouple

UK sAI.ES OFFICE

Eurotherm Controls Limited

Forodoy Close, Durrington

Worthing

West Sussex

BNl3

3PL

Telephone Soles: (01903) 695888

Technicol: (01 9031 695777

Service: (0,l 903) 695444

Fox (01 903) 695666

INTERNATIONAT SATES AND SERVICE

AUSTRALIA

Eurotherm Pty. Ltd.

Telephone Sydney (+61

21 477 7022

Fox

(+61

21 477 7756

AUSTRIA

Eurotherm GmbH

Telephone Vienno (+43 1]r7987601

Fox relexO4T I EIAUT A

BELGIUM

Eurotherm B.V

Telephone

Fox

Antwerp l+32 31

(+32 31 321 7363

322 3870

DENMARK

Eurotherm A/S

Telephone

Fox

Copenhogen (+45

3 I | 871 622

(+45

31]r 872124

FRANCE

Eurotherm Automotion SA

Telephone Lyon

(+33

478} 664500

Fox (+33 478} 352490

Telex

0y'2 380038 EUROTERM F

GERMANY

Eurotherm Regler GmbH

Telephone

Fox

Limburg l+49 64311

(+49 64311 298119

2980

Telex

041 484791 EUROT D

Also regionol oflices

Soles ond support in over

30 countries worldwide

For countries not listed enquiries/orders

Eurotherm Controls Limited

Export Dept.,

Forodoy Close, Durrington, Worthing

West Sussex, BN I 3

3PL

Telephone (0'l 903) 268500

Fox (01903) 265982

Telex 871

l4

EUROWG G to:

@Copyright Eurotherm Conhols l-imited 1994

All rights strictly reeryed No port of this daument moy be stored in o retrievol system, or ony fom or by ony mmns wihoul prior writlen pemission from

Eurotherm Conhols

Limited Every effort hos ben tcken b ensue the occurocy of this spsilicolion Howryer in order io moinloin our bchnologicol lmd we ore continuously improving our products which could, without notice, result in omendmenls or omissions to this sp*ificotion We connot occept responsibility lor domoge, injury loss or expenses resulting therefrom.

HONG KONG

Eurotherm Limited

Telephone

Fox

Hong Kong l+852lr

(+852) 2870 0148

2873 3826

Telex 0802 69257 EIFELHX

INDIA

Eurotherm lndio Limited

Telephone

Fox

Modros l+9144lr 4928129

(+9144) 4928131

IRELAND

Eurotherm lrelond Limited

Telephone Noos (+353

45l, 879937

Fox (+353 45l. 875123

ITALY

Eurotherm SpA

Telephone Como (+39 3l

)

9751 I I

Fox (+39

3ll

977512

Telex 380893 EUROTH

I

Port No: HA0l 3208

JAPAN

Eurotherm Jopon Limited

Telephone Tokyo

(+81

31 33702951

Fox(+81 3l,33702960

KOREA

Eurotherm Koreo Limited

Telephone Seoul (+82 21 5438507

Fox

(+82

21 545 9758

Telex EIKOR K23105

NETHERIANDS

Eurotherm B.V.

Telephone Leiden (+31 71ll 5411841

Fox

(+31 71l, 5414526

NEW ZEALAND

Eurotherm Limited

Telephone Aucklond (+64 9) 358 8106

Fox: (+64 9) 358

I 350

NORWAY

Eurotherm A,/S

Telephone Oslo (+47 66) 803330

Foxl+47 66) 80333.l

SPAIN

Eurotherm Espofro SA

Telephone (+34

I ) 66,l 6001

Fox

(+34 l l 661 9093

SWEDEN

Eurotherm AB

Telephone Molmo (+45 40) 384500

Fox l+46 4Ol 384545

SWITZERLAND

Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz)

Telephone Zurich(+41

AG

l)

81036r'6

Fox (+41

I ) 81

08920

UNITED KINGDOM

Eurotherm Controls Limited

Telephone Worthing (+a4 19031 268500

Fox (+44 l903l 265982

U.S.A

Eurotherm Controls lnc.

Telephone Reston

(+1 7O3l 471 4870

Fox

(+1 703) 787 3436

ED 09

Printed in Englond 109